E. v. v. Ramanamurthy, S. Ramachandran-Design of Transmission Systems-Air Walk Publ. (2015)

For UG
978-93-84893-67-5
Chapter - 1
DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS
Design of Flat belts and pulleys - Selection of V belts and

pulleys – Selection of hoisting wire ropes and pulleys – Design of
Transmission chains and Sprockets.
1.1 BELT DRIVES

1.1.1 Introduction
Belt drive is a mechanical drive made up of flexible
material used to transmit power from one shaft (driving
shaft) to another shaft (driven shaft) which are parallel to
each other and run at same (or) different speeds.
The selection of belt drive depends on some important

factors which include, the speed of driving and driven shaft,
power transmitted, speed reduction ratio, centre distance
between the two shafts, space available and so on.
1.1.2 Types of Belt drives
The belt drives are classified based on their specific
applications. They are
(a) Light duty belt drives
These are used to transmit less power (approx 5 kW)
and at belt speeds upto 10 m/s. The main applications of
these type of drives are in agricultural purposes (pumps,
blowers, fans, etc.,)
(b) Medium duty belt drives
These type of belt drives are used to transmit medium
powers (approx. 5 kW to 20 kW) and speed varies from 10
m/s to 20 m/s. The main applications of these type of belt
drives include, machine tools, generators, etc.,
1.2 Design of Transmission Systems
(c) Heavy duty belt drives

These type of belt drives are used for transmitting
heavy power (ie) above 20 kW. The main applications of
these type of belt drives include, crushers, bucket elevators,
marine engines, etc.,
1.1.3 Types of Belts
The belts can be classified based on cross-section and
represented in Fig. 1.1. They are
(i) Flat belts
(ii) V - belts
(iii) Circular belts
(iv) Toothed belts
Types of Belts
(a) Flat belt (b) V - belt (c) Circular belt
V -b elt
F la t b elt C ircula r b elt
. . .. . . .
. . .. ..
. .. ..............
..
(a) Flat belt (b) V-b elt (c) Circular b elt
Fig. 1.1. Types of Belts.
(i) Flat belts

The Flat belt as shown in Fig.1.1(a) is mostly used
in farming, mining and logging applications. The Flat belt
is a simple system of power transmission. It can deliver
high power at high speeds (370 kw at 50 m/s).
Design of Flexible Elements 1.3
(ii) V - belts
The V - belt as shown in Fig.1.1(b) are generally
endless and their cross-section shape is trapezoidal. The V
- shape of belt tracks in a mating groove in the shaft, with
the result that the belt cannot slip off.
(iii) Circular belts

The Circular belt as shown in Fig.1.1(c) are circular
cross section belt to run in a pulley with a 60 V - groove
round belts are used in case of low torque requirements.
(iv) Toothed belt

The toothed belt, is made as a flexible belt with teeth
moulded onto its inner surface. It runs over matching
toothed pulleys (or) sprockets. Since toothed belts can also
deliver more power that a friction drive belt, they are also
used for high power transmissions. They include primary
drive of some motor cycles.
Materials used for belts

The materials used for belts has to be strong, flexible
and durable. They should have high coefficient of friction.
They are cotton fabrics, leather, rubber, silk, etc.,
1.1.5 Flat Belt Drives

Flat belt drives can be used for transmitting large
amount of power and there is no upper limit of distance
between the pulleys. These drives are efficient at high speeds
and they offer noiseless running. Flat belts are available for
a wide range of width, thickness, weight and material.
1.1.6 Advantages of Flat-belt drive

1. Different velocity ratios can be obtained by using
a stepped cone pulley.
2. A belt drive can be used as a clutch, by shifting

the belt from fast pulley to loose pulley.
3. Design of flat belt drive is simple.
4. Flat belt drive is relatively cheap and easy to
maintain.
5. Flat belt drives are flexible, which gives
protection.
6. Close casing is not required, like a gear box.
7. Flat belt drives can be used for long centre
distances (upto 15 metres)
1.1.7 Disadvantages
1. Since velocity ratio is not constant, flat belt drive
is not a positive drive
2. Flat belt drives have larger dimensions and
occupy more space.
3. Flat belt drive is not suitable for smaller centre
distance (less than 1 metre).
1.1.8 Types of Flat belt drives
1. Open belt drive (Fig. 1.2)
2. Crossed or twist belt drive (Fig. 1.3)
3. Quarter turn belt drive (Fig. 1.4)
4. Compound belt drive (Fig. 1.5)
5. Belt drive with idler pulleys (Fig. 1.6)
6. Stepped or cone pulley drive (Fig. 1.7)
7. Fast and loose pulley drive (Fig. 1.8)
D rive r
Slack side D rive n
e
T ig h t s id
Fig.1.2. Open Belt Drive.
D rive r
S la D rive n
ck s
id e
+ +
id e
ht s
T ig
Fig.1.3 Crossed or Twist Belt Drive.

D rive r
D rive n
G uide pulle y
(a) Q uarter Turn Belt Drive. (b) Q uarter Turn Belt Drive
with Guide Pulley.
Fig.1.4
D rive r
3
4
1
2 + Fo llow er
+ +
3 4
1 2
Fig. 1.5. C om pou nd Belt Drive.
+
Idler
pulleys
D rive r
+ + D rive n
Pu lleys
+
+
Fig.1.6 (a). Belt D rive with M any I dler Pu lleys.
+ +
Idler pulley
Fig.1.6 (b). Belt Drive with Single Idler Pulley
D riving pu lley
M ain o f L ine s ha ft
D riving Sh aft
C o ne pu lley
L oo se p ulley
Fa s t p ulley
D rive sha ft M ac hine

s ha ft
Fig.1 .7 Stepped o r Cone Fig.1 .8 Fa st and lo os e

Pu lley Drive . pu lle y drive
1.1.9 Design Based on Basic Equations
 
d D
N1
N2
(D river) 
C (D riven)
Fig.1.9
The Fig. 1.9 represents the open flat belt drive.
Let, d  diameter of smaller pulley (Driver)
D  diameter of larger pulley (Driven)
N 1  speed of driver
N 2  speed of driven
C  center distance between two pulleys

Step 1
N2 d
Velocity ratio  
N1 D
dt

Dt t  thickness of belt
(If thickness is considered)
dt  S 
 1
D  t  100  (where S  % of slip)
1
Speed ratio 
Velocity ratio
N1 D

N2 d
Step 2
Ratio of tensions
T1  Tc
 e
T2  Tc
where T 1  tension on tightside in Newtons
T 2  tension on slackside in Newtons
T c  centrifugal tension in Newtons
  coefficient of friction
  angle of contact in radians
Rr
    2 where   sin  1  
 C 

 deg  R  larger pulley radius
180
  ra dia ns r  smaller pulley radius

C  centre distance
Always consider  for smaller pulley

Note:  is used for cross belt drive
 is used for open belt drive
Step 3:
Calculation of T c
Tc  Centrifugal tension  m  v2 in Newton.
where m  mass of the belt in kg f/meter length.
 density of  where,
   volume
 bel t material    density in kg/m 3
   Area  length A  Area in m 2  b  t
   A  l kgf/m length length  1 m assume
b  width of belt in m
t thickness of belt
in m
If  is given in kg/cm 3, then assume A in cm 2 and
length  100 cm.
then, m    A  100 kg/m length
v  vel. of belt (or) belt speed
dN 1 DN 2
 or m/sec
60 60
(d and D must be in meters)

Step 4
Max. tension  T  S tress  Area    b  t Newton
where   stress in the belt N/m 2
b  w idth of belt in m eter
t  thickness of belt in meter
 T  T1  Tc
Step 5
Power transmitted by the belt
Also P  T 1  T 2 v in watts
Note: For Max. Power Transmission

T
Tc 
3 where T  Max. tension in Newtons.
T
mv2 
3


T
v [velocity of belt for m ax. pow er.]
3m
Step 6
Initial tension T0
T1  T2
T0 
2 (if Tc is neglected)
T1  T2  2T c
T0 
2 (if Tc is considered)
Step 7
Length of Open belt drive.
 D  d2
L D  d  2C 
2 4C
D  larger pulley dia.
Length of Cross belt drive
d  smaller pulley dia.
2
 D  d C  Centre distance
L D  d  2C 
2 4C
1.1.10 Design Based on Manufacturer’s Data
Step 1: Diameter of Driver (or) Driven pulley

d N2
D N1
(or)
D N1
Speed ratio  
d N2
Find the unknown parameters by using the given

parameters
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.54, Take the

standard value of pulley diameters and the tolerances.
Step 2: Velocity of the belt v

 d N1  D N2
v (or) in m/s
60 60
Step 3: Load correction factor K s

From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.53, According to
given application, take the Load correction factor K s
Step 4: Arc of contact 

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.54
D  d
Arc of contact   180    60
C
where
D  Diameter of larger pulley
d  Diameter of smaller pulley
C  Centre distance
Step 5: Correction factor for Arc of contact K 

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.54, corresponding to
Arc of contact, correction factor K  can be determined.
Step 6: Corrected power

Corrected power 
 Given pow er in kW  K s
or  
 K
Design power 
Step 7: Corrected belt rating

Load rating per mm per ply at 180 arc of contact at 10 m/s
belt speed, (select for either Fort 949 g (or) Hi-speed 878),
in kW

minimum pulley diameter and maximum belt speed select
the number of plies.
 Corrected belt rating of selected belt with

corresponding arc of contact and belt speed
v 
= Load rating    number of plies
10 180
Step 8: Width of the belt

From PSG Data book Pg.No. 7.54,
Millimeter plies of belt
corrected load or corrected power


load rating per mm per ply at be lt spe ed
(or)
corrected load
Width of belt 
load rating/mm
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.52, The standard belt

width, corresponding to ply was found out
Step 9: Length of the belt

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.53, the Length of the
belt can be calculated.
for open drive
 D  d2
L  2C  D  d 
2 4C
for cross drive
 D  d2
L  2C  D  d 
2 4C
for Quarter turn drive

L
2
D  d  
  2  
C2  D C2  
d2
Step 10: Width of pulley

the Belt width, the pulleys to be wider than the belt width
by given “mm”
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.54, the recommended

series of pulley diameters and tolerances are determined.
Problem 1.1: Design a suitable flat belt drive to transmit

10 kW at 1500 rpm to a line shaft to run at 500 rpm
Approximate centre distance is 2.0 m. The diameter of larger
pulley is around 750 mm. (Oct. 2001)
P  10 kW  10  10 3 watt; N 1  1500 rpm;
N 2  500 rpm ;
C  2 metre  2  10 3 mm ; D  750 mm
N2 d
N1 D
500 d 750  500

 d  250 mm
1500 750 1500
dN 1
Velocity of belt  v 
60
  250  1500
  19.63 m  sec
60  1000
Load correction factor K s

According to load classification, refer PSG data book,
Page No.7.53 and take the value of KS.
K s  1.3.... for line shafts
Correction arc of contact: K , refer PSG data book,

Page No.7.54.
Dd
Arc of contact  180   60
C
750  250
 180   60
2000
 165
From the PSG data book, page No.7.54
Correction factor for 

at   165
Arc of contact, 
K   1.06
Note: Find K  by using interpolation between 160

and 170
  K
160  1.08
5   0.02
165   1.06
Calculation of Corrected Power

K s  Given powe r in k W
corrected power 
K
1.3  10
  12.26 kW
1.06
Refer PSG data book, page No. 7.52,
According to the minimum pulley diameter and the

maximum belt speed, assume the no. of plies, from table
at v  19.63 m  sec and d  250 mm ;
Take, n  n o. of plies  5
Calculation of Load rating:

Select high speed belt,
The load rating per mm width per ply at 10 m/sec

 0.023 kW  mm  ply
Load rating at belt speed at v  19.63 m  sec
0.023  19.63

10
 0.0451 kW  mm  ply
Calculation of width of the belt

Refer PSG data book, Page No.7.54
Corrected load or Corrected power

Millimeter plies of belt 
Load rating  m m  ply
12.26
Width  no. of plies   271.54
0.04515
271.54
 Width of the belt   54.3 mm
5
Since n  no. of plies  5
Refer PSG data book, Page No.7.52,
For 5 ply belt, the standard width of belt  76 mm
Calculation of length of the belt L:

Refer PSG data book, Page No.7.53
 D  d2
L D  d  2C 
2 4C
 750  2502
L 750  250  2  2000 
2 4  2000
 5602.04 m m
Width of Pulley
Refer PSG data book, Page No. 7.54
up to including 125 mm belt width, pulley is greater

than the belt width by 13 mm
 width of pulley  76  13  89 mm
Refer PSG data book, page No.7.54
The recommended pulley nominal diameter  90 mm ;

with tolerance of nominal diameter as  1.2. mm
Problem 1.2: A leather belt 9 mm  250 mm is used to drive

a castiron pulley 90 cm in diameter at 338 rpm. If the active
arc on the smaller pulley is 120 and the stress in the tightside
is 20 kg  cm2, find the horse power capacity of the belt which
weights 0.00098 kg  cm3. The coefficient of friction of leather
on cast iron is 0.35. (Apr. ’99 and Apr. 2000)
Given Data
t  9 mm  0.9 cm ; b  250 mm  25 cm ; d  90 cm

N  338 rpm;   120   2.094 radian
180
Stress in the tight side    20 kg  cm 2 ;
  0.00098 kg  cm3;   0.35

Max. tension on the tightside T    A rea of belt
 20  0.9  25  450 kg
Mass of the belt per meter length  m    b  t  l
m  0.00098  25  0.9  100
 2.205 kg  meter length
where l  100 cm (assume 1 meter)
Centrifugal tension  T c  mv2
 2.205  15.928 2
 55.940 N
 55.94 kg
 dN
v
60
  90  338

100  60
v  15.9278 m /sec
Tension on the tight side of the belt  T1  T  Tc
 450  55.94
 394.05 kg
 1 
Power capacity of the belt  P  T1  Tc  1  v
 e 
 1 
 394.05  55.94  1   15.9278
0.35  2.094 
 e 
27987.69
 kgf  m/sec 75 kgf  m  sec  1 HP
75
P  37.30 HP
Problem 1.3: Two parallel shafts whose centre lines are 4.8
m apart, are connected by an open belt drive. The diameter of
the larger pulley is 1.5 m and that of smaller pulley 1.05 m.
The initial tension in the belt when stationary is 3 kN. The
mass of the belt is 1.5 kg  m length. The coefficient of friction
between the belt and the pulley is 0.3; Taking centrifugal
tension into account, calculate the horse power transmitted,
when the smaller pulley rotates at 400 rpm. (Oct. ’99)
C  4.8 m  4800 m m; D  1.5 m  1500 mm;   0.3;
d  1.05 m  1050 mm; N 1  400 rpm ;
T0  3 kN  3  10 3 N
T 1  T 2  2Tc
Initial tension T 0   3  10 3
2
Centrifugal tension  T C  mv2
 1.5  21.99 2
 725.41 N
T 1  T 2  3  10 3  2  2 725.41 
T 1  T 2  4549.18 N  1
From open belt drive
Angle of contact      2
Dd  1 1500  1050 

Where   sin  1    sin  2.68
 2C  2  4800

     2  2.68  174.64  
180
  3.048 radia
,n
d N 1
Velocity of the belt  v 
60  100
  1.05  400

60
 21.99 m  s ec
T1 T1
 e;  e0.3  3.048  2.495
T2 T2
 T1  2.495 T 2
Substitute the value of T1 in equation (1)
2.495 T2  T2  4549.18
4549.18
T1   1301.6 N
3.495
 T 1  2.495  1301.6  3247.49 N
Power Transmitted  P  T1  T2  v
 3247.5  1301.6   21.99
P  42790.34 Watts  42.790 kW
Problem 1.4 Design a fabric belt to transmit 10 kW at 450

rpm from an engine to a line shaft at 1200 rpm. The diameter
of the engine pulley is 300 mm and the distance of the shaft
from the engine 2 m. Take coefficient of friction as 0.2.
[April 2002]
Given Data
Power P  10 kW;
Speed of driver N 1  1200 rpm
Speed of driven N 2  450 rpm
Diameter of driver d   300 mm  0.3 m
Centre distance C   2 m
Solution
Step 1: Diameter of driven D 

D N2
d N1
N2
D d
N1
1200
  300
450
 800 mm
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.54, The standard,

value of pulley diameter,
D  800 mm
Step 2: Velocity of the belt

 d N1
Since v 
60
  0.3  1200

60
 18.84 m/s

From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.53, corresponding to
line shaft,
K s  1.3
Step 4: Arc of contact

Dd
Arc of contact   180     60
 c 
 0.8  0.3 
 180     60
 2 
  165
Step 5: Correction factor for Arc of contact

Arc of contact, the correction factor
K   1.06 (by interpolation)

Given po wer  K s
Corrected power 
K
10  1.3

1.06
 12.26 kW

load rating per mm per ply at 180 arc of contact at 10
m/s belt speed,
Assuming HI-SPEED 878 g duck belting,
Load rating = 0.023 kW/mm/ply

minimum pulley diameter and maximum belt speed
(ie) corresponding to d  0.3 m  300 mm;
and v  18.84 m/s ~

 20 m/s
The number of plies = 6
 Corrected Belt rating of selected belt with

corresponding arc of contact and belt speed
v 
 L oad rating    number of plies
10 180
18.84 165
 0.023   6
10 180
 0.2383 kW/mm
Step 8: Width of the belt

From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.54
Corre cted Load

Width of belt 
Load rating/mm
12.26

0.2383
 Width of belt = 51.44 mm
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.52, the standard belt

width, corresponding to ply, = 100 mm
Step 9: Length of the Belt

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.53,
 D  d2
L  2C  D  d 
2 2C
 0.8  0.32
22 0.8  0.3 
2 22
 5.79 m  5790 mm
Step 10: Width of the pulley

belt width
Pulley width  100  13  113 mm
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.52, the standard belt
width corresponding to ply is = 125 mm
Problem 1.5 A pulley of 900 m diameter revolving at 200
rpm is to transmit 7.5 kW find the width of a leather belt if
the maximum tension is not to exceed 145 N in 10 mm width.
The tension on the tight side is twice that on the slack side.
Determine the diameter of shaft and the dimensions of the
various parts of the pulley assuming it to have six arms.
Maximum shear stress is not to exceed 63 MN/m2. [April 2010]
Given Data
Diameter of pulley D  900 mm  0.9 m
Speed of pulley N  200 rpm

Power of P  7.5 kW  7500 W
Maximum Tension T  145 N in 10 mm width
Allowable shear stress,   63 MN/m 2
 63  10 6 N/m 2
Solution
We know that,
Power transmitted by belt P  T1  T2 v
where T 1  Tension in the Tight side
T 2  Tension in slack side
v  Velocity of the belt

 DN

60
  0.9  200

60
v  9.42 m/s
 7500  T1  T2 9.42
7500
 T1  T2 
9.42
 T1  T2  796.17 N
Given that,
Tension on the tight side is twice that on the slack

side
 T 1  2T2
 2T2  T 2  796.17
 T 2  796.17 N
and
T 1  1592.35 N
But width of the belt b 
Tension which is maximum


B elt ra ting
1592.35

145 /10 . .
 . 145 N in 10 mm width 
  14.5 / mm width 

 109.81 mm
Standard width of belt = 112 mm
Diameter of shaft ds
2 NT
Since, power 
60
60P
 Torque T  
2 N
60  7500

2  200
 358 Nm
But diameter of shaft
16T
d3 

1/3
 16  358 
d 6 
 0.030702 m
   63  10 
Dimensions of pulley
(a) Dimensions of rim
Width of pulley, B mm

Thickness of pulley, t mm

Belt width, upto and including 125 mm
Pulley to be wider than the belt width by 13 mm
 Width of pulley B  b  13 mm
 112  13
 125 mm

D
Thickness of pulley rim t   3 mm
200
[for single belt]
900
 Thickness of pulley rim t  3
200
 7.5 mm
(b) Dimensions of arm

 Number of arms (n)
number of arms = 6 (for diameter of pulley over 450

mm)
cross section of arm is elliptical
 Thickness of arm
(i) Thickness of arm near the boss (b)
aD
4n

3
b  2.94 for single belt
where a  width of pulley  125 mm
D  diameter o f pulley  900 mm
n  number of arms in pulley  6
125  900


3
 b  2.94  49.20 mm
46
Design of Flat Belt Drives (Problems)

Problem 1.6: An open flat belt drive connects two parallel
shafts 1.2 m apart. The driving and driven shafts rotate at
350 rpm and 140 rpm respectively and the driven pulley is
400 mm in diameter. The power to be transmitted is 1.1 kW.
Design the drive.
Given
P  1.1 kW  1.1  10 3 W
C  1.2 m  1.2  10 3 mm
N 1  350 rpm
N 2  140 rpm
D  400 mm
Solution
Step 1: Diameter of driven pulley
N2 d
N1 D
d 140
 
400 350
d  160 mm
Take standard value of pulley diameter from PSG

Data book Pg.No. 7.54
 d  160 mm
Step 2: Velocity of the belt

 d N1  D N2
Since v  or
60 60
  160  350

60  1000
v  2.93 m/s

Assuming steady load
K s  1.2

Dd
Arc of contact   180      60 
 C 
 400  160 
   180     60 
 1200 
  168
Step 5: Correction factor for Arc of contact K 

~ 170
  168
K   1.04

K s  Given power in kW
Since corrected power 
K
1.2  1.1

1.04
 1.26 kW

Hi-speed 878 of duck belting and for 10 m/s belt speed
belt rating = 0.023 kW/mm/ply
 corrected belt rating for v  2.93 m/s
0.023  2.93 168

 
10 180
 0.006289 kW/mm /ply
Step 8: Width of belt

C orrected power
Millimeter piles of belt 
Load rating/mm/ply
Corrected power
 Width  Number of piles 
Load rating/mm/ply
1.26
 Width 
0.006289  Number of piles
186.97
 Width 
Number of piles
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.52, corresponding belt

speed v  2.93 m/s, minimum pulley diameter d  160 mm
Assume number of piles = 4
186.97
 Width   46.74 mm
4
standard width w  50 mm
Step 9: Length of Belt

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.53 for open drive
 D  d2
L  2C  D  d 
2 4C
 400  1602
 2  1200  400  160 
2 4  1200
 3291.6 mm
L  3300 mm

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.54, belt width upto
and including 125 mm, pulleys to be wider than the width
by 13 mm
 Width of the pulley  50  13 mm
Wid th of pulley  63 mm
The recommended series of pulley diameter and

tolerances is 63  0.8 mm
Problem 1.7: Two pulleys, one 430 mm diameter and the

other 180 mm diameter are on parallel shafts 1.90 m apart
are connected by a cross belt, find the length of the belt
required and the angle of contact between the belt and each
pulley.
What power can be transmitted by the belt when the larger
pulley rotates at 210 rpm, if the maximum permissible tension
in the belt is 1 kN and the coefficient of friction between the
belt and pulley is 0.25?
Given
D  430 mm  0.43 m  R  0.215 m
d  180 mm  0.180 m  r  0.09 m
C  1.90 m ; N 1  210 rp m ; T 1  1 kN  1000 N;
  0.25
Solution
Since length of the flat belt is given from P.S.G Data
book Pg.No. 7.53 for cross drive
 D  d2
L  2C  D  d 
2 4C
 0.43  0.182
 2  1.9  0.43  0.18  
2 4  1.9
 3.8  0.95818  0.04896
L  4.8071 m  4807.1 mm
We know that, for cross belt drive

Angle of contact      2
Rr
where   sin  1  
 C 
 0.215  0.09 
 sin  1  
 1.9 
 9.237 
   180  2  9.237 
 198

  198   3.464 rad
180
Power transmitted by belt drive
P  T 1  T2 v
 DN 1   0.43  210
But v  
60 60
 4.72 m/s
T1
But  e  and T1  1000 N
T2
1000
  e0.25  3.464
T2
 T 2  420.63 N
 Power Transmitted P   1000  420.63   4.72
 2734.62 W
P  2.734 kW
Problem 1.8: An electric motor drives an exhaust fan. The

pulley diameters of the motor and fan are 40 cm and 160 cm
respectively. The angle of contact between belt and pulleys of
motor and fan are 2.5 radians and 3.78 radians respectively.
The coefficient of friction between the belt and motor and fan
pulleys are 0.3 and 0.25 respectively. The speed of the driver
pulley is 700 rpm. Power transmitted by the electric motor is
30 hp. Calculate the width of 5 mm thick flat belt. Take
permissible stress for the belt material as 23 kgf/cm2.
Given
d  40 c m  0.4 m; D  160 cm  1.6 m;
1  2.5 radians, 2  3.78 radians, 1  0.3, 2  0.25
N 1  700 rpm; P  30 HP; t  5 mm;   23 kgf/cm 2
To find
Since
Velocity of the belt v
 d N1  DN 2
 (or)
60 60
  0.4  700
v
60
v  14.7 m /s
But the power transmitted
T1  T 2
P v
75
T1  T 2
30   14.7
75
 T1  T2  153.06 kgf ...(1)

But we know that
T1
 e 1  1
T2
T1
  2.11
T2 ...(2)
From equations (1) and (2)
2.11 T 2  T2  153.06
 T 2  137.89 kg f
and T1  290.95 kg f
But know that

Mass of the belt/metre length
= density  Area  length
Density may be taken as 1 gm/cm 3 (assume)

1
  b  0.5  100
1000
 0.05 b kg/m
Since the velocity of the belt is more than km/s,

therefore centrifugal tension must be taken into
consideration.
w
Tc   v2
g
0.05 b
  14.71 2
9.81
Tc  1.1b kgf
But the maximum tension in the belt;
T  T1  Tc  stress  Area
T  T1  Tc   bt
 290.95  1.1b  23  b  0.5
 b  27.88 cm ~
 28 cm
Problem 1.9: Design a flat belt drive to transmit 110 kW for

a system consisting of two pulleys of diameters 0.9 m and 1.2
m respectively, for a centre distance of 3.6 m, belt speed of 20
m/s and coefficient of friction  0.3. There is a slip of 1.2% at
each pulley and 5% friction loss at each shaft with 20% over
load.
Solution
Given: P  110 kW  150 HP, d  0.9 m  90 cm ,
 r1  0.45 m,  1.2 m, D  120 cm,  r2  0.6 m ;
C  x  3.6 m ; v  20 m/s ;   0.3 ; S 1  S 2  1.2%
Let N 1  Speed of the smaller or driving pulley in rpm

N 2  Speed of the larger or driven pulley in rpm
We know that speed of the belt v
 d 1N 1  S1 
v 1 
60  100 
  0.9 N1  1.2 
20   1  100 
60  
 N 1  430 rpm
and peripheral velocity of driven pulley
 d 2N 2  S2 
v1 
60  100 
  1.2 N 2  1.2 
 20  1  
60  100 
 N 2  315 rpm
We know that the torque acting on the driven shaft
Power transmitte d  4500


2 N2
150  4500

2  315
 341 kg f  m
Since there is a 5% friction loss at each shaft,

therefore the torque acting on the belt
 1.05  341
 358 kg f  m
Since belt is to be designed for 20% overload,

therefore the design torque,
 1.2  358
 430 kg f  m
Let T1  Tension on the tight side of the belt

T 2  Tension on the slack side of the belt
We know that the torque exerted on the driven pulley.

 T 1  T2 r2  T1  T2 0.6
 0.6 T 1  T 2 Kg f  m
Equating this to the design torque, we have
0.6 T1  T2  430
430
 T 1  T 2   717 kg f
0.6
 T 1  T 2  717 kgf ...(1)

Now let us find out the angle of contact of the belt
on the smaller or driving pulley. From the geometry of the
figure, we find that
O 2M r2  r1 60  45
sin      0.0417
O 1O 2 x 360
   2.4 
   180  2  180  2  2.4  175.2 

 175.2   3.06 rad
180
We know that
 T1  
T e
 2
 e0.3  3.06
 T1  0.918
  e
T2
 
T1
or  2.51
T2 ...(2)
From equations (1) and (2), we have
T1  1192 kgf and T 2  475 kgf
Assuming f  safe stress for the belt = 25 kgf/cm2

t  thickness of the belt  1.5 cm
b  Width of the belt.
Since the belt speed is more than 10 m/s, therefore

centrifugal tension must be taken into consideration.
Assuming a leather belt for which the density may be taken
as 1 gm /cm 2
 Weight of the belt permetre length
w  Area  length  density
 b  1.5  1000  1
 0.15 b kg/m
and centrifugal tension
w
Tc   v2
g
0.15b
 202
9.81
 6.12b kgf
We know that maximum tension in the belt,
T  T1  Tc  f.b.t
1192  6.12b  25  b  1.5  37.5 b
 37.5b  6.12 b  1192
 b  37.98 cm
From Design data book, the standard width of the

belt b is 40 cm.
From Design data book, Pg.No. 7.53 for open drive
 d 2  d 12
L  2x  d 2  d1 
2 4x [x  C  centre distance]
 120  902
 2  360  120  90 
2 4  360
 1050.6 c m
L  10.506 m
Problem 1.10: Design a belt drive to transmit 20 kN at 780

rpm to an rolling machine, the speed ratio being 3.0, the
distance between the pulleys is 2.8 m. Diameter of rolling
machine pulley is 14 m.
Given Data
P  20 kW; N 1  780 rpm ; i  3; C  2.8 m ; D  1.4 m
Solution
Step 1: Diameter of Driver pulley
We know that
D N1
Speed ratio i  
d N2
D 1.4
d   0.466 m
i 3
Step 2: Velocity of belt in m/sec

 d N1  D N2
r or
60 60
  0.466  780

60
 19.03 m/s
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 7.53;
Load correction factor k s  1.5 (for rolling machine)

Dd
Arc of contact,   180    60 
 C 
 1.4  0.466 
   180   
 2.8 
 159.98 ~
 160
   160 
From PSG Data book, Page No. 7.54,
Correction factor, K   1.08

K s  Given pow er in k W
Since corrected power 
K
1.5  20

1.08
corrected power  27.7 kW

From PSG Data book, Pg No. 7.54,
Load rating per mm width per ply at 180 arc of

contact, at 10 m/s belt speed.
Assuming Fort 949 g duck belting,
The load rating = 0.0289 kW per mm per ply.
From PSG Databook Pg.No. 7.52, corresponding to

the minimum pulley diameter, d  0.466 m  466 mm
velocity = 19.03 m/s
Assuming No. of piles = 6
 Belt capacity of selected belt with corresponding

arc of contact 160 and belt speed of 19.03 m/s
19.03 160
 0.0289   6
10 180
 0.2933 kW /mm width
Step 7: Width of belt

Millimeter piles of belt
Corrected load

loa d rating/mm/ply at belt spe ed
Corrected load 27.7

(or) Width of belt b  
load ra ting/mm 0.2933
b  94.44 mm
The standard belt width corresponding to 6 ply = 152 mm
Step 8: Length of the belt

Assuming open drive belt,
 D  d2
Belt length L  2C  D  d 
2 4C
 1.4  0.466 2
 L  2  2.8  1.4  0.466  
2 4  2.8
 8.608 m

the belt width above 125 upto and including 250 mm,
pulleys to be wider than the belt width by 25 mm.
 Width of the pulley  152  25 mm
b  177 mm

pulley diameter  180  2.0 mm
1.2. DESIGN OF V-BELT DRIVE

1.2.1 Introduction
V-Belt is a type of flexible connector used for
transmitting power from one pulley to another pulley
having a centre distance upto 3 metres.
V-Belts are used with electric nylon to drive different

equipments like blowers, compressor, machine tool,
industries machinery, etc. The belts are operated on
grooved pulley called sheaves. The sheaves have V - shaped
grooves or two inclined sides with flat bottom. The belt
makes contact with the sheaves on the sides and clearance
at the bottom.
Usually V - Belts are endless ie., each belt is made

in a circular form with various cross section which may be
differentiated by different grades. It is made in trapezoidal
section and the power is transmitted by the wedging action
between the belt and the V -groove of the pulley or sheave.
The cross-section of V - belt is discussed in article 1.2.4.
A properly installed V - belt should fit tightly against

the sides of the pulley grooves without making any
projection beyond the rim and should have efficient
clearance bottom of the groove.
The materials used for V-belts are cotton fabric and

cards moulded in rubber and coined with fabric and rubber
(fig. 1.10).
1.2.2 Advantages
1. High velocity ratio (upto 7 and in some cases 10
also)
2. Smaller centre distance.
3. Reliability of the drive, in any position; even with

vertical shafts.
4. Replacement is easy, because V-belts are available
in standard sizes.
5. Smooth operation.
1.2.3 Disadvantages
1. Design of V-belt drive is more complicated.
2. Cannot be used for larger centre distance.
1.2.4 The Cross-section of V-belt

Standard section of belt: Cross-section is a
trapezoidal.
Fa bric and
2  Groove angle x
w
R u bb er C over
 40 general Fa bric

T C o rds
To find cross-sectional area: R u bb er
b
1 
C.S. Area  [W  b] T
2
Fig.1.10.Cross - Section of a V -Belt
To find (b):
x
tan 20 
T
x  T  tan 20 
b  W  2x
 W  2 T  tan 20
1.2.5 Types of V - belts

According to BIS (IS - 2494 - 1974), V-belts are
classified as A, B, C, D and E types.
For various dimension of standard V-belt.
Refer PSG Data book Pg.No. 7.70.
DESIGN OF V-BELTS
I. Based on Basic equations:
T1   Semi groove an gle

 e/sin 
T2   Angle of contact in radians
T 1  Tension on tight side
T 2  Tension on slack side
T1  Tc T c  C entrifugal tension
 e/sin 
T2  Tc  m v2
v  Speed of the belt in m/sec.
 1 
Power transmitted per beltP  T 1  T c  1  v
/sin  
 e 
Total power transmitted
n  Number of V belts 
Power trans mitted per b elt
II. Design Based On Manufacturer’s Data

Refer data book, Page No: (From 7.58 to 7.69)
*Step 1
From the given data, select the cross-section of the

belt depending on the power to be transmitted.
From PSG data book Page No. 7.58
Note the corresponding values,
Belt cross section, W, T, mass of belt, and minimum

pulley dia;
*Step 2
Select smaller pulley dia. from the table P.No. 7.58

of PSG Data book and find larger pulley dia. by using speed
ratio.
D  Larger pulley dia;
d  Smaller pulley dia;
N 1  Speed of driver pulley ;
N 2  Speed of driven pulley ;
*(Take R20 series for pulley diameter)
V-belt designation refer PSG data book Page

No. 7.61.
C 3048/120 1S:2494 means,
C - represents - Cross section
3048 - represents nominal inside length.
Step 3
Calculate nominal pitch length (L) (P.No. 7.53)
 D  d2
L D  d   2C
2 4C
From PSG Data book Page No.7.58, 7.59 and 7.60,

according to the Cross-section of the belt; select the nearest
nominal pitch length and take the corresponding nominal
inside length.
*Represent the belt length in terms of nominal inside
length along with cross-section as Designation of V-belt.
*Step 4
Calculation of design power

According to the cross-section, from PSG databook,

Calculate the Power
Ex: Let the C.S. of belt is (B)
50.8
 Power/belt  0.79 S  0.09   1.32  10  4S2 S
de
 d1 N 1
where S  belt speed  m/sec
60
de  equivalent pitch diameter
 dp  Fb
d 1  dia. of smaller pulley in m .

N 1  Speed of smaller pulley in m
where d p  Smaller pulley diameter mm
F b  From PSG Data book table, P. No. 7.62 according

to speed ratio D/d
D
Take value of F b at ratio.
d
 N 1  driven dia D
Speed ratio    
N driver dia d
 2
*To Find No. of belts
Refer PSG Data book Page No. 7.70
P  Fa
No. of belts  n 
kW  F c  fd
where P  given power in kW
F a  Co rrection factor 7.69  refer PSG data boo k

Page No. 7.69
kW  Power at the corresponding crosssection .

F c  Correction factor for length Refer data book Page No. 7.59 and 7.60
F d  Correction factor for arc of contact Refer data book Page No. 7.68
Dd  
  180     60   C  given ce ntre distance.
 C  
at  value, take F d
* Calculation of new centre distance

(From PSG Data book Page No. 7.61)
CA  A2  B

L Dd
where A  
 4 8 
D  d2
B
8
*Calculation of T 1 and T 2
T1  Tc
 e /sin 
T2  Tc ... (1)
  SemiGroove a ngle
Dd
  Arc of contact  180     60 
 C 
  C alculate in radians.
Centrifugal tension Tc  m v2
where m    b  t  1 kg/m length
  density of belt material kg /m 3

b  t  C.S. area of Vbelt
m    C .S. area  1 kg/m length
(C.S. must be in m 2)
 d N1
v m/sec
60
d  smaller pulley dia. in m .
(or)
Mass can be read from PSG data book Pg No. 7.58

according to cross-section area.
Take mass/m length.
Tc  m v2 Newton.
Power transmitted/belt  T1  T2  v

... (2)
Solving eq (1) and eq (2) and Calculate T1 and T 2
*Calculation of stress: fb
Max. permissible tension  T  fb  area of belt
fb  permissible stress in the belt
But, T  T1  Tc
 T 1  T c  fb  area of belt
Calculate fb:
 T1  T2 
* Initial tension T o   
 2 
Problem 1.11: A 30 kW, 1440 rpm, motor is to drive a

compressor by means of V-belts. The diameter of pulleys are
220 mm and 750 mm; The centre distance between the
compressor and motor is 1440 mm. Design a suitable drive.
(Apr. ’97)
Given data:
P  30  103 Watts
Driver speed  N1  1440 rpm ;
Driver pulley dia.  d  220 mm
Driven pulley dia.  D  750 mm;
Centre distance between the compressor and motor
C  1440 mm
 1.44 m
Step 1
From PSG data book, Pg. No. 7.58.
Select Cross-section of the belt.
Select either (C), (D) or (E)
Select (C) type Belt (Since minimum pulley pitch dia

= 220 mm given)
Load of drive  P  22 kW to 150 kW
Min. pulley pitch diameter  200 mm
Nominal top width W  22 mm
Nominal thickness T  14 mm ;
Weight/meter  0.343 kg f/m length

1
C.S. area of belt  W  b T
2
1
 [22  11.81 ]  14
2
 236.67 mm2
Step 2
 D  d2
Nominal pitch length  L  D  d   2C
2 4C
 750  2202
 750  220   2  1440
2 4  1440
 4452.439 mm
.
 4.452 m
Take the nearest nominal pitch length from PSG data
book.
Refer PSG data book P.No. 7.60,
Take standard nominal pitch length  4450 mm ;

(Nearest)
The corresponding nominal inside length

 4394 mm .
The Designation of V-belt C 4394  1S2494

Step 3
Calculation of Design Power P in kW
142.7
kW  1.47S  0.09   2.34  10  4S2 S
de
[S  v  velocity]
dN 1   0.22  1440

S   16.587 m /sec
60 60
de  Equiva le nt pitch diam eter

 dp  Fb
 220  1.14
 250.8 m.m
dp  pitch dia. of smaller pulley
 220 mm
D 750
  3.4
d 220
F b  1.14 (Refer PSG data book Pg. No. 7.62)
  0.09 142.7 4 2 
kW   1.47 16.587    2.34  10  16.587  16.587
 250.8 
P  8.4312 kW
Step 4
To find the no. of belts (n)
Refer PSG Data book page No. 7.70
P  Fa
kW  F c  F d
where
P  given po wer kW
F a  co rrection factor from PSG data book Page No. 7.69
Let the time period is upto 10 hr.

 F a  1 (for compressor)
kW  Power at the corresponding C.S. ie at C  Cross section
F c  C orrection factor for length P.No.7.60  1.04
F d  Correction factor for arc of contact
Dd
  180    60
 C 
 750  220 
 180    60  157.9 
 1440 
 158
Refer PSG Data book page No. 160  0.95

7.68
 for 158, F d  0.94 157 0.94

3 0.01
0.01  1
1 
3
 0.0033
n  no. of belts  158  0.94  0.0033
30  1

8.4312  1.04  0.94
 3.63  0.9433
 4 belts
 No. of belts required  n  4
Calculation of new centre distance
CA 
 A2  B (from PSG Data book P.No. 7.61)
L Dd L  nominal pitch length

A  
4  8 
D  d2  4450 m m
B
8
4450  750  220 

A    731.58 mm
4  8 
750  2202
B  35112.5 mm
8
C  731.58   731.58 2  35112.5


New centre distance C  1438.75 mm
Calculation of T 1 and T 2
T1  Tc 2  40
 e /sin  ... (1)
T2  Tc Semi-groove angle   20
Let   0.25

  158 
180
 2.75 radians
Tc  mv2  0.343  16.5872 m  0.343 kgf/m length
 94.36 N v  S  16.587 m /sec
 1 
Power/belt  [T 1  T c]  1  v
/sin  
 e 
 1 
8.3412  10 3  T1  94.36   1   16.587
0.25  2.75 / sin 20 
 e 
8.4312  10 3  T1  94.36  14.364 
T 1  681.3274 N
T1  Tc
 e/sin 
T2  Tc
681.3274  94.36
 e0.25  2.75/sin 20
T 2  94.36
5869619
 7.464
T2  94.36
T 2  78.638  94.36
T 2  172.998 N
To Find Stress fb

T  T1  T2  fb  area of belt
681.3274  94.36  fb  236.66
Permissible stress in the belt material
fb  3.28 N/mm 2
Problem 1.12: Design a V-belt drive to the following

specifications
Power to be transmitted  75 kW
Speed of the driving wheel N1  1440 rpm;
Speed of the driven wheel N2  400 rpm;
Diameter of the driving wheel d  300 mm;
Centre distance  2500 mm
Service  16 hours/day
Assume any other relevant data if necessary. (Oct. 2007)
Given Data:
P  75  10 3 Watts
Driving Wheel Speed N 1  1440 rpm ;
Driven Wheel Speed N 2  400 rpm
Driving wheel diameter d  300 mm
Centre distance C  2500 mm ;
Service  16 hr/day .
Step 1
Selection of Cross section;
From PSG data book, Page No. 7.58
Since minimum pulley dia. is 300 mm
Select (C) cross section
Nominal Width  W  22 mm
Nominal thickness t  14 mm
Mass/kg  m  0.343 kg/m length
1
C.S. area  W  b t
2
1
 [22  11.808]  14  236.656 mm 2
2
Step 2
 D  d2
Nominal Pitch length  L  D  d    2C
2 4C
 1050  3002
 1050  300   2  2500
2 4  2500
 7176.82 mm
L  7.176 m
N1 D

N2 d
N1 1440
D d   300  1050 m m
N2 400
Take the nearest value of nominal pitch length (from PSG
data book 7.60) L  6863 mm
The Corresponding nominal inside length = 6807 mm

Step 3
Calculation of Design Power

From PSG Data book page No. 7.62 : for (C) C.S. of
the belt
 142.7 
kW   1.47S  0.09   2.34  10 4S2  S
 de 
dN 1   0.3  1440
S   22.61 m/sec
.
60 60
d e  equivalent pitch diameter

 dp  Fb
 300  1.14  342 mm
where dp  pitch dia. of smaller pulley
D
refer PSG Data book page no. 7.62 at  3.6 the value
d
of F b  1.14
But the max. value of d e in the formula is 300 mm

for (C) cross-section.
 Take de  300 mm
 142.7 
kW   1.47 22.61  0.09   2.34  10  422.612  22.61
 300 
Max. power transmitted by belt  11.643 kW
Step 4
To find the no. of belts

(Refer PSG Data book page No. 7.70)
P  Fa
kW  Fc  F d
P  75 kW
F a  16 hrs/day (Page No. 7.6 PSG databook)
Select medium duty

[Since specific application is not given]
 F a  1.2
P  Pow er  11.643 kW
F c  1.14 - refer PSG Data book Page No. 7.60 at

Cross-section C
Refer PSG databook, Page No. 7.68.
Dd
F d  0.95   180     60
 C 
 1080  300 
 180    60 
 2500 
 161.28 
Take   160;
75  1.2
 n  no . o f belts required 
11.643  1.14  0.95
 7.137
= n  8 belts
8 belts are required.
Calculation of New Centre Distance

Refer PSG databook Page No. 7.61
CA 
 A2  B
L D  d
A 
4 8
D  d2
B
8
6863  1080  300

A 
4 8
 1173.8252
1080  3002
B
8
 76050
 New centre distance
 C  1173.8252  

1173.8252 2  76050
C  2314.796 mm
Problem 1.13: A 20 kW, 1440 rpm motor is to drive a

compressor by V-belt drive with a speed ratio of 3. Design the
drive completely for a centre distance of about 1.5 meter.
(Oct. 2000, Nov/Dec 2014)
Given data:
P  20 kW  2  10 3 Watts; N1  1440 rpm

N1
Speed radio  i  3 
N2
Centre distance, C  1.5 m  1500 mm
N1 1440
N 2  Speed of driven pulley,   480 rpm
3 3
Selection of Standard V-belt section

Refer PSG data book, page No.7.58
Select cross-section ‘C’ and its minimum pulley pitch

diameter d  200 mm
D
But, i 
d
 D  Pitch diameter of larger pulley
 3  200  600 mm
Take the values of W, t and weight per meter length
W  22 mm; t  14 mm; m  0.343 kg  m length
Calculation of Nominal Pitch length (L):

Refer PSG data book Page No. 7.53
 D  d2
L D  d  2C 
2 4C
 600  200 2
 600  200  2  1500 
2 4  1500
 4283.30 mm
Nominal pitch length L  4283.30 mm
From PSG data book, page No.7.50

A belt of ‘C ’ cross-section with nominal pitch length

4450 mm is selected (next higher value of the calculated
pitch length L).
The corresponding Nominal inside length  4394 mm
Designation
A V-belt cross-section C and of nominal inside Length
of 4394 mm shall be designated as C  4394 1S:2494
Calculation of Design Power

The maximum power in kW. Which the V-belts of
section A, B, C, D and E can transmit shall be calculated
from the following equations.

For C-section
142.7
kW  1.47 S  0.09   2.34  10  4 S 2 S
de
142.7
kW  [1.47 15.079  0.09 
228
 2.3  10  4  15.0792] 15.079
 1.151  0.6258  0.05229  15.079
 7.117 kW
Where S  belt speed
d N 1

60
  200  1440
 15.079 m/sec
60  1000
de  eq uivalent pitch diameter
 d p  Fb
dp  pitch dia. of smaller pulley
 200 mm
Fb  small diameter factor (refer PSG data book

P.No. 7.62)
D 600
for   3; Fb  1.14
d 200
de  200  1.14
 228 mm
To Find No. of Belts n

P  fa
kW  F c  Fd
F a  1.1 (Assume medium duty and upto 10 hr.)
To Find F d:
  Arc of contact angle

Dd
 180     60
 C 
 600  200 
 180    60 
 1500 
 164
where P  given power in kW.
F a  correction factor (refer PSG data book P.No.

7.69)
F c  Correction factor for length refer PSG data book

P.No. 7.58
F c  1.04
F d  Correction factor for arc of contact (refer PSG
data book P.No. 7.68)
at   164; the value of F d  0.965 (approx)
20  1.1
 n  No. of belts 
7.117  1.04  0.965
n  3.08
Take n  4 belts.
Calculation of New centre distance (Refer PSG data

book Page No. 7.61)
CA 
 A2  B
L  D  d L  N ominal P itch length
A 
4 8  4450 mm
4450  600  200  D  600 mm
 
4 8
 798.34 mm d  200 mm
2 2
D  d 600  200
B 
8 8
 20,000 mm
C  New centre distance  A  

 A2  B
 798.34  
 798.34 2  20.000
 1584.05 mm
Take, C  New centre distance  1584 mm

Problem 1.14 Design a V-belt drive to transmit 50 kW at

1440 rpm from an electric motor to a textile machine running
24 hours a day. The speed of the machine shaft is 480 rpm.
Solution
Given data
P  50 kW  50  10 3 watts
Driver speed  N 1  1440 rpm
Driven speed  N 2  480 rpm
Service  24 hours a day
we know
N1 1440
Speed ratio  i   3
N2 480
from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.58
for the power 50 kW, ‘C’ type of belt may be selected.

For this belt, the minimum pulley pitch diameter is
dmin  200 mm
equivalent pitch diameter de  dpmax  F b max from

max
P.S.G Data book Pg.No. 7.62, corresponding to Belt

cross-section ‘C’ de  300 mm
max
and corresponding to speed ratio range
F b max  1.14
de max 300
 dp max    263.15 mm
F b max 1.14
Hence we should select the diameter of smaller pulley

d  between 200 to 263.15 mm
Let us select d  250 mm
 from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.61
Diameter of larger pulley
N1
Dd 
N2
1440
 250   0.98
480
D  735 mm [   0.98 a ssum ed]
from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.61, corresponding to

i  3,
C
 1.0
D
 C  1  735
 C  D  735 mm where c  centre distance
C min  0.55 D  d  T
where T  N ominal T hickness  14 mm
(from P.S.G Data book Pg. No. 7.58, corresponding to

cross section of belt)
 C min  0.55 735  250  14
 556 mm

C max  2 D  d
 2 735  250
 1970 mm
Since, calculated ‘C’ value is in between C m in and

C m ax our selection is correct. From P.S.G Data book,
Pg.No. 7.58
corresponding to cross-section symbol ‘C’
Nominal top width W  22 mm
Weight per metre  0.343 kgf
1
But C.S.A of belt  W  b T
2
but x  T tan 20
 14  tan 20
 5.0955 mm
b  W  2x
 22  2 5.0955 
 11.808 mm
1
 C.S.A of belt  [ 22  11.808 ]  14
2
 236.66 mm 2
Nominal pitch length of belt

 D  d2
L D  d   2C
2 4C
 738  250 2
 725  250    2  735
2 4  735
 3097 mm
Take standard Nominal pitch length  3104 mm
Nominal inside length  3048 mm
Design power
142.7
kW  1.47 S 0.09   2.34  10  4 S 2 S
de
d N 1   0.250  1440
But S  
60 60
 18.85 m/s
and
de  dp  F b  250  1.14  285 mm
 Design power
 0.09 142.7 4 2
 [1.47  18.85    2.34  10  18.85  ]  18.85 
285
 10.26 kW
P  Fa
kW  F c  F d
where P  given power in kW
F a  1.4 for electric motor for textile machinery
F c  0.97 corresponding to Nominal pitch length and

cross-section of belt
Dd
  180    60
 C 
 735  250 
 180    60   140.4 
 735 
 Fd  0.845 , from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.68
50  1.4
 n  number of belts 
10.26  0.97  0.845
 8.32
~
 9 belts
Calculation of new centre distance
From P.S.G Data book Pg.No. 7.61
CA 
 A2  B
L Dd
But A   
4  8 
3104  735  250 
  
4  8 
 389.19
D  d2 735  2502

B   29403.1
8 8
 C  389.19  

389.19 2  29403.1 
New centre distance C  738.56 mm
Problem 1.15 Select a suitable V-Belt drive to connect a

7.5 kW, 1440 rpm, induction motor to run a fan at
approximately 480 rpm for a service of 16 hr per day. The
space available for centre distance is 1 m.
Solution
Given
N 1  1440 rpm, N 2  480 rpm
P  7.5 kW, Service  16 hrs/day
C1m
Since the diameters of Driving pulley and Driven

pulley are not given, they may be assumed.
Let d  Diameter of smaller pulley i.e. driving pulley
D  Diameter of bigger pulley i.e. driven pulley
For the power of 7.5 kW, ‘B’ type belt may be selected.
For ‘B’ type belt dmin  125 mm , and dmax is calculated as
follows.
Equivalent pitch diameter [From P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 7.62]
de max  dp max  F b max
de max 175
(ie) dp max    153.5 mm
F b max 1.14
Since F b max  1.14 from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No.

7.62 corresponding to speed ratio range. D/d.
and de max is from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.62,

from corresponding to cross-section ‘B’.
Hence “d” should be in between 125 to 153.5 mm.
Step 1
Let diameter of driving pulley d  140 mm
N1 1440
D d  140  0.98
N2 480
 D  412 mm
here  is assumed as 0.98 from P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 7.61
D N1
i  3
d N2
Rated power  service factor

Design power 
Length facto r  Arc of contact factor
Service factor  1.1 for light duty a nd 16 hrs/day
(from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 769)
Step 2
Pitch length of the belt
 D  d2
L  2C  D  d  (from Pg.No. 7.61)
2 4C
 412  1402
 2 1000   412  140 
2 4  1000
 2885.4 mm
Take the nearest value of Nominal pitch length (from

P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.60); L  2888 mm
The corresponding nominal inside length  2845 mm

(from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.60)
Step 3
Calculation of Design power
from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.62
50.8
kW  0.79S  0.09   1.32  10  4 S2 S
de
 d N1
S
60
  0.140  1440
  10.555 m /sec
60
de  equivalent pitch diameter
 dp  F b dp  Pitch dia of sma ller pulley
 140  1.14
 159.6 mm
~
 160 mm
  0.09 50.8 4 2
 kW  0.79 10.555    1.32  10 10.55  10.55
 160 
 0.63902  0.3175  0.0147  10.55
 0.3068  10.555
 3.2368 kW
Step 4
To find the No. of belts
from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.70
P  Fa
number of belts  n 
kW  F c  F d
P  75 kW ,
F a  1.1 (for light duty application from P.S.G. Data

book, Pg.No. 7.69)
kW  3.2368 kW
F c  1.05 (from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.60,

corresponding to cross section ‘B’ and nominal Inside
length)
from P.S.G. Data Book Pg.No. 7.68
Dd
Arc of contact angle  2 cos  1  
 2c 
Dd
 180  60  
 c 
 412  140 
 180  60  
 1000 
 163.68  ~
 163
F d  0.96 (from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.68,

corresponding to Arc of contact on smaller pulley)
 Number of belts required
75  1.1
  25.285 ~
 26 belts
3.2368  1.05  0.96
Hence, 26 belts are required
Calculation of New centre distance [from P.S.G. Data

book, Pg.No. 7.61]

CA A2  B
where
L 
A  D  d
4 8
2885.4 
  412  140
4 8
 504.58
D  d2
B  9,248
8
 New centre distance
C  504.58  
 
504.58 2  9248
C  999.91 mm
Initial tension  0.5 to 1% L [from P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 7.61]
1
Take 1% of L  2888   28 mm
100
 Final centre distance  999.91  28
 1027 mm
width of pulley  n  1 e  2f
f  E dge of pulley to first groove centre
where n  total numb er of belts
e  centre to centre distance of grooves

 26  1 19  2 12.5 (from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.70
 500 mm
Specifications
Type of Belt: B 2845/116 IS 2494 (V Belt)
Number of Belts: 26
Pitch diameter of smaller pulley: 140 mm
Pitch diameter of bigger pulley: 412 mm
Centre distance: 1027 mm
Problem 1.16 A motor driven blower is to run at 600 rpm
driven by an electric motor of 8.5 kW at 1900 rpm. Design v-belts.
Given data
Power P  8.5 kW
Speed of driver N 1  1900 rpm
Speed of driven N 2  600 rpm
Solution
Step 1: Selection of cross section of belt
Since the diameters of the pulleys are not given, they
can be assumed.
for the power 8.5 kW, ‘C ’ type belt may be selected.
For ‘C ’ type belt, dmin  200 mm
Nominal top width W   22 mm,

Thickness t  14 mm,
Weight per metre  0.343 kg f
Step 2: Selection of diameters

Equivalent pitch diameter

d e  dp  F b
(or)
de  dpmax  F b max
max

‘C ’ type belt
de  300 mm
max
and corresponding to D/ d ratio,
F b max  1.14
de
max 300
 dpmax    263.15 mm
F b max 1.14
Therefore Diameter of smaller pulley d  (or) driver

pulley
d  230 mm

Diameter of larger pulley
N1
D   d  
N2
Where N 1  rpm of smaller pulley (Driver pulley)

and
N 2  rpm of Larger pulley (driven pulley)
and
  0.98 (assumed)
1900
 D  230   0.98
600
 713.76 mm
Step 3: Determination of centre distance

From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.61,
D 713.76
i   3.1
d 230

i  3.1 ~
 4
C
 0.95
D
 C  0.95  713.76
 C  678.072 mm
C min  0.55 D  d  
 0.55 713.76  230  14
 533.06 mm
C max  2 D  d
 2 713.76  230
 1887.52 mm
Since the calculated a  678.072 mm is between

C min and C max, The calculated centre distance is correct.
Step 4: Nominal pitch length of belt L 

 D  d2
L  2C  D  d  
2 4C
 713.76  230 2
 2  678.072  713.76  230 
2 4  678.072
 2819.35 mm

cross-section C
Nominal pitch length L  2901 mm
The corresponding Nominal Inside length = 284.5 mm
Step 5: Calculation of Design power

belt cross-section symbol ‘C’,
 142.7 
kW   1.47 S  0.09   2.34  10  4 S2 S 
 de 
 N1
since S  belt speed 
60
  0.230  1900

60
 22.8 m/s

de  dp  Fb (or) d  F b
 230  1.14
 de  262.2  de  300
max
  0.09 142.7 4 2 
 kW   1.47 22.8   2.34  10 22.8    22.8
 262.2 
kW power  10.113 kW
Step 6: Number of belts

From P.S.G Databook, Pg.No. 7.70
P  Fa
Number of belts 
kW  Fc  F d
Power P  8.5 kW (given)
Assuming medium duty service and over 16 hr and

continuous service
F a  1.3

Belt cross section ‘C’ and Nominal inside length = 2845 mm
F c  0.95
Dd
Arc of contact   180     60 
 C 
 713.76  230 
 180   
678.072
  60
 
 137 

Arc of contact,  and V - Flat.
F d  0.85
8.5  1.3
 Number of belts n 
10.113  0.95  0.85
 1.353 ~
 2 belts
Step 7: Calculation of New centre distance

From PSG Data book Pg.No. 7.61, centre distance ‘C ’
CA 
 A2  B
where
L D  d
A 
A 8
2901 713.76  230

 
4 8
 354.6 mm
D  d2
B
8
713.76  2302

8
 29252.96 mm2
 New centre distance ‘C ’
 354.6   354.62  29252.96


 665.22 mm
Problem 1.17: Design a suitable V - Belt and design the drive

for a wet grinder. The power available from a 0.75 kW motor
running at 780 rpm. Drum speed is to be about 120 rpm. Drive
is to be compact.
Given Data
P  0.75 kW; N1  780 rpm; N 2  120 rpm
Solution
Step 1: Selection of cross-section of belt
Since the diameters of pulleys are not given they can
be assumed.
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.58, for the power

0.75 kW, “A” type belt may be selected. For “A” type belt,
minimum pulley pitch diameter dmin = 75 mm; Normal top
width w  = 13 mm;
Nominal thickness T  = 8 mm; weight of metre =

0.106 kg f.
Step 2: Selection of diameters

From PSG Data book, Pg.No.7.62,
Equivalent pitch diameter de  dp  F b
(or)
de max  dp max  F b max

“A” type belt
de  125 mm
max
D
and corresponding to ratio,
d
F b max  1.14
de
max 125
 dp max    109.64 mm
Fb max 1.14
Therefore diameter of smaller pulley d  or driver

pulley should be between 75 mm to 109.64 mm
Hence let the diameter of driver pulley
d = 100 mm
N1
Diameter of larger pulley D   d  
N2
where
N 1  rpm of smaller pulley (Driver pulley)
and
N 2  rpm of larger pulley (Driven pulley)
and   0.98 (assumed)
780
 D  100   0.98
120
 637 mm
Step 3: Determination of centre distance

D 637
i   6.37
d 100

C  6.37,
C
 0.85
D
 C  0.85  637
 C  541.45 mm
C min  0.55 D  d  t
 0.55 637  100   8
 413.35 mm
C max  2 D  d
 2  637  100
 1474 mm
Since the calculated ‘C ’ = 541.45 mm, is between

C m in and C max, the calculated centre distance is correct.
Step 4: Nominal pitch length of belt L 

 D  d2
L  2C  D  d 
2 4C
 637  1002
 2  541.45   637  100 
2 4  541.45
 2373.72 mm

cross-section “A”
Nominal pitch length L  2703 mm,
The corresponding nominal Inside length = 2667 mm.

Step 5: Calculation of Design power

belt cross-section symbol “A”.
 19.62 
kw   0.45 S  0.09   0.765  10  4 S 2  S
de
 
 d N1
Since S  belt speed 
60
  0.100  780

60
 4.084 m/s
de  dp  Fb
 100  1.14
 114 mm  de max  125 mm
  0.09 19.62 4 2 
 kw   0.45  4.084   0.765  10 4.084   4.084
 114 
 0.911 kW

P  Fa
Number of belts 
kw  F c  F d
Power P  0.75 kW given
Assuming medium duty service and upto 10 hr service
F a  1.1

belt cross-section “A” and Nominal inside length = 2667
mm.
F c  1.1
Dd 
Arc of contact   180      60
 C 
 637  100 
 180      60
 541.45 
 120.49

Arc of contact,  and V - Flat
F d  0.83
0.75  1.1
 Number of belts n 
0.911  1.1  0.83
 0.9918 ~
 1 belt
Step 7: Calculation of New centre distance

Centre distance ‘C ’  A  

A2  B
L  D  d
where A  
4 8
2703  637  100

 
4 8
 386.33 mm
D  d2
and B 
8
637  100 2

8
 36046.12 mm 2
 New centre distance ‘C’
 386.33   386.332  36046.12

 
 722.78 mm
Problem 1.8: Design a V-belt from an electric motor to the

flywheel of a forging press from the following data. Motor
power 80 kW. During operation the motor is overloaded, the
overload factor being 1.5. Rated speed of motor is 720 rpm
and The required speed of the press flywheel is 300 rpm. The
flywheel with diameter of 1500 mm is preferably used as a
driven pulley. The distance between the areas of the flywheel
and motor pulley can be about 1650 mm. [May 2011]
Given data
P  80 kW; N 1  720 rp m; N2  300 rpm ; D  1500 mm ;
C  1650 mm, Over load factor F a  1.5
Solution
Step 1: Selection of cross-section of belt
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.58, for the power 80
kW, “D” type belt may be selected.
For “D” type belt, minimum pulley pitch diameter

d min  355 mm; Nominal top width w   32 mm; Nominal
thickness T  19 mm; weight per metre = 0.596 kg f.
Step 2: Calculation of diameters

N1
Diameter of larger pulley D  d  
N2
where n 1  rpm of smaller pulley (Driver pulley)
n 2  rpm of larger pulley (Driven pulley)
and   0.98 (assumed)
N2 1
dD
N1 
300 1
 1500  
720 0.98
 637.75 mm
Step 3: Nominal pitch length of belt L

 D  d2
L  2C  D  d  
2 4C
 1500  637.752
 2  1650  1500  637.75  
2 4  1650
L  6770.6 mm

belt cross-section symbol “D ”
Nominal pitch length L  6886 mm
The corresponding nominal inside length = 6807 mm

Step 4: Calculation of design power

From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No.7.62, corresponding to
belt cross-section symbol “D ”
 506.7 
kw   3.22 S  0.09   4.78  10  4 S 2  S
de
 
 dN 1
Since S  belt speed 
60
  0.6377  720

60
 24.04 m/s
de  dp  Fb
 637.75  1.13
 720.657 mm
. . D
[ . F b  1.13 corresponding to ratio from PSG Data
d
book Pg.No. 7.62]
  0.09 506.7 4 2 
 kw   3.22  24.04    4.78  10 [24.04 ]   24.04
 720.657 
 34.6 kW

P  Fa
Number of belts n  
kW  F c  F d
Power P   80 kW (given)

belt cross-section “A” and Nominal inside length 6807 mm.
F c  1.1
Dd
Arc of contact   180    60 
 C 
 1500  637.75 
 180     60
 1650 
 148.64

Arc of contact,  and V - Flat
F d  0.82
80  1.5
 Number of belts =
34.6  1.1  0.82
belts  3.84 ~
 4
Step 7: Calculation of new centre distance

Centre distance ‘C’  A  


A2  B
L  D  d
where A 
A 8
6886  1500  637.5 

 
4 8
 882.2 mm
D  d 2
and B
8
1500  637.5 2

8
 92934.3 mm 2
 C  882  
 
882 2  92934.3
 1709.6 mm
1.3. DESIGN OF WIRE ROPES

1.3.1 WIRE ROPES
When a large amount of power is to be transmitted
over a long distance (up to 150 meters) from one pulley to
another pulley, then wire ropes are used.
Wire ropes are used for hoisting and hauling

purposes, example: elevators, mine hoist, cranes, conveyors,
etc.
Wire ropes are made from cold drawn wires to

increase strength and durability. The various materials
used for wire ropes are wrought iron, cast steel and alloy
steel.
1.3.2 Advantages of wire ropes

1. Wire ropes are light in weight
2. They offer silent operation.
3. They can withstand shock loads
4. They are more reliable
5. They do not fail suddenly
6. They are more durable, low cost and high efficient

when compared to fibre ropes.
1.3.3 Disadvantages of wire ropes

1. Not suitable for low power transmission.
2. It cannot be employed for short centre distance.
3. High manufacturing cost.
4. High Maintenance cost.
5. Should be kept away from electrical power, to
prevent current leakage through them.
6. It should be kept away from corrosive environment.
1.3.4 Construction of Wire rope

The wires are initially heat treated and cold drawn
during stage in order to have high strength and durability.
The wires are first twisted into a strand and then a
number of strands are twisted about a core to form the
rope as shown in the Fig. 1.11 (a), (b).
dw
d
S tran d
C o re
Fig. 1.11(a) 6x7 w ire rop e
R o pe
R1 R1
Fig. 11.11(b) 2
C ross-sectio n o f a rop e.
The number of wires in each strand is generally 7,

19 or 37 and number of strands is usually 6.
1.3.5 Designation of wire ropes

The wire ropes are designated by the number of
strands and the number of wires in each strand.
For example, a wire rope having six strands and

seven wires in each strand is designated by 6  7 rope.
1.3.6 Classification of wire ropes

Wire ropes are classified based on
(a) Number of strand and number of wire in each

strands
(i) 6  7 ropes
(ii) 6  19 ropes
(iii) 6  37 ropes
(iv) 8  19 ropes
(b) Direction of twist of wire and strand as

(i) Cross-lay ropes
(ii) Parallel-lay ropes
(iii) Composite-lay ropes
(c) Direction of strand bending

(i) Right hand lay
(ii) Left hand lay
(d) Usage
(i) Running ropes
(ii) Stationary ropes

Steel Wire Ropes of Various Constructions
Parallel Lay Ropes

Left Hand Lay
Righ t Hand Lay

Cross Lay Ropes
Com posite Lay Ropes

Fig.1.12. Types o f W ire - R opes.
(iii) Track ropes
(iv) Wire ropes slings
Stress in Wire Ropes
(i) Direct stress

The stress induced due to the weight of the load to
be lifted, weight of the rope etc.
W  Wr
d 
A ... (1)
Where W  weight of the load to be lifted
W r  weight of the rope
A  cross  sectio na l area of the ropes
(ii) Bending stress

The stress induced in the rope as it passes over a
sheave or drum. It is directly proportional to the wire
diameter and inversely proportional to the diameter of the
sheave.
dw
 b  Er
D ... (2)
Where, E r  Young’s modulus of the entire rope
 0.8  10 5 N  mm 2 or
3
Er  E
8
E  Young’s modulus of the wire material
dw  wire diameter
D  s heave diameter
(iii) Stress due to acceleration

The stress induced due to the acceleration which is
changed due to speed of hoising. It is not due to starting
or stopping acceleration.
 W  Wr  a
a   
 g A ... (3)
where a  acceleration of rope and load during hoisting
V2  V1

t
(Speed of the rope changes from V 1 to V2 in t sections)
(iv) Stresses during starting
During starting, the load is given some acceleration

which induces addition at stress in the rope.
s  2  d  4  (If there is no slack in the rope)
If there is slack in the rope before starting, which

result impact load in the rope then,
 
W  Wr  2as h E r 
s 
A
1

 
 1 
 d l  g 
... (5)
where, h  slack during starting
l  length of the rope.
as  acceleration during starting  stopping
(v) Effective stress
The sum of direct stress  d and the bending stress

 b is called the effective stress in the rope.
The effective stress in the rope during normal

working
 ne  d  b
The effective stress during the acceleratio n of the load
 ae   d   b   a
The effective stress during starting  se   s   b

1.3.7 Failures of wire rope

Wire rope failure may be caused by the following
reasons
(a) Work at overloads.

(b) Wear and corrosion due to poor maintenance.
(c) Due correct selection of drum and rope diameter.
(d) Incorrect winding of drum.
(e) High dynamic impact.
1.3.8 Design procedure for wire rope
1. Selection of suitable wire rope

Select a suitable wire rope based upon it usage from
the table.
6  17 rope used in wires, tramways, power

transmission
6  19 rope used in cranes, derricks, dredges, elevators
6  37 rope used in steel mill ladles, cranes, high speed
elevators
8  19 rope used as extra flexible hoisting rope
2. Calculation of design load

Design load = load to be lifted  Assumed factor of
safety n
Refer PSG data book Pg.No. 9.1
Assume factor of safety 1 to 1.6 times the factor of

safety given in data book, it is because of duty factor.

3. Selection of wire rope diameter d 

Select a suitable diameter from the table.
Refer PSG Data book Pg.No. 9.4, 9.5 and 9.6
4. Calculation of shear diameter D 

Always larger shear diameter is preferred.
5. Selection of Area of useful cross-section of rope

A 
Refer Pg.No. 9.1 (PSG data book)
T 2
A  0.4 d
4
6. Calculation of wire diameter d w 

d
dw 
1.5 
i
where i  Number of wire in the rope
 Number of strands  Number of wire in each

strand
7. Selection of weight of rope w r

Refer PSG data book Pg.No. 9.4, 9.5 and 9.6
8. Calculation of various loads

(i) Direct load  W d  W  W r
(ii) Bending load  W b  b  A
dw
 Er  A
D
(iii) Acceleration load W a
 W  Wr 
Wa   a
 g 
v2  v1
where a 
2
(when speed of rope changes from v1 to v2 in t seconds)
(iv) Starting on sloping load
(a) When no slack in rope
starting load W st  2  W d
 2 W  W r
(b) When there is slack
starting load W st  st  A

 2ash  E r 
 W  W r  1
 
 
d  l  g 
9. Calculation of effective load
(i) Effective load during normal work
Wen  W d  W b
(ii) Effective load during starting
Wse  W b  W s
(iii) Effective load during acceleration
Wae  W d  W b  Wa
10. Calculation of working factor of safety FOS w 

Breaking load
FOSw 
Effective load durin g a cceleration
For Breaking load, refer PSG data book Pg.No. 9.4,

9.5 and 9.6
11. Checking of safe design
12. Calculation of Number of ropes

Re commended factor of safety n
Number of ropes 
Working factor of safety FOSw 
Problem 1.19: A workshop crane is required to lift a load of

30 kN using a wire rope and hook. The hook weighs 15 kN.
The diameter of rope drum is 30 times than that of the wire
rope. The load is to be lifted with an acceleration of
1m  sec2. Calculate the diameter of rope. Factor of safety is 6.
Young’s modulus of wire rope is 80 kN  mm2. Ultimate stress
is 180 kN  cm2. The cross sectional area of the wire rope is 0.4
times the square of the wire rope diameter.
(Oct. ’96, May/June 2013)
W 1  weight of the load to be lifted  30 kN
W 2  weight of the crane hook  15 kN
Direct load or Dead weight on the rope
 W d  W1  W 2
 30  15  45 kN  45  103 N
Ultimate stress 180 kN  cm2
180  10 3
 2
 1800 N  mm2
10
Young modulus  E r  80 kN  mm2  80  10 3 N  mm2
D  diameter of rope drum  30  d

where d  d ia o f w ire rope
a  1 m  sec 2; FOS  6; as  0.4 d2
Design load  Factor of safety  Dead weight on the rope

 6  45
 270 kN
Since the rope is used in crane, select 6  19 rope
d d
dW    0.0624 d
1.5 i
 1.5 
 6  19
Er  dW
Bending load on the rope  W b  A
D
80  10 3  0.0624 d
  0.4d 2
30 d
 66.56 d2 N
Wd
Load on the rope due to acceleration  W a  a
g
45  10 3
 1
9.81
 4587.15 N
 Total load acting on the rope  W d  W b  W a
 45  103  66.56 d 2  4597.15 ... (1)

Total load on the rope
 Area of wire rope  Allowable stress
u 1800
A  0.4 d2 
FOS 6
 120 d2 ... (2)

Equate the equations (1) and (2)
45  10 3  66.56 d2  4587  120d2
120 d 2  66.56 d 2  49,587
49,587
d2 
53.44
d  30.46 mm
From table, Refer PSG data book Page No. 9.5

standard diameter of wire  32 mm
Problem 1.20: Select a wire rope for a vertical mine hoist to

lift a load of 55 kN from a depth of 350 meters. A rope speed
of 600 m/min is to be attained in 20 seconds.
Solution
Given data:
W  55 kN  55  10 3 N ; depth  350 metre ; v  600 m  min;

t  20 seconds
1. Selection of wire rope for a vertical mine hoist.

From PSG databook, Page No. 9.1 select
6  19 ro pe;
2. Factor of safety
 n  n  duty facto r Refer PSG Data book Pg. No.9.1
For mining installations n  10 and duty factor
 1.6 refer P.No.9.2
(assume mechanism class 4)
 n  10  1.6  16
 Design load for the wire rope
 16  55  10 3  880  103 N  89.73 tonnes
From PSG databook P.No. 9.5.
For nominal breaking strength of 90.4 tonnes and

tensile strength of 160 to 175 kg f  mm 2, the diameter of
rope is 41 mm.
 Select diameter of rope as  d  41 mm
Approximate weight w  6.37 kg f  m ; (Assume)
d ep th  350 m
 6.37  350  2229.5 kg f
w  22295 N
d 41
dw  dia of wire    2.56 mm
1.5 i
 1.5 
 6  19
3. Diameter of sheave: (D)

Refer PSG data book page No. 9.1,
D
Min  100
d
 D  100  d  100  41  4100 mm

E r  dW 0.8  10 5   2.56
 Bending stress  
D 4100
b  49.95 N  mm 2
Take E r  0.8  10 5 N  mm2 (Assume)
Equivalent bending load on the rope  W b  b  A
 49.95  528.1  26.378 kN

A  0.4   d2
4

 0.4   41 2
4
 528.1 mm 2
4. Acceleration of the rope and load:
V 600
a 
60t 60 20 
 0.5 m  sec 2
Ww
Additional load due to acceleration  W a  a
g
55  10 3  22295
  0.5
9.81
 3939.6 N
5. Effective load on the rope during acceleration of

the load
 W  w  Wb  Wa
 55  10 3  22295  26.378  10 3  3939.6

 107.6126  10 3 N
 Actual factor of safety during acceleration of the

load
880  10 3
  8.177  16 Design factor of safety
107.6126  10 3
6. Effective load on the rope during normal working

 W  w  Wb
 55  10 3  22295  26.378  10 3
 103.673  10 3 N
Actual factor of safety during normal working
880  10 3
  8.488  16
103.673  10 3
 8.488  16 des ign fa ctor of safety
Therefore, the design is satisfactory.
Problem 1.21: Select a wire rope from a 6  37 group to lift

a maximum load of 10 kN through a height of 60 m. The
weight of bucket is 2 kN. Maximum lifting speed is 2 m/s
which is attained in 3 seconds. Drum diameter is 30 times the
rope diameter. Factor of safety is 6.
(Anna University, May 2010)
Solution
Given
W 1  weight of load to be lifted = 10 kN
W 2  weight of bucket = 2 kN
Direct load (or) Dead weight on the rope W d

W d  W1  W 2
W d  10 kN  2 kN  12 kN  12  10 3 N
D  Diameter of rope drum  30  d
F os  6 (since the load applied on the rope during

starting and acceleration is more than two times the
weight)
Rope Type  6  37 ropes
Maximum speed v  2 m/s
Time = 3 seconds
i  6  37 type
1. Design load P d  F os  3  Dead weight on rope
P d  3  6  12
P d  3  72 kN
P d  216  10 3 N
Ultimate stress  1700 N/mm2 (Assumed)
Design load
2. Area of rope A 
Ultima te stress
216  10 3 N

1700 N/mm 2
A  127 mm 2
Diameter of rope is determined by using
A  0.4 d2


A
d
0.4
0.4

127

 17.8 mm
Next standard diameter of rope d  18
(Refer PSG data book Pg.No. 9.4, for 6  37 ropes)
Approximate weight w  6.37 k gf/m
w  6.37 kg f/m  63.7 N/m
d
dia of wire  d w 
1.5 i

18

1.5 
 6  37
 0.8053 mm
3. Diameter of sheave
D
 100
d
 D  100  d  100  18
 1800 mm
Take E r  0.8  10 5 N/mm 2 (Assumed)
Er  dw 0.8  10 5  0.8053
 Bending stress  
D 1800
b  35.79 N/mm2
Equivalent bending load on the rope
wb  b  A
w.k.t

A  0.4   d2
4

 0.4   182
4
 101.78 mm 2
 w b  35.79  101.78 N
 3642.7 N
 3.6427 kN
4. Acceleration of rope and load

v 2
a 
t 3
 0.66 m/s 2
load due to acceleration w a
Ww
wa  a
g
10  10 3  63.7
  0.66
9.81
w a  677.06 N
5. Effective load on rope during acceleration of load

 W  w  wb  w a
 10  10 3  63.7  3.64  10 3  677.06
 14382.7 N
 14.3827  10 3 N
 Actual factor of safety during acceleration of load
216  10 3 N

14.3827  10 3 N
 15.01  18 (Design factor of safety)
6. Effective load on the rope during normal working

 W  w  wb
 10  10 3  63.7  3.642  10 3
 13.7057  10 3 N
Actual factor of safety during normal working
216  10 3 N

13.7057  10 3 N
 15.75  18 (design factor of safety)

 The design is satisfactory.
Problem 1.22: A crane is lifting a load of 18 kN through a

wire rope and a hook. The weight of the hook etc., is 10 kN.
The load is to be lifted with an acceleration of 1 m/sec2.
Calculate the diameter of the wire rope. The rope drum
diameter may be taken as 30 times the diameter of rope. Take
a factor of safety of 6 and young’s modulus for the wire rope
0.8  105 N/mm2. The ultimate stress may be taken as

2
1800 N/mm . The cross-sectional area of the wire rope may be
taken as 0.38 times the square of the wire rope diameter.
Solution
Given
W 1  Weight of the load to be lifted  18 kN
W 2  Weight of crane hook  10 kN
Direct load (or) Dead weight on the rope Wd
 W1  W2
 18  10  28 kN  28  10 3 N
Ultimate stress  u  1800 N/mm 2
Young Modulus E r  0.8  10 5  80  10 3 N/mm 2
D  diameter of rope drum  30  d
where d  diameter of wire rope
a  1 m /s 2; F.O.S  6; as  0.38 d2
where as  crosssectional area of wire rope
a  acceleration
Design Load Pd

 Factor of safety  Dead weight on th e rope
 6  28
 168 kN
Since the rope is used in crane, from P.S.G. Data

book, Pg.No. 9.1, select 6  19 rope
The diameter of wire
d d
dW    0.0624 d
 i 1.5 
1.5   
6  19
Bending load on rope

E r  dW
W b   as
D
80  10 3  0.0624 d
Wb   0.38 d 2
30 d
 63.232 d2 N
Load on the rope due to acceleration

Wd 28  103
Wa  a 1
g 9.81
 2854.23 N
 Total load acting on the rope
 Wd  Wb  Wa
 28  10 3  63.232 d2  2854.23 ... (1)

Total load on the rope
 Area of wire rope  Allowable stress
u 1800
 as   0.38 d 2 
FOS 6
 114 d 2 ... (2)

Equate the equations (1) and (2)
28  10 3  63.271 d2  2854.23  114 d2
30,854.23  50.729 d2
 d  24.66 mm
From table, Refer P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 9.5,

standard diameter of rope  25 mm
Problem 1.23: A 6  19 wire with a tensile designation 1120

is used to raise a load. The nominal diameter of the wire rope
and the sheave diameter are 15 and 400 mm respectively.
Assuming long life on the basis of fatigue consideration
determine the maximum load that the wire rope can carry.
Solution
Given that
i  6  19 wire rope
Tensile designation 1120 means  v  1120 N/mm2
d  15 mm
D  400 mm
W max to be found out.
p
w.k.t  0.0012
v
Refer PSG data book Pg.No. 9.2 (Graph)
 P  0.0012  v
P  0.0012  1120
P  1.344 N /mm 2
2Wmax
Also w.k.t P 
dD
(Refer PSG Data book Pg.No. 9.2)
P  d  D 1.344  15  400
W max  
2 2
W max  4032 N Ans.
1.3.9 Design of wire rope sheaves

Performance of wire rope in a machine is affected by
the design of its sheaves and drum.
The Bending stress induced in the wire rope.
dw
 b  Er 
D
So, the bending stress induced in the rope is inversely

proportional to the diameter of the sheave.
 Its diameter should be large enough to reduce the
bending stress in the rope. It also provides better and more
economical service.
Narrowing sheaves will crush the rope and damage.
G ro ove D ia m e te r G ro ove D ia m e te r G ro ove D ia m e te r
R o pe D ia m eter
R o pe D ia m eter R o pe D ia m eter
Sh eave G roo ve Sh eave G roo ve Sh eave G roo ve

w ith Too M uch w ith Too Little w ith Corre ct
C learanc e C learanc e C learanc e
Fig.1.13
Sheave materials
Cast iron sheaves are employed in light and medium
service where as steel castings are often employed for heavy
service.
The cross-section of standard sheave grooves for wire

ropes are given in the data book (Refer PSG Data book
Pg.No. 9.10)
For various proportion of sheave groove, Refer PSG

data book Pg.No. 9.10.
1.3.10 Design of wire rope drums

In industries and other practical field, more than one
wire rope is being used, therefore one has to use rope drum
to enable the rope to be wound in multiple layers.
The drum is selected similarly the sheaves. Drums

for steel wire ropes are generally made up of cast iron.
The drum should be provided with helical grooves so

that the rope winds up uniformly and is less subjected to
wear. The helical grooves should be large enough to prevent
jamming of the rope.
1.3.11. For dimensions of the drum groove for wire

rope, refer PSG data book Pg.No. 9.9.
Problem 1.24: A 6  19 steel wire rope is used for the elevator

in the building. The weight is being lifted with a maximum
speed of 200 m/min. The weight of the elevator cage is 10 kN
and the weight of passengers is 9 kN. The lifting sheaves are
of the traction type. Design a suitable wire rope sheave. Take
FOS as 10.
Solution
Given data
Wire Type  6  19 wire rope
v  200 m/min
W elevator  10 kN
W passenger  9 kN
FOS = 10
1. Calculate the rope diameter
To design a wire sheave, we have to find the rope

diameter first.
Total load  W elevator  W passenger
 10 kN  9 kN
 19 kN
 Design load  Total load  FOS
 19  10  190 kN
Taking the design load as breaking strength
refering PSG data book Pg.No. 9.6
The diameter of the rope is selected as 25 mm.
 d  25 mm for v  1100  1250 N/mm2
and breaking strength = 190 kN
Calculation of sheave diameter

For velocity upto 50 m/min
D min/d  27
But lifting speed is 200 m/min, this ratio has to be

modified. For every additional speed of 50 m/min, D min/d
ratio has to be increased by 8%
D min
 Modified  27  1.08 4  1
d
 . . 200 
 34  . 50  4 
 
 Diameter of sheave D  34  25
 850 mm
Design of wire rope sheave

Refer PSG Data book Pg.No. 9.10
Knowing the diameter and refering data book, the
proportions of sheave are given below
(i) a  65 mm; (ii) b  50 mm;
(iii) c  10 mm; (iv) e  1.5 mm;
(v) h  37.5 mm; (vi) l  18 mm;
(vii) r  14.5 mm; (viii) r1  5 mm;
(ix) r2  5 mm; (x) r3  20 mm;
(xi) r4  15 mm;
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
APRIL 1998:
Design a belt drive to transmit 22.5 kW at 740 rpm
to an aluminium-rolling machine. The speed ratio being 3.0
and the distance between the pulleys is 3 meter. Diameter
of the rolling machine pulleys is 1.2 meter. Take fabric belt
and cast iron pulley. Assume Co-efficient of friction
  0.2, Permissible tension for 8 ply fabric belt = 12.5
kg/cm width. Take the length of the belt, 1% less to give
initial tension.
APRIL 2002:
Design a fabric belt to transmit 10 kW at 450 rpm
from an engine to a line shaft at 1200 rpm. The diameter
of the engine pulley is 600 mm and the distance of the
shaft from the engine is 2 meter.
OCTOBER 1996:
Design a chain drive to transmit 5 kW at 900 rpm
of sprocket pinion. The speed reduction is to be 2.5:1. The
driving motor is mounted on an adjustable base. Assume
that the load is steady, the drive is horizontal and the
service is 16 hours per day.
OCTOBER 2000:
Select a suitable deep groove ball bearing for a
drilling machine spindle of 40 mm diameter and suggest
necessary tolerances on the shaft and housing. Radial load
is 2.0 kN. Thrust is 1.5 kN. Spindle speed is 3000 rpm.
Desired life is 3000 hours.
1.4. DESIGN OF CHAIN DRIVE

1.4.1 Chain Drives
A chain drive consists of two sprockets and an endless
chain. The chain is wrapped around two sprockets. The
chain consists of number of links made of plates, which are
connected by pin joints. The sprockets are made of special
profile toothed wheels.
D rive n S procket
D rive r S pro cket
C e ntre D istan ce
Fig.1.14. A. Typical Ch ain Drive.
1.4.2 Advantages:
1. Chain drives can be used for long or short center
distances.
2. From a single driving sprocket, a number of
shafts can be driven in the same or opposite
direction by means of a chain.
3. Chain drives are more compact.
4. The efficiency of chain drives is approximately
98% (higher than belt drives).
5. There is no slip between sprocket and chain. (It

is a positive drive compared to the belt drive).
6. Chain drives require less maintenance, when
compared to belt drives.
1.4.3 Disadvantages
1. Periodic maintenance is required, particularly
lubrication and slack adjustment.
2. Noisy operation, when compared to belt drives.
3. Design is more complicated (sprocket design).
4. Chain drive is unsuitable where precise motions
is required due to polygonal effect and wear in
the joints.
1.4.4 Applications:
1. Transportation industry (Bicycles, motor cycles
and automobile vehicles, etc.)
2. Textile industry.
3. Building construction and material handling.
1.4.5 Types of chains:

The common types of chains are (a) Roller chain
(b) Bushed chain (c) Silent chain (or) inverted tooth chain
G Pt Pt Pt
w w
Db Dr
DP
A1 A2
W A3
B ush C hain R oller
C hain Sim p lex C h ain D up lex C hain Triplex C hain
Fig.1.15
1.4.6 Components of Chain Drive
1. Chain
(a) Roller chain

It is a type of chain in which an alternate inner and
outer links are connected by hinged joints. Each joint
consists of a pin of diameter ‘D p’ pressed into the outer
plates and the dash is secured in the holes of the inner
plates.
The roller employed in the chain safeguards the

sprockets teeth against wear.
The projection area of the contact surface for such a

joint is given by
A  Dp  b
where b  width of inner plates
(b) Bush chains

Bush chains differ from the roller chains in that they
have no rollers in it. Therefore they are lighter in weight,
but the absence of rollers increases the wear of teeth on
the sprockets because of the sliding friction between the
teeth and bushes.
(c) Silent or inverted chains

It is similar to the roller chain, with the sprockets
engaged by projection on the link side bars and series of
toothed plates are pinned together in rows across the width
of the chain.
Its structure is more intricate, it is more expensive

manufacturing and it requires good maintenance.
2. Sprockets
A sprocket is a profiled wheel with teeth that mesh
with a chain. The name sprockets applies generally to any
wheel upon which are radial projections that engage a
chain passing over it.
The operating capacity of a chain drive depends upon
the quality of the sprockets. Generally sprockets are made
up of cast iron or hardened steel. Sprocket with small
radius is termed as pinion-sprocket and with large radius
is called wheel sprocket.
p
d  Pitch circle diameter of sprocket 
sin  /Z
p

sin 180/ Z
D rive D irection O utside Diam eter
Pitch Circle
D riving Diam eter
C learance for
Belt U nderside
Fig.1.16 S procket
P = P itch of C hain Z = N um ber of Te eth
Dr
o
 1 80
2 = Z
r 
 2

2
d
o
3 60 2
=
Z
p
d = Pitch C ircle D ia m eter of Sp rocket =
sin ( /2)
p
o
sin (1 80 /z)
Fig.1.17. Action of C hain E ngaging Spro cket Teeth.
The Fig. 1.17 represents the action of chain engaging

sprocket teeth.
3. Chain housing
It is a pointing made up of thin sheet, provided to
prevent the chain drive from dust and dirt. It also dampers
the noise of the drive and pressure grease.
4. Slack adjuster
It is a movable bearing to regulate the chain slag and
maintain required tension in the drive. The bearings are
in the form of slides in which sprocket shaft is installed.
1.4.7 Design Procedure
Step 1
Calculate transmission ratio
Z2 n1
i 
Z1 n2
Z 1  No. of teeth on sprocket pinion (Driver)
Z 2  No. of teeth on sprocket wheel (Driven)
n1  Speed of rotation of pinion in rpm.
n2  Speed of rotation of wheel in rpm.
Step 2
(a) Select the no. of teeth on sprocket pinion Z 1

from databook Page No. 7.74 based on
transmission ratio (i)
(b) Calculate the No. of teeth on sprocket wheel
Z 2
Z2
Since i 
Z1
 Z 2  iZ 1
Z min  7 teeth
Z max  100 to 120 tee th
For uniform wear, select odd no. of teeth on driver

and even no. of teeth on driven.
Step 3
Calculate of pitch p
Refer databook Page No. 7.74
Optimum centre distance  a  30 to 50 p
a
i.e., pmax 
30
a
pmin 
50
Select the standard pitch from databook 7.71, 7.72 & 7.73
The selected standard pitch must be within

pmax and pmin .
The standard pitches are 6.0 mm 25.40 mm

8.0 mm 31.75 mm
9.525 mm 38.10 mm
12.7 mm 44.45 mm
15.875 mm 50.8 mm
19.05 mm,
Step 4
Select chain No., according to the selected standard

pitch.
(PSG Data book page No. 7.71, 7.72 and 7.73)
Take the following values according to the selected

chain No.
Simplex - R
Duplex - DR
Triplex - TR
(1) Bearing area in cm 2 A
(2) Weight per meter in kg f W
(3) Breaking load in kg f Q

Step 5
Refer PSG databook, Page No. 7.77.
Checking of breaking load Q in kg f
Power transmitted on the basis of Breaking load
Qv
N in kw
102  n  K s
N  given power in kW.
Q  induced breaking load (to be calculated)
v  chain velocity in m/sec.
ZpN
 m /sec.
60  1000
p  pitch in m m
N 1  N  Speed o f pinion in rpm
z  Z  no. of teeth on pinion
n  factor of safety allowable
Refer databook Page No. 7.77
The value of n depends on
1. speed of rotation of pinion

2. pitch in mm
ks  Service factor
Refer PSG databook Page No. 7.76 and 7.77
 k1  k2  k3  k4  k5  k6
The service factor ks depends on six factors

k 1 to k6
According to the given conditions, take the values of

k 1, k2, k 3, k4, k 5 and k6 and Calculate K s.
Note: If conditions are not given, select K s  1
(by assuming K1  K2  K3  K4  K5  K6  1
Substitute all the values in the equation
Qv
N Calculate Q
102 n K s
Q  [Q] then design is safe.
If Q  [Q] then change the chain no. and read the
values of A, W and [Q] and check again Q breaking load.
Step 6
Check the Actual factor of safety.
Refer PSG data book Page No. 7.78.
Q
[n] 
P
[n]  actual Fos  n allowable factor o f safety
Q  Breaking load of chain in kgf
P  P t  P c  Ps
P t  Tangential force due to power transm ission
102 N
Pt  kg f
V
P t  C entrifugal tension
W  v2
Pc  kg f
g
N  P ower in kW given
v  C hain velocity in m/sec
W  W eight/m length of chain kgf
g  9.81 m/sec 2
P s  Tension due to sagging of chain:
Ps  K  W  a K  Coefficient of sag
(refer PSG Data book page No.
7.78)
value of K depends on position of
chain drive
W  Weight/m length of chain kgf
a  Centre distance in meter
To Find ‘a’: Centre distance
1. To find length of chain

2
 Z2  Z1 
 
Z1  Z2  2 
lp  2ap   (no. of links)
2 ap
(to be corrected to even no.)
Actual length of chain  l  lp  p

ao
where ap 
p
ap  Approximate centre distance
ao  Initially assum ed centre dis tance
p  Pitc h
2. To find exact centre distance

e 
 e2  8m 
a p
 4 
Z1  Z2 The value of m can be

where e  lp  read directly from the
2
PSG data book. Page
No.7.76
2 The value of m depends
 Z2  Z1 
m  on Z 2  Z 1 value
 2 
 Calculate Z 2  Z 1 and
take the corresponding
value of ‘m’.
Calculate exact centre distance ‘a’.
Ps  K  W  a
where a  centre dista nce in meters
K  Coefficient. of sag
W  Weight/m length
Calculate P and
Q
[n] 
P
[n]  n
Then the design is satisfactory.
* If [n]  n, then change the chain No. and repeat the

calculations and check again [n] and n
Step 7
Checking of bearing stress  Refer PSG Data book,

Page No. 7.77
The allowable bearing pressure [] depends on
1. Pitch
2. Chain velocity
Read the value of [] in kgf/mm 2 and convert in

kg f /cm 2
kgf/mm 2  10 2  kg f/cm2
Power transmitted on the basis of allowable bearing
 A  v
stress  N 
102 K s
where N  given power in kW
  Induced bearing stress in kgf  cm 2
A  bearing Area  cm 2
v  Chain speed  m/sec
K s  service factor
Calculate   induced stress in kgf  cm 2
  []

Step 8
Diameters of pinion and wheel d and D
p
d
180 d  dia. of smaller sprocket
sin
Z1
p
D
180 D  dia. of larger sprocket
sin
Z2
1.4.8 Chordal action of a roller chain

Sprocket with less number of teeth can affect the
smooth running of a chain drive. This unsmooth running
condition is termed as chordal action of the chain.
When a chain roller approaches the sprocket and has

just seated, it has radius R c, also known as chordal radius.
When the roller passes through half of the pitch angle
, the roller has radius R which is the pitch radius.
 R  Rc
At N rpm, the chain velocity for pitch radius R  is

2 RN and for chordal radius is 2 R c N.
Since the velocity R  Rc, it is obvious that it is

undergoing from minimum to maximum velocity for every
rotation, which results in unsmooth running.
Chordal rise  R is given by
 R  R  Rc

 R  R cos
2
 
 R  1  cos 
 2 
The rise can be reduced by increasing the number of

teeth z in the sprocket, because
360

z
1.4.9 DESIGN OF CHAIN DRIVES

Problem 1.25: Design a chain drive to operate a compressor
from a 15 kW electric motor at 900 rpm; The compressor is to
run at a speed of 300 rpm; The minimum centre distance
should be 550 mm.
Solution
Given Data:
Power of Motor P  15 kW
Speed of motor N 1  900 rpm
Speed of the compressorN 2  300 rpm ;
Minimum centre distance ao  550 mm;
Step 1: Calculation of transmission ratio
Z2 N1
Tra ns mission ratio  
Z1 N2
N1 900
i  Transmission ratio   3
N2 300
Step 2: From PSG Design data book, refer Page No. 7.74.
For i  2 to 3 ; Z 1  25 to 27
i  3 to 4 ; Z 1  23 to 25
Take Z 1  23 to 27 (select any odd no. of teeth)
Select Z 1  27 teeth (no. of teeth on sprocket pinion)
Z 2  i Z1  3  27  81
 82 (no. of teeth on sprocket wheel)
Step 3: From PSG design data book, P.No.7.74
Optimum centre distance  a  30 to 50  p
where a  approximate centre distance
550
pitchmax  pmax   18.33 mm
30
550
pitchmin  pmin   11 mm
50
Select standard pitch from PSG data book,
Take any standard pitch between 11 to 18.33 mm
 Select Pitch  p  15.875 mm
Step 4: Selection of Chain No.
Select roller chain from PSG Data book Page No. 7.72
The available chain No. are 10A and 10B

*
Select 10A-2 Duplex Chain.
Pitch  p  15.875 mm
Corresponding to chain No. selected, take the values of

A  Bearing area  1.4 c m2
W  Weight per m length  1.78 kgf
Q  Breaking load  4440 kgf
Step 5: Calculate Power transmitted based on breaking

load:
From data book, Pg. No. 7.77
Qv
N kW
102n  Ks
From the above equation calculate ‘Q’ breaking load

by considering
N  given power
N  15 kW
Z1 p N1 27  15.875  900
v 
60  1000 60  1000
 6.429 m/sec
n  Minimum value of factor of safety
K s  1 ; Z1  15 to 30 from PSG data book, Pg. No. 7.77,
Select n  11 for a pitch 15.875 mm and

n 1  1000 rpm
Since the specific conditions are not given in the

problem, assume K 1  K 2  K 3  K 4  K5  K 6  1
 Ks  1
Q  6.429
15 
102  11  1
15  102  11  1
Q  2617.825 kgf
6.429
Breaking load Q  2617.825 kgf which is less than the

selected chain Breaking load 4440 kgf
The selection of chain no. is satisfactory based on

breaking load.
Step 6
(a) Calculation of Length of chain

(b) Final centre distance.
(a) Length of continuous chain in multiples of pitches
2
 Z2  Z1 
 
Z1  Z 2  2 
lp  2ap  
2 ap
ao
where ap 
p
550
  34.64
15.875
 34.64
ao  initially assumed centre distance in mm
 550 mm
p  pitch  15.875 mm
No. of teeth on sprocket wheel Z 2  82 ;
No. of teeth on sprocket pinion Z 1  27
Refer PSG data book Page No. 7.76,

2
 Z2  Z1 
  m
 2 
Read the value of ‘m’ directly from PSG data book
Pg.No. 7.63 Z 2  Z 1  82  27  55;
the value of m  76.6

27  82 76.6
lp  234.64   
2 34.64
 125.99
 126 approximate d to 126 
Length of chain  l  lp  p
 126  15.875  2000.25 mm

Take, l  2000 mm
(b) Final centre distance
e 
 e2  8m
a p
4
Z1  Z2 m  76.6 (from distance)

e  lp 
2
27  82
 126 
2
109
 126   71.5 m.m
2
Final centre distance
71.5  
 71.5 2  8  76.6
a  15.875
4
a  549.98
a  550 mm
Step 7: Check the actual factor of safety.

From PSG databook, Refer P.No. 7.78
Q
Actual factor of safety  [n] 
P
Q  Breaking load of the chain  4440 kg
P  P t  Ps  Pc
102 N
P t  Tangential force due to power Transmission 
v
102  15
Pt  N  15 kW
6.429
 237.98 kg f v  6.429 m/sec
W  v2
P c  Centrifugal fus ion 
g
1.78  6.429 2

9.81
 7.499 kg f
W  1.78 kg f
P s  tension due to slagging  kWa metres
550
 6  1.78 
1000
 5.874 kg
K  Coefficient of Sag from PSG data book 7.78
 6 (Horizontal)
a  550 mm  0.55 m
P  237.98  7.499  5.874
 251.353 kgf
Q 4440
[n]  
P 251.353
 17.66  11
which is greater than allowable factor of safety
 The design is safe.
Step 8: Checking of Allowable Bearing Stress
From PSG data book, Pg.No. 7.77
The allowable bearing stress    2.24 kg f/mm2
(for a pitch of 15.875 and speed  1000 rpm )
Refer PSG data book, from Pg. no. 7.77

stress
 Av
N kW
102 Ks
  1.4  6.429 N  15 kW

15 
102  1
  169.98 kgf/cm 2 or A  1.4 cm 2
  1.69 kgf/mm 2 v  6.429 m/sec
  [] Ks  1
 2.24 kg f/mm 2
Therefore the design is safe.

p
Step 9: Pitch dia. of small sprocket  d 
180 
sin
Z1
15.875

180
sin
27
 136.74 mm
p
Pitch dia. of large sprocket D
180
sin
Z2
15.875

180
sin
82
 414.46 mm
Problem 1.26: A 600 rpm blower is to be driven by a 10 kW

1440 rpm motor approximately 750 mm away. Design a
suitable chain drive. (May/June 2011)
Given Data:
Power  10 kW  10  10 3 W atts:
Speed of motor  N 1  1440 rpm; speed of blower  600 rpm
Approximate centre distance  750 mm
Step 1: Calculation of transmission ratio (i)
Z2 N1
Transmission ratio  i  
Z1 N2
1440
i  2.4
600
Step 2: From PSG Design data book, Page No. 7.74

For i  2 to 3; Z 1  no. of teeth on pinion  25 to 27
Take Z 1  27 teeth
 Z 2  no.of teeth on wheel  i Z 1
Z 2  2.4  27  64.8
Step 3: From PSG design data book Page No.7.74
Optimum centre distance  a  30 p to 50 p
where p  pitch
750
Pitchmax  P max   25 mm
30
750
Pitchmax  P min   15 mm
50
Select standard pitch from PSG databook, Pg.No.

7.72
Take standard pitch from PSG databook, between 15
mm to 25 mm
 Select Pitch 19.05 mm
Step 4: Selection of chain No.

Select roller chain (from Pg. No. 7.72) from the
available chain No.
Select chain No. 12A-1 (simpler roller chain)
p  pitch  19.05 mm
Bearing Area  A  1.05 cm 2;

weight per meter  W  1.47 kg f
Breaking load  Q  3200 kg f
Step 5: Calculate power transmitted on breaking load from

databook, Page No. 7.77
Q.V
N kW
102. n ks
From the above equation, calculate ‘Q’ breaking load

by using N  given power in kW.
p  Z 1 N1
N  10 kW; V 
60  1000
19.05  27  1440
  12.34 m  sec
60  1000
n  Minimum value of factor of safety
From PSG databook, Page No. 7.77
Select n  13.2
Since the specific conditions are not given, assume
K1  K2  K3  K4  K5  K6  1
 KS  1
Q  12.34
10 
102  13.2  1
102  13.2  1  10
Q  1091.08 kgf
12.34
Breaking load Q  1091.08 kgf, which is less then the

selected chain, breaking load of 3200 kg f.
Step 6
(a) Calculation of Length of chain, and

2
 Z2  Z1 
Z  Z  
a L ength of co ntinuous chain  1 2  2 
 l  2a  
in multiples of pitches  p p 2 ap
66  27 38.5
 lp  2 39.37   
2 39.37
 126.217 m
 128 mm approximate links
ao
Where ap 
p
ao  initially assumed center distance  750 mm
750
 ap   39.37
19.05

e 
e2  8m
(b) Finalc entredistanc e  a  p
4
81.5  81.5 2  8  38.5 


a  19.05
4
 767.18 mm
Z1  Z2
e  lp 
2
66  27
 128   81.5
2
Take a  final centre distance  770 mm (rounded to

nearest value)
Step 7: Check the actual factor of safety
From PSG data book, Page No. 7.78
Q
P
Q  breaking load of the chain  3200 kgf
P  P t  P S  P C
P t  tangential force due to power transmission
102 N

V
102  15
  123.98 kg f
12.34
W  v2
P C  Centrifugal tension 
g
1.47  12.342

9.81
 22.818 kg f
P S  tension due to slagging  k.W.a
 6  1.47  0.77  6.7914 kg f
P  123.98  22.818  6.7914
 153.5894 kgf
K  coefficient of sa g from PSG databook, P.No.7.78.
K  6 (Horizontal)
a  770 mm  0.77 metre
Q 3200
 Actual factor of safety  [n]  
P 153.5894
[n]  20.83  13.2

(Greater than allowable factor of safety)
Step 8: Checking of Allowable bearing stress:
Refer data, Page No. 7.77
The allowable bearing stress    1.85 kg f  mm 2

Av
Stress  N  kW
102 KS
   1.05  12.34
10  N  10 kW
102  1
  78.7219 kg f  cm 2 A  1.05 cm 2
or v  12.34 m  sec
2 KS  1
  0.78721 9 kgf  mm
Which is less than allowable stress of 1.85 kg f  mm 2
Problem 1.27: A truck equipped with a 8.5 kW engine uses

a roller chain as the final drive to the axle. The driving
sprocket runs at 900 rpm and the driven sprocket at 380 rpm,
with a centre distance of approximately 550 mm. Select roller
chain.
Solution
Given data
N  8.5 kW
N 1  900 rpm
N 2  380 rpm
ao  550 mm
Step 1
Calculation of transmission ratio (i)
Z2 N1
Transmission ratio i  
Z1 N2
900
i
380
 2.368
Step 2
From PSG Data book Pg No. 7.74
For i  2 to 3
Z 1  no o f teeth o n pinio n = 25 to 27
 Z2  Z1  i
 27  2.368
 64.4
Step 3
From PSG design data book Pg.No. 7.74
Optimum centre distance  a  30 p to 50 p
where p  pitch
a 550
P max    18.33
30 30
a 550
P min    11
50 50
Select standard pitch for design data book Pg.No.

7.72
Take any standard pitch between 11 to 18.33 mm
 select pitch p  15.875 mm
Step 4
Selection of chain
Select roller chain from PSG Data book Pg.No. 7.72
The available chain No are 10 A and 10 B.
Select 10 A - Z Duplex chain.
Now corresponding to chain No selected, take the

value of (PSG data book Pg.No. 7.72)
W  Weight per m length  1.78 kgf
Step 5
Calculate power transmitted based on breaking load.
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 7.77
Q.v
N kW
102. n.K s
From the above equation calculate ‘Q’ by considering

N (given power) = 8.5 kW
Z1 p N1
v
60  1000
27  15.875  900

60  1000
 6.4293 m/sec
Select n  11 fo r pitc h = 15.875 and N 1  1000 rpm
K s  1 (Assume)
. .
. since the specific condition is not given in
problem.
K s  K 1  K 2  K3  K 4  K5  K 6  1
Q  6.4293
 8.5 
102  11  1
8.5  102  11  1
Q
6.4293
Q  1483.36 kg f
 Breaking load Q  1483.36 kg f which is less than

the selected chain breaking load Q  4440 kg f
 The Design is satisfactory based on breaking

Step 6
(a) Calculation of length of chain
(a) Length of continuous chains in multiplies of

pitches
2
 Z2  Z1 
Z 1  Z2  2

L p  2ap   
2 ap
ao 550
where ap  
p 15.875
 34.64
No of teeth on sprocket wheel Z 2  64
No of teeth on sprocket pinion Z 1  27
From PSG data book Pg.No. 7.76, take the value of

m for Z 2  Z 1  64  27  37
 m  34.7
2
 Z2  Z1 
w.k.t    m  34.7
 2 
64  27 34.7
Lp  2 34.62   
2 34.64
 115.74 links
 116 approximated to 116 link s
 Length of chain  l  lp  p
l  116  15.875
l  1841.5 mm
Take, l  1842 mm
e  
e2  8m
(b) Final centre distance a  p
4
Z1  Z 2
w here e  lp 
2
64  27
 116 
2
 70.5
70.5  
 70.52  8  34.7
a  15.875
4
a  551.66 mm
Take a  552 mm
Step 7
Check actual factor of safety
Q
Actual factor of safety  n 
P
Q  Breaking load of the chain = 4440 kg
 P  Pt  Ps  Pc
P t  Tangential force due to power transmission
102 N

v
102  8.5
Pt 
6.4293
P t  134.851
N  8.5 kW
v  6.4293 m/sec
W  v2
P c  Centrifugal function 
g
W  1.78 kg f/m length
1.78  6.42932

9.81
 7.5 kg f
P s  tension due to slag = kWa meter
k  6 (Horizontal) from Pg.No. 7.78 PSG Data book

550
P s  6  1.78 
1000
P s  5.874 kg f
 P  Pt  Pc  Ps
 134.851  7.5  5.874 kg f
 148.225 kg f
Q
 [n] 
P
4440

148.225
 29.95  1 allowable FOS
Step 8
Checking of Allowable Bearing stress
From PSG Data Book P.No. 7.77
The allowable stress for pitch of 15.875 and speed <
1000 rpm.
  2.42 kg f/mm 2

stress
 AV
N kW
102 Ks
  1.4  6.4293
8.5 
102  1
8.5  102  1

1.4  6.4293
  96.322 kg f/cm 2
  0.9632 kg f/mm 2
   0.9632  []  2.24 kg f/mm 2
Therefore the design is safe.
Step 9
p
Pitch dia of small sprocket  d 
180 
sin
Z1
15.875
d
180
sin
27
 136.74 mm
p
Pitch dia of large sprocket D 
180
sin
Z2
15.875
D
180
sin
64
D  323.53 mm
Problem 1.28: Design a chain drive to actuate a compressor

from 15 kW electric motor running at 1000 rpm, the compressor
speed being 350 rpm. The minimum centre distance is 500 mm.
The compressor operates 15 hours per day. The chain tension
may be adjusted by shifting the motor.
Solution
Power transmission N  15 kW
Motor speed N 1  1000 rpm
Compressor speed N 2  350 rpm
Centre distance A  500 mm
Let the operating chain may be a roller chain. Since

the optimum centre distance is 30 to 50 pitches.
500
pmax   16.66
30
500
pmin   10
50
a 500
(ie) p    14.3 mm
35 35
The standard pitch value is p  15.875 mm (from

P.S.G. Data book, Page No. 7.72 for pitch between
10 and 16.66 )
N1 1000
Transmission Ratio, i    2.857
N2 350
for i  2.85 , the number of teeth on pinion sprocket,

from P.S.G. Data book, Page No. 7.74.
Z 1  25 (assumed)
then the number of teeth on wheel sprocket.
Z 2  i Z 1  2.85  25  71.42 ~
 72
The power transmitted on the basis of breaking load

is given by,
Q .v
PN kW
102n Ks
N  Power to b e transmitted  11 kW
Q  Minimu m b reaking load in N
v  Chain velocity in m/s
n   F.O.S to be assumed
k s  Service facto r
Service factor ks  k1  k2  k3  k4  k5  k6
from P.S.G. Data book, (Pg.No. 7.76, 7.77)

k 1  1.5 load with heavy sh ock
k 2  1.0 Adjustable supports
k 3  1.0 a p  30 to 50 p
k 4  1.0 Assume th e line joining the centres of the
sprockets is inclined up to 60 to the horizontal
k 5  1.0 Drop lubrication, Assumed
k 6  1.25 Double shift of 16 hours a day
K s  1.5  1.0  1.0  1.0  1.0  1.25
 1.875
from the P.S.G. Data book Pg.No. 7.77
Let the minimum F.O.S n   11 for

k s  1 and Z 1  25
n   n  ks
(or)
n   11  1.875
 20.625
Z1 N1 p 25  1000  15.875
Chain velocity, v  
60  1000 60  1000
 6.61 m/s
Hence minimum breaking load
N n  K s 15  20.625  1.875
Q 
v 6.61
 87.75 kg f
Since minimum breaking load ((ie) developed

tangential force to break the chain) is 87.75 kgf. We should
select a chain, having higher breaking strength than the
calculated value.
For pitch value of 15.875 mm, DR Rolon chain may

be selected whose breaking strength is 4440.0 kg f from
P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.72.
Now the chain is checked for its actual F.O.S and for
allowable stresses.
Q
Checking for actual F.O.S, [n ] 
P
where  P  P t  P c  P s
Now P t  Tangential force du e to power transmission

102N
 kgf
V
102  15
  231.467 kg f
6.61
P c  centrifugal tens io n in kgf
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.72, W
weight/metre length  17.8 N
WV2 17.8  6.612
PC    79.27 kg f
g 9.81
P S  Tension due to sagging of chain in Newtons
 kWa, where k  Sagging coefficient
from P.S.G. Data Book, Pg.No. 778, position of chain

inclined up to 40 is assumed
hence k  4, a  0.5 m given, W  17.8
 P s  4  17.8  0.5
 35.6 kg f
  P  231.467  79.27  35.6
 346.337
Q 4440
Hence [n ]    12.81  11
 P 346.337
Since the actual F.O.S is more than adopted

minimum value, chain selection is correct. ie., n  n
Checking for induced bearing stress
The induced bearing stress over the projected area of

the chain is given by
N  Ks

AV
A  Bearing area
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.72, corresponding

to DR 50, Bearing area  140 mm2
15  1.875
Hence  
1.4  6.61
 3.039 kgf/cm 2  0.03039 kg f/mm
This is less than the allowable bearing stress, whose

value for k s  1.875, Z 1  25 and N 1  1000, fro m P.S.G.
Data bo o k, Pg. 7.77 is 42 N/mm 2
Hence selection of chain is correct

Now length of chain interms of pitches is obtained

as
2
 Z2  Z 1 
Z 1  Z 2  
 2 
l p  2a p   from P.S.G. Data
2 ap
book, Pg.No. 7.75
2
. .  Z2  Z1 
.   m
 2x 
From PSG Data book Pg. No. 7.76 take m  56
But
ao 500
ap    31.5
p 15.875
Hence
 25  72  56
lp  2  31.5    
 2  31.5
 113.27 mm; T ake 114
Length may be corrected to 112 pitches
 Actual length of chain
 114  15.875  1809 mm
Now corrected centre distance
e 

 e2  8 m
a  from P.S.G. Data book, Pg. No.
 4 
7.75
 Z1  Z 2 
But e  lp   
 2 
 25  72 
 114  
2   65.5
 
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.76, m  54 , for
Z 2  Z 1  48
 65.5  

 65.5 2  8  54 
Hence a     15.875
 4 
 506.47 mm
Centre distance (decrement) allowance to

accommodate initial chain sag
  0.5 F
But F  0.02 a
   0.5  0.02 506.47   5.0647 mm
Hence required centre distance  506.47  5.06
 501.48 mm
Now, pitch diameter of pinion sprocket d
P 15.875
d   126  127 mm
 180   180 
sin  sin  25 
Z   
 1 
pitch diameter of wheel sprocket D
P 15.875
D   363.9  364 mm
 180   180 
sin  sin  72 
Z   
 2 
Specifications
Type of chain: 10 A  2 DR 50 Ro ller c hain
Centre distanc e  501.40 mm

Number of teeth of sprocket pinion  25
Number of teeth of sprocket wheel  72
Length of chain  1809 mm

Pitch diameter of pinion sprocket  127 mm
Pitch diameter of wheel sprocket  364 mm
Problem 1.29: A 15 kW squirrel cage motor with a speed of,

1250 rpm, is driving a centrifugal pump at 550 rpm. The
centrifugal pump is located at 700 mm from the motor. Design
a chain drive.
Solution
Given Data
Power of motor  N  15 kW
Speed o f mo to r  N 1  1250 rpm
Speed of centrifugal pump  N 2  550 rpm
Minimum centre distance  700 mm
Step 1
Calculation of transmission ratio
Z2 N1
Transmission ratio  
Z1 N2
N1 1250
i  Transmission ratio    2.27
N2 550
Step 2
From P.S.G. Data Book, Pg.No. 7.74
For i  2 to 3; Z 1  25 to 27
Take Z 1  27 teeth (No. of teeth on sprocket pinion)

Z 2  i Z 1  2.27  27  62
Step 3
From P.S.G. data book, Pg.No. 7.74
Optimum centre distance  a  (30 to 50) P
where a  approximate centre distance
p  pitch of chain
a 700
pitchmax  b max    23.33 mm
30 30
a 700
pitchmin  b min    14 mm
50 50
Select standard pitch from P.S.G. data book, from

Pg.No. 7.72
Take any standard pitch between 14 to 23.33 mm.
 select pitch p  15.875 mm
Step 4
Selection of chain number
Select roller chain from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No.
7.72
The available chain Number are 10 A and 10 B
Select 10 A - 2 Duplex chain
Pitch p  15.875 mm
Corresponding to chain number selected, take the
values of
W  Weight per metre length  1.78 kg f

Step 5
Calculate power transmitted based on breaking load
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.77
Qv
N  kW
102 n k s
From the above equation calculate ‘Q’ breaking load

by considering
N  given power  15 kW
Z1 p N1 27  15.875  1250
v   8.929 m/ s
60  1000 60  1000
n Minimum value of factor of safety

(Ks  1; Z 1  15 to 30) from P.S.G. data book; Pg.No.7.77;
Select n  13.2 for a pitch 15.875 mm and

N 1  1600 rpm .
Since the specific conditions are not given, in the

problem, assume K1  K2  K3  K4  K5  K6  1
 K5  K 1  K2  K3  K 4  K 5  K 6  1
Q  8.929
 15 
102  13.2  1
 Q  2261.66 kg f which is less than the selected

chain Breaking load 4440 kg f.
The selected chain Number is satisfactory based on

breaking load.
Step 6
(a) Calculation of Length of chain

(a) Length of continuous chain in multiples of pitches

2
 Z2  Z1 
Z1  Z2  
 2 
lp  2ap   from P.S.G. Data
2 ap
book, Pg.No. 7.75
ao
where ap 
p
where ao is initially assumed centre distance
p is pitch in mm
700
 ap   44.09
15.875
No. of teeth on sprocket wheel Z 2  62
No. of teeth on sprocket pinion Z 1  27
Read the value of “m” directly from P.S.G. data book

at Z 2  Z 1 from Pg.No. 7.76
 the value of m corresponding to Z 2  Z1  35 is 31
2
 62.27 
62  27  2 
 lp  2  44.09   
2 44.09
 133.38
Length of chain  l  lp  p
 133.38  15.875
 2117.46 mm
 2117.5 mm
(b) Final centre distance (from P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 7.75)
e 
 e2  8 m
a p
4
Z1  Z2
But e  lp 
2
27  62
 133.38   88.88 mm
2
 Final centre distance

88.88   
88.88 2  8 31
a  15.875
4
 699.90
a~
 700 mm
Step 7
Check the actual factor of safety
Q
Actual factor of safety [n] 
P
where
Q  Breakin g loa d of the ch ain  4440 kg
 P  Pt  P s  P c
102 N

v
where N in kW and v in m/s
102  15

8.929
 171.35 kg f
W  v2
P c  Centrifugal tension 
g
where W  Weight per meter length. From P.S.G.

Data book, Pg.No. 7.72, corresponding to p  15.875 and
chain number.
 W  1.78 kg f/m length
1.78  8.929 2
 Pc   14.46 kg f
9.81
P s  tension due to sagging
 k.W.a
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.78; k - coefficient

for sag. k  6 for horizontal position of chain drive.
and
a is the centre distance
W is weight per meter length
700
 P s  6  1.78 
1000
 7.476 kg f
  P  171.35  14.46  7.476
 193.286 kg f
Q 4440
 [n]    22.97  13.2
 P 193.286
which is greater than allowable factor of safety.
Step 8
Checking of Allowable Bearing stress. From P.S.G.
data book, Pg.No. 7.77, corresponding to speed of rotation
of sprocket  1600 rpm , and pitch 15.875.
Allowable Bearing stress []  1.85 kgf/mm 2

stress.
Av
N
102 Ks
  1.4  8.929
 15     122.39 kg f/cm 2
102  1
Or
  1.22 kg f/mm2
  []
  1.85 kg f/mm2
 The design is safe

Step 9
Pitch dia of small sprocket
p
d
180
sin
Z1
15.875
d  136.74 mm
180
sin
27
Pitch dia of large sprocket D
p
D
180
sin
Z2
15.875

180
sin
62
D  313.43 mm
Problem 1.30: Design a chain drive to run a compressor from

a 11 kW electric motor running at 970 rpm, the compressor
speed being 330 rpm. The compressor operates 16 hours/day.
The centre distance should be approximately 500 mm. The
chain tension can be adjusted by shifting the motor on slides.
Solution
Power transmitted N  11 kW
Motor speed N 1  970 rpm
Compressor speed N 2  330 rpm
Centre distance a  500 mm

Let the operating chain may be a roller chain. Since

the optimum centre distance is 30 to 50 pitches.
assume a  30  50 p where p  pitch of chain
a 500 a 500
(ie) pmax    23.33 mm; pmin    10 mm
30 30 50 50
The next standard pitch value, p  15.875 mm
N1 970
Transmission ratio, i    2.93
N2 330
for i  2.93 , the number of teeth on pinion sprocket,

from the P.S.G. Data book, Page No. 7.74
Z 1  25
then the number of teeth on pinion-sprocket
Z 2  iZ 1  2.93  25  73
the power transmitted on the basis of breaking load

is given by
Q .v
N kW
102n Ks
N  P ower to be transmitted  11 kW
Q  Minimu m b reaking load in N
v  Chain velocity in m/s

n   F.O.S to be assumed
K s  Service factor
Service factor ks  k1  k2  k3  k4  k5  k6
(from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.76, 7.77)
k 1  1.5 load with heavy sh ock
k 2  1.0 Adjustable supports
k 3  1.0 a p  30 to 50 p
k 4  1.0 Assume th e line joining the centres of the
sprockets is inclined up to 60 to the horizontal
k 5  1.0 Drop lubrication, Assumed
k 6  1.25 Double shift of 16 hours aday
k S  1.5  1.0  1.0  1.0  1.0  1.25
 1.875
From the P.S.G. Data book Pg.No. 7.77
Let the minimum F.O.S n  11 for
k s  1 and Z 1  25
(or)
n   11  1.875 for Ks  1.875 , Z 1  25
 20.625
Z1 N1 p 25  970  15.875
Chain velocity, v  
60  1000 60  1000
 6.41 m/s
Hence minimum breaking load
N n  Ks
Q
v
11  20.625  1.875

6.41
 66.36 kg f
Since minimum breaking load ((ie) developed

tangential force to break the chain) is 66.36 kg f. We should
select a chain, having higher breaking strength than the
calculated value.
For pitch value of 15.875 mm. DR 50 Rolon chain

may be selected whose breaking strength is 4440 kg f from
P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.72
Now the chain is checked for its actual F.O.S and for
allowable stresses.
Q
Actual F.O.S, [n ] 
P
where  P  P t  P c  P s
Now P t  Tangential force du e to power transmision
102 N 102  11
Pt  
v 6.41
 175.03 kgf
P c  centrifugal tens io n in Ne wtons
W v2

g
17.8  6.412

9.81
 74.55 kgf
 W  W eight per metre 

 
 length  17.8 N from P.S.G. 
 
 Data book, Pg.No. 7.72 
Ps  Tension due to sagging of chain in Newtons
 k.W.a , where, k  sagging coefficient
from P.S.G. Data book Pg.No. 7.78, position of chain

inclined up to 40 assumed
hence k  4
a  0.5 m given
W  17.8
 P s  4  17.8  0.5
 35.6 N
  P  175.03  74.55  35.6
 285.18
Q 4440
Hence [n ]    15.56
 P 288.18
Since the actual F.O.S is more than adopted

minimum value, chain selection is correct.
ie 15.56  11
Checking for induced bearing stress

The Induced bearing stress over the projected area of

the chain is given by
N  ks

Av
A  Bearing area
from P.S.G. Data book Pg.No. 7.72, corresponding to

DR 50, Bearing area  140 mm 2
This is less than the allowable bearing stress whose

value for k s  1.875 , Z 1  25 and N 1  970 (from P.S.G. Data
book, Pg.No. 7.77) is 42 N/mm 2
Hence selection of chain is correct.
Now length of chain in terms of pitches is obtained as
2
 Z2  Z1 
Z 1  Z 2  
2 
lp  2ap  
2 ap
from P.S.G. Data book Pg.No. 7.75
But
a0 500
ap    31.5 from P.S.G. Data book Pg.No. 7.7 5
p 15.875
Hence
2
 73  25 
 
 25  73   2 
lp  2  31.5    
 2  31.5
 112.24
Length may be corrected to 112 pitches
 Actual length of chain (from P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 7.75)
 112  15.875
 1778 mm
Now corrected centre distance
e

 e2  8 m 
a p (from P.S.G. Data book,
 4 
Pg.No.7.75)
 Z1  Z2 
But e  lp  
 2 
 25  73 
 112     63
 2 
m  58.4 , for Z 2  Z1  73  25  48 from P.S.G. Data
book, Pg.No. 7.76
Hence
 



 63  8  58.4 
2
a   63    15.875
 4 
 484.8 mm

accommodate initial chain sag (from P.S.G. Data book,
Pg.No. 7.75)
  0.5 F
But F  0.02 a
   0.5  0.02 484.8 
 4.848 mm
Hence, Required centre distance  484.8  4.848
 479.95 mm
Now, pitch diameter of pinion sprocket d
p
d
 180 
sin 
Z1 
 
15.875
  127 mm
 180 
sin  
 25 
Pitch diameter of wheel sprocket D

p 15.875
D   369 mm
 180   180 
sin  sin  
Z2   73 
 
Specifications
Type of chain: 10 A-2 DR 50 Rolon chain
Centre distance: 479.95 mm
Number of teeth of sprocket pinion: 25
Number of teeth of sprocket wheel: 73
Length of the chain: 1778 mm
Pitch diameter of pinion sprocket: 127 mm
Pitch diameter of wheel sprocket: 369 mm
Problem 1.31: A blower is to run at 600 rpm. Power to the

blower is available from a motor rated 8 kW at 1500 rpm.
Design chain drive for the system if the centre distance is to
be 800 mm.
Solution
Given data
Power N  8 kW
Speed of blower N 2  600 rpm
Centre distance a   800 mm
Step 1
Calculate of transmission ratio i
Z2 N1 1500
i    2.5
Z2 N2 600
Step 2
From P.S.G data book, Pg.No. 7.74
for i  2 to 3, Z 1  No. of teeth on pinion  25 to 27
Since Z 2  No. of teeth on wheel  i Z1
 Z 2  2.5  27  68 teeth
Step 3
Fro m P.S.G Data bo o k, Pg.No. 7.74
Optimum c entre distanc e  a  30 p to 50 p
where p  pitch
800
Pitchmax  pmax   26.66
30
800
Pitchmin  pmin   16
50
Select standard pitch from P.S.G Data book,

Pg.No. 7.72
Take standard pitch, between 16 mm to 27 mm
 select pitch 19.05 mm
 p  19.05 mm
Step 4
Selection of chain No.
Select roller chain from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.72
from the available chain No.
Select chain No. 12A - 1 (simpler roller chain)
p  pitch  19.05 mm
Bearing area  A  1.05 cm 2
Weight per meter  W  1.47 kgf
Breaking load  Q  3200 kgf
Step 5
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.77, power
transmitted on breaking load
Qv
N
102  N 1  k s
N  8 kW
p  Z1 N1 19.05  27  1500
V 
60  1000 60  1000
19.05  27  1500
  12.85 m/s
60  1000
n  minimum value of Factor of safety from P.S.G

Data book, Pg.No. 7.77
Select n  13.2 corresponding to speed of rotation of

small sprocket, rpm
Since specific conditions are not given, assume
K 1  K2  K 3  K 4  K 5  K 6  1
 KS  K1 K 2 K3 K 4 K5 K 6  1
Q  12.85
8
102  13.2  1
 Q  838.22 kgf which is less than the selected

Breaking load of 3200 kg f.
Step 6
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.75 length of
continuous chain in multiples of pitches
2
 Z2  Z1 
Z1  Z2  
2 
 lp  2 a p  
2 ap
ao
where ap 
p
a o  initially assu me d centre distance in mm
 800 mm
800
 ap   41.99
19.05
2
 68  27 
 
27  68  2 
 lp  2 41.99   
2 41.99
 131.48 mm
 132 mm
Length of chain  l  lp  p
 132  19.05
 2514.6 mm
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.76, take m

corresponding to Z 2  Z1  68  27  41
 m  42.6

e

e2  8 m
final centre distance ‘a’  p
4
Z1  Z 2
but e  lp 
2
27  68
 132   84.5
2

84.5   84.52  8 42.6 
a  19.05
4
 803.9 mm
 804 mm
Step 7
Check the actual factor of safety from P.S.G Data
book, Pg.No. 7.78
Q
P
Q  breaking load of the cha in  3200 kg f
 P  Pt  P s  P c
where
P t  tangential force due to pow er transmission
102 N 102  8
   63.5 kg f
v 12.85
W v2
P c  centrifugal tension 
g
1.47  12.85 2

9.81
 24.74 kg f
P s  tension due to sagging  k  W  a
k  coefficient of sag  6 Horizontal
a  796 mm  0.796 m
 P s  6  1.47  0.796
 7.02 kg f
  P  63.5  24.74  7.02
 95.26 kg f
Q
 Actual factor of safety [n] 
P
3200

95.26
 33.59  13.2 greater than allowable FOS
Step 8
Checking of Allowable bearing stress from P.S.G Data
book, Pg.No. 7.77
allowable bearing stress    1.85 kg f/mm 2
Power transmitted on basis of allowable bearing

[] Av
stress  N 
102 k s
[]  1.05  12.85

8  []  60.47 kgf/cm 2
102  1
or
[]  0.6047 kgf / mm 2  1.85 kgf / mm 2

(i.e.) allowable bearing stress
Problem 1.32: A compressor is to be actuated from a 10 kW

electric motor. The speed of the motor shaft is 1000 rpm and
the compressor speed being 350 rpm. The minimum centre
distance is 500 mm. The compressor operates 16 hours per
day. Design a suitable chain drive.
Solution
Given
P  10 kW ; N1  1000 rp m, N 2  350 rp m ,
a  500 mm  0.5 m, servic e  16 hours/day.
Let the operating chain may be roller chain from

P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.74, the optimum centre
distance is 30 to 50 pitches.
p is the pitch of the chain.
a 500
(ie) pmax    16.36 mm
30 30
500
pmin   11
50
select standard pitch betn (11 to 16.6)
From P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.72, The next

standard pitch value, p  15.875 m
From P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.74
N1 1000
Transmission ratio i    2.857
N2 350
for i  2.857 , the number of teeth on pinion-sprocket,

from P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.74,
Z 1  25 As su med
then the number of teeth on wheel-sprocket,
Z 2  iZ 1
 2.857  25
 71.425
~
 72
The load applied on the chain due to transmitted

power is given by.
N  ks  n
Q
v
where N  power to be transmitted  10 kW  10,000

watts
v  chain velocity in m/s
n  Factor of safety to be assumed
k s  Service factor
Now service factor
ks  k1  k2  k3  k4  k5  k6
k 1  1.5 (Load with heavy shock)

k 2  1.0 (Adjustable supports)
k 3  1.0 ap  30 to 50p
k 4  1.0 (Assume the line joining the centres of the

sprockets is inclined upto 60 to the
horizontal)
k 5  1.0 (Assuming drop lubrication)
k 6  1.25 (16 hours/day service)
 k s  1.5  1  1  1  1  1.25
 1.875
Let the minimum factor of safety,
n  11 for ks  1 and Z 1  25
 for ks  1.875 and Z 1  25
n  11  1.875
 20.625
Z 1N 1p
Chain velocity, V 
60  1000
25  1000  15.875

60  1000
 6.614 m/s
Hence the minimum breaking load,
N  n  ks 10,000  20.625  1.875

Q 
v 6.614
 58,469.72 N
Since the minimum breaking load (ie., developed

tangential force to break the chain) is 58,469.72 N , we
should select a chain having higher breaking strength than

the calculated value.
for the pitch value of 15.875 mm, DR 50 Rolon chain

may be selected whose breaking strength is 66600 N
Now the chain is checked for its actual factor of

safety and for allowable stress.
Checking for actual factor of safety:
Q
Actual factor of safety, [n] 
P
where P  P t  P c  P s
and Q  Breaking strength of selected chain
Now
N
  Newtons
 v 
10000
  1575 Newton
6.35
F c  Centrifugal tension in Newtons
Wv 2

g
From P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.72,
W  weigth per metre length  30.2 N

30.2  6.352
 Pc 
9.81
 124.132 N
P s  Tension due to sa gging of chain in newtons
kWa
where k  Sagging coefficient  4 (position of chain

drive inclined upto 40)
 P s  4  30.2  0.5
 60.4 N
 P  1575  124.132  60.4
 1759.53 N
Q
Hence [K n] 
P
66600
  37.85
1759.53
Sinc e the ac tual fac to r o f safety is mo re than ado pted

minimum value,c hain selec tio n is c o rrec t.
Chec kingfo rinduc ed bearing stress:
The induc ed bearing stress o ver the pro jec ted area o f
the c hain is given by
N  ks

Av
from P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.72

A  B earing area  210 mm 2
10,000  1.875
 
210  6.35
 14.06 N/mm 2
This is less than the allowable bearing stress whose

value is 28.7 N/mm 2 from P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.77.
Hence the chain selection is correct.
Now the length of chain interms of pitches is

obtained as,
2
 Z2  Z1 
Z1  Z 2  2

L p  2ap   
2 ap
a0 500
But ap    31.5
p 15.875
Hence,
2
 72  25 
25  72 
 2 
L p  2  31.5   
2 31.5
 113.2
Length may be corrected to even number such as

L p  114 pitches.
 Actual length of chain
l  lp  p
 114  15.875
 l  1810 mm
Now the correct centre distance,
e 

 e2  8m
a p
 4 
where
 Z1  Z2 
e  lp   
 2 
 25  72 
 114   
 2 
 65.5 ~
 66
Corresponding to Z 2  Z1  72  25   47
m  56
Hence
 66  

 662  8  
56
a   15.875
 4 
 510 mm
from P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.75

accommodate initial chain sag,
But F  0.02 a
  0.5F
 0.5  0.02  a
 0.5  0.02  510
 5.1 mm
Hence required centre distance
 510  51
 505 mm
The pitch diameter of pinion sprocket, d
p 15.875
d 
 180   180  
sin  sin  
Z1   25 
 
 d  127 mm
and
The pitch diameter of wheel sprocket, D
p 15.875
D 
 180   180  
sin  sin  
Z2   72 
 
 D  364 mm
Specifications
Type of chain  10 A  2 DR 50 Rolon chain
Centre distanc e  505 mm
number of teeth of sprocket pinion  25
number of teeth of sprocket wheel  72

Length of chain  1810 mm
Pitch diameter of pinion sprocket  127 mm
Pitch diameter of wheel sprocket  364 mm
Problem 1.33: Design a chain drive to actuate a compressor

from a 10 kW electric motor at 960 rpm. The Compressor speed
is to be 350 rpm. Minimum center distance should be 0.5 m.
Compressor is to work for 8 hours/day.
Given data
Power of motor N  10 kW
Speed of the compressor N 2  350 rpm
Minimum centre distance a  500 mm
Solution
Step 1: Calculation of transmission ratio
From PSG Data book, Pg.No: 7.74
Z2 N1
Transmission ratio i  
Z1 N2
N1 960
 i    2.74
N2 350
Step 2: Number of Teeth

For i  2 to 3; Z 1  25 to 27
i  3 to 4; Z 1  23 to 25
Take Z 1  25 to 27 (select any odd number of teeth)

Select Z 1  27 teeth (number of teeth on sprocket

pinion)
Z 2  i Z 1  2.74  27
 Z 2  73.98 ~
 74
 Z 2  74 teeth
Step 3: Selection of pitch

From PSG Design data book, Pg.No: 7.74
Optimum centre distance a  (30 to 50) p
500
Pitchmax   16.66
30
500
Pitchmin   10
50
Select standard pitch from PSG Data book

Pg.No. 7.74
Take any standard pitch between 10 mm and

16.66 mm
 select pitch p  15.875 mm
Step 4: Selection of chain number

from PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.72
The available chain number are 10 A and 10 B
Select 10 A  2 Duplex chain
corresponding to 10 A  2 and Pitch = 15.875 mm

W  Weight per m etre length  1.78 kgf
Step 5: Selection of Breaking load

Power transmitted on the basis of breaking load
Q.v
N
102n K s
Z1 p N1 27  15.875  960
We know that v  
60  1000 60  1000
v  6.858 m/s
Since specific conditions are not given in the problem,

assume K1  K2  K3  K4  K5  K6  1
 Ks  1
from PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.77, corresponding to

ks  1, Z 1  15 to 30, pitch p  15.875 ,
N 1  960 rpm  1000 rpm
 n  11 allowable factor of sa fety
102n k s N 102  11  1  10
Q 
u 6.858
 Q  1636.04 kg f  selected chain Breaking load

4440 kg f
Step 6
(a) calculation of length of chain
(b) final centre distance
(a) Calculation of length of chain

Length of continuous chain in multiples of pitches

lp
2
 Z2  Z1 
Z1  Z2  2

 2ap   
2 ap
ao
where ap 
p
500
 ap 
15.875
 ap  31.49
2
 74  27 

 27  74   2 
 lp  2  31.49    
 2  31.49
 62.98  50.5  1.776  115.25  116 approximated to 116 
 from PSG Data book,
Length of chain l  lp  p
 116  15.875  1841.5 mm
Take l  1840 mm

Final centre distance corrected to even number of

pitches ‘a’
e e2  8 m

a p
4
 z1  z2   27  74 
where e  lp     116   
 2   2 
e  65.5 mm
2 2
 z2  z1   74  27 
and m  
 2   2 
m  55.95
 Final centre distance ‘a’
65.5  
65.52  8  55.95
  15.875  505.97
4
 a~
 506 mm
Step 7
Check the actual factor of safety
Q
Actual factor of safety [n] 
P
where Q  breaking load of ch ain  4440 kg
and  P  Pt  P s  P c
where Pt  tangential force due to power

transmission
102 N
Pt 
v
102  10
 Pt 
6.858
 148.73 kg f
and P c  centrifugal tension
from PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.78,

2
W v2 1.78  6.858 
Pc    8.533 kgf
g 9.81
and P s  tension due to sagging of chain

Ps  k W a
where k  coefficient of sag

from PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.78, corresponding to
position of chain drive as horizontal
k6
506
 P c  6  1.78   5.404 kgf
1000
  P  148.73  8.533  5.404  162.66 kg f
Q 4440
 [n]    27.29  11
 P 162.66
which is greater than allowable factor of safety
Step 8
Checking of Allowable bearing stress
pitch = 15.875 mm, speed less than 1000 rpm
[]  2.24 kgf/mm 2

stress
 Av
N
102 k s
102N k s 102  10  1
 
AV 1.4  6.858
 106.236 kgf/cm 2  1.062 kg f/mm 2  2.24 kgf/mm2
  []
 The design is safe
Step 9
Pitch diameter of small sprocket d
p 15.875
d 
180  180 
sin sin
Z1 27
d  136.74 mm
Pitch diameter of large sprocket D
p 15.875
D 
180  180
sin sin
Z2 74
D  374 mm
Chapter 2
SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL

AXIS HELICAL GEARS
Speed ratios and number of teeth-Force analysis -Tooth

stresses - Dynamic effects – Fatigue strength - Factor of safety -
Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical gears
based on strength and wear considerations – Pressure angle in
the normal and transverse plane- Equivalent number of
teeth-forces for helical gears.
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Gears are defined as toothed wheels, that transmit
power and motion from one shaft to another due to the
successive engagement of teeth.
2.1.1 Advantages of Gear drives
1. It is a positive drive and the velocity ratio

remains constant.
2. The drive is compact, since the centre distance
between the shafts is relatively small.
3. It can transmit more power.
4. The efficiency of gear drive is very high (99% in
case of spur gears)
5. In the gear box, shifting of gears is possible.
Hence, velocity ratio can be changed over a wide
range.
2.1.2 Disadvantages
1. Gear drives are costly.
2. Maintenance cost is high.
3. Manufacturing processes for gears are
complicated.
4. Gear drives require careful attention.
5. Accurate alignment of shafts is required.
2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF GEARS

Gears are broadly classified into four groups;
1. Spur gears
2. Helical gears
3. Bevel gears and
4. Worm & Worm wheel
1. Spur gears: The teeth are
cut parallel to the axis of the
shaft. Spur gears are used,
when the shafts are parallel.
2. Helical gears: The teeth
of these gears are cut at an
angle  with the axis of the
shaft. Helical gears impose
radial and thrust loads on the Fig:2 .1 S pur G ea r
shafts. To eliminate the end

thrust load, double helical gears are used. These gears are
called as Herringbone gears. The construction results in
equal and opposite thrust reactions, balancing each other
and there is no thrust load on the shaft.
Spur Gears & Parallel Axis Helical Gears 2.3
Fig 2.2 (a) Helical

Fig 2.2 (b) D ouble Helical gear
Helical and Herringbone gears are used, when the

shafts are parallel.
3. Bevel gear: Bevel gears are used for shafts whose axes
intersect each other. The angle can be 90, less than 90
or more than 90. The tooth of the bevel gears can be cut
straight or spiral.
Fig. 2.3 Bevel gear

4. Worm and Worm wheel:

Worm and Worm wheel are
used for shafts, whose axes do
not intersect and are
perpendicular to each other.
Worm gears are mainly used
for high speed reduction ratio.
The worm is in the form of a
Fig 2.4 W orm and Wo rm wheel
threaded screw, which meshes
with a wheel.
2.3 TERMINOLOGY OF SPUR GEAR

1. Pitch Circle: It is an imaginary circle which allows
pure rolling action without slip.
2. Pitch Circle diameter (PCD): (d) It is the diameter

of the pitch circle. The size of the gear is usually specified
by pitch circle diameter (d).
3. Pitch point: It is a common point of contact between

two pitch circles.
4. Base circle: It is an imaginary circle from which the

involute curve of the tooth profile is generated.
5. Pressure angle or angle of obliquity: : It is the

angle between the common normal to two gear teeth at the
point of contact and the common tangent at the pitch point.
The standard pressure angles are 14 12  and 20.
6. Circular Pitch: Pc It is the distance measured along

the pitch circle between two similar points on adjacent
teeth.
D ede nd um A dde ndu m circle

ce Top la nd
F a th
A dde ndu m w id P itch su rfa ce
ce
Tota l de pth Fa P itch circle
k
W orking F la n
D epth
Too th spa ce
C ircu lar p itch

Too th th ickne ss
R oot
C lea ran ce or
D ede nd um circle
C lea ran ce or
w orking d epth circle
Fig: 2.5.Term s used in gears
d
Pc  
Z
7. Diametral pitch: P d It is the ratio of the number of

teeth to the pitch circle diameter.
Z
Pd 
d
Pc  Pd  
8. Module: m: It is defined as the reciprocal of diametral

pitch. (or) It is the ratio between pitch diameter and the
number of teeth.
1 1 d 
m  
P d Z  Z 
d
Module is represented in millimeter.
9. Gear ratio i: It is the ratio of number of teeth on

the gear to the number of teeth on pinion.
 Z 1  No . of teeth o n pinio n

Z 2 N1  Z 2  No. of teeth on gear
i 
Z 1 N2 
 N 1  Speed o f pinion
 N  Speed of gear
 2
10. Transmission ratio: It is the ratio of the angular
speed of the first driving gear to the angular speed of the
last driven gear in a gear train.
2.4 GEAR TOOTH FAILURES

There are two basic modes of gear tooth failure
1. Breakage of the tooth due to the static and

dynamic loads
2. Surface distruction or tooth wear.
The breakage of the tooth can be avoided by adjusting
the parameters in the gear design, such as module and face
width.
The various types of gear tooth wear are as follows:
1. Abrasive wear: The dust particles in the lubricant,

dirt, rust, metallic debris can scratch the tooth surface.
It can be prevented by providing oil filters, increasing

surface hardness and use of high viscosity oil.
2. Corrosive wear: The corrosion of the tooth surface is

caused by extreme pressure of additives present in the
lubricating oil and due to external contamination.
It can be prevented by providing complete enclosure

of gears from external contamination.
3. Initial pitting: It is caused due to errors in the tooth

profile, surface irregularities and misalignment. It can be
prevented by precision machining of gears, adjusting the
correct alignment of gears and reducing the dynamic loads.
4. Destructive pitting: It is a surface fatigue failure
which occurs when the load on gear tooth exceeds the
surface endurance strength of material.
It can be prevented by designing the gears so that

the wear strength of the gear tooth is more than the sum
of static and dynamic loads.
5. Scoring: This is due to excessive surface pressure,

high surface speed and inadequate supply of lubricant. Due
to the break down of the oil film, excessive frictional heat
leads to overheating of the meshing teeth. Scoring can be
avoided by selecting the parameters, such as surface speed,
surface pressure and the flow of lubricant in such a way
that the resulting temperature at the contacting surfaces
is within permissible limits.
2.5 LAW OF GEARING

For a constant velocity ratio, the profile of the teeth
must be such that the common normal to the profiles at
any point of contact always intersects the line of centres
at the same point, which is called the pitch point, which
is the tangency of their pitch circles.
Forms of Teeth
1. Involute teeth
2. Cycloidal teeth.
 An Involute of a circle is a plane curve generated
by a point on a tangent, which rolls on the circle
V c1 on
o m m al
C rm
No
O1 1 V c2
M
2
O2
Fig: 2.7 Law o f gearing
without slipping.
(Normal at any point of an involute is a tangent
to the circle).
 A cycloid is the curve traced by a point on the
circumference of a circle which rolls without
slipping on a fixed straight line.
2.5.1 Advantages of Involute gears

1. The centre distance for a pair of involute gears
can be varied within limits without changing the
velocity ratio.
But incase of cycloidal gears, the exact centre
distance should be maintained.
2. In involute gears, the pressure angle, from the
start of the engagement of teeth to the end of the
engagement remains constant. Due to this
condition, the drive is smooth and also the wear
of gears is less.
In cycloidal gears, the pressure angle is maximum
at the beginning of the engagement, reduces to

zero at pitch point, starts increasing and again
becomes maximum at the end of the engagement.
This results in less smooth running of gears.
3. The face and flank of involute teeth are generated
by a single curve. Therefore, the manufacturing
of involute teeth are easy.
In case of cycloidal teeth, double curves (Epi -
cycloid for face and Hypo-cycloid for flank) are
required. Therefore, the manufacturing of
cycloidal teeth are difficult.
2.5.2 Disadvantages of Involute Teeth
 The main disadvantage of the involute teeth is
that the interference occurs with pinions having
smaller number of teeth.
This may be avoided by altering the heights of
addendum and dedendum of the mating teeth.
(Interference: When the tip of the tooth of
pinion undercuts the root on its mating gear, it
is known as Interference)
 Interference may be prevented, if the addendum
circles of the two mating gears cut the common
tangent to the base circles between the points of
tangency. (OR) The point of contact between the
two teeth is always on the involute profiles of both
the teeth.
2.5.3 Advantages of Cycloidal Gears
1. The cycloidal teeth have wider flanks, therefore
for the same pitch, cycloidal gears are stronger.
2. Cycloidal gears have less wear, because the

contact takes place between a convex flank and
concave surface.
3. In cycloidal gears, the interference does not occur
at all.
2.5.4 Disadvantages
 Manufacturing of cycloidal gear is difficult.
 Therefore, due to simplicity during manufacturing

and flexibility, the involute gears are generally
used.
2.6 SPEED RATIO AND NUMBER OF TEETH
Speed ratio is defined as the ratio of the speed of the

faster gear (smaller size gear) to the slower gear (larger
size gear).
It is also called as the gear ratio (i), which is the

ratio of number of teeth of large gear to smaller gear.
It should be always greater than unity (1)

Z 2 =6 0 To oth G ea r d2
d1
Z 1 =3 6 To oth G ea r
1 (Pinion )
d
Fig 2.8 2 (ge ar)

N1 Z2 d2
i  
N2 Z1 d1
where Z 1  number. of teeth on smaller pinion
Z 2  number. of teeth on larger gear
N 1  speed of small pinion gear in rpm.
N 2  speed of large gear in rpm.
2.7 MINIMUM NUMBER OF TEETH

The minimum number of teeth on pinion to avoid
interference is given by
2
Z min 
sin 2 
  20 [full depth involute system]
Assume number of teeth as 18 to 20 for safe design.
2.8 FORCE ANALYSIS [SPUR GEAR]

The power is transmitted by means of a force exerted
by the tooth of the driving gear on the engage (meshing)
tooth of the driven gear.
According to the law of gearing, this resultant force

F must always act on the pressure line.
The pressure line is the tangent line which is tangent

to the base circles of the gear and pinion.
Since the direction of resultant force F is inclined at

an angle  called as pressure angle, the resultant force
can be resolved at the pitch point into two components such
as.
1. Tangential component of force F t
2. Radial component of force F r
1. Tangential component of force Ft

F t is the useful force, because it is employed to
transmit power. The transmitted power and torque can be
calculated by using F t.
Mt 2 Mt
Tangential Force, Ft  
d/2 d
Radial Force F r  F t  tan 
Resultant Force F  

 F 2t  
F 2r
(Or)
Ft
F  
cos 
O1
p in ion
d river
Pre ssure
line F
Pitch po int

G ear
d riven
Fig 2.9 (a) O2

Power transmitted
P   F t  v Pinion
d river
v  pitch line velocity O1
 dN Ft Pitch
v ; p oin t
60 F 
Fr
2. Radial component of
Fr
force F r F
 Pitch
Radial component of Ft p oin t
force F r, is a separating
G ea r
force, since it is always d riven
directed towards the center
of gear, tries to separate the O2
gears. The F r does not do

any useful work. This force
F r produces bending
moment on the gear shaft,
Fig:2.9. (b)
so it is also called as
bending force.
where P  Power transmitted

M t  Torque transmitted
d  Pitch circle diameter of driving gear

N  Speed of driving gear in rpm
  Pressure angle
v  Linear velocity
60 P
Torque Transmitted M t 
2 N
[Note: The tangential force should be same for both

pinion and gear wheel]
The analysis of gear tooth is based on the following
assumptions
1. The effect of dynamic load is neglected.
2. Friction losses in the bearings and gears are
negligible.
3. The gears mesh at the pitch circles.
4. The shafts for pinion and gear are parallel.
2.9 TOOTH STRESSES (THE LEWIS BENDING

EQUATION)
Wilfred Lewis introduced
an equation for estimating the
b
bending stress in gear tooth. This
equation formulated in 1892 still Ft
............................ . .
remains the basis for most gear ..................................................................................
.... .............................................
t ..............................................
.. ................ . ...... ......
design today. In the Lewis ................... .................. ......
..... ....
analysis, the gear tooth is treated h
as a cantilever beam and the Fig. 2.10. G ear tooth as cantilever
tangential component F t causes

the bending moment about the base of the tooth.
The Lewis equation is based on the following
assumptions.
(i) The effect of radial component F r which induces
compressive stress is neglected.
(ii) It is assumed that the tangential component F t
is uniformly distributed all over the face width of
the gear (this is possible when the gears are rigid

and accurately machined).
(iii) The effect of stress concentration is neglected.
(iv) It is assumed that at any time, only one pair of
teeth is in contact and takes total load.
It is observed that the cross section of the tooth varies
from free end to fixed end. Therefore, a parabola is
constructed within the tooth profile and shown in Fig. 2.11
as dotted lines.
Gear tooth as parabolic beam
Fr
The advantage of parabolic out
O
line is that it is a beam of uniform Ft
strength, and the stress at any cross h

section is uniform. X X
We know
t
Bending Moment, M b  F t  h...(1) N
Se ctio n b
bt 3 t at XX
I and y 1  Fig:2.11 A
12 2
y1  maximum distance between center line and

the extreme fibre.
Mb y Mb Mb
 b   
I  I  Zm
y 
 1
bt 3
12 bt 2
Z m  Section modulus  
t 6
2
6F t  h
b  Permissible bending stress (N / mm2) 
bt 2
 bt 2  
b
 Ft   
 6h  ...(2)
Multiplying the numerator and denominator of the
right hand side by P c (circular pitch)
 t2 
F t  P c b b  
6hP c
 
The bracketed quantity depends on the form of the

tooth and is termed as Lewis factor or form stress
factor y.
t2
Let y
6hP c
Then the equation can be rewritten as F t  P c b b y
...(3)
Where, y is called as Lewis form factor
where
h  length of the tooth
b  maximum bending stress
I  moment of Inertia
b  face width
t  thickness of tooth
P c  circular pitch
y  Lewis form factor

When the stress reaches the permissible magnitude

of bending stresses, the corresponding force F t is called
the beam strength F s . .
 . P c    m
F s  [ b] P c by  [ b] by  m Lewis Equation
where, F s  beam strength of gear tooth (N) (or) kg f

[b]  Permissible bending stress N/mm2 (or)
Allowable static stress kg f / cm2
The above equation is known as LEWIS EQUATION
From PSG Data book Page: 8.50

0.684
y  0.124  for 14 12 full depth Involute
Z
0.912
 0.154  for 20  Involute
Z
0.95
 0.175  for 20  Involute subteeth
Z
In order to avoid the breakage of gear tooth due to

bending, the beam strength should be more than the
effective force between the meshing teeth.
In design of gears, it is required to decide the weaker

force between pinion and gear.
When the same material is used for pinion and gear,

the pinion is always weaker than the gear . .
 . Pc    m
 We know that F s  [b] b y P c
 It can be observed that ‘m’ and ‘b’ are same for

pinion as well as gear in a gear pair,
 When different materials are used, the product

 b  y decides the weaker one between the pinion
and gear
 The Lewis form factor y ia always less for pinion
compared to gear
 Therefore, when the same material is used for
pinion and gear, the pinion is always weaker than
the gear and hence design should be based on
pinion.
Effective load-Calculation
To determine the tangential component of the
resultant force between two meshing teeth,
This component can be calculated by using
P  60
(I) M t  , and
2 N 1
2M t
(II) F t 
d1
The value of the tangential component, depends upon

rated power and rated speed.
We know that,
[b] is permissible static bending stress which is

modified to C v b where, C v is the velocity factor considered
in fatigue loading.
This velocity factor C v developed by Carl. G. Barth,

can be expressed in terms of Pitch line velocity.
The values of velocity factor are as given below

3  vm
(i) C v  , For ordinary and commercially cut
3
gears (made with form cutters) and vm  10 m/sec
6  vm
(ii) C v  , For accurately hobbed and generated
6
gears, vm  5  20 m/sec.
5.5  vm1/2
(iii) C v  , For precision gears with
5.5
shaving grinding and lapping and vm  20 m/sec
1  vm
(iv) C v  , For non-metallic gears.
1  0.25 vm 
Where, vm  Pitch line velocity (m/sec)
 dN
 d in mm
60  10 3
(The velocity factor is an empirical relationship

developed by past experience).
2.10 DYNAMIC EFFECTS (DYNAMIC TOOTH LOAD)

When gears rotate at very low speed, the tangential
tooth load F t can be considered to be the actual force
present between two meshing teeth.
However, the most of the cases, the gears rotates at

appreciable speed and it becomes necessary to consider the
dynamic force resulting from impact between mating teeth.
The Dynamic force is induced due to the following

factors.
1. Inaccuracies of the tooth profile,
2. Errors in tooth spacings,
3. Misalignment between bearings,
4. Elasticity of parts, and
5. Inertia of rotating masses.
These are two methods to account for Dynamic load.

I. Approximate estimation by the velocity factor in
the preliminary stages of gear design
II. Precise estimation by Buckingham’s equation in

the final stages of gear design.
Note: Approximate estimation, using velocity factor C v

developed by C.G. Barth was discussed earlier.
In the final stages of gear design, when gear
dimensions are known, errors specified and quality of gears
determined, the Dynamic load is calculated by equation
derived by Buckingham.
Where, F d  Dyn amic load
 Ft  Fi
Where F t Tangential tooth load
F i  Increment load due to dynamic action
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 
cb  F t 
Where Vm  Pitch line Velocity (m/min)

c  Dynamic factor kg f/cm 2 depending upon

machining errors
e  measured error in action between gears in cm
b  face width of tooth (cm)
F t  tangential force due to rated torque kg f
The Dynamic factor c, depends upon modulus of

elasticity of materials for pinion and gear and the form
tooth or pressure angle and it is given by
e
c
 1 1 
K 
E1 E2 
 
Where, K  Constant depending upon the form of teeth.

E 1  Modulus of elasticity of pinion material
kgf/cm2
E2  Modulus of elasticity of gear material
kgf/cm2
The error, e in the dynamic load equation is

measuring error in action between gears in (cm)
This error depends upon the quality of gear and

manufacturing methods.
2.11 WEAR TOOTH LOAD (OR) FATIGUE

STRENGTH OF GEAR
WEAR
For gears, wear is defined as loss of material from
contacting surfaces of teeth.
It is further classified as
 Normal wear
 Moderate wear
 Destructive wear
 Abrasive wear
 Scratching wear, etc.
 Generally, normal wear (Polishing in) does not
constitute failure because it involves loss of metal
at a rate too slow to affect performance
 Moderate wear refers to loss of metal more rapid
than normal wear.
 This need not necessarily be destructive and may
develop on heavily loaded gear teeth.
 Destructive wear usually results from loading that
is excessive for the
lubricant
D riving
employed. to oth
P itch
 The effect of circle P itch
circle
destructive wear
on the tooth profile D rive n
of an involute gear to oth
Fig:2.12
is depicted in the
Figure 2.12.
PITTING
Pitting is the principal mode of failure of rolling
surfaces. The details of the process vary with the material
and operating conditions, but in all cases, it manifests itself
by the initiation and propagation of cracks in the near
surface layer until microscope pieces detach themselves to

form a pit or a spall.
In spur gears, surface pitting has long been
recognised as one of the failure modes. This is often
referred to as “Pitch line Pitting”
The main factors affecting pitting type of failure,
 Contact stress.
 Material pouring and hardness.
 Surface finish and lubrication
Contact stress was originally conceived By
“HERTZ” in 1896 whose name it is often referred to as
Hertz Contact Stress.
The failure of the gear tooth due to pitting occurs

when the contact stress between two meshing teeth exceeds
the surface endurance strength of the material.
In order to avoid this type of failure, the proportion

of the gear tooth and surface properties such as surface
hardness should be selected in such a way that the wear
strength of the gear tooth is more than the effective load
between the meshing teeth.
The Hertz stress is based on the assumptions of

electric and isometric material behaviours, load is
compressive and normal to the contacting surfaces which
are stationary and the size of contacting area whose
dimensions are relatively smaller compared with the
curvature radius of the contacting bodies
The Figure 2.13 illustrates the contact area and

corresponding stress distribution between two cylinders.
R2
p
pO
R1 r L
x
b
Y
Fig:2.13
Here the area of contact stress which is theoretically

rectangular with one dimension being the cylinder length
L . (i.e. corresponding to face width of the gear)
The distribution of pressure is represented by a semi

elliptical prism and the maximum contact pressure P 0
exists on the load axis.
The gear design practice is to estimate the contact
stress at the pitch point of the teeth by assuming line
contact between two cylinders whose radius of contact
depends on the gear geometry at the pitch point.
The analysis of wear strength was done by Earle
Buckingham and was accepted by AGMA (American Gear
Manufacturing Association) in 1926. This Buckingham
equation gives the wear strength of the gear tooth based
on Hertz theory of contact stress.
Hence, the maximum tooth load from wear
consideration as evaluated from Hertz contact stress
equation applied for pitch point contact is given by
F w  d 1 bQk
Where d1  Pitch circle diameter of pinion in (cm)
b  Face width of the pinion in (cm)
2i
Q  Ratio factor 
i1 [ for external
 for internal]
2Z 2

Z2  Z1
k Load stress factor also known as material

combination factor in kg f/cm2
This load stress factor depends upon the maximum

fatigue limit of compressive stress, the pressure angle, and
the modulus of elasticity of the materials of the gear.
According to Buckingham theory, this load stress

factor is given by
c2 sin   1 1 
k
1.4 E E 
 1 2 
Where,  c  Surface endurance limit of a gear pair in

kg f/cm2.
2.12 FACTOR OF SAFETY [F.O.S]

Factor of safety is defined as the ratio of the ultimate
stress to working stress
Ultimate stre ss
F.O.S 
Working stress
Material strength
F.O.S 
D esign Load
2.12.1 (i) Factor of safety for bending

Beam strength of gear tooth F s
F.O.Sb 
Dynamic load on gear tooth Fd
F.O.S for bending is in between 1.5 to 2.
2.12.2 (i) Factor of safety for pitting

Wear strength of gear tooth F w
F.O.Spitting 
Dynamic load on gear tooth F d
F.O.S for pitting is 2.
2.13 GEAR MATERIALS

The gears are manufactured from both metallic and
non-metallic materials. Some of the materials are given
here.
2.13.1 Metallic materials

1. Cast Iron
2. Steel
3. Bronze, etc.
2.13.2 Non-metallic materials

1. Wood
2. Rawhide
3. Compressed paper
4. Synthetic resins like nylon etc.

2.13.3 Selection of gear materials

The gear materials should have following properties.
1. High tensile strength to prevent failure against

static loads.
2. High endulance strength to withstand Dynamic
loads.
3. Low co-efficient of friction.
4. Good manufacturability.
PSG Design Data book Page no. 1.40
MATERIALS FOR GEARS
Tensile Brinell
IS
Material strength Hardness
Specification
N/mm 2 number
Grey Cast Iron Grade 25 250 197
Phosphor Sand Cast 160 60
Bronze Chill cast 240 70
Centrifugally 270 90
cast
Cast Steel Grade 1 550 145
Constructional St 58 580-680 160-190
steel
Plain Carbon C 60 600-700 180-200
Steel
Carbon steel C 45 700 145 Core
for C 55 720 460 Case
surface 200 Core
hardening 520 Case
Carbon steel C 14 500-750 650 Case
for case
hardening
Tensile Brinell
IS
Material strength Hardness
Specification
N/mm 2 number
Direct 40 Ni 2 Cr 1 1500 44
hardening Mo 28 1000-1150 400-500
Alloy steels 30 Ni 4 Cr 1 1150 400-500
35 Ni 1 Cr 60 750-1050 400-500
40 Ni 3
Alloy Stells 17 Mn 1 Cr 95 800-1100 650 Case
for case 15 i2 Cr 1 Mo 1040 630 Case
hardening 15 900-1200 600-620 Case
13 13 Ni 3 Cr 1200-1500 600-650 Case
80 600-850 650 Case
15 Ni 4 Cr 1
15 Cr 65
Nitriding 40 Cr 2 A1 1 >660 750 - 800 Case
Alloy Steel Mo 18
2.14 DESIGN OF STRAIGHT TOOTH SPUR GEAR

BASED ON STRENGTH AND WEAR CONSIDERATION
[LEWIS AND BUCKINGHAM EQUATION METHOD]
Lewis equation is used to find beam strength of gear,

whereas the Buckingham equation is used to determine the
maximum dynamic load and wear strength of the gears.
Step 1: For a given problem, note down the given

parameters like power, speed, gear ratio, etc.
Step 2: Selection of material
If material is not given, select a suitable material for

pinion and gear wheel based on - gear ratio (i)
[From PSG data book pg no: 8.4]

Choose both pinion and gear as same material. (If

material is not given).
Pinion is the weekest materials. So design the pinion

gear alone, because Lewis equation is applicable for weaker
one of the two gears.
If both pinion and gear are made up of different

materials, determine the gear and pinion strength,
separately.
Strength of gear  b2  y2
Strength of pinion  b1  y1
where y1 and y2 are the Lewis form factor of pinion and

gear respectively
b1 and b2 are the bending stress of pinion and
gear respectively.
[Based on the weaker material, Design the gear drive]

[From PSG Data book Pg: 8.5 table: 7]
Step 3: Calculation of Tangential load F t

75
F t  HP  kgf
vm
HP – Horse power
vm  mean velocity in m/s
 d1 N 1
vm  m/s
60  1000
d1  mm ; N 1  rpm
[Note: 1 HP ~
 750 Watts ; 1 kg f ~
 10 N (Newton)]
Step 4: Calculation of Dynamic load F d
F d  F t  Cv in kg f
Already we have calculated the value of the F t and

vm
C v  velocity Factor (Refer PSG Data book Pg.No.8.51)
 3  vm  vm  10 m/s wheels for commercially cut

Cv   ;
 3  wheels
 6  vm 
Cv   ; vm  5  20 m/s for carefully cut wheels
 6 
1
5.5   vm  2 v  20 m/s for precision wheels
  m
Cv 
5.5
1  vm
Cv  For non-metallic gears.
1  0.25 vm
Step 5: Calculation of strength of gear tooth (or) beam

strength F s
F s  [ b] by P c . .
[ . P c    m]
 [ b ]  b  y    m
m  module ; b  face width

y  Lewis form factor based on P c
 d1
P c  circular pitch  (cm)
Z
If b is not given, then
. .
assume b  3 to 4 times of P c [ . b  3P c o r b  4P c]
where,
[ b] is the design bending stress in kg f/cm2
but P c   m ;
b~
 3 m to 4  m
d 
where, m  module   
Z
d1  Diameter of pinion (weaker gear)
Z  no: of teeth on pinion. [If Z is not given, then assume

Z  17 to 25 teeth]
If [ b] is not given, choose the approximate value from

the PSG data book based on the material. [Table: 7, pg:
8.5]
Step 6: Calculation of module: m
For safe Design; F s  F d
By Equating this two equations, determine the value

of module.
[Choose the standard module value from PSG Data

book: Table 1, pg no: 8.2]
Step 7: Calculate the value of face width b
b  3 Pc
3m
b~
 10 m
where, m  module
Substitute the value of m, which is calculated from

previous step 6.
Step 8: Calculate pitch circle diameter d 1
d1  Z1 m
Step 9: Calculate pitch line velocity in m/min
 d1 N1
V m/min
m  1000 [V m in m/min and
vm in m/s]
where, N 1  speed of pinion in rpm

d1  pitch circle dia. of pinion in mm
Step 10: Recalculate the beam strength Fs (or) strength

of gear tooth
F s  [b] by P c
 [ b ]  b  y    m
Substitute the newly calculated m value
Step 11: Calculate by Buckingham’s Dynamic load F d
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.51

 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 Vm  1.485 
cb  F t 
where, b  face width in cm
c  Deformation factor
F t  Tangential load (or) transmitted load in kg f
V m in m/min
[Choose the “c” value from PSG Data book page no:
8.53 from table 41 and 42. According to quality and module,
select e - expected error in tooth profiles - mm from Table
42 and then table 41].
Step 12: Check for Beam Strength
For safe, F s  Fd
Compare the both values
If F s  F d, the design is not satisfactory, then the
values of “m ” and “b” should be increased to increase the
strength of gear tooth.
Step 13: Calculation of wear load Fw
F w  d1 b Qk
Q is Ratio factor
2i
Q for external gear
i1
2i
Q for internal gear
i1
 1 1 
[2c ] sin   
E1 E2 
k  
1.4
k – Load stress factor kgf/cm2

[c]  Design contact stress in kg f/cm 2
E1 – Young’s modulus of pinion (kgf/cm2)
E2 – Young’s modulus of gear (kgf/cm2)
[Choose E 1 and E 2 from the PSG Data book pg: 8.14

from the table: 9 based on the material]
  Pressure angle.
If  is not given; take   15  to 20 
To Calculate [c]
Select material and heat treatment process (surface
hardness) Refer PSG Data book P.No.8.16 assume HRC
value, take C R - value,
[c]  CR  HRC  k cl
To find kcl assume life of drive 10,000 hrs to 20,000 hrs.
Life   _____  hrs  rpm  60  _____ cycles
Represent life  N  _____  10 7 cycles
From P.No.8.17, according to material, and life in No.

of cycles (consider surface hardness) take kcl value.
Find [c] in kgf  cm2
Step 14: Check for wear strength

For safe Design, F w  F d
If F w  F d; Design is not safe.
Step 15: Calculate the Basic Dimensions of spur gear

Dimensions of Externally Meshing Gears:

Suffix 1 for Pinion and 2 for Wheel
Nomenclature Notation Units Spur Gears
Module m mm 2a
m
Z1  Z2
Normal module mn mm
Transverse module mt mm
Centre distance a mm Z1  Z2
am
2
Height factor f0 – f0  1 (in special

f0  0.8, stub teeth)
Bottom clearance c mm c  0.25m

(For stub teeth,
h  0.3m)
Tooth depth h mm h  2.25 m (For stub

teeth
Pitch diameter or d mm d1  mZ1 ; d1  mZ2

Reference diameter
Tip diameter dc mm da1  Z1  2f0 m

da2  Z2  2f0 m
Root diameter df mm df1  Z1  2f0 m  2c

df2  Z2  2f0 m  2c
Helix angle  deg
Number of teeth Z – 2a
Z1  Z  iZ1
m i  1 2
Virtual number of Zv
teeth
Step 16: Draw the neat sketch of spur gear
p itch circle
L in e o f a ction
Too th profile
O utside (involute)
D ia
Pre ssure
Ba se circle
a ng le
Pitch circle
W h ole depth C e nte r
d istan ce
W orking Ad de nd um
C le aran ce
d ep th
D e de nd um R o ot (to oth )
fille t
R o ot
C ircu lar too th D ia
thickness
C ircu lar
p itch
Fig: 2.14
Note: The Above Design procedure is same for Helical

gears, Worm and worm wheels and Bevel gears with slight
modifications.
Problem 2.1: Design and draw a straight spur gear drive to
transmit 35 kW. The pinion speed is 720 rpm and the speed
ratio is 2. Both the Gears are made up of the same surface
Hardened Carbon steel with 55 RC and core hardness less than
350 BHN. Ultimate strength is 720 N/mm2 and yield strength
is 360 N/mm2. [A.U. May/June: 2007; Dec 2010]
Step 1:
Given: Power P  35 kW  35  10 3 W

Speed ratio i  2
Gear material: Pinion and Gear are same material

(carbon steel) with 55 RC and core Hardness < 350 BHN.
Ultimate (stress) strength  u  720 N/mm2
Yield strength (stress)  y  360 N/mm 2
Pinion speed N 1  720 rpm
Step 2: Selection of Material
Pinion – Carbon steel surface hardened with 55 RC

with core
Gear – Carbon steel Hardness less than 350 BHN
Both the gears are made up of same material, so

pinion is the weaker one. Design the pinion wheel.
Step 3: Calculation of tangential load F t
75
F t  HP 
vm
N1 Z2 d2
i  
N2 Z1 d1
Assume Z 1  20
d1  Z1 m
Z2
2 . . d1
20 . m
Z1
Z 2  40
d1  mZ1
 d1 N 1 . .
vm   . d1  20  m
60  1000
3.14  20  m  720

60  1000
vm  0.7539  m m/s
vm ~
 0.7  m m /s}
35  10 3
P ower  HP [ 1 H.P ~
 750 watts]
750
 46.666 ~
 46.7
46.7  75
 Ft 
0.7m
5003.57
Ft  kg f
m
F d  F t  C v kg f
Assume vm  12 m/s for determining the velocity

factor C v
6  vm
Cv  [vm  5  120 m/s, for carefully cut
6
wheels, Refer PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.51]
6  12
Cv 
6
Cv  3 ;
5003.57  3
Fd 
m
15070.71
Fd 
m
Step 5: Calculation of strength of gear tooth

F s  [b]  b  y  P c . .
 . P c   m
b  3 P c or
 [b]  b  y    m b  10  m
[For carbon steel [b]  3200 kg f/cm 2 from PSG Data

book Pg: 8.5 table: 7]
2
Z1 
sin 2  . .
 . Z 1  20 
2
sin 2  
20
1
sin 2  
10
 


1  1 
  sin
 10 
  18.43 ~
 20 
then Lewis factor
0.912
y  0.154  For 20 involute
Z1
(from PSG Data book pg: 8.50)
0.912
 0.154   0.1084
20
y  0.1084 and [ b]  3200 kg f/cm 2
F s  3200  10  m  0.1084    m
F s  10892.0320  m 2 kgf
Step 6: Calculation of module m 
For safe Design F s  F d
15070.71
10892.0320  m  m 
m
m 3  1.378
m  1.112 cm
m  11.12 mm (1 cm  10 mm)
(Choose module with nearest standard value from
Table 1 P.S.G Data book pg no: 8.2]
m~
 12 mm
m  12 mm
Step 7: Calculate the value of face width b
b  10  m
 10  12
b  120 mm
Step 8: Calculate the Diameter d 1
d1  Z1 m
 20  12
 240 mm
Step 9: Calculate pitch line velocity
 d1 N 1
vm  v1 
60  1000
3.14  240  720


60  1000
v1  9.0432 m/s
Step 10: Recalculate the beam strength Fs
F s  [ b]  b  y  P c
 12   12 
 3200  10  
10   0.1084     10 
   
 15692.4815 kg f . . 12
[ . Pc    m   
10
y  0.1084 ; b  10  m in cm ]
Step 11: Calculate the Buckingham’s Dynamic load Fd
 0.164 Vm cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
v  9.0432 m/s
V m  9.0432  60 m/min
 542.592 m/min
b  120 mm
 12 c m
5003.57
Ft  kg f
m
5003.57
 kg f
12
 416.96 kgf
Ft ~
 417 kg f
Choose the “c” value from PSG Data book pg no: 8.53
table: 41 and 42.
Both pinion and gear are carbon steel   20
For 20  full depth; steel and steel, c  11860 e.
e  0.064
(m  12 and vm  9.0432 , in which vm is less than 10

m/s. For commercially cut wheels) [From table: 42; Data
book pg: 8.53]
c  11860  e
 11860  0.064
 759.04
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
 0.164  542.592 759.04  12  417 

F d  417   
 0.164  542.592  1.485 

759.04  12  417 
 8476 
 417     3623.5 kg f
 233.92 
 F d  3623.5 kg f
Step 12: Checking For Beam Strength
F d  3623.5 kg f
F s  15692.481 kg f
By comparing F d and F s, F s  F d, so Design is safe.

Step 13: Calculation of wear load Fw
F w  d 1 Qkb
2i
d 1  240 mm  24 c m ; Q  (For external gear)
i1
22
Q  1.333
21
b  120 mm  12 cm ;
 1 1 
[2c ] sin   
E1 E2 
k  
1.4
  20 (Assume)
Take E 1 and E 2 from PSG Data book pg: 8.14
Table: 9 For steel both pinion and gear wheel.
E 1  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm 2 (pinion)
E 2  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm 2 (gear wheel)
[c]  9500 kg f/cm 2 is taken from the PSG Data book

pg: 8.4 table 7 gear material (for steel).
 1 1 
9500 2  sin 20   6
 6 
 2.15  10 2.15  10 
k
1.4
k  20.509 ~
 21
F w  d1 Q kb
F w  24  1.333  21  12
 8061.98 kg f
Step 14: Checking for wear strength
F w  8061.98 kgf
F d  3623.5 kg f
By comparing F w and F d ; F w  F d, the Design is

satisfactory.
Step 15: Calculate the Basic Dimensions of spur gear.
From the PSG Data book pg: 8.22 table: 26
1. Module m   12 mm
 Z1  Z2  Z2
2. Center Distance a  m   i
2 Z1
 
 20  40  Z 2  2  20
 12  
 2 
 40
 360 mm
3. Height factor f0  1
4. Bottom clearance c  0.25  m

 0.25  12  3 mm
5. Tooth Depth h  2.25  m

 2.25  12  27 mm
6. Pitch Diameters d d 1  Z 1 m  20  12
 240 mm
d2  Z2 m
 40  12
 480 mm
7. Tip Diameter dc : d c1  Z 1  2f0
 20  2  1  12
 264 mm
d c2  Z 2  2f0 m
 40  2  1 12
 504 mm
8. Root Diameter df : df 1  Z 1  2f0 m  2c
 20  2 12  2  2
 212 mm
df 2  Z 2  2f0 m  2c
 40  2 12  2  2
 452 mm
9. No: of Teeth: Z 1  20 ; Z 2  40
Step 16: Draw the neat sketch of spur gear.
[Refer the spur gear Fig 2.14 - Pg 2.36 Design
procedure step 16:]
Problem 2.2: Design a spur gear drive to transmit 22 kW at
1000 rpm ; Speed reduction is 2.5. The centre distance between
the gear shafts is approximately 350 mm. The materials used
are: pinion – C45, gear wheel – CI Grade 30. Design the Drive
[use Lewis and Buckingham equations].
Step 1
Given data
Power P   22 kW  22  10 3 W
Speed ratio (i)  2.5
Center distance (a)  350 mm
Pinion material  C45 steel
Gear wheel material  C.I Grade 30
Step 2: Selection of materials
Pinion – C45 steel
Gear wheel – C.I Grade 30
75 . . 7
F t  HP  kgf . 1 watt  H.P
vm 750
22  10 3
 Power  H.P
750
Power  29.333 H.P
 d1 N 1
vm  m/s
60  1000
d1  d2
Centre Distance a 
2
350  2  d 1  d2
d 1  d 2  700 mm  d2  700  d1
d2
Speed ratio (i)   2.5
d1
700  d1
  2.5
d1
700  d 1  2.5 d1
700  3.5 d 1
Pitch circle dia. of pinion  d 1  200 mm d 2  2.5  200
d 2  500 mm
  200  1000
vm   10.466 m/s
60  1000
75
F t  HP 
vm
75
F t  29.333 
10.466
F t  210.18 kg f . .
[ . 1 kgf ~
 10 N]
F t  2101.8 N
6  vm
Cv 
6 For vm  5  20 m/s
Here vm  10.466 m/s
6  10.466
Cv 
6
C v  2.744
F d  210.18  2.744
F d  576.733 kg f
Step 5: Calculation of strength of gear tooth Fs
The strength of gear tooth is calculated for weaker

gears.
Here, the pinion and gear wheel are made up of

different materials, so calculate for weaker one.
Strength of gear wheel  b2  y2
From PSG Data book pg no: 8.5 table: 7
For Cast Iron Grade 30; In the PSG Data book;
C.I Grade 35 is available so take that value
 b2  800 kg f/cm 2
For pinion: C45

 b1  1400 kg f/cm 2
Lewis form factor

From the PSG Data book pg: 8.50
0.912
y  0.154  For 20 involute (Assume)
Z
0.912
For y1  0.154  [Assume Z 1  20 teeth]
Z1
0.912
 0.154  Z2
20  i
Z1
 0.1084 pinion
0.912 Z 2  2.5  20
For y2  0.154 
Z2
Z 2  50
0.912
 0.154 
50
 0.1357 gear
Strength of gear wheel   b2  y2

 800  0.1357
 108.608 kg f/c m2
Strength of pinion  b1  y1

 1400  0.1084
 151.76 kg f/c m2
By comparing gear and pinion; gear is the weaker

material. So we have to design for the gear.
F s gear  [ b2] b  y2  Pc
 800  3    m   0.1357    m
. .
 3214.33 m  m  . b  3Pc
Step 6: Calculation of module m 3m
For safe Design F s  F d ;  3 m
3214.33  m  m  576.733 Pc    m
576.733
m2  m  module
3214.33
m

0.179425
m  0.4235 cm
m  4.2 mm
The obtained module is 4.2 mm.

Choose the standard value of module from the PSG
data book pg: 8.2 table: 1
m  5 mm (standard value)
Step 7: Recalculate the face width (b)

b  3P c
3m
35
 47.12 ~
 50 mm
Step 8: Recalculate Diameter d2 (gear)

. .
. Z2  50
d2  Z2  m
d 2  50  5
d 2  250 mm
Step 9: Recalculate the pitch line velocity (gear)
 d2 N 2
v2  . . N1
. i
60  1000 N2
  250  400 1000  i  N 2


60  1000
1000
 N2
 5.233 m/s 2.5
N 2  400 rpm
Step 10: Recalculate the strength of gear tooth
F s  [ b2] b  y2  P c Substitute P c and m in cm.
 50   5 
 800     0.1257     
 10   10 
F s  852.196 kgf
Step 11: Calculate the Buckingham’s Dynamic load F d
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  Ft 
b  5 cm ; F t  210.18 kg f
Choose c value from PSG Data book table 41 and 42

pg no: 8.53
Pinion and gear material   20 (Assume)
Steel and Cast Iron c  8150 e
e  0.025 (for carefully cut gear) in module “5”.
c  8150 e
 8150  0.025
 203.75
vm  10.466 m/s
Substitute V m in m/min. b in cm; F t in kg f
V m  10.466  60 m/min
 627.96 m/min
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
F d  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
 0.164  627.96 203.75  5  210.18  

Fd  210.18   
 0.164  627.96  1.485 

205.75  5  
210.18  
126561.8968
 210.18 
155.043
 210.18  816.29
F d  1026.47 kgf
Step 12: Check for Beam Strength

For safe Design F s  F d
F s  852.196 kg f ; Fd  1026.47 kg f
F s  F d ; so the Design is not satisfactory.
For safe Design, increase the value of m and b.

m  6 mm
b  10  m
b  60 mm
RecalculateF s and F d using module (m  6 mm)

substitute m and b in cm in equation.
F s  [ b2]  b  y  P c
 6 
 800  6  0.1357     
 10 
F s  1227.162 kg f (1)
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
 0.164  627.96 203.75  6  210.18  

 210.18   
 0.164  627.96  1.485 
  
203.75  6  210.18
147545.1802
 210.18 
159.19
F d  1137.02 kg f (2)
By comparing F s and F d,
Fs  Fd
So, the Design is safe.

Step 13: Calculation of wear load F w 
F w  d1 Qkb
b  6 cm
d1  200 mm  20 cm
2i
Q
i1
(For external gear) Mostly all the sums are external

gears only.
2  2.5
Q
2.5  1
 1.4285
 1 1 
[2c ] sin   
E 1 E2 
k  
1.4
From the PSG Data book pg no: 8.14, Table: 9
E 1 for C45 steel  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm2
E 2 C.I Grade 30  1.46  10 6 kg f/cm 2
  20 Assum e
c  5000 kgf/c m2
[From PSG Data Book pg: 8.5 table:7; for C45 steel]
 1 1 
5000 2  sin 20   6
 6 
k  2.15  10 1.46  10 
1.4
5000 2  sin 20  1.15  10  6 9.8334

   7.023 kgf/cm2
1.4 1.4
F w  d 1 Qkb
F w  20  1.4285  7.023  6
 1205.304 kg f
Step 14: Checking for wear strength
For satisfactory Design F w  F d
F w  1205.304  1137.02 F d
So the Design is safe.
Step 15: Calculate the Basic dimensions of spur gear.
From the PSG Data book pg no: 8.22. Table: 26
1. Module  6 mm
Z1  Z2
2. Centre Distance (a)  m
2 Z 1  20
 20  50  Z 2  50
 6
 2 
 210 mm
where suffix 1 refers to pinion and suffix 2 refers to gear

wheel.
4. Bottom clearance (c)  0.25  m  0.25  6  1.5 mm

5. Pitch or Reference d Diameter  d 1  m  Z 1
d1  6  20
d1  120 mm
d2  m  Z 2  6  50
d2  300 mm
6. Root Diameter df  df1  Z 1  2f0 m  2c
d f1  20  2  1 6  2  1.5
 105 mm
d f2  Z 2  2f0 m  2c
 50  2 6  2  1.5
 285 mm
7. Tip Diameter dc  d c1  Z 1  2f0 m
 20  2  1 6  132 mm
d c2  Z 2  2f0 m
 50  2 6  312 mm
Problem 2.3: A Reciprocating compressor is to be connected

to an Electric motor with the help of spur gears. The distance
between the shafts is to be 500 mm. The speed of the electric
motor is 900 rpm and the speed of the compressor shaft is
desired to be 200 rpm. The torque to be transmitted is 500
N-m. Taking starting Torque as 25% more than the Normal
torque, Determine.
(a) Module and face width of the gears using 20 degree 
stub teeth.
(b) Number of teeth and pitch circle diameter of each gear.
Assume suitable values of velocity factor and Lewis factor.
Step 1
Given data: Distance between the shafts (Centre
Distance) a  500 mm
N 1 (pinion)  900 rpm (always pinion has maximum

rpm when compared to gear wheel)
N 2 gear  200 rpm
TorqueNormal  500 N  m
So, starting Torque as 25% more than the normal

torque.
T max  1.25  T mean or normal
T max  1.25  500
 625 Nm
 625  10 3 N  mm
[For this type of problems, it is not needed to design

a spur gear, Just find what is asked in Question]
Material is not given in the problem. So, choose the

material from the PSG Data book pg: 8.4 Table: 5 based
on gear ratio (i)
N2 900
i   4.5
N1 200
From the table: 5

i  4 ; pinion (material)  C 45
gear wheel (material)  cast steel
To calculate module value, we have to find the F s and

F d. F s will be calculated by using Lewis equation. [Lewis
equation is applicable for weaker gear]. So, we have to
determine, which is weaker one.
Pinion strength   b  y1
1
From PSG Data book pg: 8.5 table: 7;
 b  1400 kg f/cm 2 [for C 45 material], b  3200 kg f/cm 2 [for

1 2
steel]
0.912 (For 20 involute)

y 1  0.154 
Z1 . .
( .   20 given)
2
Z min or Z 1 
sin2 
2
 2
 17.09 ~
 18
sin 20
y 1  0.1033
Pinion strength  1400  0.1033
 144.66 kg f/cm 2
Gear strength   b  y2
2
0.192
y2  0.154 
Z2
(for 20 involute)
Z2
i
Z1
Z 2  4.5  18
Z 2  81
0.192
y 2  0.154 
81
y 2  0.1516
Gear strength  3200  0.1516
 485.12 kg f/cm 2
By comparing pinion and gear strength, pinion is the

weaker material. So design for pinion.
Step 3: Calculate tangential load F t
75
F t  HP  kg f
vm
 d1 N1 2  N1 T max
vm  P
60  1000 60
d1  d2 2    900  625
a 
2 60
d1  d2 P  58875 Watts
500 
2
d1  d2  1000 58875
P H.P
750
d2  1000  d 1  78.5 H.P
d2 1000  d1
 i  4.5   4.5
d1 d1
1000  d1  4.5 d1
1000  4.5 d1  d1
5.5d1  1000
d1  181.818 mm
d2  1000  d 1
 1000  181.818
d2  818.1818 mm
 d 1 N1
vm 
60
  181.818  900
vm 
60  1000
vm  8.5636 m/s
75
F t  78.5 
8.5636
F t  687.7 kg f
Step 4: Calculation of Dynamic load Fd
3  vm
Cv 
3 [vm  8.5636 ]
C v  3.8545
[vm  10 m/s; commercially cut wheel from Data book

pg: 8.51]
F d  687.5  3.845
 2643.44 kg f

F s  [ b ] b  y  P c
b  1400 kg f/cm 2 [From PSG Data

1
b  3 to 4P c
book pg: 8.4 Table: 7]
b  3Pc
F s  1400  10  m  0.1033    m
b3m
 4541.068 m  m
b  9.39 m
Step 6: Calculation of module m
For safe Design, F s  F d b~

 10 m
4541.068 m  m  2643.44 m  module
m 2  0.5821 Pc    m
m  0.7629 cm y1  lewis form
m  7.629 mm factor for pinion
y1  0.1033
m~
 8 mm (Standard module from Data book pg: 8.2;
table: 1).
We can also calculate module using the formula
2a 2  500
m   10.1010 (for standard value)
Z1  Z2 18  81
Take the “m” value largest of two values

m  10 mm
Step 7: Calculate face width (b)
b  10  m
 10  10
b  100 mm
Step 8: Calculate Diameter of gear and pinion:
d1  Z1  m
 18  10
d1  180 mm
d2  Z2  m
 81  10
d2 810 mm
Answer
(a) Module m   10 mm
Face width b  100 mm
(b) No. of Teeth on pinion Z 1  18
No. of teeth on gear Z 2  81
Pitch circle Diameter of pinion d 1  180 mm
Pitch circle Diameter of gear d 2  810 mm

Problem 2.4: The following particulars of a single reduction

spur gear are given. Gear ratio 10:1, Distance between the
centres 660 mm approximately. Pinion transmits 50 kW at
1800 rpm. Involute teeth of standard proportions: Addendum
 1 module with pressure angle of 22.5; Permissible normal
pressure between teeth  175 N per mm of width. Find
1. Standard module if no interference is to occur
2. No. of teeth on each wheel
3. The necessary width of the pinion
4. The load on the bearing of the wheels due to power
transmitted.
In this type of problem, it is not needed to design a

gear drive, Just find the values asked.
Given
10
Gear ratio (or) speed ratio (i)   10
1
Distance between the centres a  660 mm
Power P  50 kW  50  10 3 W
Speed of pinion N 1  1800 rpm
Pressure angle   22.5
Permissible normal pressure between teeth  175

N/mm of width.
1. Find the module (m)

d1
m
Z1
Z 1  minimum no: of teeth on pinion. Calculate the

minimum no: of teeth on pinion to avoid interference.
2
Z1 
sin 2    22.5
2
 2
sin 22.5 
 13.6 ~
 14
Z 1  14 teeth
d1  d2
a
2
d1  d2
660 
2
2  660  d1  d2
d1  1320  d 2
d2
i
d1
d2
10 
1320  d 2
13200  10d2  d2
13200  11d2
d2  1200 mm
d1  1320  1200
d1  120 mm
120
m  8.57 ~
 8
14
m  8 mm (Standard module from Data book pg: 8.2
Table: 1]
2. No: of teeth on each wheel: Z 1 and Z 2.

Corrected no: of teeth on pinion.
d1 120
Z1  
m 8
Z 1  15
Z2
 i ; Z 2  10  15
Z1
Z 2  150
3. The necessary width of the pinion

If permissible normal pressure between teeth  175
N/mm (unit load) of width is given, then to calculate face
width, use the following formula only.
Total Normal load

b F n
unit load
Ft
Fn 
cos  F t  tangential load
To find Ft
75
F t  HP 
vm
 d1 N 1   120  1800
vm  
60  1000 60  1000
vm  11.3040 m/s
Power  50 kW
50000
  H.P
750
Power  66.666 H.P
66.666  75
Ft 
11.3040
F t  442.32130 kg f
F t  4423.2130 N (Substitute F t in Newton)
Ft
Fn 
cos 
4423.2130

cos 22.5 
Fn  4787.6512 N
Fn
b
un it load
4787.6512

175
b  27.358 mm
4. The load on the bearings where power is

transmitted.
The radial component of the normal load acting on
the tooth is the load on the bearings of the wheels.
So, Radial Road F r  F n sin 
 4787.6512  sin 22.5
 1832.154 N
 1.832 kN
Fr  1.832 kN
Problem 2.5: A motor shaft rotating at 1500 rpm has to

transmit 20 HP to a low speed shaft with a speed reduction
of 3. The teeth are 14 12 involute with 25 teeth on the pinion.
Both the pinion and gear are made of steel with a maximum
safe stress of 2000 kgf  cm2. A safe stress of 400 kgf  cm2 may
be taken for the shaft on which the gear is mounted and for
the key. Design a spur gear drive to suit the above conditions.
Assume starting torque to be 25% higher than the running
torque. [AU Nov/Dec 2007, Apr/May 2009]
Given Data:
Speed of the pinion N 1  1500 rpm
Power P  20 HP
Speed reduction i  3
Pressure angle   14 12 invo lute
No . o f teeth on pinion Z1  25 teeth
Pinion and gear are made of same material

Therefore, the design is based on pinion.
Safe static stress  [ b]  2000 kgf  cm 2
[Note: The remaining data is used for designing the shaft]
Step 1: Find module m
Beam strength  F S  [b] b  y P c
. .
Assume, b  Face width  3P c  3m ; [ . P c   m]
where m  module in cm.
 Beam strength  F S  [b] y 3 m   m
 [b]  3  2  m 2 y
0.684 0.684
y  Lewis form factor  0.124   0.124 
Z1 25
1
[ 14 involute]
2
y  0.09664
 Beam strength  F S  2000  3 2 m 2  0.09664
FS  5722.79 m2 kg f ... (1)

* Dynamic Load  F d  F t  C v
75 vm  mean velo c ity

F t  Transmitted load  HP 
vm  d1 N 1 mZ 1 N 1
75  
 20  60  100 60  100
19.634 m
  m  25  1500
 76.398  
  kg f 60  100
 m  vm  19.634 m m  sec
 d1  z1 m
6  vm
Cv   when vm  20 m  sec (carefully cut gears)
6
 6  19.634 m  
 
 6 
76.398  6  19.634 m  
 Dynamic Load  Fd  F t  C v   
m  6 
12.733 6  19.634 m
Fd 
m ... (2)
To find module, equate the above equations (1) and (2)
F s  F d o r F s  Fd
12.733 6  19.634 m
5722.79 m 2 
m
449.44 m3  6  19.634 m
Calculate m  module in cm, by trial and error

method
Trial 1: m  0.5 cm
LHS  56.18 RHS  15.817

LHS  RHS  Satisfactory but too big m
Trial (2): m  0.4 c m
LHS  28.764 RHS = 13.8536

LHS  RHS:  Satisfactory but too big m
Trail (3): m  0.3 c m
LHS  12.134 RHS  11.69

LHS  RHS  Satisfactory
Trial (4): m  0.29 c m
LHS  10.96 RHS  11.69

LHS  RHS  Not Satisfactory
Therefore, the value of module (m) is in between 0.29
and 0.3. Standard module 3 mm. (P.No. 8.2 table 2)
Take m  0.3cm  3 mm
module m  3 mm
Face width b  3 m  3    3
b  28.274 mm
CHECK FOR BEAM STRENGTH AND

WEAR STRENGTH
Step 2: Checking for Beam strength

Buckingham’s dynamic Load
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
 Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
76.398 76.398
Ft    254.66 kg f
m 0.3
V m  19.634  0.3   60  353.412 m  min
b  face width  2.8274 cm
carefully c ut gears e  0.025 mm
c  11440  e  11440  0.025 [Ref PSG Data book
 286 kg f  cm Pg.No 8.53 Table 4.2]
0.164  353.412 286  2.8274  254.66 
F d  254.66 
0.164  353.412  1.485 
 286  2.8274  254.66
61628.2
 254.66   254.66  579.31
106.382
Fd  833.97 kg f
F s  5722.79 m 2
 5722.79  0.3 2  515.05

Fs 515.05 kg f
Fs  Fd,
Here F s is not greater than F d.
Therefore, the design is not satisfactory based on

beam strength. So m can be increased to 0.4 cm and found
not satisfied and increase to 0.5 and now satisfied
76.398 76.398
Ft    152.796 kgf
m 0.5
V m  19.634  0.5 60  589.02 m /m in
b  3 m  3  0.5  4.712
0.164  589.02 286  4.712  152.796 
Fd  152.796 
0.164  589.05  1.485 
 
286  4.712  152.796
144940
 190.995   1131.43 kg f
154.12
F s  5222.79  0.5 2  1430.69 kg f
Here F s  F d satisfied.
Step 3 Check for wear strength

Wear Load  FW  d1 Q  k  b
d1  m Z 1  0.5  25 [ c]  C R HRC K Cl
 12.5 mm  1.25 c m
2i 23 6 Assume alloy steel, case
Q    1.25
i1 31 4 hardened
b  4.712 c m C R  280; HRC  55 to 63
sin   1 1  take HRC  60
k  [c]2 
1.4  E 1 E 2  assume life  10,000 hrs.
 
Life N  10,000  60  1500
 90  10 7 cycles
Pressure angle   14.5  K Cl  0.585
Pinion and wheel are made of [c]  280  60  0.585
same material
 9828 kgf  cm2
E 1  E 2  2.15  10 6 kg f  cm 2
[From PSG Data book Pg. 8.14, Table 9]
sin 14.5   1 1 
k  9828 2  6
 6 
1.4 2.15  10 
 2.15  10
 16.069 kgf  cm 2
Wear load F W  d 1 Qkb
Wear load  F W  12.5  1.5  16.069  4.712
F W  1419.69 kgf
Since, F W 1419.69   Fd (1131.43)
Therefore, the design is satisfactory based on wear

strength
 Final values: m  module  5 mm  0.5 c m

b  Face width  4.712 c m
Problem 2.6: Design a spur gear drive, from consideration of

dynamic load and wear, to transmit 120 HP at 600 rpm to
shaft running at 150 rpm. Assume 10 mm module and 20
full depth involute system. The pinion is to have 20 teeth and
is made of heat treated steel having value of E as
6 2 2
2  10 kgf/cm and safe static stress of 2000 kg/c m . Assume
suitable material for gear.
Given Data:
Power  P  120 HP
Pinion speed  N 1  600 rpm
Gear speed (Shaft speed)  N 2  150 rpm

Module  m  10 mm  1 cm
Pressure angle    20
No. of teeth on pinion  Z 1  20 teeth
E  2  10 6 kgf/cm 2
Safe static stress  [  b ]  2000 kg f /cm 2
From PSG Databook, (Page No. 8.50 and 8.51)

Beam strength  FS  [ b ]  b  y  Pc Assume
 [ b ]  b  y  m b  Face width
 FS  2000  9.424  0.1084    1  3 to 4 Pc and
Pc  m
2 b  3Pc  3m
FS  6418.66 kgf/cm
 3    1  9.424 c m
b  9.424 cm
0.912
y  0.154 
Z1
0.912
 0.154 
20
y  0.1084
Step 2
75
Transmitted load  F t  HP 
vm
75
 120 
6.283
 1432.43 kg f
F t  1432.43 kgf
vm  me an velocity in m/sec
d 1N 1 Z 1mN 1
 
60  100 60  100
  20  1  600
But d1  mZ 1 
60  100
vm  6.283 m/sec or
V m  371.99 m/min
b  9.424 cm
V m  6.288  60  371.99 m/min
Step 3 : Check for beam strength

Buckingham’s dynamic load
 0.164 V mcb  F t 
 Fd  Ft   
 0.164 Vm  1.485 

cb  Ft 
c  11860 e ; e  0.09
 c  11860  0.09  1067.4 kg/cm
Refer PSG Data book Pg No. 8.53 table 41

 0.164  371.99 1067.4  9.424  1432.43  
F d  1432.43   
 0.164  371.99  1.485 

1067.4  9.424  1432.43 
701061.15
 1432.43 
220.196
 1432.43  3183.80 
F d 4616.235 kg f
But F S  6418.66 kg f
 FS 6418.66   Fd 4616.235 
Therefore, the design based on beam strength is

satisfactory.
Step 4 Check for Wear load. d1  mZ 1  10  20
Wear load F w  d1Q  k  b  200 mm  20 cm
sin   1 1 
k  [  c ]2 
1.4  E 1 E 2 
 
Assume both pinion and gear are made of

same material.
E 1  E 2  2  10 6 kg f/cm 2
To calculate [ c ]
Select material, heat treatment process (Refer PSG

Data book page 8.16)
Assume alloy steel, case hardened
HRC  55 to 63 C R  280
Take HRC  60 Assume life  10,000 hrs
[ c ]  C RHRC  Kcl N  10,000  600  60
 280  60  0.585  36  10 7 cycle
 9828 kg f/cm 2 From PSG Data book table
(17) P.No. 8.17
K cl  0.585
  pressure angle  20
sin   1 1 
 k  [  c ]2 
1.4  E E2 
 1 
sin 20  1 1 
 9828 2  
1.4  2  10 6 2  106 
 
k  23.59 kg /cm2
Wear load  F w  d 1  Q  k  b
 20  1.6  23.59  9.424  7113.989 kgf
But F d  4616.235 kg f
FW 113.9   Fd 4616.235 

strength.
Since F S  F d and F W  F d,
Therefore, the design is satisfactory based on beam

strength and also based on Wear strength.
Problem 2.7: An electric motor is to be connected to a

reciprocating pump through a gear pair. The gears are
overhanging in their shafts. Motor speed  1440 rpm. Speed
reduction ratio  5. Motor Power  36.8 kW. The gears are to
have 20 pressure angle. Design a spur gear drive.
[April/May: 2010] (Nov-Dec-2009)
[Similar to problem 2-1]

Problem 2.8: Design and draw spur gear drive transmitting

30 kW at 400 r.p.m. to another shaft running approximately
at 1000 r.p.m. The load is steady and continuous. The material
for the pinion is cast steel and for gear is cast iron. Take
module as 10 mm. Also check the design for dynamic load and
wear. [May/June: 2014]
[Similar to problem 2-1]
transmit 15 kW power to a low speed shaft rotating at 500
rpm. A 20 pressure angle involute tooth gear – pinion is used.
The pinion has 25 teeth. Both gear and pinion are made of
cast iron having allowable strength of 55 N/mm2. Design a
suitable gear drive. [Nov-Dec: 2007]
[Similar to problem 2.1]
transmit 15 kW to a low speed shaft rotating at 500 rpm. The
teeth are 20 involute with 25 teeth on the pinion. Both the
pinion and gear are made of cast iron with a maximum safe
stress of 56 MPa. A safe stress of 35 MPa may be taken for
the shaft on which the gear is mounted. Design and sketch the
spur gear drive to suit the above conditions. The starting torque
may be assumed as 1.25 times the running torque.
[Nov-Dec: 2009]
[Similar to problem 2.5]
2.15 DESIGN OF SPUR GEAR [HERTZ METHOD]

[Note: Always solve the problem by using Lewis and
Buckinghams equation method. If the life of gears is given
in the problem (or) Design the gear drive based on contact
stresses, then use this Hertz method.
Design Procedure
Step 1: Selection of material (Refer PSG Data book Page
No 8.4)
Note (a): If the material for both pinion and wheel are
same, then design for pinion alone. (because the pinion is
weaker than Gear).
Note (b): If the material for pinion and wheel are

different, pinion is to be designed first and then, Check the
design stresses for both pinion and wheel.
From PSG Data book Page No 8.4: Selection of

material based on gear ratio (i)
From PSG Data book Page No 8.16: Selection of

material based on Heat treatment process.
If case hardness or surface hardness  350 BHN
then its core hardness  350 BHN
If surface hardness is greater than 350 BHN, then

represent in HRC.
Step 2: Calculate the Life in number of cycles; (N)
Note (a): If life required is not given in the problem,

assume N  10,000 hrs to 20,000 hrs.
Note (b): If the life required is given in hrs.

Life in cycles  life in hrs   60  rpm
 ...... cycles
and write in the form of
N  .....  10 7 cycles
Step 3: Calculation of Equivalent Young’s modulus.
From PSG Data book Page No. 8.14
 Always pinion is made of steel with

E  2.15  10 6 kg f/c m2
 Wheel is made of steel, CI, Bronze or Nylon.
Take the equivalent Young’s modulus  E eq in kgf /cm 2
Step 4: Calculation of Design bending stress [ b]
Assume rotation in one direction only.
1.4 kbl
[b]   1
n k
kbl  Life factor for bending - From PSG Data book

Page No. 8.20; Table: 22
Take the value of kbl, based on
1. Material
2. Surface hardness (always  350
3. Life in No. of cycles N 
n  factor of safety - From PSG Data book Page No.
8.19; Table: 20
Take the value of n, based on
1. Material
2. Mode of Manufacture
3. Heat treatment.
k  fillet stress concentration fa ctor -
From PSG Page No. 8.19 Table: 21
Take the value of k, based on
1. Material and heat treatment

2. Addendum Modification Coefficient, X (take
always 0  X  0.1 value)
 1  Endurance limit stress in bending for complete
reversal of stresses. kg f/cm 2
From PSG Data book Page No. 8.19; Table: 19
Take the equation based on material of mating gear
In the above equation take the values of
u  ultimate stress in kgf/cm 2 and
y  yield stress in kg f/cm 2
From PSG Data book Page No. 1.9 (for C15, C20, C15
Mn 35, C40, C45)
From PSG Data book Page No. 1.13 to 1.15 (for alloy
steels)
From PSG Data book Page No. 1.4 (for cast iron) (only
u value)
Substitute all the values and calculate the design

bending stress [ b] in kg f/cm 2
Step 5: Calculation of Design contact stress [c]
From PSG Data book Page No 8.16
[ c]  C B  HB  kcl  1 If hardness represented in BHN 

(or)
[ c]  C R  HRC  kcl  2 If hardness represented in HRC
The value of C R depends on
1. Wheel material
2. Heat treatment process
3. Surface hardness.
HB - Brinell hardness number
HRC - Rockwell ‘C’ hardness number
C B and C R - Coefficient depending on the surface

hardness.
kcl - Life factor - From PSG Data book Page No. 8.17
Table: 17


10 2
Take the value of kcl , based on Ka  ;
N
N -no. of cycles
1. Material
2. Surface hardness (consider surface hardness
generally  350 HB
3. Life in number of cycles N
Substitute all the values in the above equation and

calculate the design surface (contact compressive) stress
[c] in kg f/cm 2
Step 6: Calculation of design twisting moment [M t]
[M t]  Mt  k  kd
M t  Nominal twisting moment transmitted by

the pinion kgf  cm
kW hp
 97420  71620
n n
where kW or hp  given power
n  N 1  Speed of rotation of pinion, rpm.

Initially assume,
k  kd  1.3 (Since k and k d values are not known).
Step 7: Calculation of approximate centre distance a


2
3  0.74  E  [M t]
a  i  1  [ ] 
c  i

i  Gear ratio
E  Equivalent young’s modulus  kgf/cm 2
[M t]  Design twisting moment  kg fcm
[c]  Design surfac e contact compressive  stress  kg f/cm 2

  ratio between facew idth and centre distance
b

a
initially assume   0.3
Step 8: Calculation of Z 1 and Z 2
Z 1  no. of teeth on pinion
Z 2  no. of teeth on wheel
Assume Z 1  17 to 25 teeth (if Z 1 is not given in the

problem).
Z2
Since, i  ,
Z1
(From PSG Data Book Page No. 8.1) Calculate Z 1
Step 9: Calculation of module. (From PSG Data book Page

No. 8.22)
2a
m
Z1  Z2
After calculation, take the nearest standard module

from PSG databook, Page No. 8.2 (Take always nearest
higher value).
Represent module ‘m’ in ‘millimeter’.
Step 10: Recalculate ‘a’ centre distance
m Z 1  Z 2
a
2
Represent centre distance ‘a’ in R10 SERIES in m.m.

Step 11: Calculation of facewidth b

b
In Step 7,    0.3 assumed.
a
 Face width  b  a 0.3  in m.m
1 mo d ule m 


Represent 2 centre distance a  in millimeters

3 face width b 
Step 12: Calculation of pitch line velocity V in m/sec.
 d1 N 1
v in metres where
60
d1  pitch circle diam eter of pin io n in m eters m
N 1  speed of the pinion in rpm
d1
But m  module 
Z1
 Calculate d1 in mm and convert into m.
Select Quality of Gears - From PSG Data book Page

No. 8.3
Cylindrical
IS Quality depends on (1) type of gear Straight bevel
Spiral bevel
(2) Speed of gears in m/sec.
Select the IS Quality (Preferred Quality).
Step 13: To find the constants k and k d.
Load concentration factor k.

b
Page No. 8.15, Table: 13 k values depends on  P 
d1
Calculate  p and read the corresponding value of ‘k’
(assume bearings close to Gears and symmetrical)
Dynamic load factor kd – From PSG Data book Page

No. 8.16; Table: 15
kd value depends on
1. IS Quality
2. Pinion surface hardness
3. Pitch line velocity
4. Spur, helical, straight bevel and Spiral bevel
Read the value of k d.
Step 14: Recalculate the design twisting moment [M t]
[M t]  M t k  k d
The value of M t is similar to step (6).
Substitute the values of k and kd.
Calculate the design twisting moment [M t] in kg f -

cm.
Step 15: Checking of bending stress
i1
b  [M t]  [b] From PSG Data book
amby
Page No. 8.13
where i  gear ratio
a  centre distance in c m
m  module in cm
b  face width in cm
y  form factor  Re fer P SG Data book Page No. 8 .18
Value of y depends on
1. Z 1  no. of teeth on pinion

2. X  0 addendum modification coefficient.
Note
If  b  [b] then change the module, and recalculate

a, b and [M t]
Check again bending stress  b
Step 16: Checking of surface (contact compressive) stress

 c;
i1 i1
c  0.74
a 
 ib
E [M ]  [ ]
t c
If  b  [ b] and
c  [c] then the design is satisfactory.
Step 17: Draw the neat sketch of spur gear.
Refer Pg 2.36 Fig. 2.14
Problem 2.11: Design a spur gear to transmit 22.5 kW at

900 rpm; speed reduction is 2.5; Material for pinion and wheel
are C15 steel and castiron grade 30 respectively. Take pressure
angle of 20 and working life of the gears as 10,000 hrs.
Solution
Material Given: pinion  C15  Steel
Wheel - Cast iron grade 30
Speed reduction  i  2.5
Z2
i.e. Gear ratio  i   2.5
Z1
Power  P  22.5 kW
Pinion Speed  n  N 1  900 rpm;
Life  N  10,000 hrs
Step 1: Material properties

Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.16; Table 16
Pinion: C15 (Given)

Assume C15 - Case hardened
HRC  55 to 63, assume HRC  60
i.e. Surface hardness  350 BHN
 core hardness  350 BHN
Wheel: Cast Iron - GRADE 30
HB  200 to 260
Assume surface hardness HB  250 (Brinell hardness)
 Core hardness  350
Step 2: Life required  10,000 hrs
 10000  60  900 cycles
Life required  N  54  10 7 cycles .

Step 3: Calculation of Equivalent Young’s Modulus

Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.14; Table 9
Pinion material - Steel - E 1  2.15  10 6 kg f /cm 2
Gear (or) Wheel material - C.I. Grade 30 -
E 2  1.4  10 6 kg f /cm 2
Therefore, equivalent young’s modulus
 E  1.7  10 6 kg f /cm 2
Since u  28 kg f/mm 2
For CI Grade 30, the ultimate stress
2
kg f  cm 2 N
u  30 kg f /mm 
10 mm 2
(Convert into N/mm 2)
E  1.7  105 N /mm2
Step 4: Calculation of design bending stress [ b]
(Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.18)
1.4 kbl
Design bending stress [ b]   1
n k
(assume rotation in one direction)
kbl  Life factor for bending  1
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.20, Table 22
(Consider core hardness)

K bl  1 (for N  10 7 cycles and BHN  350 
n  Factor of safety
From PSG Data book Table (20) P.No. 8.19
n2 (for case hardend)
k  fillet stress concentration factor
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.19 Table (21)

 1.2

reversal of stresses
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.19; table 19
Assume C15 as forged steel, for forged steel,
 1  0.25 u  y  500
From PSG Data book P.No. 1.9 for C15 material.
u  37 to 49 kgf/mm 2
y  24 kg f/mm 2
select u  40 kg f/mm 2  40  100 kg f/cm 2
y  24  100 kgf/cm 2
   1  0.25 40  100  24  100  500
 2100 kg f /cm 2
 Design bending stress
1.4 kbl
 [b]  
n  k  1
1.4  1
  2100  1225 kg f/cm 2
2  1.2
(Convert into N/mm 2)
[b]  122.5 N/mm 2
Step 5: Calculation of Design surface Contact compressive

stress [ c]
Refer PSG Rate book P.No. 8.16
Design surface contact compressive stress
 [ c]  CR  HRC  kcl  kgf/c m2
C R  Coeff. depending on surface hardness
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.16 Table 16
C R  220 for C15, Case hardened 
HRC  60 assumed 
kcl  Life factor Consider surface hard ness
(Table 17: P.No. 8.17 of PSG Data book)
kcl  0.585 for N  10 7 c yc les and surface hardness

 350 BHN
[c]  220  60  0.585
[c]  7722 kgf/c m2 (Convert into N/mm 2

Design surface (Contact compressive) stress
 [c]  772.2 N/mm2
Step 6: Calculation of design torque [M t]
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.15
[M t]  Mt  kd  k
kW
M t  97420
n
97420  22.5

900
 2435.5 kg f  cm
Initially assume, for symmetry scheme
kd  k  1.3
[M t]  2435.5  1.3  3166.15 kg fcm (Convert into

N-mm)
[M t]  316615 Nmm
Step 7: Calculation of Approximate centre distance ‘a’.

From PSG Data book P.No.8.13


3 2
 0.74  E[M t]
Centre distance  a  i  1  [ ] 
c  i

i  2.5
[c]  772.2 N/mm2 from Step (5)
E  1.7  10 5 N/mm 2 from Step (3)

[M t]  316615 N mm from Step (6)
b

a
b
Assume    0.3 from P.No. 8.14 table (10);
a


3 2
 0.74  1.7  10 6  316615
a  2.5  1  
 772.2  2.5  0.3
a  142.74 mm;
Assume Z 1  No. of teeth on pinion  25 teeth .
Z2
Speed reduction i 
Z1
Z 2  No. of teeth on wheel  i  Z 1
 2.5  25
 62.5 teeth
Step 9: Calculation of module Refer PSG data book (P.No.

8.22)
2a
Take, Module  m 
Z1  Z2
2  142.74 285.48
   3.24 m m
25  63 88
Take Standard module, from PSG Data book P.No.

8.2 Table (1)
module  4 mm
Step 10: Recalculate centre distance ‘a’ and rounded to

R10 series.
m Z1  Z2 4 25  63

a 
2 2
Centre distance
 a  176 mm  Standard R10 series a  200 mm
Step 11: Calculation of face width b
b
 value already assumed as 0.3 but    0.3
a
face width  b  0.3  200  60 mm
Step 12: Calculation of PCD d1 and PCD d 2
PCD of pinion  PCD 1  d1  m  Z 1
 4  25  100 mm
PCD of wheel  PCD 2  d2  m  Z 2
 4  64  252 mm
Step 13: Calculate of pitch line velocity: v
 d1 N 1
v m/sec
60
900
   0.1   4.712 m/sec
60
Step 14: Selection of Quality of Gear.

From P.No. 8.3, table (2);
at v  upto 8 m/sec
Select the Quality of Gear - IS Quality 8
Step 15: Find load concentration factor k for IS Quality

8 Gear,
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.15; table (14)

b
k depends on  p  value
d1
60
  0.6
100
at  p  0.6; the value o f k  1.03
Step 16: Find Dynamic load factor k d
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.16; Table (15)

For pitch line velocity up to 8 m /sec , cylindrical gears,
surface hardness  350 BHN
kd  1.4
Step 17: Recalculate, [M t] design twisting moment,
[M t]  M t k d k
M t  2435.5 kg fc m
 2435.5  1.4  1.03 [Refer PSG Data book

Pg. 8.15, Table 13]
[M t]  3511.99 kg f cm
[M t]  351199 Nmm .
Step 18: Check  b induced bending stress
i1
b  [M t]  [ b]
amby
[M t]  351199 N mm
i  2.5
a  200 mm
m  4 mm
b  60 mm
y  form factor
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.18 table (18)
y value depends on X and Z value)
for Z 1  25; X  0 ;
y  0.4205
2.5  1
b  351199
200 X 4 60  0.4205
 60.89 N/mm 2  [b] 1225 N/mm 2
Step 19: Check  c induced surface (contact compressive)

stress
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.13, Table (8)


i1 i1
c  0.74 E [M ] t
ib a


2.5  1 2.5  1 5
 0.74  1.7  10  351199
200 2.5  60
 483.34 N /mm 2  [ c] 772.2 N/mm 2
 The design of pinion is satisfactory.
Step 20: Check the stresses in the wheel:
(a) Gear Material
Given - cast iron - Grade (30)
Since contact area is same,
c  c  483.34 N /mm 2 (Already calculated)

wheel pinion
Life of Wheel
N pinion 54  10 7
 N Wheel    21.6  10 7 cycles
2.5 2.5
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.16,
[c]  design surface contact compressive stress
 C B  HB  k cl
For CI - Grade (30) HB = 200 to 260 BHN take HB

= 260 BHN, C B  23 ;
HB  260
kcl  from PS G Data b ook P.No. 8.17, table (17)

 10 7

 10 7
6 6
   0.5992
N 21.6  10 7
[c]  23  260  0.5992  3583.216 kgf /cm 2
Convert into N/mm 2
 358.3216 N/mm 2
c 483.34   [ c] 358.3216 
The design of wheel is not satisfactory.

Therefore, change the material of wheel and
recalculate [c] and  c  [c]
Select another material,

From PSG Data book P.No. 8.16; Table 16
Select either C40 or C45 Steel; k cl  Surface > 350
hardness
Heat treatment - Surface  N  25  10 7
hardened.


Select C40 - Surface hardened 10 7

N
HRC  40 to 55
= 0.5992
Assume HRC  50 ; C R  230 ;
kcl  0.5992
Design surface [ c]  C R HRC kcl
Contact Compressive stress
[ c]  230  50  0.5992  6890.8 kg f /cm 2
[c]  689.08 N/mm 2

  c 483.34   [c] 689.08
Therefore the selection of material C40, Surface

hardened is satisfactory.
Checkup of b induced bending stress;
b y1  b y2
1 2
[b ]2 - design bending stress of wheel

2
1.4 k bl
  1
k  n
b  [b]2
2 wheel at Z  63 ; x  0 by interpolation.
Find [b]2
wheel 
Design bending stress

1.4 k bl
 [ b]wheel  1
k n
kbl  1 From PSG Data book P.No. 8.20 table (22)
 350 BHN core hardness; N  10 7
n  2.5 From PSG Data book P.No. 8.19 table (20)
k  1.5 From PSG Data book P.No. 8.19 table (21)
1.4  1
[b] wheel   2825
2.5  1.5
[b] wheel  105.46 N/mm 2

Pinion: Wheel
b  77.49 N/mm 2 b  Induced ben ding stres s
2
1
(to be calculated)
y1  0.4205 y2  0.4927
b y 1   b y 2
1 2
77.49  0.4205
b 
2 0.4927
 66.13 N/mm 2
b 66.13   [b]2 105.46 N/mm2

2
Gear design is satisfactory.
Problem 2.13: In a spur gear for a rock crusher, the gears

are made of case hardened steel. The pinion is transmitting
18 kW. at 1200 rpm, with a gear ratio of 3.5; The Gear is to
work 8 hrs/day for 3 years. Design the drive.
[May, June 2009],(Oct. ’96)
Given Data:
Power to be transmitted  18 kW
Speed  1200 rpm
Gear ratio  i  3.5
Life required  8 hr  day for 3 years
 8  365  3
 8760 hrs
Step 1
Selection of material
Assume pinion and wheel are made of same material.
 Design only pinion (Because pinion is weaker

than wheel)
From PSG Data book - P.No. 8.16, Table 16
Select Alloy Steel - Case Hardened
Surface hardness  55 to 63
HRC  55 to 63
Assume HRC  60
 i.e, case hardness  30 BHN

 There fore core hardness  350 BHN

Step 2
Required Life  8760 hrs given 
N  8760  60  rpm
 8760  60  1200  63.07  10 7 cycles
Step 3
Refer PSG Data book pg. 8.14 Table (9)
for steel (both pinion and gear)
E eq.  2.15  10 6 kg f  cm 2
Step 4
Calculation of Design bending stress [b]
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.18
Assume, rotation in one direction only.

1.4 kbl
[b]   1
n. k
kbl  Life factor for bending  Life in cycles


From PSG Data book   Hrs  60  rpm
P.No . 8.20 Table 22    8760  60  1200

(Always consider core hardness)  63.07  10 7 cycles
 350 BHN
for surface hardness 


 350 BHN 
7 
and life  10 cycles 
The value of kbl  1
n  factor of safety, from PSG Data book P.No. 8.19,

Table 20 (for steel and case hardened)
n2
k  Fillet stress concentration factor
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.19, table (21)
Consider always Addentum modification coefficient.
0    0.1
 for case hardened steel.
the value of k  1.2
 1  Endurance limit in bending kg f  cm 2

From PSG Data book P.No. 8.19, table 19 for alloy

steel,
 1  0.35 u  1200
where u  ultimate tensile stress kg f  cm 2
For u value, refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.5 table

No.7
u  155 kgf  mm 2
assume u  160 kg f  mm 2 convert into kgf  cm 2
 160  102 kgf  cm 2
 1  0.35  160  10 2  1200
 6800 kg f  cm 2
1.4 kbl 1.4  1

 [b]   1   6800
n  k 2  1.2
[b]  3966.66 kg f  cm 2
Step 5
Calculation of design contact compressive stress [ c]
P.No. 8.16
[c]  C R HRC  kcl
C r  coefficient depe nding on su rfa ce hardness
From PSG Data book P.No.8.16, table (16)

for alloy steel and case hardened
 280
HRC  60 assumed in the step 1
kcl  Life factor  steel
From PSG Data book P.No.8.17, table 17
N  63.07  10 7 cycles}
For su rface hardness  350 and N  25  10 7}
kcl  0.585
[ c]  D esign surface contact compressive stress
 C R  HRC . k cl
 280  60  0.585
[ c]  9828 kg f  cm2
Step 6
Calculation of Design torque (or) twisting moment)
Refer PSG Data book P.No.8.15
[M t]  Design twisting moment
 M t kd  k
Mt  nominal twisting moment transmitted by the

pinion - kg f  cm
kW
 97420
n
18
 97420   1461.3 kg f  cm
1200
Step 7
Calculation of Approximate centre distance (a)


2
3  0.74  E [M t]
a  i  1  [ ]  i  
 c 
i  35
[c]  9828 kg f  cm 2 (+) for external
E  2.15  10 6 kgf  cm 2  fo r Internal

[Mt]  1899.69 kg f  cm
  0.3, Assume PSG Data book table 10, P.No. 8.14


2
3  0.74  2.15  10 6  1899.69
a   9828 
  3.5  0.3
 12.61 cm  125 mm (From R10 series)
Step 8
Assume Z 1  20 teeth , a  125 mm
Z2
i
Z1
Z 2  20  3.5  70 teeth
Step 9
Calculation of module (Refer PSG Data book P.No.
8.22)
2a 2  125
Module  m    2.77 mm
Z 1  Z2 20  70
Take standard module, m  3 mm
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.2 table No. 1
Step 10: Recalculate ‘a’ centre distance
m Z 1  Z 2
a
2
3
 20  70  135 mm
2
Take R10 series,
Centre distance  a  135 mm
Step 11: Calculation of ‘b’ face width
Refer PSG Data book P.No.8.1,
b
  0.3
a  are given in Pg. 8.14, table 11
Face w idth  b  0.3  a
 0.3  135  40.5 mm
Step 12: Calculation of P.C.D. d1
PCD of pinion d1  mZ 1  3  20  60 mm
Step 13: Calculation of pitch line velocity

From PSG Data book P.No: 8.15
 d1 N1   60  1200
v   3.769 m/sec.
60  1000 60  1000
Step 14: Select preferred Quality
From PSG Data book Table 2: Page No. 8.3
Above 1 m/sec to 8 m/sec
Preferred Quality IS 8
From the table 2, based on peripheral speed (or) pitch

line velocity.
Step 15: Calculation of kd and k
b
Cal. of p 
d1
*In the previous step, kd and k values were assumed

as 1.3;
Now cal. kd and k value.
40.5
p   0.675  0.8
60
Step 16: Take the value of k. (Load concentration factor)
From PSG Data book P.No: 8.15 table 14
IS 8 Quality, at p  0.8
the value of k  1.06 (assume any one condition)
k  1.06
Step 17: Select kd: Dynamic Load factor
From PSG Data book Table 15; P.No: 8.16
for IS 8 Quality, Cylindrical gears,
Pinion surface hardness  350 ;
Pitch line velocity up to 8 m/sec
Dynamic load factor  k d  1.4
Step 18: Recalculate Design twisting moment [M t]
[M t]  M t  kd  k M t  1461.3 kgcm
 1461.3  1.4  1.06 k d  1.4

Refer PSG Data
book Pg 8.15, table 13
 2168.5692 kg fcm k  1.06
Step 19: Checking of bending stress
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.13 table 8

i1
b  [M t]  [ b]
amby
[M t]  2168.5692 kgfcm
i  3.5 ;
a  135 mm  13.5 cm
m  3 mm  0.3 c m
b  40.5 mm  4.05 cm
y  form factor - From PSG Data book P.No. 8.18
table (18)
addendum  modification coefficient x  0
for Z  20, and x  0
y  0.389
3.5  1
b  [2168.5692 ]
16  0.3  4.05  0.389
1088.8 kg f/cm 2  [ b] 3966.66 kg f/cm 2
 Design based on bending stress is satisfactory.
Problem 2.13: Desin a spur gear pair to transmit 1.5 kW at

1440 rpm from an electric motor to an air compressor running
at 720 rpm. Take the working life as 10,000 hrs. Material to
be used is cast iron grade 25 for both pinion and wheel.
[Nov/Dec: 2010]
[Similar to problem: 2.12]

Problem 2.14: Design a straight spur gear drive. Transmitted
power 8 kW. Pinion speed 764 rpm. Speed ratio is 2. The gears
are to be made of C45 steel. Life is to be 10,000 hours.
[May/June 2013]
Given Data
Power P  8 kW ; Pinion speed n  N 1  764 rpm;
Speed reduction i  2; N  10,000 hrs
Solution
Since the gears are of same material, design only
pinion
Step 1: Material properties

Since material of gears are C45 steel from PSG Data
book, Pg.No. 8.16, Table 16
For C45 steel, Assume surface hardened

HRC  40 to 55
Assume HRC  55 ; C R  230
Step 2
Life required  10,000 Hrs  10,000  60  764
Life required N  45.84  10 7 cycles
Step 3
Calculation of Equivalent Young’s Modulus
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.14, Table 9,
E  2.15  10 6 kg f/c m2  2.15  10 5 N/mm2
Step 4
Calculation of design bending stress [ b]
1.4 kbl
[ b]  1
n  k
[assume rotation is in one direction only]
where k bl  Life factor for bending
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.20, table 22
kbl  1
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.19, Table 21
k  stress concentration factor
Assume surface hardened steel, Addendum

modification cofficient ‘X’  0  X  0.1
 k   1.5

reversal of stresses
For forged steels
 1  0.25  u   y  500
corresponding to C45 steel
u  63 to 71 kg f/mm2  71 kgf/mm 2 assume
 71  100 kg f/cm 2  7100 kgf/cm 2
y  36 kgf/mm 2  36  100 kgf/cm 2  3600 kgf/cm 2
   1  0.25 7100  3600   500  3175 kg f/c m2

corresponding to steel, forged, surface hardened
n  2.5
 Design bending stress [b]
1.4  1
  3175 kg f/cm 2  1185.33 kgf/cm 2
2.5  1.5
[ b]  118.53 N /mm 2
Step 5
Calculation of Design surface (contact
compressive) stress [ c]

[c]  C R HRC k cl
corresponding to C45 steel, surface hardened
C R  230, HRC  55

corresponding to steel, surface hardness 7350
kcl  life factor  0.585
 [ c]  230  55  0.585  7400.25 kgf/cm 2
[ c]  740.02 N/mm 2
Step 6
Calculation of design torque [M t]
From PSG Data book, Pg.No: 8.15
[M t]  M t k d  k
kW 8
where M t  97420  97420   1020 kg f  cm
n 764
Initially assume k d  k  1.3
 [M t]  1020  1.3  1326 kg f  cm
[M t]  132600 Nmm
Step 7: Calculation of Aproximate centre distance

‘a’


2
3  0.74  E [M t]
a  i  1  [ ] 
c  i

b
Here  
a
Assume   0.3


2
3  0.74  2.15  10 6  1326
a  2  1  7400.2  
  2  0.3
a  10.865 cm  a  108 mm

Assume Z 1  number of teeth on pinion  25 teeth
Z2
Speed reduction i 
Z1
where Z 2  number of teeth on wheel
 i Z1  2  25  50 teeth
 Take Z 2  50 teeth
Step 9: Calculation of module

2a 2  108
Take module  m    2.88 mm
Z 1  Z 2 25  50
Take standard module m = 3 mm
Step 10: Recalculate centre distance ‘a’

m Z 1  Z 2 3 25  50
Since a    112.5 mm
2 2
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.20, rounding the

centre distance to R10 series
a  125 mm
Step 11: Calculation of face width b

Since  is assumed as 0.3,
b
but    0.3
a
 b  0.3  125  37.5 mm
Step 12: Calculation of PCD d 1 and PCD d 2

Pitch circle Diameter d 1  m  Z 1  3  25
 d 1  75 mm  0.075 m
Pitch circle diameter d 2  m  Z 2  3  50
 d 2  150 mm  0.150 m
Step 13: Calculation of pitch line velocity v 

Since
 d1 N 1   0.075  764
v   3 m /s
60 60
Step 14: Selection of Quality of gear

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.3, table 2,
corresponding to velocity upto 8 m/s
Select the quality of the gear,
IS quality 8
Step 15: Load concentration factor ‘k’

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.15, table 14
b
k depends upon  p  value
d1
37.5
 p   0.5
75
Corresponding to p  0.5
k  1.03
Step 16: Dynamic load factor “k d”

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.16, table 15, for pitch
line velocity upto 8 m/s, cylindrical gears, surface hardness
 350 BHN
kd  1.4
Step 17: Recalculate [M t] design twisting moment,

[M t]  Mt  kd  k  1020  1.03  1.4

 1470.84 kgf  cm  147084 Nmm
Step 18: Checking induced bending stress b

i1
b  [M t]  [ b]
amby
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.18, table 18, y

depends on X and Z value.
For Z 1, X  0
y  0.4205
21
 b   140784
125  3  37.5  0.4205
 71.42 N/mm 2  [b] 118.53 N/mm 2
Step 19: Check induced surface (contact compressive)

stress c

i1 i1
c  0.74
a


ib
 E  [M t]
21 21
 0.74 
125

 2  37.5

 2.15  10 5  140784
 617.97 N/mm 2  [c] 740.02 N/mm 2
The design is satisfactory.


transmit 15 kW to a low speed shaft with a speed reduction
of 3:1. Assume starting torque to be 25% higher than the
running torque. The teeth are 20 involute with 25 teeth on
pinion. Both the pinion and gear are made of C45 steel. Design
a spur gear to suit the above conditions and check for
compressive and bending stresses and plastic deformation also
sketch the spur gear drive. [Design based on contact stress].
[Apr/May 2008]
Solution
Given data
Speed of driver  N 1  1500 rpm
Po wer P  15 kW
Gear Ratio i  3
No of teeth on pinion Z1  25 teeth
Step 1
Selection of material (from P.S.G Data book Pg.No.
8.5)
C45, surface hardened to 55 RC

core hardness  350 BHN
u  720 N/mm2,  y  360 N/mm 2
[b]  1400 kg f/cm 2
 140 N/mm 2
[c]  5000 kgf/cm 2
 500 N/mm 2
Step 2
Calculation of design torque [M t]
[M t]  M t  kd  k  1.25
since starting torque is 25% higher than the running

torque
kW
But M t  97420
N1
15
 97420 
1500
 974.2 kg f cm
Initially assume, for symmetry scheme
kd  k  1.3
 [M t]  974.2  1.3  1.25
 1583.07 kgfcm
 [M t]  158307 Nmm
Step 3
Calculation of Approximate centre distance ‘a’ from
P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.13


2
3
 0.74  E [M t]
a  i  1  [ ] 
c  i


E  2.15  106 kgf / cm2
 2.15  10 5 N/mm 2
b
Assume    0.3 (from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No.
a
8.14)


2
3  0.74  2.15  10 6  15383.07
 a  3  1  
 500  3  0.3
a  17.436 cm
a  174.36 mm
Step 4
Calculation of Z 1 and Z 2
Z1  25 assume
since i3
Z2
speed reduction i 
Z1
 Z 2  No. of teeth on wheel  i  Z 1
 3  25
 75 teeth
Step 5
Calculation of module

2a
module  m 
Z1  Z2
2  174.36

25  75
 3.48 mm
Take standard module, from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No.

8.2
 Module m  4 mm
Step 6
Recalculate centre distance ‘a’ and rounded to R10
series
m Z 1  Z2
a
2
4 25  75

2
a  200 mm
Step 7
Calculation of face width b
 value already assumed as 0.3
b
but    0.3
a
 face width  b  0.3  200
 60 mm
Step 8
Calculation of PCD d 1 and PCD d2
PCD of pinion  PCD 1  d1  m  Z 1
 4  25
 100 mm
PCD of wheel  PCD2  d2  m  Z 2
 4  75
 300 mm
Step 9
Calculation of pitch line velocity v
d1 N 1
v m/s
60
  0.1  1500
  7.85 m/s
60
Step 10
Find load concentration factor k from P.S.G Data
book, Pg.No. 8.15
b
k depends on  p  value
d1
60
  0.6
100
at  P  0.6, the value of k  1.03
Step 11
Dynamic load factor kd

For pitch line velocity up to 8 m/s, cylindrical gears,
surface harndess  350 BHN
kd  1.4
Step 12
Recalculate, [M t], design hoisting moment
[M t]  M t  kd  k  1.25
 974.2  1.4  1.03  1.25
 1755.99 kg f cm
 M t  175599 Nmm
Step 13
Check b induced bending stress
i1
b  [Mt]  [ b]
amby
31
 [175599 ]
200  4  60  0.4205
 139.19 N /mm2  140 N/mm2 ~

 1400 kg f/cm 2
[y  Form factor from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.18
y depends upon X and Z value
 y  0.4205 ]
Step 14
Check c, induced surface stress
i1 i1
c  0.74
a 
 b
E [M ]  [ ]
t c
E  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm 2


4 4 6
 c 0.74   2.15  10  1755.99
200 3  60
 4286.82 kgf/cm 2  [ c] 5000 kgf  cm 2
 Design is safe
Step 15
Check for plastic Deformation:
M t - Rated Torque  1755.99 kg f  c m
 175.599 N  m
Starting Torque 25% higher than starting Torque

(125%)
125%
[M t]ma x   Mt
100
 1.25  175.599
 219.49875 N  m
 2194.9875 kg f  cm
Step 16
Check for Bending
[M t]max 2194.9875
 b max  b   1400 
Mt 1755.99
 1750 kgf  cm
(Or)
b max  1.25   b  1.25  1400  1750 kgf  cm

[b]max  0.8   y  0.8  3600  2880 kgf/cm 2
For safe Design, [b]max  b max
By comparing this two values, the Design is

satisfactory.
Step 17
Check for wear strength
c max   c  1.25  4286.82  1.25
 5358.525 kg f/c m2
[c]max  3.1  y  3600  3.1
 11160 kg f/c m2
[c]max  c
 The Design is safe.
Problem 2.16: Design a spur gear drive to transmit 10 kW

at 1440 rpm, speed reduction is 3. Take pressure angle as
20 and working life of the gears as 15,000 hrs. Assume the
materials for pinion and wheel as heat treated cast steel and
high grade cast iron respectively. [Nov; Dec: 2012]
[Similar to the problem: 2.12]
Problem 2.17: Design a spur drive to transmit 5 kW at 900

rpm of forged steel pinion 120 mm diameter to a cast steel
gear to run at 300 rpm. Take pressure angle of 20 and
working life of the gears as 10000 hrs. [May/June 2012]
[Similar to the problem 2.12]

2.16 HELICAL GEARS

For high pitch line velocities and heavy loads, helical
gears are used.
Two types of gearing are
(i) Single helical gears.

(ii) Double helical gears. (Herringbone gears)
When straight tooth spur gears begin to engage, the
contact theoretically extends across the entire tooth on a
line parallel to the axis of the gear. This sudden application
of load results in noisy operation and high impact stress.
In helical gearing, contact begins at one end of the
entering tooth and gradually extends along a diagonal line
across the tooth face as the gear rotates. The gradual
engagement of load application reduces the noise and the
dynamic load. Therefore, the operation is silent and hence
higher pitch line velocities can be employed.
(Generally pitch line velocities upto 20 to 35 m/sec)
Applications: Automobile Gears, turbines.
Herringbone Gears -
pitch line velocity upto 60
m/sec.
Since the teeth are
inclined to the axis of
rotation, helical gear is
subjected to an axial thrust.
To reduce axial thrust,
another helical gear of (b) D o ub le helica l
(a) Single he lical
opposite hand is to be g ea r g ea r
Fig: 2.15
provided. This arrangement is

called double helical Gear (or)
Herringbone gear.

PN
 mn Pc
cos  
m
mn
m Fig:2.16. Helical gear
cos (no menclature)
where   helix angle
(Real pitch) P  Circular pitch along the plane

perpendicular to the axis.
Pm
Normal pitch P n  Circular pitch along the plane

perpendicular to the teeth.
Pn   m n.
where   helix angle
 8  25 for helical gears
 25  40 for herringbone gears.
where m n  normal module in m.m.
2.17 BEAM STRENGTH OF HELICAL GEARS (LEWIS

EQUATION FOR HELICAL GEARS)
As discussed earlier in this chapter (spur gear), The
formative gear is an Imaginary spur gear in a plane
perpendicular to the tooth element. It is understood that
the beam strength of virtual (or) equivalent or formative
gear is nothing but the beam strength of Helical gears.

Therefore a modified lewis equation is used to determine
the beam strength of a helical gear.
F s  b [b] y Pc Pc    mn
where F s  Beam strength of Helical gear
m n  normal module
b  face width
P n  normal pitch
[b]  Permissible (or) Allowable static stress
y  Tooth form factor (or) lewis form factor.
0.684
y  0.124  for 14 12 full depth Involute
Zv
0.912
Zv
0.95
 0.175  for 20  Involute subteeth
Zv
Z v  virtual number of teeth.
The beam strength F s indicates the maximum value

of tangential force that the tooth can transmit without
bending failure.
2.18 DYNAMIC LOAD ON HELICAL GEAR TOOTH

(EFFECTIVE LOAD ON GEAR TOOTH)
As discussed in previous chapter, in addition to the
static load due to power transmission, there is dynamic
load between the meshing teeth. In order to account for
dynamic loads, the following two methds are used.
1. Approximate estimation of dynamic load using the

velocity factor, which is used in the initial stages
of gear design, and
2. Accurate estimation of dynamic load using the
Buckingham’s equation, which is used in the final
stages of gear design.
1. Calculation of initial dynamic load F d
The preliminary value of dynamic load can be

calculated by using the relation
where F t  tangential load in kg f
Fd  Ft  Cv
Power in Horse power  75

Ft 
vm
where P  Power transmitted in Horse power

 dN
vm  mean velocity  m/s
60
C v  velocity factor (C v values are the same as
for spur gears)
3  vm
 , for vm  10 m/s, commercially cut gears
3
6  vm
 , for vm  5 to 20 m/s, carefully cut gears
6
5.5  vm
 , for vm  20 m/s, precision gears
5.5
1  vm
 , for non-metallic gears.
1  0.25 vm
2. Buckingham’s equation for dynamic load

Buckingham’s equation, used for accurate estimation
of dynamic load, is given by
Dynamic load
 0.164 V cb cos3   F  cos  

m t
F d  F t   

 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb c o s3   F t  ...(6.15)
 
where F t  Tangential load neglecting service factor

P  75

vm
vm  Pitch line velocity (or) mean velocity m/sec.
b  Face width
c  Deformation or dynamic factor in kg f/cm
  Helix angle
2.19 WEAR STRENGTH OF HELICAL GEARS

(WEAR TOOTH LOAD)
The wear strength equation of the spur gear is
modified to suit helical gears. Thus the modified wear
strength equation for helical gears is given by
d1  b  Q  k
Wear load, F w 
c o s2  (6.16)
where d1  Pitch circle diameter of pinion (use pinion

diameter irrespective of whether pinion or gear is
designed)
b  Face width,
Q  Ratio factor,
2i 2Z2
  , for external gears
i  1 Z1  Z2
2i 2Z2
  , for internal gears
i  1 Z2  Z1
Z2
where i  velocity ratio 
Z1
k  Load stress factor (also known as material

combination factor), in kg f/cm 2
 [ ]2  sin   1 1 
c n 
   
 14 E
 p E g 
where [c]  Surface endurance limit in kg f/cm 2
n  Normal pressure angle, and

E p and Eg  Young’s modulus of pinion and gear
respectively.
  Helix angle.
Note: In the design of helical gears, the normal module

m n should be selected from standards. For the
recommended series of modules, From PSG Data book
pg:8.2; table: 1.
2.20 PRESSURE ANGLE IN THE NORMAL AND

TRANSVERSE PLANE
2.20.1 Pressure angle 
Pressure Angle is the
angle formed by the line of Pre ssu re
Axis o f
An gle
Tra nsm ission
action with common tangent Velocity o f
Pitch P oint
to the pitch circles of
mating gears.
Pitch p oint
For Involute system of
gears, the pressure angle is
constant and it may be
Co mm on
1 Tan ge nt
14 (or) 20
2 Fig: 2.17(a)
1
 14 or 20 
2
2.20.2 Transverse Pressure Angle t

The pressure angle measured in transverse plane is
known as transverse pressure angle  t
2.20.3 Normal Pressure Angle n 
The pressure angle measured in the normal plane is
known as Normal pressure angle  n
tan  n

tan  t
where   Helix angle

Pn
n
t
Pt
Fig:2.17(b).Helical gear nom enclature
Formative or Equivalent Number of teeth for Helical

gears
The formative or equivalent number of teeth for a
helical gear may be defined as the number of teeth that
can be generated on the surface of a cylinder having a
radius of curvature at a point at the tip of the minor axis
of an ellipse obtained by taking a section of the gear in
the normal plane. Mathematically, formative or equivalent
number of teeth on a helical gear.
Z
Zv 
cos 3 
  Helix angle
Z  Actual number of teeth on a helical gear.
It is also called as virtual number of teeth.
2.21 FORCE ANALYSIS OF HELICAL GEARS

In the case of spur gears, the normal force acting on
the plane of rotation of gears and inclined at an angle
 to the common tangent, to the pitch circle diameters of
mating gears, at the point of contact, whereas for helical
gears, the force will be inclined to the plane of rotation by
an angle , known as helix angle, and to the tangent by
an angle  , the pressure Angle.
Hence the Resultant normal force F n acting on the

helical gear tooth can be derived into three components
such as tangential force F t, Radial component of force
F r and axial component of force F a .
Derivations for F t, F r and F a
Fn  Resultant (normal) force acting on the tooth.
Ft  Tangential (or) Transmitted force
Fr  Radial component of force
Fa  Axial component of force
 Pressure angle
 Helix angle
 Normal pressure angle
t  Transverse pressure angle
From the Fig. 2.18 (A)
A E
Fn
D H
B F cen tre lines
 o f teeth
Fr
 Fa
C
Ft G

Pitch C ylinder
n h ere
(A)
A B
Fn F n cos a
Fr Fa
n 
G C G
B Ft Ft
(B) (C )
Fig:2.18.
A G  Normal force acting on the tooth  F
A D  Axial component of force  F a
AE  Tangential component of force  F t
AB  Radial component of force  F r
From triangle ABG

Opposite side
sin  
Hypotenuse

AB
sin   
AG

AB  F r

AG  F n

BG  F t
 
AB  AG sin   Fr  Fn sin  (1)
Adj
cos  
Hyp

BG
cos   
AG
 
BG  AG cos   Ft  F n cos  (2)
From Triangle BCG


BC
sin   
BG . . 
. BG  Fn c o s 
 
BC  BG sin   F a  F n cos  sin  (3)
. .  
 . AD  BC  F a

CG
cos   
BG . .  
 . CG  AE  F t
 
CG  BG cos   F t  Fn cos  c o s  (4)
The radial and axial components can also be
expressed in terms of tangential components
Divide the Equation (1) by equation (4)

1  4
Fr Fn sin 

Ft F n cos  cos 
Fr  sin    1 

F t  c o s    cos  
 tan  
Fr  Ft   
 cos  
Divide the Equation (3) by Equation (4)
3  4
Fa
 F t sin 
Ft
Fa F n cos  sin 

Ft F n c o s  cos 
Fa sin 
 . . sin  
Ft cos 
 . tan   
 cos  
Fa  F t tan 
The tangential force can be derived from the torque
Mt Torque  Tangential Force  Radial Distance
Mt  F t  r  d
r 2 
 
Mt
Ft 
r
2Mt
Ft 
d
2 N M t
Power P  
60
60  P
Mt 
2 N
where P  Power; N  Speed in rpm
d  Pitch circle diameter.
2.22 DESIGN OF STRAIGHT TOOTH HELICAL AND

DOUBLE HELICAL GEAR BASED ON STRENGTH AND
WEAR CONSIDERATIONS
The design of helical gear is almost similar to spur
gear drive design with slight modification in Lewis and
Buckingham Equations due to presence of Helix angle 
in Helical gear.
. .
( .   Helix angle)
Step 1
Similar to spur gear Design
Step 2, Step 3 and Step 4
Similar to spur gear Design
Step 5
Calculation of strength of gear tooth F s
F s  [ b] b y v Pn Pn   mn
m n  normal pitch
0.684
yv  0.124  for 14 12 Involute
Zv
0.912
Zv
0.95
 0.175  for 20  Involute stub teeth
Zv
From PSG Data book pg: 8.50 and 8.51
b  10  m n
[b] is the Design bending stress in kg f/cm2. Choose

the [b] value from Data book pg: 8.5 Table: 7.
Step 6
Calculation of Normal module m n
For Safe Design F s  F d
By Equating this two equations, determine the value

of normal module.
[Choose the nearest standard normal module value

from PSG Data book pg: 8.2 Table: 1]
Step 7
Calculate the value of face width (b)
b  10  m n
Step 8
Calculate the pitch circle Diameter d1
mn
d1   Z1
cos 
  Helix Angle
Step 9
Calculation of pitch line velocity
 d1 N 1  v for m/sec
v
60  1000
V for m/min
N 1  rpm
d 1  mm
Step 10
Recalculate the stength of gear tooth F s
F s  [b] b yv   m n
Substitute m n which is calculated in previous step 5.
Step 11
Calculation of Buckingham’s Dynamic load F d
 0.164 V cb cos 3   F  c o s  

m t
F d  F t   

 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb cos 3   F t 
 
C, b and V m are similar to spur gear Design. The
above Equation F d is called modified Buckingham’s
Dynamic load for Helical gears.
Step 12
Check for Beam strength
For safe Design F s  Fd
If F s  F d, then the Design is not safe, the value of

m  should be increased to increase the strength of gear
tooth.
Step 13
Calculation wear load F w :
 1 1 
[2c ] sin  n  
d 1 Q kb E1 E2 
Fw  ; k  
cos 2  1.4
n - normal pressure Angle
c, E 1 and E 2 are similar to spur gear design.
Step 14
Checking for wear strength
For safe Design F w  Fd
If F w  F d, then the Design is not safe. The value of

k is increased and then Recalculate the value of F w again.
k is the load stress factor.
Step 15
Calculate the Basic Dimensions of Helical gear
From PSG Data book PN 8.22; Table: 26
Basic Dimensions of Externally Meshing Standard

Cylindrical Gears Suffix 1 for Pinion and 2 for
Wheel
Helical and
Nomenclature Notation Units
Herringbone Gears
Module m mm 2a cos 
mn 
Normal module mn mm Z1  Z2
Transverse mt mm mn 2a
m1  ; mt 
module cos  Z1  Z2
Centre distance a mm ma Z1  Z2
a
c o s 2
Height factor f0  fo  1 (in special cases

fo  0.8, stub teeth)
Bottom clearance c mm c  0.25 mn

(For stub teeth,
c  0.3 mn
Tooth depth h mm h  2.25 mn

(For stub teeth,
h  1.9 mn
Pitch diameter d mm m
d1  Z ;
or Reference cos  1
diameter mn
d2  Z2
cos 
Tip diameter dc mm  Z1 
da1    2f0  mn
 cos  
 Z2 
da2    2f0  mn
 cos  
Helical and
Nomenclature Notation Units
Herringbone Gears
Root diameter df mm  Z1 
df1    2f0  mn  2c
 cos  
 Z2 
df2    2f0  mn  2c
 cos  
Helix angle  deg. For helical,   8 to 25
For herringbone,   8
to 25
mn Z1  Z2
cos  
2a
Number of teeth Z  2a cos 
Z1  ; Z2  iZ1
mn i  1
Virtual number Zv Z1 Z3
Zv1  ; Zv2 
of teeth cos 3
cos3 
Step 16
Draw the neat sketch of Helical gear
H e lix
H e lix a ng le
Too th
A xis
Fig: 2.17
Problem 2.18: Design a helical gear drive to transmit a

power of 15 kW at 1400 rpm to the following specifications
speed reduction is 3, pressure angle is 20, Helix angle is
15, The material of both gears is C45 steel, Allowable static
stress is 180 N/mm2 Young’s modulus of the material
 2  105 N/mm2.
Step 1
Given data
power P  15 kW  15  10 3 W
Pinion speed N 1  1400 rpm
Speed reduction (i)  3
Pressure angle   20
Helix angle   15
Material for pinion  C45 steel
Material for gear  C45 steel
Static stress [b]  180 N/mm 2
Young’s modulus E 1  E 2  2  10 5 N/mm 2
Step 2
Pinion – C45 steel
Gear – C45 steel
Both pinion and gear are made up of same material

(C45 steel). Pinion is weaker, therefore design for pinion.
Step 3
Calculation of tangential load F t
75
F t  HP 
vm
15  10 3
power P   15 kW H.P
750
 20 H.P
 d1 N 1
vm 
60  1000
3.14  d 1  1400

60  1000
3.14  20.705  m n  1400


60  1000
vm  1.517  m n m/s
20  75 988.7936
Ft   kg f
1.517  m n mn
Assume Z 1  20
mn Z1
d1 
cos 
20  m n

cos 15
d1  20.705  mn
where m n  normal module.

Step 4
Calculation of Dynamic load F d
Fd  Ft  Cv
3  vm
Cv  ;
3
Assume vm  10 m/s, commerically cut wheels.
3  1.517 m n
Cv 
3
 3  1.517 m n 
F d  988.7775  mn    kg f
 3 
Step 5
F s  [b] b yv P cn b  10  m n
 [b]  b  yv    m n
0.192
y v  0.154  For 20 Involute teeth
Zv
(yv, from PSG Data book pg: 8.50)
Z1
Zv 
cos 3 
20
 3
 22.974 ~
 23
cos 15
0.912 [ b]  180 N/mm2

y v  0.154 
23
[ b], convert into kgf/c m2
 0.1143
[b]  18  10 2 kgf/c m2
2
F s  18  10  10  m n
. .
 . 1N ~
 10 kgf
 0.1143    m n
F s  6460.236 m 2n
Step 6
Calculation of Normal module m n
For Safe Design, F s  F d
 3  1.517 m n 
6460.236 m 2n  988.755  
 3 
6460.236 m 2n  329.5916 [3  1.1517 m n]
6460.236 m2n  379.590 m n  988.775   6460.236
m 2n  0.05875 m n  0.153055
m 2n  0.05875 m n  0.153055
By solving this Equation, we get
m n  0.4217; m n   0.3629
(- Not possible)
m n  0.4217 c m
mn ~
 5 mm
Step 7
Calculate the value of face width b
b  10  m n
 10  5
 50 mm
Step 8
Calculate the pitch circle diameter
mn
d1   Z1
cos 
5
  20
c o s 15
d 1  103.52 ~
 104 mm
Step 9
Calculation of pitch line velocity
 d1 N 1
vm 
60  1000
3.14  104  1400


60  1000
vm  7.619 m/s
Step 10
Calculate the strength of gear tooth F s
F s  [ b]  b  yv    m n
[ b]  18  10 2 kg f/c m2
 50   5 
 18  10 2     0.1143  3.14   
 10   10 
 1615.059 kgf
[b]  18  10 2 kg f/cm2
Substitute m n and b in cm.
Step 11
Calculation of Dynamic (Buckingham’s) load F d
Fd  Ft  FI
 0.164 V cb cos 3   F  cos  

m t
 F t   

 0.164 Vm  1.485 

cb cos 3  F t 
 
V m  7.619  60 m/min  477.714 m/m in
b  50 mm  5 cm
  15
Choose “c” From the PSG Data book pg: 8.53 table
41 and 42.
For   20 ; Steel and Steel. c  11860  e from table:

41 from table: 42 module 5 mm; (carefully cut wheels)
e  0.025
c  11860  0.025
c  296.5
988.7936
Ft 
mn
988.7936

5
 197.758 kg f
 3 
0.164  477.714 296.5  5 cos 15  197.758 
F d  197.758   
 

 3
 0.164  477.714  1.485 296.5  5  cos 15  197.758



116600.4643
F d  197.759 
135.63
 197.758  859.66
F d  1057.427 kg f
Step 12
Checking for Beam Strength
For Safe Design F s  F d
F s  1615.059 kg f and F d  1057.427 kgf
By comparing both values
F s 1615.059   1057.427 F d
therefore the Design is satisfactory.
Step 13
Calculation of wear load F w 
d 1 bQk
Fw 
cos 2 
d 1  104 mm  10.4 cm
b  50 mm  5 cm
  15 
2i 23
Q   1.5
i1 31
 1 1 
[c]2 sin   
E E2 
k  1 
1.4
E 1  E 2  2  10 5 N/mm 2  2  10 6 kgf/cm 2 given
  20
[c]  3000 kgf/c m2
From PSG Data book pg: 8.5 table: 7 for steel
 1 1 
3000 2  sin 20  6
 6 
 2  10 2  10 
k
1.4
3.078
k
1.4
k  2.1987
10.4  1.5  2.1987  5

Fw 
cos 15 
171.4986

cos 2 15
 183.8116 kg f
k  Load stress factor
Step 14
For safe Design F w  F d
F w  183.8116 kg f and Fd  1057.427 kg f

By comparing F w and F d ; F d  F w therefore the

Design is not satisfactory. So we have to increase the “k ”
value.
k  2.1987 ; It would be increased to increase the value
of F w .
Assume k  21.987  ;
Assume the k value; The assumed value of k should

increase the wear strength and also the wear strength
F w  should be larger value, when compared with Dynamic
load F d
Recalculation of wear load

d1 Qkb
Fw 
cos 2 
10.4  1.5  21.987  5


cos 2 15
1714.986

0.9330
 1838.116 kgf
k  21.987 Assu me
Now, F w  F s therefore the Design is satisfactory.
Step 15
Calculate the Basic Dimensions of Helical gear
1. module m n  5 mm (Normal module)
mn 5
2. Transverse module m t    5.176 mm
cos  cos 15
mn  Z1  Z2 
3. Centre Distance a   
cos   2 
5  20  60 
    207.05 mm
c o s 15  2 
Z2
 i Z 1  20
Z1
Z 2  3  20  60
5. Bottom clearance c  2.25 m n
 2.25  5
 11.25 mm
6. Tooth Depth h  2.25 mm  2.25  5  11.25 mm

mn 5  20
7. Pitch Diameters: d1   Z1 
cos  c o s 15
 103.5 mm
~
 104 mm
mn 5  60
d2   Z2   310.5
cos  c o s 15
~
 311 mm
 Z1 
8. Tip Diameter dc : d c    Z6  mn
1
 cos  
 20 
 215
 cos 15 
 113.52
~
 114 mm
 Z2 
dc    Z6  m n
2
 cos  
 60 
 25
 c o s 15 
 320.58
~
 321 mm
 Z1 
9. Root Diameter df : df    2f0  m n  2 c
1
 cos  
 20 
  2  5  2  11.25
 cos 15 
 71.02 mm
~
 71 mm
 Z2 
df    2f0  m n  2c
2
 cos  
 60 
  2  5  2  11.25
 c o s 15 
 278.08
~
 278 mm
10. Helix angle   15

11. No: of teeth: Z 1  20 Z 2  60
Z1 20
12. Virtual no: of teeth Z v : Z v  3

1
cos  cos 3 15
 22.97
~
 23
Z2
Zv 
2
cos 3 
60

cos 15
 68.92
~
 69
Problem 2.19: A pair of helical gears with 30 helix angle is

used to transmit 15 kW at 10,000 rpm. The velocity ratio is
4:1; Both the gears are made of case hardened steel with a
static strength of 100 N/mm2. The gears are 20 stub and the
pinion is to have 24 teeth. The face width is 14 times the
module. Find the module and face width for strength.
(Oct ’2006)
Given Data:
Helix angle    30
P  15 kW  15  10 3 Watts  20.38 HP
(HP = 736 Watts)
i  4 :1
N  10,000 rpm
Both the gears are made of case hardened steel.
Static strength  [b]  100 N /mm2  10
 1000 kgf/cm 2
[Convert into kgf/cm 2
i.e., N/mm2  10  1 kg f/cm 2]

Pressure angle  20 involute stub.
No. of teeth on pinion  24
Face width  b  14 tim es module
b  14  m n
Step 1
F s  Beam strength  [ b] b yv  m n
F s  1000  14 m n  0.1492    mn
 6562.15 m 2n  k gf ... (1)
75
Transmitted load  F t  HP 
vm
When vm  20 m/sec ,
5.5  

vm
Cv  (precision wheels)
5.5
75
F t  20.38 
125.66 m n
12.16 

mn
0.95
yv  0.175 
Zv
z 24
Zv  3
  36.95
cos  c o s3 30
yv  0.1492
 Z1 m n N1
vm  m/sec
100  60
m n is in cm
  24  m n  10,000

100  60
vm  125.66 m n m/sec
V m  7539.82 m n m/min
Dynamic load  Fd  Ft  Cv
5.5   vm 5.5  
 
125.66 mn
Cv  
5.5 5.5
 12.16  5.5  

125.66 mn
 Fd   
mn 5.5
 
2.2115
  5.5  

125.66 mn   2
mn
To find normal module m n, equate the above

equations (1) and (2)
2.2115
6562.15 m2n  5.5  

125.66 m n 
mn
2967.28 m3n  5.5  


125.66 mn
2967.28 m3n  5.5  


125.66 mn
Calculate m n, by using trail and error method.

Trail 1
Assume m n  0.5 cm
LHS  371.1175 ; RHS  13.42
LHS  RHS
 Not satisfactory.
Trail 2
m n  0.3 cm
L HS  80.162 ; RH S  11.639
LHS  RHS
Trail 3
m n  0.2
LHS  23.75 and RHS  10.513
LHS  RHS
 Not satisfactory
Trail 4
m n  0.15 c m
LHS  10.01; RHS  9.84
LHS  RHS
Therefore, m n  Normal module
 0.15 cm
mn  1.5 mm
mn 1.5
m   1.732 mm
cos  cos 30
Base width  b  14 m  14  1.732
b  24.24 mm
Problem 2.20: A helical cast steel gear with 30 helix angle
has to transmit 45 HP at 1500 rpm; If the gear has 24 teeth,
determine the necessary module, pitch diameter and face width
for 20 full depth teeth. The static stress for cast steel may be
taken as 560 kg  cm2. The width of face may be taken as 3
times the normal pitch. What could be the end thrust on the
gear? The tooth factor for 20 full depth involute gear may be
0.912
taken as 0.154  ; where TE represents the equivalent
TE
number of teeth. (Apr. 2009)
Given Data:
Helix angle    30

P  45 HP; N 1  1500 rpm
No.of teeth on pinion  Z 1  24 teeth  T1
Pressure angle   20 full depth involute.
Static stress [ b]  560 kg  cm 2
Face width  b  3 normal pitch  3  pn  3 m n
0.912 0.912 T1 24
yv  0.154   0.154  TE  
TE 37 3
cos  cos 3 30 
 0.1293  36.95  37 teeth

Beam strength  FS  [ b]  b  yv pn
 [ b] 3 m n yv   m n
 560  3  m n  0.1293  m n
 2143.91 m n2 kg ... (1)
Dynamic Load  F d  F t  C v
75  d1 N1   Z1 m n  N1
F t  HP  vm  
vm 60  100 60  100
  24  m n  1500

60  100
75  18.84 m n m  sec
F t  45 
18.84 m n
 179.14  6  vm 6  18.84 m n
 kg Cv  
mn  6 6
 
(Carefully cut gears)
 179.14   6  18.84 m n 
Dynamic Load  F d    
mn   6 
 
29.856
Fd  6  18.84 mn
m n ... (2)
To find normal module (mm), Equate the equations
(1) and (2)
29.856
2143.91 m 2n  6  18.84 m n
mn
71.808 m 3n  6  18.84 m n
Calculate m n by trail and error method.
Trail (1): m n  0.5
LHS  17.952 RHS  15.42

LHS  RHS Therefore it is not satisfactory
Trail (2): m n  0.4
LHS  4.595 RHS  13.536

LHS  RHS Therefore it is not satisfactory
The value of m n is in between 0.4 and 0.5
Trail m n  0.45
LHS  14.5411 RHS  14.478

 LHS  RHS
 Select normal module m n  0.45 cm  4.5 mm
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.2 Table (1)

 Take standard normal module  5 mm
normal mo d ule  m n  5 mm
face width  b  3 m n
35
 47.12 mm
Pitch diameter  d1  mn Z 1  5  24  120 mm
End thrust on the Gear

Axial force or 
End thrust   F a  F t tan 

179.14 d  120 mm
or F t 
mn
179.14  12 cm

0.5
 358.28 kg  30 helix angle 
2M t
Tangential force F t 
d
Torque on  d 12
  mt  Ft   358.28 
pinio n  2 2
 2149.68 kg  cm
 2148.6 kg.cm
Axial force F a  358.28 tan 30
Fa  206.74 kg or End Thrust 
Problem 2.22: A pair of helical gears subjected to moderate

shock loading is to transmit 30 kW at 1500 rpm of the pinion.
The speed reduction ratio is 4 and the helix angle is 20. The
service is continuous and the teeth are 20 FD in the normal
plane. For the gear life of 10,000 hours, design the gear drive.
[Nov/Dec 2007]
Step 1
Select Alloy Steel 40 Ni 2 Cr 1 Mo 28, hardened and

tempered.
Surface hardness 55 RC and core hardness  350 BHN .
and u  1550 N/mm 2

Materials for pinion and gear are assumed to be same

and hence only the pinion is designed.
Step 2
Calculation of design stresses
1.4 kbl
[b]    1
n  k
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.19, for Alloy steels
 1  0.35  u  120
 0.35  1550  120
 662.5 N /mm 2
Life is 10,000 hrs
 N  10,000  60  1500
 90  10 7 cycles
kb  0.7 from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.20
k  1.5 from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.19

corresponding to steel normalised, surface hardened steel
normalised, surface hardened.
n  2.5from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.19

corresponding to surface hardened.
1.4  0.7  662.5

 [ b ]   173.13 N/mm2
2.5  1.5
[c]  C R HRC k cl
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.16, corresponding to

Alloy steels, Hardened and tempered
C R  26.5
HRC  55

surface hardness  350
kcl  0.585
 [c]  26.5  55  0.585
 852.6 N/mm2
Step 3
Calculation of centre distance
2
a  i  1


3  0.7  E [M t]
 [ ] 
 c 
i
from PSG Data book
Pg.No. 8.13
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.15, design twisting

moment
[M t]  M t  ko k d  k
where
ko  1.25 for moderate shock
k  kd  1.3 Assume
and
kW
M t  97420  from PS G Da ta book Pg.No. 8.15
N1
30
 97420 
1500
 1948.4 kg f  c m
 194.84 Nm
 [M t]  1.25  1.3  194.84
 316.615 Nm
Assume   0.5 from PSG Data b ook Pg.No. 8.14 
E  2.1  10 5 N/mm 2 from PSG Data book Pg.N o. 8.14 


3  0.7  2.1  10 5  316.615  10 3
 a  4  1  852.6  
  4  0.5
 140.96
~
 141 mm
Assuming Z 1  20 teeth
 Z2  i Z1
 4  20  80 teeth
From PSG Data book Pg.No.8.22
2a cos 
mn 
Z1  Z2
2  141  cos 20


20  80
 2.65 mm
 Standard module m n  3 is chosen (from PSG Data

book Pg.No. 8.2)
Now revise ‘a’
m n Z1
But d1  from PSG Data book P g.N o. 8.22
cos 
3  20
  63.85 mm
cos 20
and
mn Z2
d2  from PSG Data book P g.N o. 8.22
cos 
3  80

cos 20
 255.4 mm
d1  d2
a from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.22
2
63.85  255.4

2
 159.63 mm
Step 4
Calculation of b, P a, [Mt]
  d1 
 
Pt Z1
Pa    
tan  tan 
   63.85 
 20

    27.55 mm
tan 20
but b   a from PS G D ata book Pg.No . 8.14
 0.5  159.63
 80 mm
we find b  P a
 Revise design torque
[M t]  k o  k kd  M t
We know that  p  b/d1 from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.15 
80
 p   1.25
63.85
 k (Load concentration factor  1.14 (from PSG Data

book Pg.No. 8.15)
and v  pitch line velocity
 d1 N 1   63.85  1500
   5.01 m/s
60  1000 60  1000

pitch line velocity
kd  1.2 for helical gear, IS quality 8
 [M t]  1.25  1.14  1.2  194.84
 333.176 Nm
Step 5
Calculation of induced stresses
0.7 i  1 [Mt]
b  from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.13 A
ab mn yv
where
yv is obtained for Z eq , from PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.22
Z1 20 ~
but Z eq  3
 24
cos  cos 3 20
yv  0.414 for 24 teeth
0.7 4  1 333.176  10 3
 b   73.52 N/mm 2
159.63  80  3  0.414
b 73.52   [ b] 173.1 N/mm 2
i1 i1
c  0.7 
a 
 ib
E [M t]

4  1 41
 0.7 
159.63  4  80
5
 2.1  10  333.176  10 3
 724.95  [c] 852.6 N /mm 2
Hence the design is safe

Problem 2.22: A pair of helical gears subjected to heavy
shock loading is to transmit 37.5 kW at 1750 rpm of the
pinion. The speed reduction ratio is 4 and the helix angle is
15. The service is continuous and the teeth are 20 full depth
in the normal plane. Select suitable material and design the
gears. Check for working stresses and sketch the drive.
[May, June 2009]
Refer Problem 2.19

Problem 2.23: Deduce the expressions for forces acting on a

gear tooth of a helical gear with the aid of a schematic
diagram. [Nov, Dec: 2012]
Refer Article 2.22, Pg.No.2.135

Problem 24: Design a pair of helical gears for the following
data.
Power  7.5 kW
Speed of pinion  1400 rp m
Speed reduction  3
Pressure angle  20
Helix angle  10
Select the materials and heat treatment.
Given Data:
P  7.5 kW  7.5  10 3 Watts ; n  1400 rpm ; i  3 ;

  20  ;   10
Note
(If life of the gear drive is not given, then select life
 N  10,000 hrs).
Step 1: Selection of material and heat treatment (Refer

PSG databook, Page No. 8.16)
Assume same material for both pinion and wheel.

Select Alloy steel with case hardened heat treatment
(Refer PSG Data book P.No. 1.14) - 40 Cr 1 MO 28 -
Material,  u  70  85 kgf /mm2
Take  u  80 kgf /mm2
HRC  55 to 63 and CR  280

 Surface hard ness 350 BHN 

Take HRC  60  
 Core hardness  350 BHN 
Step 2: Life in cycles.
Assume life of the gear drive  N  10,000 hrs
 N  10,000  60  RPM  10,000  60  1400
 84  10 7 cycles
Step 3: Equivalent young’s modulus (refer PSG databook
P.No. 8.14) Since the material for the pinion and wheel is
same,
E eq  2.15  10 6 kgf /c m2
Step 4: Calculation of design bending stress [b]

(Refer PSG databook P.No. 8.18)
Design bending stress (From PSG Data book P.No.

1.4 k bl 8.20)
[ b ]    1 (Consider core hardness )
n k
k bl  Life factor for bending
1
(From PSG Data book P.No.
8.19)
 1  Endurance limit stress
1.4  1  0.35  u  1200 
 [b]   4000 
2  1.5
 1866.66 kgf /cm 2 0.35 8000   1200
 4000 kgf /cm 2

Take [b]  1867 kgf /cm 2 (From PSG Data book P.No.
8.19)
n  factor of safety
2
(From PSG Data book P.No.

8.19)
k   Fillet stress concentration
 1.5
Step 5: Calculation of design surface (contact compressive)
stress. (Refer PSG databook, P.No. 8.16)
Design surface (contact compressive) stress
 [c]  C R HRC k cl
[c]  280  60  0.585 C R  280

2 HRC  60
[c]  9828 kg f /cm
kcl  Life factor (From PSG
Data book P. No. 8.17)
(Consider surface hardness)
 0.585
Step 6: Calculation of Design twisting moment [M t] (Refer
PSG databook, P. No. 8.15)
Design twisting moment Initially assume

 [M t]  M t  k d  k
 521.89  1.3 kW
M t  97420
n
[M t]  678.46 kgf  cm 97420  7.5

1400
 521.89 kg f  c m
Step 7: Calculation of approximate centre distance a

(Refer PSG databook, Page No. 8.13)


2
3  0.7  E [M t]
Centre distance a  i  1  [ ]  i
 c 


2
3  0.7  2.15  106  678.46
a  3  1  
 9828  3  0.3
b
assume  
a
 0.3
a  8.07 cm (Open type gearing)

i3
(Centre distance should be rounded to R10 series)
Refer PSG databook, Page No. 7.20
Take, Centre distance  a  80 mm
Step 8: Calculation of Z 1 and Z2
Assume, Z 1  No. of teeth on pinion  20
No. of teeth on wheel  Z2  i  Z2  3  20  60 teeth
Step 9: Calculation of Normal module m n
(refer PSG Data book page No. 8.22)
2a cos 
m n  Normal module 
Z1  Z2
2  80  cos 10
mn   1.9696 mm
20  60
Select recommended value of module, (from PSG Data

book P.No. 8.2)
Select, module  m n  2.5 mm
(For safe design, always select m n slightly greater

than required)
Step 10: Recalculate the centre distance a
m n Z 1  Z 2
a
cos  2
2.5 20  60


cos 10 2
a  101.54 mm
 Take, a  centre distance 100 mm (nearest value)
(from R10 series)
Step 11: Calculation of face width ‘b’
b
  0.3
a
 b  0.3  a  0.3  100  30 mm
Face width  b  30 mm
Step 12: Calculation of pitch line velocity, v in m/sec.
Refer PSG Data book P. No.

8.22
Pitch line velocity d1  pitch circle dia of pinion

 d1 n 1
v m/sec mn
60  1000 d1  Z1
cos 
 3.7216 m/sec
2.5
  20
cos 10
 50.77 mm
Selection of Quality of gears:
(Refer PSG Data book page No. 8.3)
Select IS Quality - Medium

Preferred Quality - 8
Step 13: To find the constants k and k d.
k  Load correctionfactor b 30
   0.59
d 1 50.77
 1.03 at   0.6   0.6
kd  Dynamic load fac to r velocity upto 3 m/sec,
 1.3 (For IS-8 Quality,  350 BHN surface
hardness)
Step 14: Recalculation of [M t]
[M t]  Mt  kd  k
 521.89  1.03  1.3  698.81 kg fcm
Step 15: Checking of bending stress.
Refer PSG Data book Page No. 8.13 yv  form factor

Refer PSG Data book
P.No. 8.18
i1 Z1
b  0.7 [Mt]  [b] Zv  (Refer Data
a  b  mn  yv cos3 
book P. No. 8.22)
3  1 20
 0.7 698.81   20.93  21 teeth
10  3  0.25  0.3955 cos3 10
 659.64 kgf /cm2  [b] 1867 kgf/ cm2
 Design is satisfactory based yv  0.3955at Zv  21 teeth
on bending stress
Step 16: Checking of Surface (contact compressive) stress
refer PSG databook, P. No. 8.13
i1 i1
c  0.7
a 
 ib
E [M t]  [c]
31 31
 0.7
10 
 33
 2.15  10 6  698.81
 7235.45 kg f /cm 2  [c] 9828 kgf/cm 2
Therefore, the design is satisfactory based on surface

(contact compressive) stress.
Problem 2.25: Design a helical gear to transmit 7.5 kW at

1400 rpm; to the following specifications:
Speed reduction is 3; Pressure angle 20; Helix angle 10;
Design compressive stress 9020 kg/cm2; Design bending stress
2100 kg/cm2. Modulus of elasticity of materials
 2.05  106 kg/cm2. (Nov/Dec 2014)
Given Data:
P  7.5 kW ;
N 1  1400 rpm;
 Z2 
Speed reduction  i  3   
Z
 1
Pressure angle    20
Helix angle    10 
Design surface compressive stress  9020 kg/cm 2
[c]  902 N/mm 2
Design bending stress  2100 kg/cm 2
[b]  210 N/mm 2
E  2.05  10 5 N/mm2
Step 1
Calculation of design twisting moment [M t]
[M t]  M t  kd  k.
M t  Nominal twisting m oment transmitted by

the pinion  kgf c m
kW
 97420 
n
7.5
 97420   521.89. kg fc m
1400
M t  521.89 .kgfcm
For symmetric scheme,
initially assume k  k d  1.3
[M t]  521.89  1.3
 678.46 kg fc m
 67846 Nmm
Step 2
Calculation of approximate centre distance.


2
3  0.7  E [Mt]
a  i  1  [ ]  i
 c 
i  Gear ratio  3; [c]  902 N/mm 2; E  2.05  10 5 N/mm 2
[M t]  67846 Nmm
b
  0.3 assume, (for open type of Gearing)
a


2
3  0.7  2.05  10 5  67846
a  3  1  
 902  3  0.3
a  84.139 mm
Step 3
Assume Z 1  no. of teeth on pinion
 20
Z2
Gear ratio i 
Z1
Z2
3
20
Z 2  60 teeth
Step 4
Calculation of normal module (m n. From PSG Data

book page 8.22; table (26)
2a  cos  a  84.138 mm
mn 
Z1  Z2   10
Z 1  20
2  84.139  cos 10
 Z 2  60
20  60
 2.07 mm
Represent normal mo dule 


standard   m n  3 mm

from PSG Data boo k P.No. 8.2 table 2  
Step 5
Re-calculate centre distance ‘a’ From PSG Data book
P.No.8.23; table (26)
mn  Z1  Z2 
Centre distance  a   
cos   2 
3  20  60 
  
cos 10   2 
 121.85 mm
(rounded to R10 series)
From R10 series, take centre distance a  125 mm

Step 6
Calculation of face width ‘b’
Already  is assumed as 0.3
b
But  
a
ba
 125  0.3  37.5 mm

Face width  b  37.5 mm
Step 7
Calculate pitch circle dia. d1 and d 2

d1  pitch circle dia  mn
  Z1
of p inio n
 cos
3
  20
cos 10
d1  60.92 mm
d2  pitch circle dia  mn

  Z2
of wheel
 cos
3
  60
cos 10
d2  182.77 mm
Step 8
Calculation of pitch line velocity v

d1N 1
Pitch line velocity v  m  sec
60
  60.92  1400

1000  60
 4.46 m  sec
Step 9
Selection of Quality, preferred Quality from PSG Data
book P.No.8.3; table (2) above 1m/sec; up to 8m/sec,
Preferred Quality- 1S6
Step 10
Calculate  p and k; Refer table (14); P.No. 8.15 of
PSG Data book
b 37.5
p    0.61556
d1 60.92
From PSG Data book table (14): P.No.8.15 at

 p  0.6 : The value of k  1.03
Step 11
Read the value of k d :
From PSG Data book Table (15): P.No. 8.16 for

quality IS  8; pitch line velocity. upto 8 m/sec.
kd  1.3
Step 12
Recalculate the design twisting mount [M t]
[M t]  M t  kd  k  521.89  1.3  1.03
 698.81 kg f  cm  69881 N  mm
Step 13
Calculation of  b and checking of ab
Refer PSG Data book P.No.8.13; Table 8

i1
b  0.7 [M t]
a  b  m n  yv
i  3; a  125 mm
m n  3 mm; b  36.555 mm
yv  form factor From PSG Data book P .No. 8.18

and P.No.822
 0.39485
[M t]  69881 N mm
3  1 69881
b  0.7  36.2
125  36.5  3  0.39485
b 36.20   [b]  210 N  mm 2 b 36.2  [ b] 210 
 The design based on beam strength is satisfactory.
Step 14
i1 i1
c  0.7
a 
 ib
E [M t]


31 31
 0.7  2.05  10 5 69881 
125 3  36.555
 512.035 N  mm 2  [c] 902 N  mm2
 The design based on wear strength is satisfactory.

Problem 2.26: A pair of helical gears with 30 helix angle is

used to transmit 15 kW. at 10,000 rpm of pinion. The velocity
ratio is 4 : 1. Both the gears are made of case hardened steel
with a static strength of 10 N  mm2. The gear is at 20 stub
and the pinion is to have 24 teeth. The face width is 14 times
the module. Find the module and face width for strength.
(May/June 2013)
Given Data:
Helix angle    30; P  15 kW; n  N  10,000 rp m; i  4
[b]  100 N  mm 2 Z 1  24 teeth b  14 module
Refer PSG Data book P.No. 8.13:

For designing,


3 [M t]
m n  1.15 cos 
y v  [b]  m Z 1
[M t]  M t  kd  k (Refer PSG Data book P.No.8.15)
kW 97420  15
M t  97420 
n 10,000
 146.13 kg f cm (Assume k d  k  1.3 
M t  14613 N  mm
Design twisting moment  [M t]  14613  1.3
 18996.9 N  mm
yv  form factor
Z v  yv
40  0.465
35  0.452
5 _ 0.013
Z1
2  ? Zv 
cos 3
2  0.013
  5.2  10  3 24
5 
cos 3 30
for 35  0.452
 36.95
for 2  5.2  10  3  37
37  0.4572
yv  At 37 and X  0
Form factor yv  0.4572
Assume m  10 [From PSG Data book P.No. 8.14

Table (12)]
Z 1  24 teeth given


3 [M t ]
m n  1.15 cos 30
yv  [b] m Z1


3 18996.9
 1.15 cos 30
0.4572  100  10  24
 1.195 mm
take m n  1.195 mm
mn 1.195
Module (m)    1.37 mm
cos  c o s 30
Take standard module  m  1.5 mm
b  face width  14 m
 14  1.5  21 mm
Problem 2.27: A pair of helical gears subjected to moderate

shock loading is to transmit 37.5 kW at 1750 r.p.m. of the
pinion. The speed reduction ratio is 4.25 and the helix angle
is 15. The service is continuous and the teeth are 20 FD in
the normal plane. Design the gears, assuming a life of 10,000
hours. [April/May: 2010]

Problem 2.28: A pair of helical gears for a turbine has a
transmission ratio of 10:1. The pinion rotates at 5000 rpm and
made of carbon steel and the gear wheel is made of high grade
cast iron. Power transmitted  90 kW. The gear pair is required
to last for atleast 12000 hrs. Select suitable gear materials.
[May/June: 2012]

Problem 2.29: A pair of helical gears is to transmit 14 kW.
The teeth are 20 sutb and helix angle is 45. Pinion runs at
10,000 rpm and has 80 mm PCD. Wheel has 320 mm PCD.
Both gears are made of cast steel. Design the gear pair and
obtain the basic dimensionals assuming a life of 10000 hours.
[April/May: 2010]

Problem 2.30: Design a pair of helical gears to transmit 10

kW at 1000 rpm of the Pinion. Reduction ratio of 5 is required.
Give details of the drive in a tabular form. Life of gear is
10  103 hrs.
Given Data
P  7.5 kW ; N  1000 rpm ; i  5
Solution
Step 1 Selection of material and heat treatment
Assume same material for both pinion and wheel.
Select Alloy steel with case hardened,
40Cr 1MO 28 material
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 1.14, properties of the

selected material,
u  70  85 kg f/mm 2;
Take u  80 kg f/mm 2
HRC  55 to 63, C R  280
 surface hardness  350 BHN 

Take HRC  60,  
 core hardness  350 BHN 
Step 2: Life in cycles
life of gear drive  N  10,000 hrs
 N  10,000  60  RPM  10,000  60  1000
N  60  107 cycles
Step 3: Equivalent Young’s modulus

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.14, since the material
for the pinion and wheel is same.
E eq  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm 2

1.4 kbl
[b]    1
n  k
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.20 consider core

hardness
kbl  1
 1  Endurance limit stress
 0.35 u  1200  0.35  8000  1200
 4000 kg f/cm 2
n  F actor of safety  2
k   Fillet stress concentration  1.5
1.4  1
 [b]   4000   1866.66 kgf/cm2
2  1.5
Step 5: Design surface contact stress

Design surface (contact compressive) stress
 [ c]  C R HRC kcl

kcl  Life factor, consider surface hardness  0.585
 [c]  280  60  0.585
[ c]  9828 kgf/cm 2
Step 6: Calculation of Design twisting moment [M t]

Design twisting moment
[M t]  M t  kd  k
Initially Assume kd  k  1.3
and
kW 10
M t  97420  97420 
n 1000
M t  974.2 kgf  cm
 [M t]  974.2  1.3  1266.46 kgf  cm
Step 7: Calculation of approximate centre distance

2
a  i  1


3  0.7  E [M t]
 [ ] 
 c 
i

open type gearing
b
  0.3
a


2 6
3  0.7  2.15  10  1266.46
 a  5  1   
 9828  5  0.3
a  12.57 c m
Centre distance should be rounded to R10 series.
Centre distance a  16 cm  160 mm

Assume, Z 1  Number of T eeth on pinion  20 teeth
Number of teeth on wheel
Z 2  i Z 1  5  20  100 teeth
Step 9: Calculation of Normal module m n

2a cos 
m n  Normal module 
Z 1  Z2
Assuming Helix angle   10 
2  160  cos 10

  2.626 mm
20  100

value of module
m n  3 mm
Step 10: Recalculate the centre distance

Since
m n Z 1  Z 2 3  20  100 
a     182.77 m
cos  2 cos 10  2 
 Take a  centre distance = 200 mm, (nearest value

is R10 series)
Step 11: Calculation of face width ‘b’

b
Since    0.3
a
 b  0.3  a  0.3  200
Face width ‘b’  60 mm
Step 12: Calculation of pitch line velocity, v in m/s

mn
d1  Z 1  pitch circle dia of pinion
cos 
3
  20  60.92 mm
cos 10
 d1 n   60.92  10  3
 Pitch line velocity v    1000
60 60
 v  3.189 m/s
Step 13: Selection of Quality of gears

From PSG Data book, Pg.No: 8.3,
select IS Quality - medium
preferred Quality - 8
Step 14: To find the constants k and k d

b 60
p    0.984
d1 60.92
corresponding to p  0.984
k1
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8:16, corresponding to

pitch line velocity, up to 8 m/s and IS Quality - 8 and
surface Hardness  350
kd  1.2
Step 15: Recalculate value [M t]

[M t]  M t  kd  k  974.2  1.2  1  1169.04 kgf  cm
Step 16: Checking the bending stress

Virtual Number of Teeth
Z1 20
Zv  3
  20.93 ~
 21 teeth
cos  c o s3 10

Z v  21 teeth , X  0
yv  0.3955
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.13 A,
i1
b  0.7 [M t]  [b]
amby
5  1
 0.7   1169.04
20  0.3  6  0.3955
 344.8 kg f/cm 2  [b]
Step 17: Checking for surface stress

i1

i1
c  0.7
a  ib
E [M ]  [ ]
t c
5  1

51
 0.7 
20 
56
6
2.15  10  1169.04
 4708.3 kg f/cm 2  [c]
 The design is satisfactory based on bending stress

and surface stress
Problem 2.31: A helical gear with 30 helix angle has to

transmit 35 kW at 1500 rpm, with a speed reduction ratio 2.5.
If the pinion has 24 teeth, determine necessary module, pitch
diameter, and face width for 20 full depth teeth. Assume 15
Ni 2 Cr 1 Mo 15 material for both pinion and wheel. [Assume
Lg  10,000 hrs]
Solution
Step 1
Material selection
Given that material used is
15 Ni 2 Cr 1 Mo 15

[b]  320 N/mm2, [ c]  950 N/mm 2
L g  10,000 hrs
Step 2
Calculation of centre distance from P.S.G Data book,
Pg.No. 8.13


2
3  0.7  E [M t]
a  i  1  [ ]  i
 c 
i  2.5 given; [c]  950 N/mm2
E  2.15  105 N/mm2 assume for s te el
b
  0.3 (assume)
a
But P.S.G Data book, from Pg.No. 8.15
[M t]  k  k d M t
But from P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.15
kW
M t  97420 
N1
35
 97420 
1500
 2273 kg f cm
Initially assume k  k d  1.3
 [M t]  1.3  2273
 2954.9 kg f cm
 [M t]  295490 Nmm


2 5
3  0.7  2.15  10  295490
 a  2.5  1   
 950  2.5  0.3
 125.39
~
 126 mm
Step 3
Calculation of module
Z1  24 given
 Z 2  i Z 1  2.5  24  60 teeth
2a cos 
mn 
Z1  Z2
2  126  cos 30


24  60
m n  2.59
The standard module m n  3 is chosen
Now revise ‘a’
mn Z1 3  24
d1    83.13 mm
cos  cos 30
d2  i d1  2.5  88.13  207.82 mm

d1  d2 88.13  207.82
a a
2 2
 147.975 mm ~
 148 mm
Step 4
Calculation of face width ‘b’
ba
 0.3  147.975
 44.39 mm ~
 45 mm
ADDITIONAL PROBLEMS
April 1998
It is desired to determine the proportions of a spur
gear drive to transmit 8 kW from a shaft rotating at 1200
rpm to a low speed shaft, with a reduction of 3:1. Assume
that the teeth are 20 full depth involute, with 24 teeth of
the pinion. The pinion is made to be of 40 C 8 normalized
and gear of 30 C 8 normalized steel. Assume that the
starting torque is 130 percent of the rated torque.
April 1998
A compressor running at 360 rpm is driven by 150
kW, 1440 rpm motor through a pair of 20 full depth helical
gears having helix angle of 25. The center distance is
approximately 400 mm. The motor pinion is to be forged
steel and the driven gear is to be cast steel. Assume
medium shock conditions. Design the gear pair.
October 2001
A pair of helical gears is to transmit 10 kW at 1200
rpm with a speed reduction of 4. Design the gear drive
assuming suitable material.
October 2000
Design a pair of spur gears to transmit 10 kW 1500
rpm with a gear ratio of 3. Assume same material for both
wheels. Check for plastic deformation assuming
instantaneous torque is 50% higher than mean torque.
October 1998
Design a set of helical gears to transmit 80 HP to
effect a speed reduction of 2.5:1 with pinion connected to
motor rotating at 1440 rpm. The teeth of gears are of full
depth 20 pressure angle to the normal plane. Peripheral
pitch line velocity may be limited to 600 meter per minute.
Assume gear and pinion are to be made of forged steel
having ultimate tensile strength of 6000 kg/cm 2. The pinion
is properly heat treated to obtain hardness of 240 BHN.
Assume service factor of 2 and number of teeth in pinion
 16 .
Chapter – 3
DESIGN OF BEVEL, WORM AND

CROSS HELICAL GEARS
Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and

stresses, equivalent number of teeth. Estimating the dimensions of
pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and
demeritsterminology. Thermal capacity, materials-forces and
stresses, efficiency, estimating the size of the worm gear pair. Cross
helical: Terminology-helix angles-Estimating the size of the pair of
cross helical gears.
3.1 INTRODUCTION
Bevel gears are used to transmit power between two
intersecting shafts. There are two types of bevel gears -
Straight and spiral. Incase of straigth bevel gears, the teeth
are straight, which converge into a common apex. Incase
of spiral bevel gears, the teeth are curved. Straight bevel
gears are easy to design and manufacture. These gears
produce noise at high speed conditions.
Spiral bevel gears are difficult to design and

manufacture. These gears facilitate a quiet operations, even
at high speeds.
In general, the angle between the axes of intersecting

shafts is 90. i.e., the axes of the shafts are at right angles.
3.2 TYPES OF BEVEL GEARS

Bevel gears are used to connect two intersecting
shafts.
um
end
dum
Add
d en
De
b
PC D
( ,n sid e)
R oot
O D iam eter
PC D  Tip
(O u ts ide)
D iam eter
R = C on e D is ta nce
b =Fa ce W idth
Se m i C o ne A ng le
( o r P itc h Angle) a f
a Ad dend um Angle
f D edend um A ng le Fig. 3.1. P arameter of bevel gear
1. Straight bevel gears 1. Axes intersect

2. Zerol bevel gears 2. Axes intersect
3. Sprial bevel gears 3. Axes intersect and teeth are
curved and oblique (less
noisy)
4. Face gears 4. Spur gear pinion meshes with
a ring gear having conjugate
teeth cut into the face of it.
5. Skew bevel gears 5. Axes are non-parallel and
non-intersecting. Teeth are
parallel
Design of Bevel,Worm and Cross Helical Gears 3.3
 
o
< 90 (A cu te) o
= 9 0 (R igh t)
(a) (b)
z2


o
> 9 0 (O b tu se ) z1 M itre B evel
o
= 90 G ea rs
(c) Fig. 3.2. (d) z 1 = z 2 = no o f te e th in ea ch g e ar.
6. Hypoid gears 6. Axes are non-parallel,

non-intersecting. Teeth are
curved. Used in
Automobile differential units
3.3 BEVEL GEAR NOMENCLATURE
o
= 90
f
M
 a
 1
d1
a 
f1
2 a1 a2
mt
f2
b mt
R a ha
b
mm
hf
d2 s = ab
d a2
Fig. 3.3. N o m e n clature of s tan d ard b evel G e ars
1. Pitch cone: It is an imaginary cone that rolls without

slipping on a pitch surface of another gear.
2. Cone Centre: It is the point where the axes of two
mating gears intersect each other. It may be also defined
as the apex of the pitch cone.
3. Pitch Angle: It is the angle made by the pitch line of
a gear with the gear axes. It is denoted by 
4. Cone Distance: It is the length of the pitch cone

element. It is also known as pitch cone radius and is
denoted by R
Pitch Radius d 1/2 d2/2

R  
sin  sin 1 sin 2
1
R
2


d 21  d 22
For Right angle gears
1
R m
2 t

 Z 21  
Z 22
where
d 1 & d2  Pitch circle diameter of pinion and
gear.
Z1 & Z2  Number of teeth of pinion and gear.
1 & 2  Pitch angle of pinion and gear.
mt  Transverse module
5. Addendum Angle  a: It is the angle subtended by

the addendum of the tooth at the cone centre.
 addendum   ha 
a  tan  1   tan  1  
 cone distan ce   R 
6. Dedendum Angle  f: It is the angle substended by

the dedendum of the tooth at the cone centre.
 dedendum   hf 
f  tan  1    tan  1  
 cone distance   R 
7. Tip Angle (Face Angle): It is the angle substended

by the root of the tooth at the cone centre. It is denoted
by a
a  Pitc h Angle  Addendum Angle
   a
8. Root Angle: It is the angle subtended by the root of

the tooth at the cone centre. It is denoted by f
f  Pitch Angle  Dedendum Angle
   f
9. Back Cone: It is an imaginary cone, perpendicular to

the pitch cone at the end of the tooth. It is also known as
normal cone.
10. Back cone distance: It is the length of the back

cone. It is also known as back cone radius.
11. Backing: It is the distance of the pitch point from

the back of the boss, parallel to the axis of the gear.
12. Mounting height: It is the distance of the back of

the boss from the cone centre.
13. Pitch diameter: It is the diameter of the largest

pitch circle.
14. Outside (or) addendum cone diameter: It is the

maximum diameter of the teeth of the gear. It is equal to
the diameter of the blank from which the gear can be cut.
Outside Diameter  Pitch diameter  2  h ac o s 
15. Inside (or) dedendum cone diameter: Inside

diameter  Pitch diameter  2hf  cos 
Where
ha  Addendum
hf  Dedendum
3.4 FORMATIVE (OR) EQUIVALENT (OR) VIRTUAL

NUMBER OF TEETH FOR BEVEL GEARS
Bevel gears are replaced by equivalent spur gears, to
simplify the design calculation and analysis. An Imaginary
spur gear considered in a plane perpendicular to the tooth
at the largest end, is called as virtual spur gear. The pitch
cone radius ‘R’ of the bevel gear is equal to the pitch circle
radius of the virtual spur gear.
The number of teeth on this imaginary spur gear is
called virtual number of teeth.
Mathematically,
For pinion For gear

Z Z1 Z2
Zv  Z v1  Z v2 
cos  cos 1 cos 2
Where
Z1 & Z2 are the actual number of teeth on the
pinion and gear of the bevel gear
respectively.
Z v1 & Z v2 are the virtual number of teeth on the
pinion and gear of the bevel gear respectively.
3.5 TOOTH STRESS (OR) STRENGTH OF BEVEL GEARS

Lewis Equation
The strength of a bevel gears tooth is obtained in the
similar way as that of the spur gear. The modified form of
the Lewis equation for the tangential tooth load is given
here.
Rb
F s  [b] b    m  yv  
 R 
[b] – Allowable Static Stress

b – Face width
m – Module
yv – Lewis Factor (or) tooth form factor for the
equivalent number of teeth.
R – Cone distance


d21 d22
R 
2 2
d1 – Pitch Circle Diameter of pinion

d2 – Pitch Circle Diameter of gear
Rb
 R  is a bevel factor.
 
3.6 DYNAMIC LOAD FOR BEVEL GEARS

The dynamic load for bevel gears may be obtained in
the similar way as that of spur gear.
Buckingham’s Dynamic load
Fd  F t  F I
 0.164 V m  cb  F t 
 Ft   
 0.164Vm  1.485  
cb  F t 
All the notations are similar to spur gear deign.
3.7 WEAR STRENGTH FOR BEVEL GEARS

The maximum (or) limiting load of wear strength of
bevel gear is given here.
d1 b Q v kw
Fw 
cos
Qv – Ratio factor based on the virtual number of

teeth.
 – Pitch Angle
b – Face width
kw – Load stress factor
2 Z v2
Qv 
Z v1  Z v2
Note: According to Buckingham’s the wear load should be

greater than dynamic load for safe design.
3.8 FORCE ACTING ON THE BEVEL GEAR

The normal force F N on the tooth is perpendicular
to the tooth profile and thus makes an angle equal to the
pressure Angle  to the pitch circle. Thus the normal force
can be resolved into two components.
(i) Tangential component F T
(ii) Radial component F R
The bearing reactions are produced by tangential

component (or) tangential tooth load.
The end thrust in the shaft is produced by the radial

component.
FT
cos  
FN
FT  FN c o s 
FN
F R V= F R FR
FR 
R FT
b
F RH= F A
G ea r S ha ft
Rm

o
=p re ssu re an gle = 2 0
P itch co ne a ng le fo r p in io n
b =fac e w id th O ver H an g
R = con e distan ce D ista n ce
Fo rc es a ctin g o n
Fig. 3.4 .
B ev el G ea r
FR
sin  
FN
F R  F N sin 
FR
tan  
FT
F R  F T tan 
These Forces are considered to act at the mean radius

R m. From the Fig. 3.4.
 d1 
R m  R  b/2 sin 1 ;  sin 1  
 2R 
d1 FR
R m  R  b/2 V FR
2R
FR
The radial force F R  acting at the Fig. 3.5 H
mean radius Rm  may be further resolved

into two components.
F RH and F RV in the axial and radial directions
respectively are shown in Fig. 3.5.
The axial force acting on the pinion shaft
FR
H
sin 1 
FR
. .
 . FR  F T tan 
F R  FR sin 1
H
 F T tan  sin 1
The radial force acting on the pinion shaft
FR
V
cos 1 
FR
F R  FR c o s 1
V . .
( . FR  FT tan 
 F T tan  cos 1
It shows that the axial force on the pinion shaft is

equal to the radial force on the gear shaft but in opposite
directions, likewise, the radial force on the pinion shaft is
equal to the axial force on the gear shaft, but in opposite
directions.
3.9 BASIC DIMENSIONS OF BEVEL GEAR PAIR
Formulae for straight and

Nomenclature Symbol
spiral bevel gears
Transverse mt y  0.5 b sin 
mt  m
m y  mm 
module  Z
Mean Module mm
Normal Module mn mn  mt cos 
Cone Distance R
R  0.5 mt Zi
 1
i2 
 0.5mt Z21  Z22


mt Z1 mt Z2
 
2 sin 1 2 sin 2
Reference d d1  mt Z1 ; d2  mt Z2.
Diameter
Tip Diameter da da1  mt Z1  2 cos 1 ;
da2  mt Z1  2 cos 2
Face Width b b ~ 0.3 R or 10 mt whichever is
smaller
For spiral bevel, see chart, p.8.40
Number of Teeth Z Z1, Z2 ; Z1  iZ2
Number of teeth Zc w 2R
Zcw 
on crown wheel mt
Minimum number ZU 2X cos 
ZU  ; X  1,
of teeth on sin2
pinion to avoid for uncorrected gears)
undercutting
Pressure Angle    20 usually
Mean spiral angle m m usually 30 to 35 ; 35
preferred.   0 for ZEROL BEVEL
y R
y 
b
Formulae for straight and

Nomenclature Symbol
spiral bevel gears
Reference angle  tan   i ; 1  90  2
Addendeum angle a m t f0
tan a1  tan a2 
R
Dedendum angle f mt f0  c
tan f1  tan f2 
R
Height factor f0 f0  1 ; standards
Clearance C C  0.2
Tip angle a a    a
Root angle f f    f
Straight Bevel Spiral Bevel
Tooth height h h  ha  hf h  1.88 mt

for   20
Working depth hw hw  2mt hw  1.7 mt
for   20
Addendum ha ha  mt ha1  hw  ha2
ha2  mt Ca
Select Ca from
Table 31a.
dedendum hf hf  1.1236 mt
(Reinecker)
 1.67mt (AEG) hf  h  ha1
1
 1.88 mt (Gleason) hf  h  ha2

2
Circular tooth S S1   mt  S2 S1   mt  S2
thickness
Straight Bevel Spiral Bevel
 mt  mt
S2   S2  
2 2
ha1  ha2 tan  1.22 ha1  ha2
 Kmt tan   Kamt
Select K from Select K2 from

table 31 b chart, p.8.42
Virtual number Zv Z Z
Zv  Zv 
of teeth cos  cos  cos2 m
Zv min  18 for   20 and f0  1

1
Face contact ratio  t bRtan m

f
 mt R  0.5b
Corrected gear usually S

correction is
applied. To avoid
undercutting the
correction factor
Xou  1 
2f0 cos1
Z1 sin2 
Nomenclature of Standard Bevel Gears

R  Cone radius
b  Face width
  90  (Angle between two shafts)

Angles
Pinion Wheel
a  addendum angle a  addendum angle
1 2
f  dedendum angle f  dedendum angle

1 2
a  tip angle a  tip angle

1 2
f  root angle f  root angle

1 2
1  semi-cone angle of 2  semi-cone angle of

pinion (1) wheel (2)
b  sin 1
1. Transverse module  m t  m m 
Z1
where
m m  mean module or average m odule
b  face width
1  semi cone angle for pin ion
Z 1  no. of teeth on pinion
1  2  90
Z2
But, tan 2  i 
Z1
Calculate 2, then 1  90  2
where 2  semi cone angle of wheel.

2. Normal module  mn  m t  cos m (only for spiral

bevel gear)
where m  mean spiral angle
 30 to 35 Gen eral
3. Cone distance (R)

R  0.5 m t  Z 1 

i2 1  0.5 m t 
Z21  
Z22
mt  Z1 m t  Z2
 
2 sin 1 2 sin 2
4. Pitch circle diameter (outside) of pinion

 d1  m t  Z 1
Pitch circle diameter (outside) of gear or wheel

 d2  m t  Z2
5. Tip dia. of pinion  d a  m tZ1  2 cos 1

1
6. Tip dia. of wheel or gear  d a  m tZ 2  2 cos 2

2
7. Face width b  0.3R or 10 m t. Consider whichever

is smaller.
R
y 
b
From PSG Data book table (13); P.No. 8.15,
for i  1 to 4   y  3
for i  4 to 6   y  4
In general, take y  3
R
3
b
R
b
3
8. Addendum angle  a
m t  fo
tan  a  tan a 
1 2 R
where fo  height factor
9. Dedendum angle   f
m tfo  c
tan f  tan f 
1 2 R
Where c  clearance
10. Virtual number of teeth Zv
Z Z1
Zv  ; Zv 
cos  1 cos 1
Z2
Zv 
2 cos 2
11. Tip angle a  1  a (pinion) a  2  a (wheel)

1 1 2 2
12. Root angle f  1  f pinion) f  2   f (wheel)

1 1 2 2
3.11 DESIGN OF STRAIGHT BEVEL GEARS USING

LEWIS AND BUCKINGHAM EQUATIONS
Step 1:
For a given problem, note down the given parameters
like, power, speed, gear ratio (i) etc...

To determine the strength of gear and pinion, use
procedure similar to the spur gear design.
Step 3: Calculation of Pitch Angles 1 & 2
1  2  90 ; tan 2  i
2  tan  1 i
Step 4: Calculation of virtual number of teeth

Z1 Z2
Z v1  ; Z v2 
cos 1 cos 2
Z2
 i if Z 1 is n ot given, Assume Z 1  20 
Z1
HP  75
Ft  kg f
vm
[1 kgf of ~
 10 Newton]
vm  Pitch line velocity m/sec.
HP  75
Ft   10 N
vm
The above step is similar to spur gear.

Step 6: Calculation of Dynamic Load F d
Fd Cv Nsf km Ft
From the data book Pg.8.52 N sf  survival factor

[N sf  1 to 2]
3.5  

vm
[C v  ] [when vm  5 m /s]
3.5
km  load distribution factor.
Choose k m value From PSG pg data book Pg.8.52
b
[ b] b yv 1 
R
Fs 
Pd
From PSG data book Pg no.8.52
Diametrical Pitch P d

Pd  Pc  Circular Pitch
Pc
d
Pc 
Z
b  Face width in cm
R  Cone Distance in cm
yv  Lewis form factor based on virtual number of

teeth.
10
b  0.3 R (or)
Pd
m t  transverse module in cm
From PSG Data book Pg 8.52
Step 8: Calculation of Transverse Module m t
We know that, For satisfactory design

F s  Fd
By equating this two factors, we can calculate the

module m t
Step 9: Calculation of Face Width (b)
10  Z1 
b  0.3 R (or)  P d1  d 
Pd
1  1 
Step 10: Calculation of Pitch Circle Diameter d 1
d1  m t  Z1
Step 11: Calculation of Pitch Line Velocity

 d 1N 1
V m/s
60  1000 d1  in mm
N1  rpm
Step 12: Recalculation of Strength of gear tooth

(Fs
  b 
[ b ] b y v  1    
  R 
Fs 
Pd
  b 
Fs  [ b] b yt   1    
 R
Step 13: Calculation of Buckingham’s Dynamic Load

Fd
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  F t   
 0.164 Vm  1.485 
cb  Ft 
The calculation of dynamic load is similar to spur

gear, where Vm should be taken for largest pitch circle.
Step 14: Checking for beam strength

For safe design Fs  Fd
This step is similar to spur gear
Step 15: Calculation of Wear Load Fw 
d ib Q v kw
Fw 
cos 1
Qv  Ratio factor based on virtual number of teeth.
kw  Load stress factor
 1 1 
[c] sin   
E 1 E2 
kw   
1.4
. . 1
. If  is not given, assume  14
2
Step 16: Checking of Wear Strength

For safe design F w  F d
Step 17: Calculate the Basic Dimensions of Straight

Bevel Gear
From PSG data book pg 8.39
Step 18: Draw the neat sketch of straight bevel gear.

DESIGN OF BEVEL GEARS (Simple steps)
(Refer PSG Data book Page Nos. 8.50 to 8.53)

By using Lewis and Buckingham’s equation.
Step 1
 b 
[ b] b  Yv  1  
 R 
F s  Beam strength 
Pd ... (1)
  1
But P d  diametrical pitch   
P c  m t mt
P c   m t
where m t  Transeverese module  in cm.
Y v    yv where yv  virtual
form factor based on
virtual no. of teeth.
Z v 
0.912 Z1
yv  0.154  for 20  involute Zv 
Zv c o s 1
0.684 1  2  90 
 0.124  for 1412 involute
Zv
0.95 tan 2  i
 0.175  for 20 involute stub
Zv
Calculate 2 and
then 1
Z v  18 for 20
involute teeth
Replace Y v and P d in the above equation (1) then
 b 
Beam strength  Fs  [ b] b  yv  m t  1  
 R ... (2)
where [b]  allowable static strength in kg f  cm 2
m t  transverse module in cm.
b  face width in cm.
Note
If b is not given in the problem, take from PSG
databook. P.No. 8.52
10  
b  0.3 R or B ut P d  
Pd Pc  mt
 0.3 R to 10 m t
cone distanc eor  

R
cone length   0.5 m t 
Z21  Z22 in cm

Dynamic load  F d  F t  C v in kgf
3.5  vm

For straight bevel. C v 
3.5 [when vm  5 m  sec ]
where, vm  mean velocity in m  sec
F t  Transmitted load  75
  HP 
or Tangential tooth load vm

Refer PSG Data book Page. No. 8.51
 d 1 av N 1
Where vm  mean velocity  m  sec
60  100
 R  0.5b 
d 1 av  m t Z 1  
 R 
Calculate vm, F t and C v and substitute the values in
the equation of F d
 Dynamic load  F d  F t  C v ... (3)
For satisfactory design, F s  F d.
To find transverse module (m t, Equate the

equations (2) and (3) and calculate m t in cm.
Take standard value of mt in mm from PSG Data

book P.No. 8.2 table (1).
Step 2
Buckingham’s Dynamic load from PSG Data book Pg
No 8.50
 0.164 Vm cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
 
(Similar to equation for the spur gear)
V m  mean velocity in m/min
C  calculation is similar to spur gear
b  face width in cm
F t  transmitted load in k gf
Fs  Fd Then the design is satisfactory based on

the Beam strength.
Note
If F s  F d, change the transverse module m t, and
recalculate d1 av, vm, F t, F S, b and R.
Calculate again F d and check in the 2nd trail, If
F S  F d then the design is satisfactory.
Step 3
b  d1  Q  k d 1  PCD of
Wear load  F w 
cos 1 pinion.
 Z 1  m t  cm
Fw  Fd Then the design tan 2  i
is satisfactory     90
i 2
based on wear
Cal. 1
strength
Note: If F w  F d then change the k  calculate as
material, Similar to spur
recalculate k  Gear Design
procedure.
and calcuculate again F w
In the 2nd  2i
 Q
trail  i1
If F w  F d

LEWIS METHOD
Problem 3.1 A pair of cast iron bevel gears connect two shafts
at right angles. The pitch diameter of the pinion and gear are
80 mm and 100 mm respectively. The tooth profiles of the gears
1
are of 14 composite form. The allowable static stress for both
2
the gears is 55 MPa. If the pinion transmits 2.75 kW at

1100 rpm, find the module and number of teeth on each gear
and check the design for wear strength. Take surface endurance
limit as 630 MPa. and modulus of elasticity for cast iron as
84 kN/mm2
LEWIS METHOD
Solution:
Step 1:
Given Data:
Material for pinion and gear cast iron
Pitch diameter of pinion d1  80 mm
Pitch diameter of gear d2  100 mm
1
Pressure Angle   14
2
Allowable Static Stress [b]  55 MPa  55  106 N/m 2
 55 N/mm 2
. .
[ . 1 N /m 2  10  6N/mm 2]
Power P  2.75 kW  2.75  10 3 W
Speed of Pinion N 1  1100 rpm
Surface endurance  e  630 MPa  630  10 6 N/m 2
 630 N/mm 2
Modulus of Elasticity
E 1  E 2  84 kN/mm 2  84  10 3 N/mm2
Step 2:
d2 100
Calculation of pitch angles i   1.25
d1 80
2  tan  1 i  2  tan  11.25 
2  51.34 
1  2  90 
1  90  51.34
1  38.65 
Step 3:
Selection of Materials
Pinion - Cast Iron
Gear - Cast Iron
Step 4:
Calculation of virtual number of teeth

Z1
Z v1  In this problem, don’t assume Z 1 value
cos 1
initially, because, we have to determine the accurate value
of Z 1.
d1
Z1 
mt
d1 80
Z v1  
m t c o s 1 m t cos 38.65 
102.43

mt
d2 100
Z v2  
m t cos 2 m t cos 51.34 
160.07

mt
Step 5:
HP  75
Ft  kgf
vm
2.75  10 3
Power   3.6666 H.P
750 d 1  mm
N  rp m
 d1 N1   80  1100
vm    4.6076 m/s
60  1000 60  1000
3.6666  75
Ft   59.682
4.6076
F t  59.682 kg f  596.82 N (1kg f ~

 10 Newton)
Step 6:
Calculation of Dynamic load Fd
F d  C v Nsf km F t
km  1 from PSG data book pg 8.52 [Both gears

straddle mounted].
N sf  1 (Assume) From PSG data book pg 8.52

3.5   vm

Cv 
3.5
Fo r straight bevel gears 

 For commercially cut wheels.
vm  5 m/s

From PSG Data Book pg 8.52.
3.5  
4.6076
Cv   1.6132
3.5
F d  C v  N sf k m F t  1.6132  1  1  596.82
F d  962.8466 N
Step 7:
 b  10
F s  [ b] by v   m t  1   b  0.3R (Or)
 R  Pd
0.684 1
yv  0.124  F or 14 involute
Zv1 2
0.684 mt
 0.124 
102.43
 0.124  6.6777  10 3m t
 b 
F s  [b]   m t  b  yv  1  
 R 
 0.3R 
 55    m t  b  0.124  6.6777  10  3 m t  1
 R 
 55    m t  0.3  64  0.124  6.677  10  3 m t 1  0.3 
F s  287.96 m t  15.507 m 2t
1
[R 
2

 d 21  d 22
1

2

 2
80 2  100
 64.03 ~
 64 ]
Step 8: Calculation of transverse module m t
For safe design; F s  Fd
287.96 m t  15.507 m 2t  962.8466
By solving this equation,
m t  4.37 or 14.19 14.19 is to o high, so neglected
m t  4.37 mm
From PSG Data book, the standard module

mt  5 mm pg 8.2
Step 9: Calculation of Face Width b
b  0.3  R  0.3  64  19.2 ~

 20 mm
Step 10: Calculation of teeth Z1 & Z 2

d1  m t  Z1  d 2  m t  Z2

d1  d2
Z1   Z2 
mt  mt

80  100
 
5  5


Z 1  16  Z 2  20

Step 11:
Calculation of pitch line velocity v m  or v 1
v1  4.6076 m/s
Step 12:
Recalculation of strength of gear tooth Fs
F s  287.96 m t  15.507m 2t
mt  5
F s  287.96  5  15.507 52
 1052.125 N
Step 13:
Calculation of wear load F w
d 1 b Q v kw
Fw 
c o s 1
102.43 102.43
Zv1    20.486
mt 5
160.07 160.07
Zv2    32.014
mt 5
2 Z v2 2  32.014
Qv    1.295
Z v1  Zv2 20.486  32.014 
 1 1 
[ 2e ] sin   
E1 E2 
kw   
1.4
[c]  630 N/mm 2

1
  14
2
E 1  E 2  84  103 N /mm2
1  1 1 
[630 2]  sin 14  
2  84  10 3 84  10 3 
kw   
1.4
2.36609

1.4 b  20 mm
kw  1.69
cos 1  cos 38.65   0.7809
d 1 b Q v kw
Fw 
cos 1
80  20  1.2195  1.69

0.7809
3297.528

0.7809
F w  4222.72 N
Step 14:
Checking for Wear
Fw  Fd
4222.72 N  962.84 N
 The design is safe based on wear condition.
Answer
Module m  5 mm
Pinion Z1  16
Gear Z2  20
Problem 3.2: Design a right angle bevel gear drive with speed
of pinion shaft  300 rpm and that of the gear shaft  150
rpm; pinion is to have 20 teeth of involute profile with module
of 20 mm and a pressure angle of 20 and is to be of suitable
material. Gear is of forged steel having allowable stress of
1500 kg/cm2, kW at gear shaft  56; Assume service factor
 2; (May / June - 2008)
LEWIS METHOD
Given Data:
Speed of pinion shaft  N 1  300 rpm
Speed of gear shaft  N 2  150 rpm
No. of teeth on pinion  Z 1  20 teeth
Module  m t  20 mm
Pressure angle    20
Gear is of forged steel with allowable static stress
 [  b ]gear  1500 kgf/cm 2
Power at gear shaft  56 kW  56  10 3 watts
Service factor 2
Z2 N1 300
i  speed reduction    2
Z1 N2 150
Z 1  20 teeth
 Z 2  40 teeth

R  cone distance (or) cone length  0.5 mt   Z 21  
Z 22
 0.5  20 

20 2  40 2
 447.21 mm
Assume pinion is also made of same material, forged

steel,
[b]gea r  1500 kg f/c m2
The design is based on gear.
[Because, the power given is the power at gear shaft.]
Assume face width  b  0.3R  0.3  447.21
 134.163 mm
 13.4163 cm
Step 1
 b 
Beam strength  F s  [ b ] b    yv  mt  1  
 R  ... (1)
From PSG Databook, Pg No. 8.52
F S  1500  13.4163  Z1 Z2
ZV  
 13.4163  cos 1 cos 2
  0.1438  2   1 
 44.721  But
 12,728 kg f/cm 2 1  2  90 ; tan 2  i  2
2  63.43 
 Beam Strength
FS  12,728 kg f/cm 2
40
ZV 
cos 63.43 
1  90  2  26.57
 89.42   90 teeth
0.912
y v  0.154 
Z V gear
0.912
 0.154 
90
 0.1438
Step 2
75
Transmitted load (or) tangential tooth load  F t  H P 
vm
Power transmitted by gear shaft  56 kW
 76.08 HP
d1 av  N1
vm  mean velocity  m/sec or
60  100
d2  N2
av
 m /sec
60  100
 R  0.5b 
d2  m tZ 2  
av
 R 
 447.21  0.5  134.163 

 20  40  
 447.21 
 680 mm  68 cm
  68  150
vm   5.34 m /sec
100  60
76.08  75
Transmitted load  F t 
5.34
 1068.53 kgf/cm 2
Buckingham’s dynamic load
 0.164 Vm cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
F t  1068.53 kg f/cm2
V m  5.34  60  320.4 m/min
b  13.416 cm
For (c) value, from table (42)

for 10 mm module e  0.09 mm
Commercially cut gears
for 20 mm module also, take same value.
From table (41),
20 involute teeth form,
c  11860  0.09  1067.4
Buckingham Dynamic load

 0.164 Vmcb  F t 
 Fd  Ft   
 0.164V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
 0.164  320.4 1067.4  13.416  1068.53  

F d  1068.53   
 0.164  320.4  1.485

1067.4  13.416  1068.53 
 52.54515388.7684  
 1068.53   
 52.545  184.216 
 1068.53  3415.27  4483.8 kgf/cm 2

Beam strength F S  12,728 kg f/cm2 ; F d  4483.8 kgf/cm 2
 FS  Fd
 The design is satisfactory based on beam strength.
Step 3
To check for wear strength,
b  d 1  Qv  k w
Fw 
cos 1
b  face width  13.4163 cm
d1  m tZ 1  20  20  400 mm  40 cm
2i 22 4
Qv     1.333
i1 21 3
1  26.57 
sin   1 1 
k  [  c ]2 
1.4  E 1 E 2 
 
[ c ]  C R  H RC  k cl P.No. 8.16 PSG Data book
 220  60  0.6177
 8153.83 kg f/cm 2
. .
. Forged steel, HRC  55 to 63
Take HRC  60
C R  220
k cl assume life 10,000 hrs Refer PSG Data book
(P.No. 8.17)
N  300  60  10,000
 18  10 7 cycles

 

6 107 6 10 7
kcl  
N 18  10 7
 0.6177
Take
E 1  E 2  2.15  10 6 kgf/cm 2 P.No. 8.14 PSG Data book
sin 20  1 1 
 k w  8153.83 2 
1.4  2.15  10 6 2.15  10 6 
 
 15,109 kg/cm2
13.4163  40  1.33  15.109

Fw 
cos 26.57 
 12,057 kg f/cm 2,
But F d  4483.8 kgf/cm 2 [ Fw  Fd]

strength.
Problem 3.3: A pair of 20 full depth involute teeth bevel
gears connect two shafts at right angles having a velocity ratio
of 3:1. The gear is made of cast steel with permissible stress
of 100 N/mm2. The pinion transmits 37.5 kW at 750 rpm.
Determine (1) module and face width and (2) pitch diameters.
1
Assume face width   Length of Pitch cone.
3
(Nov/Dec 2007)
LEWIS METHOD
Given Data:
Pressure angle  20
i3
Permissible stress  [ b]  100 N /mm 2  10
 1000 kgf/c m2
P  37.5 kW  50.95 HP .
1 HP  736 Watts
Speed of pinion  N  750 rpm
1
Face width b  Length of pitch cone
3
1
 R
3
(Pitch cone length (or) cone distance)
b
[b] b Yv [1  ]
R
From PSG data book, F s 
Pd
(Replace Y v & P d
 b 
F s  beam strength  [b] b  yv mt  1  
 R  Yv   yv
 
Pd  
Pc  m t
1

mt
1  1
 1000  R    0.1125  m t  1  
3  3
 78.539 m t  R kg f
1  2  90 Z1 20
Zv    21.08  22
cos 1 cos 18.53
(assume Z 1  20 teeth
tan 2  i  3 0.912 0.912
yv  0.154   0.154 
Zv 22
2  71.56  0.1125
1  18.43,
Beam strength  F s  78.53 m t R kg f

... (1)
Dynamic load  F d  F t  C v
75 Power (P)  37.5 kW

F t  HP 
vm  50.95 HP
But  d av N 1
vm  m/sec
100  60
Z 1  20 teeth  R  0.5b 
d1  mt Z1  
av
 R 
Z 2  i  Z 1  3  20  60 teeth  0.5R 
 R 
3
 mt Z 1  .

R
 
R  0.5 m t 
 Z 22
Z 21  
R  0.5 m t 

20 2  60 2  R  0.166 R 
 mt  
 R 
 31.62 m t cm
 d1av N 1
vm 
100  60
  16.6797 mt  750


60  100
 6.55 mt m/sec
 F t  T ransmitted load
75
 50.95 
6.55 m t
 583.396 
  kgf
mt
 
vm 3.5  
3.5   
6.55 m t
Cv  
3.5 3.5
Dynamic load  Fd  F t  C v
583.396 3.5   6.55 m

t
 
mt 3.5 ... (2)
Substitute the value of R in Eq. (1)
Beam Strength F s  78.53 m t R
 78.53  m t  31.62 m t
 2483.1186 m t2  kgf ... (1)
Equate eq (1) and eq (2); Fs  Fd then check

Fw  Fd
583.396 3.5   6.55 m

t
m t2  
mt 3.5
Calculate m t by trial and error method,

Trail 1
Let m t  0.5 cm
LHS  620.779 RHS  1770.08
LHS  RHS
Not Satisfactory
Trail 2
Let m t  0.6 cm
LHS  893.922 RHS  1523.05
LHS  RHS
Trail 3
Let m t  0.65 cm
LHS  1049.1176 RHS  1426.65
LHS  RHS
Trail 4
Let m t  0.62 cm
LHS  954.51 ; RHS  1482
LHS  RHS
Trail 5
Let m t  0.7
LHS  1216.72 ; RHS  1343
LHS  RHS
Trail 6
Let m t  0.72
LHS  1287.24 RHS  1313
LHS  RHS
Trail 7
Let m t  0.725
LHS  1305.18 ; RHS  1305.69
LHS  RHS
Therefore, select
m t  T rans verse m odu le  0.725 mm  7.25 cm
According to the standard value of normal module mt
Refer PSG Data book P. No. 8.2 and Table 1
The standard normal module mt  8 mm
 Cone distance
 R  31.62  m t  31.62  0.8  25.296 c m
Cone distance (or) Length of pitch cone (R)

 152.96 mm
R 252.96
Face width:  b    84.32 mm
3 3
Pitch diameters:
Pitch dia. of pinion d1  m tZ 1  8  20  160 mm
Pitch dia. of wheel d2  m tZ 2  8  60  480 mm.
Here check F w  F d
Problem 3.4 Design a bevel gear to transmit a power of 9

kW at 200 rpm of the pinion. Gear Ratio is 3, material used
is C20. Ultimate tensile strength u is 500 N/mm2, Yield
strength y is 260 N/mm2 (May/June 2013)
LEWIS METHOD
Solution:
Step 1:
Given Data:
Power  9 kW  9  10 3 W
Pinion Speed N 1  200 rpm
Gear Ratio i  3
Material used for pinion and gear  C20
u (ultimate strength)  500 N/mm 2
y (yield strength)  260 N/mm 2

Step 2:
Selection of Materials
Pinion  C20 ; Gear  C20
Step 3:
Calculation of pitch angles 1 & 2
tan 2  i
2  tan  1 3
2  71.56  ; 1  2  90
1  90  71.56 
1  18.43
Step 4:

Z1
Z v1 
cos 1 Z 1  20 (Assume)
20
 21.08 ~
 22
cos 18.43 
Z2
i
Z1
Z 2  3  22
Z 2  66
Z2 66
Z v2  
cos 2 cos 71.56 
Z v2  2086 ~
 209
Step 5:
HP  75
Ft  kgf
vm
9  10 3
Power  HP
750 d 1  m tZ 1
d 1  20m t
 12 HP
 d 1N 1   20 mt  200
v1  
60 60  1000
209.439
v1  mt m/s
100
v1  0.2094 mt m/s
12  75
Ft 
0.2094  mt
4297.99
Ft  kg f
mt
Step 6:
Calculation of Dynamic load Fd
F d  C v N sf k m Ft
3.5  

vm
Cv 
3.5
From PSG data book pg No. 8.52

N sf  1 ; k m  1 (both gears straddle mounted)
Assume vm  5 m /s
3.5  5
Cv 
3.5
 1.6388
1.6388  1  1  4297.99
Fd 
mt
7043.553 70435.53
Fd  kgf  N
mt mt
Step 7:
 b
F s  [ b] b  yv    m t 1  
 R 
u 500
[ b]    166.66 N/mm 2
3 3
R~
b  0.33 R
3
b  0.33 R
b  10.43 mt
mt
R1 
2

 Z 21  
Z22
mt

2


20 2  60 2
R  31.62 mt
0.912
yv  0.154 
Zv
1 For 20 Involute   20 (Assume)
0.912
 0.154 
22
yv  0.1125
F s  166.66  10.43 mt  0.1125    m t 1  1/3
 409.56  m 2t N
Step 8:
Calculation of transverse module m t
We know that
Fs  Fd
70435.53
409.56 m 2t 
mt
70435.53
m 3t 
409.56
m t  3

171.978
m t  5.56 mm
mt ~
 6 mm
(From psg Data Book Pg. 8.2 1 Table 1.
Step 9:
Calculation of face width (b)

R~
b  10  mt  10  6
3
b  60 mm
Step 10:
Calculation of pitch circle diameter d 1
d 1  m 1Z1
 6  20
d 1  120
Step 11:
Calculation of pitch line velocity v 1
v1  0.2094  m t m/s
 1.2564 m/s
Step 12:
F s  409.56 m 2t N
 409.56  36 
 14744.16 N
Step 13:
Calculation of Buckingham’s Dynamic Load Fd
 0.164 Vm cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.468 

cb  Ft 
4297.99
Ft  kgf
mt
4297.99
 kgf
6
 716.33 kg f ~
 7163.3 N
V m  V 1  1.2564 m/s  60 m/m in
b  60 mm ~
 6 cm
c  11860 e for steel
e  0.015 m  6 mm  Precis ion gears
c  11860  0.015
c  177.9 kg f/cm
0.164 V m cb  F t
Fd  Ft 
0.164 V m  

1.468 cb  F t
substitute F t in kg f
b  in cm
V m  m/min
vm  m/s
c  kg f/cm
then we obtain F d in kg f
 0.164  1.2564  60177.9  6  716.33  
 716.33   

 0.164  1.2564  60  1.468  177.9  6  616.33 
22052.2118
 716.33 
74.36
 716.33  296.548
F d  1012.87 kgf ~
 10128.7 N
Step 14:
Checking for beam strength

Fs  Fd
14744.6  10128.7
Step 15:
Calculation of Wear Load Fw 
d 1bQvkw
Fw 
cos 1
d 1  120 mm
b  60 mm
2Zv2 2  209
Qv    1.809
Z v1  Z v2 22  209
cos 1  cos 18.43   0.9487 Assume kw  1 N /mm 2

kw -load stress factor.
120  60  1.809  1
Fw 
cos 1
 13729.102 N
Step 16:
Checking for Wear Strength

For satisfactory Design.
Fw  Fd
13729.102  10128.7 N
 The design is safe based on wear strength.

Step 17:
Calculation of Basic Dimensions of Straight Bevel

Gear.
From PSG Data book pg no. 8.39.
1. Reference (or) Lead Angle
1  18.43
2  71.56 
2. Addendum Angle  a
 mtf0 
a1   a2  tan  1  
 R 
61
 tan  1  
 190 
a1   a2  1.8 R  31.62 m t
 31.62  6
~
 189.72  190 mm
3. Dedendum Angle f
 f0  c 
f1   f2  tan  1  mt 
 R 
 6 1  0.2  
 tan  1  
 190 
 tan  1 0.03789 
f1   f2  2.17
4. Height Factor 0
0  1
5. Tip Angle a
a1  1  a1  a2  2  a2


 18.43  1.8   71.56  1.8
 20.23    73.36 

6. Root Angle t
t1  1   f1  t2  2  f2


 18.43  2.17   71.56  2.17
f1  16.26  t2  69.39 

7. Virtual number of teeth
Z v2  22 ; Z v2  209
Problem 3.5 Design a pair of bevel gears to transmit 15 kW

at the pinion speed of 1600 rpm, and the gear ratio is 4.
Material for gears 15 Ni 2 cr Mo 15 / steel. The tooth profiles
of the gears are of 20 composite form.
LEWIS METHOD
Solution
Step 1
Given Data
P  15 kW  15  10 3 W
N 1 pinion  1600 rpm
Gear ratio (i)  4
Material for pinion and gear  15 Ni 2Cr Mo 15 /

steel.

Step 2:
Selection of Material
Pinion - 15 Ni 2 Cr 1 Mo 15 / steel
Gear - 15 Ni 2 Cr 1 Mo 15 / steel
Step 3:
Calculation of Pitch Angles 1 & 2
tan 2  i 1  2  90
2  tan 14 1  90  75.96
2  75.96 1  14.03
Step 4:

Z1 Z2
Z v1  Assume Z 1  20 i
c o s 1 Z1
20 Z 2  4  20
  20.6 ~
 21
c o s 14.03  Z 2  80
Z2 80
Z v2    329.76 ~
 330
cos 2 cos 75.96 
Steps 5:
HP  75
Ft  kg f
vm
d1  m t  Z1
15  10 3 d1  20m t
P H.P
750
P  20 H.P
 d 1N 1   20m t  1600
vm    1.6755 m t
60  1000 60  1000
HP  75
Ft  kgf
Vm
20  75

1.6755 m t
895.255
 kg f
mt
Step 6:
Calculation of Dynamic Load F d
F d  Cv N sf k m F t
3.5  

vm
Cv  Ass ume vm ~
 5 m/s
3.5
[For bevel gears vm  5 m/s]
Choose k m & N sf From PSG data book pg 8.52
N sf  1 ; k m  1
[  both gears are straddle
mounted (Assume) ]
3.5  
5
Cv   1.6388
3.5
1.6388  1  1  895.255 1467.212

Fd   kg f
mt mt
14672.12
Fd  N
mt
Step 7:
Calculation of strength of gear tooth

 b
F s  [ b] byv 1      m t
 R 
Choose [ b] From PSG Data book pg.8.5
(For 15 Ni 2Cr 1 Mo 15 / steel.) (m t upto 6)
[ b]  3200 kgf/cm 2
1
 320 N/mm 2 1 kgf/cm 2  N/mm 2
10
 320 N /mm2
1
Always Assume b  R
3
mt
R
2

 Z 21  
Z 22
mt

2

 20 2  80 2
R  41.23 mt
0.912
yv1  0.154  For 20 Involute, From PSG data
Z v1
book pg 8.50
0.912
yv  0.154   yv  0.1105
21
b
F s  [ b] b y v1 1    m t
R
1   R 
 320   R   0.1105  1     mt
 3   3R 
 41.23 
 320    m t  0.1105 0.666     m t
 3 
F s  1016.78 m 2t
Step 8:
Calculation of Transverse module m t
We know that
Fs  Fd
14672.12
1016.78 m 2t 
mt
14672.12
m 3t 
1016.78
mt ~
 2.43
From PSG Data book Pg. 8.2; Table 1 standard

module
mt  3 mm
Step 9:

b  0.3  R R  41.22  m t
 0.3  123.69  37.107  41.23  3  123.69
b~
 38 mm R~
 124 mm
Step 10:
d1  mt Z 1
 3  20
d1  60 mm
Step 11:
Calculation of pitch line velocity v1
 d 1  1600   60  100
vm  v1l  
60  1000 60  1000
 5.0265 m/s
Step 12:
F s  1016.78 m 2t
 1016.78  9
 9151.02 N
Step 13:
Calculation of Buckingham’s Dynamic Load Fd
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 
 0.164 V m  1.485 

cb  F t 
 
895.255
Ft  kgf
mt
 298.418 kgf
To determine vm for bevel gear, take largest pitch

circle dia of gear.
d1  60 mm d2
i
d1
N1 d2  4  60
i
N2
N 2  N 1/i d2  240 mm
1600

4
N 2  400 rpm
 d2 N 2   240  400
vm  
60  1000 60  1000
vm  5.0265 m/s
From PSG data book pg 8.53 ; Table 41 & Table 42.
For 20 Full depth steel and steel  11860 e
e  0.0125 (Precision gears)
b~
 38 mm  3.8 cm
c  1160  0.0125
 148.25 kgf /c m
To calculate F d
Substitute V m in m/min ; b  in cm
F t  kg f b  38 mm  3.8 cm
Then obtain F d in kg f.
V m  5.0265  60 m/min
 301.5 m/m in
 0.164 V m cb  F t 
Fd  Ft   
 0.164 V m  1.468 

cb  Ft 
 0.164  301.59 148.25  3.8  298.418  

 298.418   
 0.164  301.59  1.468 

148.25  3.8  298.418 
42623.70
 298.418 
236.11
 298.418  180.52
F d  478.9 kgf ~
 4789 N
Step 14:

Fs  Fd
9151.02  4789
Step 15:
d 1b Q v kw
Fw 
cos 1
d 1  60 mm ; b  38 mm
2Z v2 2  330
Qv    1.8803
Z v1  Z v2 21  320
cos 1  cos 14.03   0.97
 1 1 
[2e ] sin   
E E2 
kw   1 
1.4
  20
From Data book pg 8.14 ; Table 9. (steel & steel)
E 1  E 2  2.15  106 kg f/cm 2
 2.15  10 5 N /mm2
kw  load Stress Factor
e  55 kg f/mm2 (steel) From PSG Data book pg

No.85; Table 7
e  550 N/mm2
 1 1 
5502  sin20   5
 5 
kw   2.15  10 2.15  10 
1.4
 0.687 N/mm2
d1b Q v kw 60  38  1.8803  0.687

Fw  
cos 1 0.97
F w  3038.3 N
Step 16:

F w  3038.3 N ; F d  4789.04 N
Fd  Fw
 The design is not safe.
To increase the wear load, we have to increase the

load stress factor k w
kW  0.687 N/mm 2 ; New kW  2.5 N/mm 2 Assum e
d 1 b Q vkw
Fw 
cos 1
60  38  1.8803  2.5

cos 14.03 
 11047.26 N
Now F w  F d
 Now the design is safe.
Step 17:
Calculate the Basic Dimension of Straight Bevel Gear

From PSG Data book pg 8.39
1. Reference (or) lead Angle
tan 2  i 2  75.96 
1  14.03
2. Addendum Angle  a
m t fo
tan  a1   tan a2
R
31
a 1  tan 1   fo  1
 124 
a 2  a1  1.3859
3. Dedendum Angle f
m t f0  c
tan f1  tan f2  c  0.2
R
3 1  0.2
  f1   f2  tan  1 29.67  10 3
124
f1   f2  1.704 
4. Height Factor f0
f0  1
5. Tip Angle a
a1  1  a1  a2  2  a2


 14.03  1.385  a2  75.96  1.385
 15.415   a2  77.345

6. Root Angle t
t1  1   t1  t2  2  t2


 14.03   1.704    75.96  1.704 
 12.326    74.256 

7. Virtual number of teeth
Z v1  21 ; Z v2  330
3.11.(a) DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR BEVEL GEAR

(BASED ON HERTZ METHOD)
Step 1
Selection of material:
P.No. 8.16 Table (16) or Table (5) P.No. 8.4 of
PSG Data book.
Similar to Spur and helical gear.

If pinion and gear are made of same material, design
for only pinion (because pinion is weaker than gear)
Select material, surface hardness.
If surface hardness  350 BHN
o r 55 to 63 RC
or 40 to 55 RC
The core hardness  350 BHN
Step 2
Calculate equivalent Young’s modulus.
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.14 table (9)
Read young’s modulus E 1, E2 according to the
material.
Find the equivalent Young’s modulus E eq
 kg /cm2 N 
f
to convert   
 10 mm2 
Step 3
Assume life 10,000 hrs to 20,000 hrs.
If life is given in the problem,
Calculate life N in terms of cycles.
i.e.,
N  Life required  Given life in Hrs  RPM  60 C ycles
Represent life interms of  ......   10 7 cycles
Step 4
Calculation of Design bending stress [ b ]

(similar to spur and helical gears)
1.4kbl  1
Design bending stress  [ b ] 
n  k
kbl  Life factor for bending From PSG Data book
P.No. 8.20; table (22) (consider core hardness).
It depends on material, Surface hardness and life in

cycles.

reversal stress in kg f/cm 2 From PSG Data book P.No.
8.19; Table (19). According to material of mating gear,
take u and  y values from From PSG Data
book P. No. 8.5 Table (7) in kgf/cm 2;
u  ultimate stress in kg f/cm 2(Refer P.No. 1.9 of

PSG Data book)
y  yield stress in kg f/cm 2
Table (20); P.No. 8.19 of PSG Data book
According to material, mode of manufacture and heat

treatment.
k  Fillet stress concentration factor From PSG

Data book P.No. 8.19 Table (21). Take addendum
modification coefficient.
0  X  0.1 value and according to material and heat

treatment.
Calculate design bending stress [ b ] in kg f/cm 2
kgf/cm2
Convert into N/mm 2  N/mm 2
10
Step 5
Calculation of Design surface contact compressive

stress. Fron PSG Data book P.No. 8.16
[ c ]  C RHRC  kcl kg f/cm2
C R  Coefficient depending on the surface

hardness. From PSG Data book Table (16)
P.No. 8.16.
Depends on material, heat treatment and hardness.
HRC  Rockwell ‘C’ hardness number Table (16)

P.No. 8.16
kcl  Life factor From PSG Data Table (17),

P.No. 8.17 (Consider surface hardness)
It depends on material, surface hardness and life in

number of cycles.
Calculate [ c ] in kg f/cm 2
Step 6
Calculation of Design torque of twisting moment
[ M t ] P.No. 8.15 PSG Data book
Design twisting moment  [ M t ]  Mt  k d  k
M t  Nominal twisting moment transmitted by the

pinion kg f  cm .
97420 kW

N
kW  nominal power transmitted in kW
N  speed of rotation of pinion  rpm
k  load correction factor. Table (14) (P.No. 8.15) of

PSG Data book.
kd  dynamic load factor. Table (15) (P.No. 8.16) of

PSG Data book.
k value depends on IS quality and b/d 1 ratio
kd value depends on IS quality and pitch line velocity
Since the values of b, d1 pitch line velocity, and IS

quality are not known, initially assume k d  k  1.3 for
symmetric scheme. Calculate M t in kg f  cm .
And [ M t ]  Mt  k d  k in kg f  cm .
[ kg f  cm  100  Nmm ]
Step 7
Calculate Cone distance ‘R’
P.No. 8.13 table (8) of PSB Data book


2
 0.72  E[ M t ]

R   y 2 3
i 1    0.5  [  ]  cm
i
 y c 
R
y  table (13) From PSG Data book P.No. 8.15
b
Assume y  3 (or) 4 (based on i value)
Z2
i  speed ratio 
Z1
[ c ]  Design surface (contact compressive) stress
kg /cm 2
E  Equivalent Young’s modulus kg/cm 2
[ M t ]  Design twisting moment kg-cm.
Step 8
Calculation of m t  transverse module
From PSG Databok P.No. 8.38 table (31)
R  0.5 m t Z 1 
i2  1 (or) R  0.5 m t 

Z21  
Z22
Assume Z 1  20 to 30
Represent cone distance R in mm.
Calculate m t in mm
Take standard module m t

Z2
i  speed ratio 
Z1
Represent transverse module mt in mm
Step 9
b
Calculate to find (k)
d1av
k  Load concentration factor:
To find d 1av
b  sin 1
m m  mav  m t 
Z1
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.38 table 31
Cal. v  pitch line velocity
 d1 av N 1
 m  sec  d1 av 
60  1000
 mm  Z 
 1 
Cal. d1av in mm 
b
Calculate ratio .
d1 av
From PSG Data book Table (14): P.No. 8.15 Take

the value of k
b
k value depends on value and surface hardness.
d1 av
Step 10
Selection of IS Quality (From PSG Data book
P.No.8.3) Table 2
 d1av  N 1
Calculate pitch line velocity v  m  sec
60  1000
Corresponding to velocity (m/sec) select the preferred

quality.
Step 11
Read the value of kd
kd  dynamic load factor  It depends on Pitch line


From PSG Data book  velocity (m/sec)
P.No. 8.16 table 15 

Read the value of k d Corresponding to pitch line
velocity, Surface hardness and preferred quality.
Step 12
Recalculate [M t]- Design twisting moment.
[M t]  M t  kd  k
M t from step 6 kgf cm
kd from step 11 kgfcm  100  N  mm
k  from ste p 9
Represent [Mt] in kg  cm
Step 13
Calculation of induced bending stress b
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.13A; table (8)
R 
i2  1 [M t] 1
b  2
 [b]
R  0.56 b  mt yv cos 
R  Cone distance   pressure angle ;

(cm);  20
i  Speed ratio; [M t]  Design to rque  kg  cm ;
m t  Transverse module cm
yv  form factor
Z1
Z eq  Z v 
cos 1
Refer PSG Data book table (18) P.No. 8.18 at

X  0 (Addendum modification coefficient) and Z v
Read yv value either directly (or) by interpolation.

Note: If b  [b]
Increase the value of m t

Recalculate: (R) ; Pitch line velocity. v
(b) ; kd, k
m av  ; [M t ]
d1a
v
Calculate b (induced bending stress)

Check again  b
If  b  [b]
Then the design based on beam strength is
satisfactory.
Step 14
Calculate induced surface contact compressive stress
c
From PSG DAta book P.No. 8.13 table (8)
c 
0.72
R  0.5b 
 
 i2  13
ib
E [M t]  [ c]
Note: If c, b are less than design stresses [ c] and [b]

respectively, then the design is satisfactory.
If pinion and wheel are made of different materials.

First design pinion and then check the stresses in the
wheel.
Procedure Step (1)

For wheel material,
Calculate design bending stress [b ]  [ b ]w heel 

2  similar to step 4
and design surface contac t  
and step 5
   c    C  
compressive stress   2    
w heel
Assume
c  wheel Life of pinion

pinion Life for wheel 
i
c  [c]W heel N  cycles
wheel
If
c  [c]w heel,
wheel
Change the material and recalculate [ c]wheel and

check again.
If  c  [c]wheel , then the design is satisfactory.
To check b,
 b y v  b y v y v  form factor for pinion

1 1 2 2 1
b  induced bending 

Already Z1
1
 calculated Zv 
stress for pinion  1 cos 1
 in step 13
y v  form factor for wheel
2
Z2
Zv 
2 cos 2
Calculate b and check b

2 2
b  [b ] i.e. [ b]wheel

2 2
FORMULAE FOR GEAR FORCES

From PSG Data book P.No. 857 table 46
(a) Spur Gear

2 Mt
Tangential force  F t 
d1
M t  twisting moment
kW
 97420 kgf  cm
N1 where N 1  pinio n speed in rpm
d 1  pinion pitch circle diameter
Radial force F r  F t tan 

(where   pressure angle  20 
(b) Helical Gear

2M t
Tangential force Ft 
d1
tan 
Radial force F r  F t 
cos 
(c) Bevel Gears: (Straight bevel)

 2 Mt 2M t 
Tangential force   F tav   
 dav  b 
d 1 1  0.5

  R  
Radial force  F r   F t  tan   cos 1, for pinion

 av
  F t  tan  cos 2 fo r wheel

 av
Axia l fo rce  F a  F tav. tan   sin 
 F tav tan sin 1 for pinion
 F tav tan  sin 2 for w heel
(d) Bevel (Spiral) Gear
Tangential force F t:
2M t 2M t Where
F tav  
d av  b    Pres sure angle  20
d1  1  0.5
 R    helix angle
 18 to 25
Radial force Fr
F tav
 tan   cos   sin av sin 
c o s av
Axial force  F a
F tav
 tan  sin   sin av  c o s 
cos av
av  mean spiral a ngle 30 to 35
 35 preferred
  Pressure angle  20
  reference angle
1  semico ne angle of pinion
2  semicon e angle of wheel
(a) For right angle (when   90

Z2
tan 2  i 
Z1
1  90   2
(b) For acute angle when   90
sin
tan 1 
i  cos  1  2  
(c) Objective angle, when   90
sin 180  
tan 1 
i  c o s 180  
Problem 3.6 Design a bevel gear drive to transmit 7 kW at

1600 rpm for the following data.
Gear ratio : 3
Material for pinion and gear : C45 steel
Life : 10,000 hrs.
(May/June 2013)
HERTZ METHOD
Given data
P  7 kW ; N  1600 rpm ; i  3 ; N  10,000 hrs
Solution
Since the given material for pinion and wheel are
made of same material (i.e) C45 steel, therefore, design only
pinion.

corresponding to C45 steel.
Assume surface hardened heat treatment,
HRC  40 to 55  HRC  50 (Assume)
(ie) sufarce hardness > 350 BHN
core hardness < 350 BHN
Step 2: Life of gears

N  10,000 hrs  10,000  60  1600  96  10 7 cycles
Step 3: Equivalent Young’s modulus

From PSG Data book, From PSG Data book Pg.No.
8.14, Table offer
E  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm 2  2.15  10 5 N/mm 2


1.4 kbl  1
[b] 
n  k
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.20, Tabl;e 22.

Assume rotation in one direction only, consider core
hardness  350 BHN; N  10 7 cycles
kbl  1
From PSG data Blook Pg.No. 8.19, Table 19, for

forged steel
 1  0.25  u   y  500 kgf/cm2
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 1.9, for C45 steel,
u  63  71 kgf/mm 2; y  36 kgf/mm 2
Assume
u  70 kg f/mm 2  70  100 kg f/cm 2
   1  0.25 70  100  36  100  500  3150 kg f/cm 2
From, PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.19, Table 20
for forged steel and surface hardened
n  2.5
From PSG Data Book Pg.No. 8.19, Table 21
for steel, surface hardened at 0  X  0.1
k  1.5
 Design bending stress [b]
1.4  1  3150
  1176 kg f/c m2  117.6 N/mm 2
2.5  1.5
Step 5: Calculation of design surface contact

compressive stress [c]
[c]  C R HRC  kcl
for C45 - surface hardened steel
C R  230
HRC  50
Assuming steel, surface hardness > 350,
N  25  10 7
kcl  0.585
 [c]  50  230  0.585  6727.5 kgf/c m2  672.75 N/mm2
Step 6: Calculation of design torque

[M t]  M t  kd  k
kW 7
But M t  97420  97420   426.21 kgf  cm
n 1600
Assume initially, k  kd  1.3 (for symmetric)
 [M t]  426.21  1.3  554.07 kgf  cm  554.07  10 2 Nmm

Step 7: Calculation of cone distance ‘R’ From PSG

Data book Pg.No. 8.13, Table 8


2
 0.72  E [Mt]


i2  1
3
R  y    0.5 [ ]  i
 y c 
for i  3, Assume  y  3


2 5 2
 0.72  2.15  10  554.07  10

 2 3
R3 3 1  3  0.5 672.75   
  3
 R  97.67 mm
Step 8: Calculation of Transverse module ‘m t’

From PSG data book Pg.No. 8.38, Table 31,
R  0.5 m t Z1 
i2  1
Assume Z 1  20 teeth
 97.67  0.5  m t  20 

 32 1
 m t  3.08 mm
Represent traverse module terms of standard module,

From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.2, Table 1,
 m t  5 mm
Note: If we hoose m t  4 mm , then the design will be not

safe, To avoid recalculation, always choose higher standard
module m t.
Step 9: Recalculate “R ” and calculate “b”

 R  0.5 m t Z 1 i2  1

  0.5  5  20  

32 1  158.113 m m
R
y  3
b
R 158.113
b 
3 3
 b  52.7 mm
b
Step 10: Calcualtion of k and
d 1av
Average module
sin 1
m av  m t  b
Z1
but
tan 2  i  3
 2  tan  1 3  71.56
 1  90  71.56   18.43 
52.7  sin 18.43

 m av  5 
20
 m av  4.16 mm
But
d1av  Z 1 m av  20  4.16  83.33 mm

b 52.7
   0.6323
d 1av 83.33
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.15, Table 14 for

surface hardness > 350 for both the gears
k  1.6
Step 11: Selection of IS Quality

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.3, Table 2.
 d1av  N
Pitch line velocity v 
60  1000
  83.33  1600
v  6.98 m/s
60  1000
According to velocity, straight bevel, select IS quality

- 8 steel
Step 12: Read the value of k d

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.16, Table No: 15,
corresponding to IS Quality - 8, surface hardness > 350
and v upto 8 m/s
kd  1.4
Step 13: Recalculate design twisting moment [M t]

[M t]  M t  kd  k  426.21  1.4  1.6  954.71 kg f  cm
 [M t]  95471 Nmm
Step 14: Calculation of induced bending stress b

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.13 A, Table 8
R 
 i2  1 [Mt] 1
b    [ b]
2
R  0.5b b mt yv cos 
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 818, Table 18,

Z1 20
Zv    21.08 ~
 21 teeth
cos 1 cos 18.43
Take average value of 20 and 22 teeth
y v  0.3955
  pressure a ngle  20 assume
158.113 32 1


  95471  1
 b  2

158.113  0.5  52.7   52.7  5  0.3955 cos 20 
 28.076 N/mm 2  [b] 117.6 N /mm 2
 The design of pinion based on beam strength is

satisfactory.
Step 15: Calculation of induced surface stress

From PSG Data book, Pg.No: 813, Table 8


0.72 

i2  13
c   E [M t]
R  0.5b ib

0.72
158.113  0.5  52.7 




3 2  13
3  52.7
 2.15  10  954715
 350.128 N/mm2  [c]672.75 N /mm 2
Problem 3.7 A 25 kW motor running at 1200 rpm drives a

compressor at 780 rpm, through a 90 bevel gearing
arrangement. The pinion has 30 teeth. The pressure angle of
teeth is 20. Both the pinion and gear are made of heat treated
cast Iron grade 35. Determine the cone distance, average

module and face width of gears.
HERTZ METHOD
Solution
Given data
Power  P  25 kW
Pinion speed  N 1  1200 rpm
Wheel speed  N 2  780 rpm
Z 1  30 teeth
N1
i  1.54
N2
Step 1
Material given is CI grade 35 (heat treated)
[b]  800 kgf / c m2  80 N /mm2
[ c]  7500 kgf / c m2  750 N /mm2
E  1.7  10 6 kgf/c m2  1.7  10 5 N/mm2
Step 2
Calculation of Design torque [M t]
[M t]  M t  kd  k
But
kW
M t  97420 
N1
25
 97420 
1200
 2029.58 kg fcm
kd  k  1.3 assume
 [M t]  2029.58  1.3
 2638.45 kg fcm
 263845 Nmm
Step 3
Calculate cone distance ‘R’


2
 0.72  E [M t]

 2 3
R  y i 1     0.5 [ ]   i
 y c

R
y   3 correspon ding to i  1 to 4
b
i  1.54


2 5
 0.72  1.7  10  263845
R3

1.54 1 2 3
 3  0.5  [750]   1.54
 
 89.54 mm
Step 4
Calculation of transverse module “m t”
R  0.5 m t Z 1 

i2  1
 89.54  0.5  m t  30 

1.542 1
 m t  3.25 mm
Take standard module m t  4 mm
(From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.21)
Step 5
Recalculate ‘R’ and calculate ‘b’
R  0.5 m t Z 1 i2  1

 0.5  4  30  

1.542 1
 110.17 mm
R
But y   3 assumed
b
R 110.17
b   36.72 mm
3 3
Step 6
Calculation of load concentration factor ‘k’
b
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.15, b 
d 1av
The average module

sin 1
m av  m t  b
Z1
we know that
tan 2  i
(i.e) tan 2  1.54
 2  tan  1 1.54  57
 1  90  57   33
36.72  sin 33 
 m av  4 
30
 3.33 mm
but
d1av  Z 1 m av  30  3.33  100 mm
b 36.72
   0.3672
diav 100
 From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.15
k  1.6
Step 7
Calculate pitch line velocity v
 d 1av N 1   100  1200

v   6.283 m/s
60  1000 60  1000
Step 8
Calculate the value of k d
kd  1.4 for v up to 8 m/s
Step 9
Recalculate design twisting moment
[M t]  Mt  kd  k
 2029.58  1.4  16
 4546.25 kgfcm
 454625 N  mm
Step 10
Calculation of Induced bending stress b
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.13 (A)
R 
 i2  1 [M t] 1
b  2
  [ b]
R  0.5b b m t yv cos 
From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.18 take yv

corresponding to Z v
Z1 30 30
Zv     35.77
cos 1 cos 1 c o s 33 
~
 36 teeth
 y v  0.4546 at value X  0, Z v  36
110.17 
 1.542 1  45462.5 1
 b  2

110.17  0.5  36.72   86.72  4  0.4546 cos 20
91,967,564.61
  173.89 N /mm 2  [ b] 80 N/mm 2
528,880.904
Hence the design is not safe.
Therefore increase the value of transverse module

m t
Trail 1
Assume m t  5
Repeat the steps 5 to 10
Step 5
R  0.5 m t Z 1 
i2  1  137.71 mm
R 137.71
b   45.90 mm
3 3
Step 6
sin 1
m av  mt  b
z1
sin 33
 5  45.90 
30
m av  4.166 mm
but
d1av  Z1 m av
 30  4.166  120 mm
b 45.90
   0.375
d1av 120
 From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.15
k  1.6
Step 7
 d1av  N 1   120  1200
v 
60  1000 60  1000
 7.539 m/s
Step 8
kd  1.4 for v upto 8 m/s
Step 9
[M t]  M t  kd  k
 2029.58  1.4  1.6
 4546.25 kg fcm
 454625 Nmm
Step 10
R

i2  1 [M t] 1
b  2

R  0.5 b b mt yv cos 
137.71 1.54 2 1


  454625 1
 2

137.71  0.5  45.9   45.9  5  0.4546 cos 20
b  89.03 N/mm2  [ b] 80 N/mm 2
The design is not safe
Trail 2
Assume m t  6
Repeat the steps 5 to 10
Step 5
R  0.5 m t Z 1 
i2  1
 0.5  6  30 
1.54 2 1
 165.25 mm
R 165.25
b   55.08 mm
3 3
Step 6
sin 1
m av  mt  b 
Z1
sin 33
 6  55.08 
30
 5 mm
but
d 1av  Z 1 m av  30  5
 150 mm
b 55.08
   0.3672
d 1av 150
 k  1.6 From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 8.15
Step 7
 d 1av N 1
v
60  1000
  150  1200
  9.42 m/s
60  1000
Step 8
kd  1.4 for v upto 12 m/s

Step 9
[M t]  M t  kd  k
 2029.58  1.4  1.6
 4546.25 kg fcm
 454625 Nmm
Step 10
R

i2  1 [M t] 1
b  2

R  0.56   b m t yv cos 
165.25 1.54 2 1


  454625 1
 2

165.25  0.5  55.08   55.08  6  0.4546 cos 20
 51.52 N/mm2  [b] 80 N/mm2
Hence design is safe.
Step 11
Calculation of surface compressive stress


3


i2  1 

0.72 
c   E [M t]

R  0.5 b ib


3
 

0.72 



1.542 1 
  1.7  10 5  454625
165.25  0.5  55.08  1.54  55.08
 392.67 N/mm2  750 N/mm 2
since  c  [ c] the design is safe.

Problem 3.8 Design a bevel gear to transmit a power of 9

kW at 200 rpm of the pinion. Gear Ratio is 3, material used
is C20. Ultimate tensile strength u is 500 N/mm2, Yield
strength y is 260 N/mm2 (May/June 2013)
HERTZ METHOD
Given data:
Power  9 kW  9  10 3 W
Gear ratio i3
Material used
Pinion-Gear  C20
Ultimate strength  u  500 N/mm 2
Yield strength  y  260 N/mm 2

Material for pinion and gear - C20 (Given) Refer
PSG Data book Pg No.8.4. Since the pinion and gear are
made up of same material, design pinion as it is weaker
than gear.
Step 2: Calculate equivalent Young’s Modulus

From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.14 table 9
Select
E eq  2.15  10 6 kg f/c m2
E eq  2.15  10 5 N/mm 2
Step 3:
Assume life  10000 hrs
 N  10000  60  200
N  12  10 7 cycles
Step 4: Calculation of design bending stress[b]
From PSG Data book Pg. No. 8.18
1.4 kbl  1
[b] 
n k
From PSG Data book Pg. No.8.20 table 22

(consider core hardness)
kbl  1

reversal stress in kgf/cm 2
From PSG Data book Pg No.8.19 table 19
 1  0.22 u  y  500 (For cast steel)
 0.22 500  260  500 N/mm2
 667.2 N/mm 2
 6672 kg f/cm 2
From PSG Data book Pg No. 8.19 table 20
n2

From PSG Data book Pg No. 8.19 table (21)

Take addendum modification co-efficient as
0  x  0.1
k   1.2
1.4 kbl  1
 [b] 
n k
1.4  1  6672

2  1.2
 3892 kg f/c m2
[b]  389.2 N/mm2
Step 5:
Calculate design surface contact compressive stress [ c]
[ c]  C B HB kcl kg f/cm 2
Where
C B  20
HB  170 to 200
From PSG Data book Table 16 Pg. No.8.16
Take HB  170
kcl  life factor
From PSG Data book Pg 8.17 table 17
kcl  1
 [c]  20  170  1
 3400 kgf/cm 2
[ c]  340 N/mm 2
From PSG Data book Pg no. 8.15
Design twisting moment [M t]  M t k d k
Where
M t  Nominal twisting moment
97420 kW
Mt 
N
Where
N  S peed in rpm  200 rpm Given
kW  n ominal power in kW  9 kW Given
97420  9
 Mt 
200
 4383.9 kg f  cm
k  load correction facto r
k d  dynamic load factor
From PSG Data book Pg No.81.5

k d  k  1.3
 [M t]  M t kd  k
 4383.9  1.3
 5699.07 kg f  cm
 1 kgf  cm  100 N  mm
Step 7: Calculate cone distance ‘R ’

From PSG Data book Pg No.8.13 table (8)


2
 0.72  E [M t]
R  y 

i2  1
3
   0.5  [ ]  cm
i
 y c 
R
y  From PSG Data book table 13 Pg no. 8.15
b
Take y  3 (based on i  3 Given)
E  equivalent Young’s Module


2 6
 0.72  2.15  10  5699.07

 32 1
3
R3  3  0.5 [3400] 
  3

 7.1750  10  9  4.0843  10 9
3
R3 10

R3 10  3.08304

R  29.24 cm
R  30 cm
R  300 mm
Step 8: Calculation of m t  transverse module
R  0.5 mt Z 1 

i2  1
Assume Z 1  20
R
 mt 
0.5  Z 1 

i2  1
300
mt 
0.5  20  
 32 1
300
mt 
31.6227
m t  9.486 mm
Take standard module From PSG Data book Pg

no.8.2 table 1
Take m t  10 mm
b
Step 9: Calculate to find k
d 1av
k  load concentration factor
To find d 1
av
b  sin 1
mm  m t 
Z1
b  0.3 R
 0.3  300
 90 mm
Z 1  20
90  sin 71.56  tan   i

m m  10 
20
1  tan  1 i
 5.73 mm
1  tan  1 3
d1  m m  Z1  71.56 
av
 5.73  20
 114.6 mm
Now calculate pitch line velocity v
 d1 N 1
av
v m/sec
60  1000
  114.6  200
v
60  1000
v  1.2 m/sec
Calculate
b 90
ratio   0.785
d1 114.6
av
From PSG Data book table (14) Pg No.8.15. Take

the value of k
k  1.06

Corresponding to pitch line velocity v
Select the preferred quality
Select IS quality 10
Step 11: Read the value of dynamic load factor

kd
From, PSG Data book Pg No.8.16 table 15
The value of kd  1.1
Step 12: Recalculate [M t]-Design twisting moment
[M t]  M t kd k
M t  4383.9 kg f  cm from step 6
kd  1.1
k  1.06
 [M t]  4383.9  1.1  1.06
[M t]  5111.6274 kgf  cm
[M t]  511162.74 N  mm
From PSG Data book Pg No.8.13 A table 8.
R 
i2  1 [ M t] 1
b   [b]
R  0.5 b b m t  yv c o s 
2
Where
R Cone distance  30 cm
 Pressure angle  20
i Speed ratio  3
[M t]  Design torque  5111.6274 kgf  cm
b  face width  9 c m
m t  transverse module  1 cm
yv  form factor
Form factor is based on equivalent no of teeth on the

virtual cylinder Z v
Z1
Zv 
cos 1
20

c o s 71.56 
Z v  63.22
Read the value of yv corresponding to Z v From PSG

Data book Pg No.8.18 table 18 at x  0
y v  0.490
R 
 i2  1 [M t]
1
 b  2
R  0.5  b b m t yv cos 
30 32 1

 5111.6274 1
 2

30  0.5  9  9  1  0.490 c o s 20
484931.554

2694.664
b  175.95 kg f  c m  [ b]  3892 kg f  cm
 The design is safe based on beam strength.
Step 14: Calculate induced surface contact

compressive stress (c)

c 
0.72
R  0.5b 
 
 i2  13
ib
Eeq [M t]  [c]
c 
0.72
30  0.5  9 
 
 3 2  13
39
2.15  10 6  5111.6274
0.72
  113453.25
25.5
 3203.3 kgf  c m
  c  3203.3  [ c]  3400 kgf  c m
Problem 3.9 Design a pair of bevel gears to transmit 15 kW

at the pinion speed of 1600 rpm, and the gear ratio is 4.
Material for gears 15 Ni 2 Cr Mo 15 / steel. The tooth profiles
of the gears are of 20 composite form.
HERTZ METHOD
Solution:
Given data
P  15 kW  15  10 3 W
N 1 pinion  1600 rpm
Gear ratio i  4
Material used for pinion and gear  15 Ni 2 Cr Mo15/ steel

Steel 1: Selection of Material

Material for pinion and gear  15 Ni 2 Cr Mo 15 /
steel
Refer PSG Data book Pg No.8.4
Since the pinion and gear are made up of same

material, design pinion as it is weaker than gear.
Step 2: Calcuatle Equivalent Young’s Modulus

select
E eq  2.15  10 6 kgf/cm 2
E eq  2.15  10 5 N/mm 2
Step 3:
Life is not given in the question, so Assume life
N   10000 hrs
 N  10000  60  1600
 96  10 7 cycl es
Step 4: Calculation of Design bending stress [b]
1.4 kbl  1
[b] 
n k
From PSG Data book Pg No.8.20 table 22, take

the value of life factor for bending kbl 
k bl  0.7
From PSG Data book Pg no.8.19 table 19

reversal of stress.
For alloy steel
 1  0.35 u  1200
Where
u  Ultimate tensile stress
According to material of gear, take the value of u

From PSG Data book Pg No. 8.5 table 7 in kg f/cm 2
u  90
Take u  90 kg f/mm 2
 9000 kg f/cm 2
   1  0.35  9000  1200
 4350 kg f/cm 2
n  2.0
k  Fillet stress concentration factor.
(Take addendum modification co-efficient 0  X  0.1)
k   1.2
1.4 kbl  1
[b] 
n k
1.4  0.7  4350

[b] 
2  1.2
[b]  1776.25 kg f/cm 2
[b]  177.625 N/mm 2
Step 5: Calculate design surface contact compressive

stress [c]
[ c]  C R HRC kcl kg f/cm2
For Alloy steel case hardened.
C R  280
HRC  55
K c1  0.585
[ c]  280  55  0.585
 9009 kgf/cm 2
[ c]  900.9 N/mm 2

Twisting moment [M t]  M t k d k
Where
M t  Nominal twisting mo ment
97420 kW
Mt 
N
Where
N Speed in rpm  1600 rpm
kW  Nominal power in kW  15 kW
97420  15
 Mt 
1600
M t  913.3125 kg f  c m
k Load correction factor

kd  Dynamic load factor
k d  k  1.3
 [M t]  m t kd  k
[M t]  913.3125  1.3
[M t]  1187.306 kg f  cm
[M t]  11873.06 N  mn
STep 7: Calculate cone distance R



2
 0.72  E [M t]
R   y

3
i2  1    0.5 [ ]  cm
i
 y c 
R
y  From PSG Data book, table 13 Pg no.8.15
b
Take y  3 (based on i  4)
E  Equivalent Youong’s Modulus (found in step 2)


2 6
 0.72  2.15  10  11873.06

 42 1
3
R3  3  0.5 9009  4
 
3

17 3 
 1.4193  10  9  6.3817  10 9
 25.78 cm
R  26 cm
R  260 mm
Step 8: Calculation of m t transverse module
R  0.5 mt Z 1 

i2  1
Assume Z 1  20
R 260
 mt  
0.5 Z1 

i 12
0.5  20 

42 1
M t  6.38 mm

No.8.2 table
Take M t  8 mm (Standard value)
b
d1
av
k  load concentration facto r
To find d 1
av
b sin 1
m m  mt 
Z1
b  0.3 R
 0.3  260
b  78 mm
Z 1  20
tan 1  i
1  tan 1 4
1  75.96
78  sin 75.96 
mm  8 
20
m m  4.21 mm
d1  m m  Z1
av
 4.21  20
 84.2 mm
 d1 N 1
av
v m/sec
60  1000
  84.2  1600
v
60  1000
v  7.05 m/sec
Calculate
b 78
ratio   0.92
d1 84.2
av
From PSG Data book table (14) Pg No.8.15 Take

the value of k
b
k  1.1 Corresponding to  1.0
d1
av

Corresponding to pitch line velocity v
Select the preferred quality.
Select IS quality 8 w.r.t to v  7.05 m/s

kd

Step 12: Recallcualte [M t] Design twisting moment
[M t]  M t kd k
 913.3125  1.4  1.1
 1406.50125 kg f  cm
 140650.10 N  mm
From PSG Data book Pg No.8.13A table 8

R 
 i2  1 [Mt] 1
b  2
 [b]
where
 Pressure angle  20
i Speed ratio  4
Mt  Design torque  1406.50 kg f  c m
b Face width  7.8 c m
Mt  Transverse module  0.8 cm
yv  Form factor
From factor is based on equivalent no of teeth on

virtual cylinder Z v
Z1
Zv 
cos 1
20
Zv 
cos 75.96
Z v  82.44
Read the value of yv corresponding to Z v

From PSG Data book Pg No.8.18 table 18 at x  0
y v  0.499
R i2  1

 [ M t]
1
 b  2
R  0.5b b mt yv cos 
26 
4 2 1  1406.50 1
 2
26  0.5  7.8  7.8  0.8  0.499 c o s 20
150777.8496

1429.07
b  105.507 kg f/cm 2
  b  105.507  [b] 1776.25 k gf /cm 2
The design is satisfactory based on beam strength.

compressive stress c
c 
0.72
R  0.5b 
 
 i2  13
ib
E eq [M t]  [t]

0.72
26  0.5  7.8 
 
42  13
4  7.8
2.15  10 6  1406.50125
0.72
  82423.05  2685.27 kg f/cm 2
22.1
c 2685.27 kg f/cm 2  [ c] 9009 kg f/c m2
The design is satisfactory.

Problem 3.10 Design a bevel gear drive to transmit 3.5 kW

with the following specifications: speed ratio  4; driving shaft
speed  200 rpm; drive is non reversible, material for pinion
is steel; material for wheel is cast iron; and life 25,000 hours.
HERTZ METHOD
Solution
Step 1
Selection of material (From P.S.G. Data book,
Pg.No. 1.12)
Pinion: C 45, surface hardened to 45 RC and core

hardness  350 BHN
u  700 N/mm2;  y  360 N/mm 2
Wheel: CI grade 30; u  300 N/mm2
Step 2
calculation of design stresses
[c]pinion  C R HRC kcl (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.

No. 8.16)
C R  23; HRC  45
for life 25,000 hrs
N  25000  60  200
 30  10 7 cycles
life factor for surface strength kcl  0.585
for HB  350 and N  25  10 7 cycles

 [ c]pinion  23  45  0.585  605.5 N/mm 2
1.4 k bl
[b]pinion     1 (From P.S.G. Data book,
n  k
Pg. No. 8.18)
for forged steels,
 1  0.25  u   y  50
 0.25 700  360  50
 315 N/mm2
kbl  for HB  350 and N  10 7 cycles
k  for steel normalised, surface hardened
n  2.5 for steel, surface hardened
1.4  1  315
 [b]pinion 
2.5  1.5
 117.6 N/mm2
[c]wheel  C B  H B  k cl ( From P.S.G. Data book,

Pg. No. 8.16)
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.16, for CI, Grade 30
C B  2.3; HB  220 assumed
we know that
30  10 7 30  10 7
N wheel    7.5  10 7 cycles
i 4
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.17; for CI


6 10 7
kcl 
N wheel


6 10 7
  0.714
7.5  10 7
 [c]wheel  2.3  220  0.714  361.3 N/mm 2
1.4 k cl
[ b]wheel  1
n  ka
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.19; for CI
  1  0.45  u
 0.45  300
 135 N/mm 2
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.20, for CI


9 10 7
kbl 
N wheel


9 10 7
  0.799
7.5  10 7
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.19, for CI, No

heat treatment
n  2.5
k   1.2
1.4  0.799
 [b]wheel   135  5.03 N/mm2
2.5  1.2
Step 3
Determination of R (Design of pinion)


2
 0.72  E [Mt]
R  y 
 2 3
i 1    0.5  [ ]  
i
 y c 
i  4 given
E eq  1.7  10 5 N/mm 2 (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.

No. 8.14)
 y  3 Assume (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg. No

8.15)
[M t]  k o  k  k d  M t
k o  1 assumed
k  kd  1.3 assume From P.S.G. Data bo ok, Pg. No. 8.15 
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg. No. 8.15
kW
M t  97420
N
3.5
 97420 
200
 1704.85 kg fcm
 170.48 Nm
 [M t]  1  1.3  170.48
 221.63 Nm


2 5 3
3 3  0.72  1.7  10  221.63  10
R 

16 1  3  0.5 605.5  
  4
 159.17 mm
Step 4
Determination of m t
R  0.5 m t 

i2  1  Z1 (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.
No. 8.38)
159.17  0.5 m t 

16 1  18 assume Z1  18
 mt  4.28 mm
Take m t  5 (standard)
Step 5
Recalculate R and find b

R  0.5  5  16 1  18
 185.54 mm
R 185.54
b   61.8 mm
3 3
Step 6
Calculate m av , d 1av and pitch line velocity,

 R  0.5 b 
m av  m t  
 R 
 185.54  0.5  61.8  
5 
 185.54 
 4.17 mm
d1av  Z 1 m av
 18  4.17  75 mm
 d 1av N 1
Pitch line velocity, v  (from P.S.G. Data
60  1000
book, Pg. No. 8.15)
  75  200
v  0.8 m/s
60  1000
Step 7
Revise k, kd and [M t]
b 61.8
Since   0.824
d1av 75
b
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.15, for 1
d1av
and surface hardness is less than 350 BHN for wheel
 k  1.1
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.16, for class 6

gear, v  1 m/s
 kd  1
 [M t]  1  1.1  1  170.48
 187.53 Nm
Step 8
Calculation of Induced stresses
(i) Stresses in pinion (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.

No. 8.13)
1/2
 
 0.72  
 i2  13
c     E [M t] 
ib
 R  0.5 b   
1/ 2
 


0.72  

42  13
 1.7  10  187.5  10
3

 185.54  0.5  61.8    4  61.8 
 442.67 N/mm2  [ c] 605.5 N /mm2
From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.13 A
0.7 R 
 i2  1
b   [M t]
R  0.5 b2  b m t yv
tan 2  i  4
 2  tan  1 4  76 
 1  90  76  14
Z1 18
Zv    19
cos 1 cos 14
 yv  0.383 (from Pg. No. 8.18)
0.7  185.54  16 1  187.53  10 3


 b 
185.54  0.5  61.82  61.8  5  0.383
 35.48 N/mm 2  [b] 117.6 N/mm 2
(ii) Check for stresses in the wheel

c  c  442.67 N/mm 2  [c]wheel  361.3 N/mm 2
wheel pinion
 Wheel does not have adequate wear strength.

Using following relation to calculate the induced bending
stress
b wheel  ywheel   b pinion  ypinion
where
ywheel is the form factor for the virtual number of

teeth of the wheel
we know that
Z 2  i Z 1  4  18  72
Z2
But Zv  From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.39
cos 2
72
  297.6 ~
 300
c o s 76
yv  0.521 correspondin g to Z v  300 teeth
 wheel  0.521  35.48  0.383
wheel  26.08 N/mm 2  [ b]wheel 50.3 N/mm 2
Hence design of pinion and wheel is satisfactory

Problem 3.11 A 90 degree straight bevel gear set is needed

to give a 3:1 reduction. Determine the pitch cone angle, pitch
diameter and gear forces if the 25 pressure angle, pinion has
15 teeth of pitch circle diameter 4 and the transmitted power
is 8 HP at 550 pinion rpm.
HERTZ METHOD
Solution
i  3,   25, Z1  15 teeth, P  8 HP  5.888 kW
Assume the material for pinion and gear C45 surface

hardened.
Since C45 hardened to 55 RC, core hardness

 350 BHN
u  720 N/mm2,  y  360 N/mm 2

Assume life as 10,000 hrs
 10,000  60  550  33  10 7 cycles
Design compressive contact stress
(From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.16)
[c]  C R  HRC  kcl
 23  55  0.585
 740 N/mm2
since CR  23 ; HRC  55 ; kcl  0.585
Design bending stress (From P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 8.18)
1.4 kbl
[b]  1
n  k
But
  1  0.25 u  y  50 From PSG Data bookPg. No. 8.19
 0.25 720  360   50
 320 N/mm2
since k bl  1, n  2.5, k   1.5
1.4  1  320
 [ b ] 
2.5  1.5
 119.5 N/mm2
Cone Distance ‘R’ (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No.

8.13)


2
 0.72  E [M t]


3
R  y i2  1    0.5 [ ] 
y c  i

R
Assume y   3 (From P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No.
b
8.15)
i3
[M t]  k o  k  k d  M t from P.S.G. Data book, P g. No. 8.15
ko  1 assumed
k  k d  1.3 assumed
5.888  10 3  60
 Mt   102.229 Nm
2  550
 [M t]  1  1.3  102.229  132.89 Nm

E  2.1  10 5 N/mm2 assumed


2 5 3
 0.72  2.1  10  132.89  10


3 2 3
R 3 1  3  0.5  [740] 
  3
 106.355 mm
But R  0.5 m t Z 1 

i2  1
106.355  0.5 m t  15 
10

m t  4.48  5 mm standard
from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.2
 R  0.5  5  15 

10
 118.58 mm
R 118.58
b   39.528 mm
3 3
But
b sin 1
m av  mt  (From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.38)
Z1
tan 2  i  3
 2  tan 1 3  71.5 
1  90  71.5   18.5 
39.528 sin 18.5

m av  5   4.16 mm
15
 d1av N 1
v  pitch lin e velocity  m/s
60  1000
But d1av  Z 1 m av  15  4.16  62.45 mm
  62.45  550
v  1.79 m/s
60  1000
IS Quality 6 bevel gear is assumed
k  1.6 for b/d1av  0.64  from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.15 
k  1.4
 [M t]  ko  k  kd  mt  1  1.6  1.4  102.229  10 3
 228.99  10 3 Nmm

1
 2
0.72


 2
i  1 3
c  E [M t] 
R  0.5 b  ib 
0.72

118.58  0.5  39.528
1
 
32  1 3 2
 5 3
 2.1  10  132.89  10 
 3  39.528 
 628.55 N/mm 2  [c] 740 N/mm2
R
2
i  1 [M t]
b  2
from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.13
R  0.5 b  b mt yv
Z1 15
Z v  Z eq    15.81  16
cos 1 cos 18.5
Y v  0.355 From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.18

corresponding to 2 V
118.58  
3 2 1  228.99  10 3
 b 
118.58  0.5  39.528 2  39.528  5  0.355
 118.22  [ b] 119.5 N/mm2
Now the design is satisfactory
The pitch cone angle 1  18.5
Pitch Circle Diameter (PCD) (outside) of pinion

 d1  Z1 m t
 75 mm
PCD (outside) of gear  d2  Z 2 m t
Z2
i3
Z1
Z 2  3  15  45
 d 2  Z 2 m t  25 mm
PCD (average) of pinion  d1av  Z 1 m av

 15  4.16
 62.4 mm
PCD (average) of gear  d 2av  Z 2 m av
 45  4.16
 187.2 mm
Gear forces
2 M t 2  102.229  10 3
Tangential force F t  
d1av 62.4
 3276.5 N
Radial force F r  F t  tan   cos 
 3276.5  tan 25  cos 18.5 
 1448.93 N
Axial force F a  Ft  tan  sin
 484.796 N
Problem 3.12 Design a pair of bevel gears for two shafts

whose axis are at right angles the power transmitted is 25 kW.
The speed of the pinion is 300 rpm and the gear is rotating
at 120 rpm. Take material used as C45 for both pinion and
gear.
HERTZ METHOD
Given data
Power transmitted P   25 kW
N 1 Pinion speed  300 rpm
N 2 Gear speed  120 rpm
pinion 
Material used C45
gear 
w.k.t
N1 300
i   1.5
N2 120
Solution:
1. Selection of Material
Refer PSG Data book Pg No.1.12
Given
C45, surface hardened to 45 RC and core hardness ~
350 BHN for pinion and wheel
v  700 N /mm2 ; y  360 N/mm 2
Since the material used for pinion of gear are same

design only pinion as it is weaker than gear.
Step 2: Calculate Equivalent Young’s Modulus

From PSG Data book Pg in 8.14 table 9
Select
E eq  2.15  10 6 kg f/cm 2
E eq  2.15  10 5 N/mm 2
Step 3: Life is not given in the question, so

Assume N  10000 hrs
N  10000  60  300
 18  10 7 cycles
From PSG Data book Pg no 8.18
1.4 kbl  1
[b] 
nk
From PSG Data book Pg no.8.20 table 22 take

the value of life factor for bending kbl
kbl  1
From PSG data book Pg 8.19 table 19

reversal of stress
 1  0.22 u  y  500
 1  0.22 700  360  500
 1  733.2 N/mm 2
 1  7332 kg f/cm 2
n  factor of safety
n  2.0
Take addendum modification co-efficient 0   0.1
k   1.2
1.4 kbl  1
[b] 
n k
1.4  1  7332

2  1.2
[y]  4277 kgf/cm 2
[b]  427.7 N/mm 2

Step 5: Calculate design surface contact compressive

stress [c]
 c  C R HRc kcl kg f/cm2
C R  230
HR c  45
life factor kcl from PSG Data book Pg No.8.17

table 17
kcl  0.585
 [c]  230  45  0.585 kg f/cm 2
 6054.75 kgf/cm 2
[ c]  605.47 N/mm2
Design twisting moment [M t]  M tk dk
Where
M t  Nominal twisting moment
97420 kW
Mt 
N
where
N Speed in rpm  300 rpm.
kW  Nominal power in kW  25 kW
97420  25
Mt 
300
 8118.33 kg f  cm
kd  dynamic load factor

k load concentration factor
k d  k  1.3
[M t]  M t  kd  k
[M t]  8118.33  1.3
[M t]  10553.829 kg f  cm
[M t]  1055382.9 N  mm
Step 7: Calculate cone distance ‘R ’



 0.72  E [M t ]

 i2  1
3
R  y    0.5 [ ]  cm
i
 y c 
R
y  From PSG Data book table 13 Pg no 8.15
b
Take y  3 (base on i  1.5
E  equivalent Young’s Module



2 6
 0.72  2.15  10  10553.829
R3

1.52 1
3
 3  0.5 6054.75  1.5
 
R  5.408 

34.2254
R  5.408  5.850
R  31.63
R  32 cm
R  320 mm
Step 8: Calculation of m t  transverse module
R  0.5 m t Z 1 
i2  1
Assume Z 1  20
R
mt 
0.5  Z 1 
 i2  1
320
mt 
0.5  20  

1.52 1
m t  17.75 mm

no.8.2 table 1
Take m t  18 mm
b
d1
av
k  load concentration factor
To find d 1
av
b sin 1
mm  m t 
Z1
b  0.3 R
b  0.3  320
 96 mm
Z 1  20
tan 1  i
1  tan 1 1.5
1  56.30
96  sin 56.30
m m  18 
20
 14.006 mm ~
 14 mm
d1  mm  Z1
av
 14  20
 280 mm

 d1 N1
av
v m/s ec
60  1000
  280  300

60  1000
v  4.398 m/sec
Calculate
b 96
ratio   0.342
d1 280
av
From PSG Data book table (14) Pg No.8.15
Take the value of k
k1
Step 10: Selection of IS quality

Corresponding to pitch line velocity v
Select the preferred quality
Select IS quality  10

kd
From PSG Data book Pg No. 8.16 table 15
Step 12: Recalculate [M t] Design twisting moment
[M t]  M t k d  k
M t  10533.829 kg f  cm
k d  1.1
k1
[M t]  10533.839  1.1  1
[M t]  11587.2119 kg f  cm
[M t]  1158721.19 N  mm
Step 13: Calculation of induced bending stress

From PSG Data book Pg No. 8.13 A table 8
R 
 i2  1 [M t]1
b  2
 [b]
where
 Pressure angle  20 (Assume).
i Speed ratio  1.5
[M t]  Design torque  11587.2119 kgf  cm
b Face width  9.6 cm
Mt  transverse module = 1.8 cm
yv  Form factor
Form factor is based on equivalent no of teeth on the

Z1
virtual cylinder Z v 
cos 1
20

c o s 56.30 
 36.04
Read the value of yv corresponding to Z v
From PSG Data book Pg No.8.18 table 18 at

X  20
y v  0.458
R 
 i2  1 [M t] 1
 b  2
 [ b]
R  0.5b b m t y v c o s
32 
 1.5 2 1  11587.2119 1
 
2
32  0.59.6   9.6  1.8  0.458 cos 20 
668452.5863 1
 
5855.271 c o s 20
b  121.48
  b  121.5 kgf  cm  [b] 4277 kg f  c m
The design is satisfactory based on beam strength.

compressive stress c
c 
0.72
R  0.5b 
 i2  1 3


ib
Eeq [M t]  [ c]
c 
0.72
32  0.5  9.6 
 
 1.52  13
1.5  9.6
 2.15  10 6  11587.2119
0.72
  100679.2518
27.2
c  2665.039 kg f  c m
c  2665.039 kg f  c m  [c] 6054.75 kg f  cm
Problem 3.13 Design a bevel - gear drive to transmit 7.5 kW.

at 1440 rpm. Gear ratio is 3; pinion and gear are made of
C45 steel; Life of gears 10,000 hrs. (Apr./May 2009)
HERTZ METHOD
Given Data:
Power  P  7.5 kW
Z2
i 3
Pinion speed  N 1  1440 rpm Z1
Gear ratio  i  3
Life  N  10,000 hrs
Life  N  10,000  60  1440  86.4  107 cycles
Step 1
Selection of Material: From PSG Data book P.No.
8.16; table (16) Material Given C45
Pinion and wheel are made of same material.

Therefore, design only pinion
Assume surface hardened heat treatment
C45  surface hardened
HRC  40 to 55
Assume HRC  50
i.e, surface hardness > 350 BHN
core hardness < 350 BHN
Step 2
Life of gears. (N)
N  10,000 hrs
 10,000  60 1440
Life 
N  86.4  10 7 Cycles
of Gears 
Step 3
Equivalent Young’s modules ‘E’
For steel pinion and steel wheel
E  2.15  10 6 kgf  cm2
E  2.15  10 5 N  mm2
Step 4
Calculation of design bending stress [b]
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.18 Design bending

1.4 kbl  1
stress    b  
  n  k
(Assume rotation in one direction only)
(From PSG Data book P.No. 8.20, table (22)

(consider core hardness)  350 BHS; N  10 7 cycles
kbl 1
 1  0.22 u  y  500 kgf  cm 2
(From PSG Data book P.No.8.19 table (19)
(Forged Steel) from PSG Data book pg no.1.9
for C45  and y  36 kgf  mm2

  63  71 kgf  mm2
material  u
take u  70 kgf  mm2  36  100 kgf  c m2
 70  100 kgf  cm2
From PSG Data book P.No.8.19 table (20)
 1  0.25 70  100  36  100  500
 3150 kg f  c m2
[For forged and surface hardened]
n  2.5
k   From PSG Data book table 21; P.No.8.19
(Steel - surface hardened - at 0    0.1
k   1.5
Design bending stress [b]

1.4  1  3150
[ b]  [Pg.No. 8.18] table.18
2.5  1.5
 1176 kg f  cm 2
[b]  117.6 N  mm 2
Step 5
Calculation of Design surface contact compressive

stress [ c]
[c]  C R HRC  kCl kg f  cm 2
From PSG Data book Table 16; P.No. 8.16
C R  230 for C45  surface hardened steel
HRC  50 assumed
HRC  50
7
k Cl  From PSG Data book P.No.8.17; P.No.17  steel, N  25  10
Consider surface hardness which is  350 BHN
kcl  0.585
[ C ]  50  230  0.585  6727.5 kg f  cm 2
[ c]  672.75 N  mm2
Step 6
Calculation of Design torque [M t]
From PSG Data book P.No.8.15
Design twisting moment

[M t]  M t  k d  k kg f  cm
kW
M t  97420 
N1
7.5
 97420 
1440
 507.39 kg fcm
Assume initially, k  kd  1.3 (for symmetric scheme)
[M t]  507.39  1.3
 659.61 kg fcm
[M t]  659.61  100 Nmm
Step 7
Calculate Cone distance ‘R’
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.13 and table (8)


2
 0.72  E[M t]
R  y 
 i2  1    0.5 [ ]  i
 y c 
R
y 
b
From PSG Data book table (13) P.No. 8.15
Assume y  3 (for i  1 to 4)
i  Gear ratio  3
[c]  672.75 N  mm 2
E  2.15  10 5 N  mm 2
[M t]  659.61  100 N  mm


2 5
 0.72  2.15  10  659.61  100

 3 2 1
3
R3  3  0.5 672.75  
 
3
R  90.43 mm
Step 8
Calculation of m t  transverse module.
R  0.5 mt Z 1 i2  1
 assume Z 1  20 teeth
90.43  0.5 m t  20  

 32 1 gea r ratio  i  3
mt  2.859 mm
Represent transverse module in terms of standard

module
 m t  3mm; take n earest higher value
Step 8 (a):
Recalculate (R) and Calculate (b)
R  0.5 m t Z 1 

i2  1
 0.5  3  20 
 3 2 1
R  94.86 mm Revised cone distance ‘R’
R
y  3
b
R 94.86
b   31.62 mm
3 3
Face width b  31.62 mm
Step 9
To find k ; Calculate b  d1 av
From PSG Data book P.g. No. 8.15 Table 14
k  Load concentration factor
To find d 1 ;
av
Average (or) sin 1

m av  m t  b tan 2  i  3
Module Z1
31.62  sin 18.43  2  71.56

3
20
m av  2.5 mm 1  90  71.56 
(or)  18.43
d1  Z 1 m av  R  0.5 b 
av d1  m tZ 1  
av
 R 
 20  2.5  50 mm  94.86  0.5 31.62 
 3  20  
 94.86 
b 31.62  50 mm
   0.06324
d 1av 50
From PSG Data book table 14; P.No.(8.15)
 The value of k  1.6
Step 10
Selection of IS Quality

d 1av  N 1
Calculate pitch line velocity  v 
60  1000
  50  1440
v
60  1000
v  3.769 m/sec
According to velocity of straight bevel, Select IS

quality 6 steel;
Step 11
Read the value kd
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.16 Page No. (15)
kd  1.4 for IS quality (6) surface hardness  350 and

v  upto 8 m/sec
Step 12
Recalculate [ M t ] - design twisting moment.
[ M t ]  M t  kd  k
 507.39  1.6  1.4
 1136.55 kg fcm
[ M t ]  113655 Nmm
Step 13
Calculation of induced bending stress b,

R

i2  1 [ M t ] 1
b  2
 [ b ]
R  0.5b b  m tyv cos 
R  94.86 mm ; i  3 To find yv:

From PSG Data book
P.No. 8.18; Table (18)
[Mt]  113655 Nmm

Z1 20
Zv  
cos 1 cos 18.43
b  31.62 mm ; m t  3 mm
 21.08  21 teeth
Take average for 20 and 22 and take yv value at
X  0.
yv  form factor  0.3955
 Induced bending stress [ b]
R

i2  1 [ M t ] 1
b  2
 [ b ]
R  0.5b b  m t  y v c o s

94.86  32 1 113655  1
 2

94.86  0.5  31.62   31.62  3  0.3955 cos 20
 b  154.75 N/mm 2  [ b ] 117.6 N/mm 2
Design of pinion based on beam strength is not

satisfactory.
Therefore, increase the value of transverse module

m t i.e., Revise m t.
Trail 2
Assume transverse module  m t  4 mm
Repeat steps 8 (a) to (13)
Step 8 (a)
R  0.5m t  Z 1

i2  1
 0.54  20 

32 1
R  126.49 mm
R 126.49
b   42.16 mm
3 3
Step 9
sin 1
m av  m t  b 
Z1 1  18.43 
 sin 18.43 
  4  42.16 
 20 
m a v  3.33 mm
d1  Z1  mav
av
 20  3.33  66.67 mm
b 42.16
  y
d1 66.67
av
 0.6323
From table (14); PSG Data book P.No. 8.15
k  1.6
Step 10
  d1  N1
av
v
60  1000
  66.67  1440

60  1000
 5.026 m/sec
Select IS quality (6) gear.
Step 11
kd  1.4
Step 12
[ M t ]  Mt  k d  k (Similar to previous step)
 507.39  1.6  1.4
 1136.55 kg fcm
[ M t ]  113655 Nmm
y v  0.3955 
(Similar to previous step)
Step 13
R

i2  1 [ M t ] 1
b  2
R  0.5b b  m t  yv c o s

126.49  3 2 1 113655 1
 
2
126.49  0.5  42.16  42.16  4  0.3955 c o s 20
b  65.28 N/mm 2  [ b ] 117.6 N/mm 2

Therefore, the design of pinion based on beam

strength is satisfactory.
Note: To avoid re-calculation from step 8(a) to 13, always

take module mt (standard) greater value i.e., instead of
selecting 3 mm, take 4 mm in the beginning itself.
Step 14
Calculation of induced surface contact compressive
stress c; ( Notes use only recalculated values)
c 
0.72
R  0.5b 
 
i2  13
ib
E[ M t ]  [ c ]
R  126.49 mm ; b  42.16 m m ; i  3
E  2.15  10 5 N/mm 2 ; [ M t ]  113655 Nmm

 
 3  
2 3
0.72 1
c  2.15  105  113655
126.49  0.5  42.16 3  42.16
 c  533.89 N /mm 2  [  c ] 672.75 N/mm 2
To Find Angles
[f o  1 ]
1. Addendum angle  a
m t  fo
tan  a  tan  a 
1 2 R
 41 
a   a  tan  1 
1 2
 126.49 
a   a  1.81
1 2
2. Dedendum angle  f
m t fo  c
f   f  tan  1
1 2 R
4 1  0.2
 tan  1
126.49
f   f  2.17
1 2
3. Tip angle  a  1  a
1 1
(Pinion)
 18.43   1.81
a  20.24 
1
4. Root angle  f  1  f
1 1
(Pinion)
 18.43   2.17
f  16.26 
1
5. Tip dia. of pinion  da  mt Z 1  2 cos 1

1
 420  2 c o s 18.43 
da  87.58 mm
1
6. Tip dia. of wheel  d a  m tZ 2  2 c o s 2

2
 420  2 c o s 71.57 
da  82.52 mm
2
7. Pitch circle dia. (outside) of pinion  d 1  m t  Z 1
 4  20
d1  80 mm
8. Pitch circle dia. (outside) of wheel (or) gear

 d2  m t  Z2
 4  60
d2  240 mm
Problem 3.12 A pair of bevel gear is to be used to transmit

12 kW from a pinion rotating at 360 rpm to a gear mounted
on a shaft which intersect the pinion shafts at the angle of
70; Assuming the pinion is to have an outside pitch diameter
of 200 m.m, a pressure angle of 20; a face width of 40 mm:
and the gear shaft is to rotate at 120 rpm; Determine (a) the
pitch angle for the gear (b) the forces on the gear (c) the torque
produced about the shaft axis (d) Calculate dia. of pinion
shafts, if   45 N  mm2 and if pinion shaft overhangs by
120 mm. (Nov. 2007)
Given Data:
P  12 kW
P in ion s peed  N 1  360 rpm
Angle between 
   70 
two shafts 
Pitch circle dia. of pinion 

Outside   d 1  200 mm

Pressure 
   20 
angle 
Face width  b  40 mm
Gear shaft speed  120 rpm
N1 360
i  3;
N 2 120
Z 2  No. of teeth 
  i  Z 1 Z 1  no.of teeth on pinion
on Gear

Z 2  3  20  60 teeth
Let m t  transverse module;
d1  m t Z1
d1 200
mt    10 mm
Z1 20 (which is equal to standard module)
Cone distance  R  0.5 m t Z 1 


i2  1
 0.5  10  20 

3 2 1
R  316.22 mm
Let 1  semi cone angle of pinion
2  semicone angle of w heel or Gear
  1  2  70 Acute angle
sin 
tan 1 
i  cos 
sin 70
tan 1 
3  cos 70
1  tan 1 0.2811
1  15.7
2  70  15.7
2  54.3.
Addendum Angle: a
m t  f0
tan  a 
1 R
 m t f0 
Addendum angle of pinion  a  tan 1  
1
 R 
 10  1 
 tan  1  
 316.22 
 a  1 48   a
1 2
 m t f0 
Dedudum angle of pinion  f  tan  1  
1
 R 
 10  1 
 tan 1  
 316.22 
f  210  f
1 2
Tip angle of pinion   a  1  a

1 1
 1542  1 48
a  17.5  17 30

1
Tip angle of wheel  a  2   a

2 2
 54 18  148
a  566
2
Root angle 
 f  1  f
of pinion  1 1
 1542  210
 1332
Root angle 
 f  2  f
of pinion  2 2
 5418  210
 528
(b) The forces on the Gear

2 Mt 2 Mt
(a) Tangential force  F tav  
dav  b 
d 1  1  0.5 
 R 
kW
M t  97420
N1
12
 97420  kg fcm  3247.33 kg fcm
360
Torque  M t  324733 N  mm
2  324733
F tav   3466.58 Newton
 40 
200  1  0.5 
 316.22 
Ftav  3.466 kN
Radial force  Fr  F tav tan  c o s 1   20

1  1542 
 3.466  tan 20 c o s 1542
 1.2016 kN
Axial force  F a  F tav tan  sin 1
 3.466  tan20  sin 1542
Fa  0.3413 kN
(c) Torque produced about the shaft axis
Assume over hang  120 mm
Fa and Fr induces BM; Rm  dav  2
M1  Fr  overhang  Fa  Rm  R  0.56 

dav  mt Z1  
1
 R 
 1.214  120  0.3413  93.67  316.22  0.5  40 

 10  20  
 316.22 
 113.7 kNmm  187.35 mm

Rm  93.67 mm
FT induces also bending moment.
M 2  F t  overhang
 3.466  120  415.92 kN mm

Re sultan t BM  
 M21  M22
 
 113.7 2  415.92 2  431.18 kNmm
E quivalent 

Torq ue on  Te  
 M2  T 2 [T  Mt  324733 N  mm]
shaft 
Te  
 431.18  10 32  3247332  539785.75 N  mm
If   45N  mm 2 for shaft material

Te    d3  539785.75 N  mm
16 S
Shaft dia. d  39.38 mm approx 40 mm
Pinion shaft diameter  d  40 mm

3.12 DESIGN OF WORM AND WORM WHEEL

3.12.1 Introduction
When the shafts are non-parallel and
non-intersecting, worm and worm wheel drive is used.
Worm drive can be treated as screw and nut pair. A
segment of nut is coiled to form a wheel. The thread of a
worm has trapezoidal profile in the axial direction.
Materials: Since the sliding occurs, the materials used
should have low coefficient of friction.
Worm: Worms are made of steel. The threads are grounded
and polished to reduce the surface roughness as low as
possible.
Worm wheel: Worm wheels are made of bronze and cast
iron.
LW
Pa 
l a n
D W D OW
x DT
D OG
DG
Rf Rr
b
Fig.3 .6. W orm and W orm G ear

3.13 TERMS USED IN WORM GEARING

1. Axial Pitch: Pa: It is the distance measured axially
(i.e, parallel to the axis of worm) from a point on one
thread to the corresponding point on the adjacent thread
on the work
P a  mx where m x  axial module of the worm
2. Lead: It is the linear distance through which a point
on a thread moves ahead in one revolution of the worm.
Lead  P a Z1 where, P a  axial pitch

Z 1  numbe r of starts
3. Lead angle: : It is the angle between the tangent to

the thread helix on the pitch cylinder and the plane normal
to the axis of the worm.
If one turn of a worm
thread in unwound, it will = P a Z1
form an inclined plane LN
whose base will be equal to

the pitch circumference of
d 1
the worm and altitude equal Fig. 3.7
to lead of the worm, as
shown in Fig. 3.7.
From the Fig. 3.7
Lead of the Worm

tan  
Pitch circumference of the worm
l Pa Z1 Pc Z1
  
 d2  d1  d1
. .
 . P a  P c
 m x Z1
tan  
 d1
mx Z 1

d1
The lead angle () may vary from 9 to 45. A lead

angle less than 9 results in rapid wear and the safe value
1
of  is 12
2
Z 1  no. of starts on the w orm
Z 2  no. of teeth on the worm wh ee l
Z2
i  gear ratio 
Z1
m x  axial m odule
d 1  Pitch circle diameter of worm
d 2  pitch circle diameter of worm wheel
d1
q  diam eter factor 
mx
a  centre distance
 Z1 
  lead angle  tan  1  
 q 
4. Tooth Pressure Angle: It is measured in a plane
containing the axis of the worm and equal to one half the
thread profile angle.
The pressure angle of 30  is recommended to obtain

a high efficiency and to permit overhauling, for automotive
applications.
5. Normal Pitch: The distance measured along the normal

to the thread between two corresponding points on two
adjacent threads of the worm.
P N  P a cos 
P N  Normal pitch
Normal diametrical pitch,
Z1 Z2 
Pd   
d 1 sin  d2 sin  PN
Note:
The reciprocal of the normal diametrical pitch is
known as Normal Module m n
1 d1 sin  d2 sin  P N
mn    
Pd Z1 Z2 
Normal lead L N  l cos 
6. Helix Angle : It is the angle between the tangent to

the thread helix on the pitch cylinder and the axis of the
worm.
    90
  90  
7. Velocity Ratio (i): The ratio of speed of the worm N

to the speed of the worm gear N 2 in rpm.
N1 Z2
i 
N2 Z1 . . N1 Z2
. 
N2 Z1
3.14 EFFICIENCY OF WORM GEARING

The ratio of work done by the worm gear to the work
done by the worm is known as efficiency of worm gearing.
It’s given by 
tan  cos    tan  


c o s  tan   
where,
 Normal pressure angle
 Co-efficient of friction
 lead angle
The maximum efficiency, when
tan   

1  2  
For square threads,   0 and tan   
tan 

tan      Friction Angle
3.15 STRENGTH OF WORM GEAR TOOTH

The Lewis equation of beam strength
F s   m x b [ b] y
F s  m x  b  [ b ] Y Y
y 

where
mx – Axial module
b – Face width
[b] – Allowable Static Stress
y – Form factor for worm wheel
3.16 DYNAMIC LOAD ON WORM GEAR TOOTH

 6  vmg 
Fd  Ft  
 6 
Where,
Ft – Tangential load
Fd – Dynamic load
vmg – Pitch line velocity of worm gear
3.17 WEAR STRENGTH OF WORM GEARS
F w  d2  b  kw
d2 – Pitch diameter of worm wheel
b – Face width
kw – Wear Factor (or) load stress factor
3.18 THERMAL RATING OF WORM GEARING

The heat generated due to friction must be dissipated
in order to avoid over heating of the drive and lubricating
oil.
The quantity of heat generated (H g) is given by
H g  P 1  
P – Power in watts
 – Efficiency of worm gearing
The heat generated must be dissipated through the

lubricating oil to the gear box housing and then to the
atmosphere.
The heat dissipating capacity depends upon the

following factors.
1. Area of Housing (A); 2. Thermal conductivity of
material (K) and 3. Temperature difference between the
housing surface and 4, Surrounding air T 2  T 1
H d  A T2  T1 K
Where
H d  Heat dissipated
Hg  Hd
P 1    A T2  T1 K
3.19 FORCES ACTING ON WORM GEARS

When the worm gear is transmitting power. The
forces acting on the worm are similar to power screw. The
force acting on the worm is shown in Fig. 3.8. The forces
on the worm and worm gear are equal in magnitude, but
opposite in direction.
W orm W orm
W orm G ea r G ea r
G ea r
S h aft
+
FR
FR
FA
FT
W orm
W orm S h aft W orm
Fig.3.8. F orces A cting on W orm Teeth .

1. Tangential force on the Worm
2  Tw
FT 
d1
where,
Tw – Torque on worm.
d1 – Pitch circle diameter of worm.
3.20 MERITS AND DEMERITS OF WORM GEAR DRIVES
3.20.1 Merits of Worm Gear Drives

1. It is used for very high velocity ratio of about 100.
2. Very smooth and noiseless operation.
3. Self locking facility is available.
4. It is very compact when compared with equivalent

spur or helical gears for the same speed reduction.
3.20.2 Demerits of Worm Gear Drives

1. Low Efficiency
2. More heat will be produced and hence this drive

can only be operated inside an oil reservoir (or)
an extra cooling fan is required in order to
dissipate the heat from the drive.
3. Low power transmission (up to 100 kW)
4. Cost is very high, when compared with other

gears drive.
3.21 BASIC DIMENSIONS OF WORM GEAR

From PSG data book pg.8.43 Table 35
Basic Dimensions of Worm Gear Pair
Nomenclature Symbol Formulae
Centre distance a a  0.5 mx q  Z2  2x
Face width of wheel b From PSG Data book

table 38 Pg 8.48
Length of worm L From PSG Data book
table 39 Pg 8.48
Axial module mx 2a
mx 
q  Z2 2x
Number of starts Z Determined by calculation

Number of teeth on wheel Z2 Z2  iZ1
Gear ratio i Z2
i
Z1
Diameter factor q d1
q
mx
Height factor fo Normally fo  1
Axial pitch Px Px   mx
Pitch of the helix, lead Pz Pz  ZPx
Pressure Angle in axial    20

section
(Archimedian worm)
Lead angle on the  Z
tan  
reference cylinder q
Lead angle on the pitch  Z

tan  
cylinder q  2x
Bottom clearance c c  0.2

to 0.3 mx
Addendum modification x a
x  0.5 q  Z2
coefficient mx
Worm Reference diameter d1 d1  qmx
Worm Tip diameter da1 da1  d1  2fomx
Worm Root diameter df1 df1  d1  2fomx  2c
Worm Pitch diameter d1 d1  mx q  2x

WORM WHEEL
(In axial section) d2 d2  Z2mx
Reference diameter
Worm wheel Tip diameter da2 da2  Z2  2fo  2x mx
Worm wheel Root df2 df2  Z2  2fo mx  2c

diameter
Worm wheel Pitch d2 d2  d2
diameter
Throat tip radius R1 d1
R1   fomx
2
Worm wheel Throat root R2 d1
R2   fomx  c
radius 2
Worm Tip relief radius r1 r1  0.1 mx
Worm Root relief radius r2 r2  0.2 mx
Worm Nominal tooth  mx

S
thickness on reference 2
diameter in axial section.
Worm Nominal tooth Sn 
Sn  m cos 
thickness on reference 2 x
diameter in normal section
Note: In PSG Data Book Z 2 is denoted by z & Z 1 by Z .
3.21.1 Forces on Worm: Refer PSG databook Page No. 8.57

2M t
1. Tangential force: F t 
d2
2. Radial force: F r  F t tan 
3. Axial force: F a  F t tan   
M t  twisting moment
  pressure angle
  friction angle
3.22 DESIGN OF WORM AND WORM GEAR USING

LEWIS AND BUCKINGHAM’S EQUATION
Step 1:
For a given problem note down the given parameters
like Power, gear ratio (i), speed, etc.

Refer PSG Data book Pg. No. 8.45
Selection of material is similar to spur gear and take

the vlaues of [c]. – Design surface stress and [ b] - Design
bending stress.
Step 3: Calculation of lead Angle

d1
Diameter factor q 
mx
d1
11 
mx [If q is not given Assume q  11 ]
m x  axial module
 Z1 
Lead Angle   tan  1  
 q 
To determine Z 1 (no. of starts of gear); It is based on
the efficiency of worm gear drive. choose the appropriate
value From PSG data book pg. 8.46, Table 37.
Step 4:
Calculation of Tangential load Ft acting on the wheel in
terms of axial module mx
HP  75
Tangential load F t 
vmg
vmg pitch line velocity of worm gear
 d2 N2 d 2  in mm
vmg 
60  1000 N 2  rpm
Power in HP
Step 5:
Calculation of Dynamic Load Fd
 6  vmg 
Fd    Ft
 6 
Step 6:
Calculation of strength of gear tooth
[b] y bP cn [ b ] y b
Fs  
 P dn P cn  Normal circular pitch
P dn  Normal Diametrical pitch
 [b] yb   mx
 [b] Y b  mx
Step 7:
Calculation of axial module mx

By equating F s  F d ;
Determine the m x
Step 8:

b  0.75 d 1 (If Z 1  2or 3  d1  11 m x
b~
 8.25 m x [From Data book Pg. 8.48, Table: 38]
Step 9:
Calculation of pitch circle diameter d2

d2  Z2  m x
Step 10:
Calculation of pitch line velocity of worm wheel vgm 

 d 2N 2 d2  in mm
vgm 
60  1000 N2  rpm
Step 11:
Recalculation of beam strength

F s  [b] y b  m x
Step 12:
Recalculation of Dynamic Load

 6  vmg 
Fd    Ft
 6 
Step 13:
F d  F s for safe design.
Step 14:
Calculation of wear load Fw 
F w  d2  b  kw
Step 15:
F d  F w For safe design.
Step 16:
Checking for efficiency
actual  design then the design is safe.
 tan  
actual   
 tan    
[From PSG Data book pg no. 8.49]
  Friction Angle  tan 1 
If  is not given Assume   0.03
  co-efficient of friction.
Step 17:
Calculation the power loss (or) Heat Generated
H g  1  a  Input hp  4500 kg f m/min
(Or)
a   actual
H g  1  a   P Watts (power in Watts)
Step 18:
Calculate the area required to dissipate the heat
Heat generated  Heat dissipated to the atmosphere
Heat Dissipated H d  h cr A  t kg f m/min
hcr – heat transfer co-efficient.
t – change in temperature T2  T1
A – Area required to dissipate the heat.
(Or)
substitute A in m 2, K in W/m 2
H d  A T 2  T 1   K
H d in watts.
Step 19:
Calculate the basic dimensions of worm and worm wheel.
From the PSG Data book pg 8.43 table 35.
Step 20:
Draw the neat sketch of worm and worm wheel.
Problem 3.13 A hardened steel worm rotates at 1440 rpm
and transmits 12 kW to a phosphor bronze gear. The speed of
the worm wheel should be 60  3% rpm. Design the worm gear
drive if an efficiency of atleast 82% in desired, and also
determine the heat generated, required area of cooling to
dissipate the generates heat. Temperature rise restricted to
40C and heat transfer co-efficient 10 W/m2C
Solution:
Step 1:
Given Data
Worm N1  1440 rpm

Power P   12 kW  12  10 3 W
Worm wheel N 2  60  3% rpm
desired  82%
Material (Worm) - Hardened steel
Material (Worm wheel) - Phosphor bronze
Change in temperature t  40C
Heat transfer co-efficient, Hcr  10 W/m 2 C
Step 2:
Worm - Hardened Steel
Worm Wheel - Phosphor bronze
Step 3:
Calculation of lead Angle 
d1
mx
d1
11  d1  11 mx
mx [Assume q  11
If not given]
  tan  1 Z/q
 Z1 
 tan 1  
 11 
From PSG Data book Pg. 8.46 ; Table: 37

  82% [  0.80 to 0.92] Z1  3
  tan  1 3 /11
  15.25 
Step 4:
Calculation of tangential load Ft

hp  75
Ft 
V mg
[vmg  worm gear velocity]
 d2 N 2
V mg 
60  1000 d2  m x  Z2
N1
i
N2
1440
 3%  i
60
Z2
i  24  0.72 ; i ~
 24 i
Z1
  m x  72  60 Z 2  24  3
vmg   0.226 m x
60  1000 Z 2  72
3
12  10
P hp
750
P  16 hp
hp  75
Ft  kg f
vmg
16  75

0.226 m x
5309.73 53097.3
 kg f  N
mx mx
Step 5:
 6  vmg 
Fd    Ft
 6  (Assume vmg  5 m/s)
 6  5  53097.3
  N
 6  mx
97345.05
 N
mx
Step 6:
Calculation of strength of gear tooth Fs Y  y  
F s  [b]  y    m x  [ b] b  Y  m x
Y  0.392 Assu me   20
From PSG Data book Pg. No.8.52.
[b]  780 kgf/cm 2  78 N/mm 2
From PSG Data book pg. 8.45, Table 33. (For bronze,
rotation in only one direction)
b  0.75 d1 [From PSG Data book Pg.No.848 Table38]
 0.75  11m x
 8.25 m x
F s  78  8.25 m x  0.392  mx
F s  252.252 m 2x
Step 7:
Calculation of axial module (mx)

For safe design
Fs  Fd
97345.05
252.252 m 2x 
mx
m 3x  385.903
m x  7.28
mx ~
 8 mm
From the PSG Data book pg. no.8.2, Table 1 (Choose the
largest standard module from table).
Step 8:

b  8.25 m x
 8.25  8
b  66 mm
Step 9:
Calculation of pitch axile diameter (d2)

d2  Z2  m x
 72  8
 576 mm
Step 10:
Pitch line velocity of worm wheel V2
V 2  0.226 m x
V 2  1.808 m/min
Step 11:
Recalculation of Dynamic Load Fd
97345.05
Fd  N
mx
F d  12168.13125 N
Step 12:
Recalculation of Strength of Gear Tooth Fs
F s  252.252 m 2x
 16144.128 N
Step 13:
Checking for Beam Strength Fs
F s  F d for satis factory design
16144.128  12168.14
 Fd  FS
The design is safe, based on the beam strength.
Step 14:
Calculation of wear load Fw 
Fw  d2 b kw
d 2  576 mm
b  66 mm
k w  5.6 kg f/c m2  0.56 N/mm 2
[  20, (Assume) Hardened steel & Bronze, From

PSG data book pg no. 8.54, Table 43]
Fw  d2 b kw
 576  66  0.56
F w  21288.96 N
Step 15:

For satisfactory design
Fw  Fd
F w  21288. 96 N ; Fd  12168.14
By comparing these values, F w  F d, so the design is

safe based on wear strength.
Step 16:
 tan  
actual   
 tan      
  tan 1 
  1.718
  15.25 
From PSG Data book Pg. 8.49 (Assume   0.03 )

tan 
actual 
tan   
tan 15.25 

tan 15.25  1.718 
0.27262

0.30512
 0.8934  100
desired  82%
actual  89.34%
actual   desired (for safe design)
 So the design is safe, because the actual efficiency

is greater than desired efficiency.
89.3%  82% 
Step 17: Calculate the power loss (or) Heat Generated

H g  1  a  Input hp  4500 kg f/min
H g  1  0.893416  4500 kg f/min
 7675.2 kg f/min
Step 18:
Calculate the area required to dissipate the Heat.

Heat generated H d  Heat dissipation to the
atmosphere.
hcr  10 W/m2C
Nm
 10
Sm 2C
Nm
 6 kgfm/min
S
10  kgfm  60

60  10 m 2C min
7675.2 kgf/min  h cr  t  A 1 w/m 2C  6 kg fm/minC
hcr  60 kgfm/min C
kg f m
7675.2 kg fm/min  60  A  40
min  C m n
A  3.198 m2
Step 19:
Calculate the basic dimension of worm and worm wheel.

1. Axial module m x  8 mm
2. Number of starts (worm) Z 1  3
3. Number of teeth on the worm wheel Z 2  72
4. Face Width b  66 mm

5. Length of worm L  12.5  0.09 Z 2 m x
From PSG Data book pg. No. 8.48 Table 39
L  [12.5  0.09 72 ]  8
 151.84
L~
 152 mm
6. Centre Distance (a)

a  0.5 m x q  Z  2x
 0.5  8 11  72
 332 mm (Assume x  0)
7. Height Factor fo  1
8. Bottom Clearance
c  0.2 m x to 0.3 m x [Take c  0.3 m x]
c  0.3  8
 2.4 mm
9. Pitch Diameter
d1  mx q  2x
 mx q
 8  11
 88 mm
d 2  Z 2m x
 72  8
 576 mm
10. Tip diameters da
d a1  d1  2fom x
 88  2  1  8  104 mm
d a2  Z 2  2f0  2n m x n  0
 72  2  1  0 8
 592 mm
11. Root Diameter df

df  d 1  2fom x  2C
1
 88  2  1  8  2 2.4 
 67.2 ~
 68 mm
df  Z 2  2fo m x  2C
2
 72  2  1 8  2  2.4
 555.2 ~
 56 mm
Problem 3.14 Design a worm gear drive to transmit 12 kW

at 1200 rpm. Speed reduction desired is 30 : 1. The worm is
made of hardened steel and the wheel of phosphor bronze.
Check the heating capacity of gears and determine the
efficiency. [May/June 2012]
Solution:
Step 1:
Given Data
Power P  12 kW  12  10 3 W
WormN 1  1200 rpm
Speed ratio i  30
Worm - Hardened steel
Work wheel - phosphor bronze
To Find
Heating capacity of gears H g
Efficiency ( actual)
Step 2:
Worm - Hardened steel
Worm wheel - Phosphor Bronze
Step 3:
Calculation of lead Angle

d1
mx
 q  11(Assume
If not given)
d1
11 
mx
d 1  11 m x
Z1
  tan  1
q (Assume Z 1  3
if not given).
1
 tan 3/11 
  15.25 
Step 4:

hp  75
Ft  kg f
V mg
12  10 3
Power P   hp
750
 16 hp
 d2 N2 d2  m x  Z2
vmg 
60  1000 Z2
i
  90 mx  40 Z1

60  1000 Z 2  30  3
 0.18849 m x Z 2  90
hp  75 d2  90 m x
Ft 
vmg
N1
 30
16  75 N2

0.18849 m x 1200
N2 
30
6366.385 653663.85
Ft  kgf  N N 2  40 rpm
mx mn
Step 5:
 6  vmg 
Fd    Ft
 6  (Assume vmg  5 m/s
6  5 63663.85
 
6 mx
116717.05
Fd 
mx
Step 6:
Calculation of strength of gear tooth Fs
F s  [ b] b Y m x
[n]  780 kg f/cm 2  78 N/mm 2

[From PSG Data book pg. No.8.45. Table 33.] For

bronze rotation in one direction only
b  0.74d1 Z 1  3 ; From PSG Data book pg No. 8.48;
Table 38]
b  0.75  11 m x
Y  0.392   20)
(Assume) From PSG data book pg.No.8.52]
b  8.25 m x
F s  78  8.25 m x  0.92  m x
F s  252.252 m 2x
Step 7:
Calculation of axial module mx
For safe design
Fs  Fd
116717.05
252.252 m 2x 
mx
116717.05
m 3x 
252.252
 462.700
m x  7.73
m x~
 8 mm
From PSG Data book pg no.8.2, Table 1 the standard

module in chosen mx  8 mm
Step 8:
b  8.25 m x
 8.25  8
b  66 mm
Step 9:
d2  Z2 m x
 90  8
d 2  720 mm
Step 10:
V 2   0.18849 m x
 0.18849  8  60
 90.5 m/min
Step 11:
Recalculation of dynamic load Fd
116717.05 116717.05
Fd  
mx 8
F d  14589.63 N
Step 12:
F s  252.252 m 2x
 16144.128 N
Step 13:
Checking for Beam Strength
For satisfactory design,
Fs  Fd
16144.128  14589.63
 The design is safe based on the strength of gear.
Step 14:
Calculation of Wear Load (Fw
F w  d2  b  kw
d2  720 mm ; b  66
kw  5.6 kg f/cm 2  0.56 N/mm2
[Hardened steel Bronze, from psg Data book pg. 8.54,

Table 43]
Fw  d2 b kw
 720  66  0.56
 26611.2 N
Step 15:
Checking for Wear strength
For satisfactory design
Fw  Fd
26611.2 F w   14589.63 F d
 The design is safe based on the wear strength of

gear.
Step 16:
tan 
Efficiency actual 
tan   
  tan 1    0.03 (Assume)

  1.718
  15.25
tan 15.25 
actual 
tan 15.25  1.718 
actual  0.8935  100%
 89.35%
Step 17:
Heating capacity of great (H g ) (or) power loss (or)
Heat generated.
H g  1  a   Inpu t hp  4500 kg f m/min
 1  0.8935   16  4500 kgfm/min
 7668 kg f m/min  1 kgfm 1 Nm 

  
 mi n 6 s 
7668
Nm /s
6
H g  1278 Watts  . . 1 Nm 
 . W
 s 
Step 18:
Calculate the basic dimensions of worm and worm
wheel.
2. Number of starts (worm) Z1  3
4. Face Width b  66 mm

5. Length of Worm L  12.5  0.09 Z2 m x
Choose L From PSG Data book pg. No. 8.48,

Table 39
L  12.5  0.09  90 8
 164.8
L~
 165 mm
6. Centre Distance a  0.5 m x q  Z 2  2x
 0.5  8 11  90 (Assume x  0 )
 404 mm
7. High Factor f0  1
8. Bottom Clearance c  0.2 to 0.3 m x
c  0.3 m x
[Take c  0.3 m x]
 0.3  8
 2.4 mm
9. Pitch Diameter (d) (Assume n  0)

d1  m x q  2n  d2  Z 2m x

 8 11  0   90  8
 88 mm   720 mm

10. Tip diameter d a (Assume n  0)

da1  d1  2fo m x  d a2  Z 2  2fo  2nm x 
 
 88  2  1  8   90  2  0 8 
 104 mm  da2  736 mm 
 
Root diameter (d f)
df1  d 1  2fom x  2c
 88  2  8  2  1  2.4  67.2
 68 mm
df2  Z 2  2fo m x  2c
 90  2  8  2  2.4  699.2
df2 ~
 700 mm
Problem 3.15 Design a worm gear drive to transmit a power

of 22.5 kW. The worm speed is 1440 rpm, and the speed of
the wheel is 60 rpm. The drive should have a minimum
efficiency of 80% and above. Select suitable materials for worm
and wheel and decide upon the dimensions of the drive.
(May/June 2013)
Solution:
Step 1:
Given Data
Power P   22.5 kW  22.5  10 3 W
Worm N 1  1440 rpm
Worm Wheel N 2  60 rpm
Minimum Efficiency (desired  80%

Step 2:
Worm  Always Select (steel)
Worm wheel  Choose bronze
From PSG Data book Pg No.8.45; Table 32.
Step 3:
Calculation of lead angle 
d1
Diameter Factor q 
mx (Take q  11 )
d 1  11 m x
 Z1 
  tan  1  
 q  Z 1  3   0.8  0.9
d  0.8
 tan 1 3/11
  15.25 
Step 4:
hp  75 Z2
Ft  i
vmg Z1
 d 2 N2 N1
vmg  i
60  1000 N2
  m x72  60 [d 2  72 m x] 1440
 i
60  1000 60
i  24
 0.226 mx m/s Z 2  24  3
Z 2  72
22.5  10 3
Power P   hp
750
 30 hp
hp  75
Ft  kgf
V mg
30  75 9955.75
  kg f
0.226 m x mx
99557.5
Ft  N
mx
Step 5:
Calculation of Dynamic Load F d
 6  vmg 
Fd    Ft
 6  Assume vmg  5 m/s
 6  5  99557.5
  m
 6  x
182522.08
Fd 
mx
Step 6:
F s  [ b] b Y m x
Y  0.392 (Assume   20 From PSG Data book

pg. no. 8.52 [Y  0.392 in chosen]
b  0.75 d 1
[b]  80 N/mm 2 for bronze.
 8.25 mx
F s  80  8.25 m x  0.392  m x
 258.72 m 2x
Step 7:
Calculation of axial module m x
For safe design
F s  Fd
182522.08
258.72 m 2x 
mx
m 3x  705.481
m x  8.90
mx ~
 10 mm
A standard module chosen, From PSG Data book

pg. No.8.2 Table 1.
Step 8:
Calculation of face width b
b  8.25 m x
 8.25  10  82.5 ~
 83 mm
Step 9:
d2  Z2  m x
 72  10
d2  720 mm
Step 10:
v2  vmg  0.226 m x
 0.226  10
 2.26 m/s
Step 11:
Recalculation of Dynamic Load Fd
182522.08 182522.08
Fd  
mx 10
F d  18252.208 N
Step 12:
Recalculation of strength of great tooth Fs
F s  258.72 m 2x
 258.72  10 2
F s  25872 N
Step 13:
Check for Beam Strength
F s  F d For satisfactory design.
F s 25872   18252.208 F d
 The design is safe based on beam strength of gear.
Step 14:
F w  d 2  b  kw
d 2  720 mm ; b  83 mm
kW  5.6 kg f/cm 2  0.56 N/mm 2 [Assum e   20
For steel and Bronze] From PSG Data book pg

no.8.54 Table 43.
F w  720  83  0.56
 33465.6 N
Step 15:

For safe design F w  F d
F w  33465.6
F d  182522.08 N
By comparing two values F w  F d,  The design is

safe based on wear strength of gear.
Step 16:

tan 
actual 
tan   
  tan 1  Assume   0.03
  tan 1 0.03
  1.718
  15.25
tan 15.25 
actual 
tan 15.25  1.718  desided  80%
actual  0.8934
actual  89.34%
The actual efficiency is greater than that of desired
efficiency,  The design is safe [a  d]
Step 17:
Calculate the basic dimensions of worm and worm
wheel.
2. Number of starts Z 1  3
4. Face width b   83 mm
5. Length of Worm L  12.5 0.09Z 2 mx
L  12.5  0.09  72   10
 189.2
~
 190 mm
6. Centre Distance a  0.5 m x q  Z 2  2x

(Assume x  0 )
 0.5  10 11 1 72   415 mm
7. Height Factor fo  1
8. Bottom Clearance c  0.2 m x to 0.3 m x [Take c  0.3m ]

x
c  0.3 m x
 0.3  10
 3 mm
9. Pitch diameter
d1  m x q  2n  d 2  Z 2m x

d1  10 11  0   72  10
 110 mm   720 mm
 (Assume n  0 )
10. Tip diameter d a
da1  d 1  2fom x  d a2  Z 2  2fo  2n m x


99  2  1  10   72  2  1  0  10
 119 mm   740 mm

11. Root diameter d f
df2  Z2  2fo mx  2c
df1  d 1  2fom x  2c 
  72  2 10  2  3
 99  2  10  2  3 
  694
df1  73 mm
 d f2  694 mm
3.23 DESIGN OF WORM AND WORM WHEEL [Based

on Hertz Method]
Refer PSG Data book Pg. No. 8.43 to 8.49
Worm: Steel
Worm wheel: Cast iron (or) Bronze
Take the values of [ c]  Design surface stress and
  b   Design bending stress in kgf  cm2

 
For [c] value
Initially assume sliding velocity vs as 3 m  sec and

select wheel material as bronze. Take the value of [c]
From PSG Data book P.No. 8.45.
For [b] value,
The value depends on material, methods of casting of

wheel, u and type of rotation. Take the value of [ b] From
PSG Data book P.No., 8.45
Step 2
Select no. of starts  Z 1

Take the value of Z 1, based on efficiency. If efficiency
is not given, assume efficiency and take Z 1.
Step 3
Calculation of number of teeth on wheel
Z2  i  Z1
Normally Z 2  30 to 70 (For compact reduction unit

choose Z 2 towards the lower
limit; For higher
transmission efficiency
choose Z 2 towards the
higher limit)
In general, For hp  20 ; Z 2  60 to 70
for small hp, Z 2  30 to 50
Step 4
Diameter factor: (q)
d1
q d 1  pitch diameter of Worm in mm
mx
m x  axial module - mm
Initially assume q  11
Step 5
Calculation of design twisting moment [M t] Refer

PSG Data book Page No. 8.44
Mt  Nominal twisting moment

transmitted by worm wheel in kg fcm
hp
 71620 i   kgf cm
N
Design twisting N 1  speed of worm in rpm

moment k  load concentration factor
 [M t]  M t  k  k d  1 when load is almost con stan t
kd  dynamic load factor
 1 for V s  3 m  sec
Step 6: Calculation of centre distance (a) Refer PSG Data

book Page No. 8.44
Substitute c in kg f/cm 2 and M t in kg f  cm then we

get (a) in cm.


2
 Z2  3  540  [M t]
a 1  Z  10 cm
 q   2 
 q [c] 
 
(Or)


2
 Z2  1  3  540  [M t]
a  Z  10 cm
 q   2 
 q [c] 
 
Substitute  c in N/mm 2
[M t] in N-mm, then we get ‘a’ in mm.
Step 7: Calculation of axial module m x: Refer PSG Data

book Page No.8.43
2a
mx 
q  Z 2  2x
assume x  0
x  addendum modification coefficient
Refer data book, Refer PSG Data book Page No.
8.2, take the standard value of module.
Step 8: Recalculate centre distance ‘a’
According to the standard value of module m x recalculate

the centre distance a
m x q  Z 2
a
2
Step 9: Calculation of sliding velocity vs  m  sec
d1  Pitch circle diameter of worm  q  m x

V1 Z1
Sliding velocity  vs  tan  
cos  q
where   lead angle
Check vs:  Z1 
  tan 1  
 q 
If vs  3 m  sec, then reduce surface stress by 30% of
[ c] design initial value.
ie., [c]  0.7  Initially assumed value of [c]
Calculation of pitch line velocity of wheel V2:
d 2 N 2 d2  mxZ
v2  m  sec
60 N 2  wheel speed in rpm
for v2  3 m  sec
kd  1;
Since the value of k and kd  1
There is no change in the value of design twisting

moment. [M t]
Step 10: Checking of design surface stress [c], Refer PSG

Data book Page No.8.44
Substitute a in cm, M t in kg f/cm , We get, c in

kg/cm 2


540  Z 2/q  1 
C    [M t]  [C ] in kgf/c m
Z2  q  a 
(Or)
3


  Z2  
 1  [m t ]
540  q  
c     in N/mn2
 Z2   a  10
 
 q 
Substitute a in mm; [M t] in N-mm; then get  c in
N/mm 2
Step 11: Checking of design bending stress [b]
1.9 [Mt] y v  form factor

b   [ b ]
m3x  q  Z 2  yv Z1
Cal. Z v or Z eq 
cos 3 
at the value of Z v take
value of yv
From PSG Databook
Page No.8.18
at X  0
Step 12: Calculation of efficiency
Refer data book Page No. 8.49
tan  Where

tan      lead angle in degree
  friction angle in degree
Refer PSG Data book Pg
NO.8.49
From Graph,
at sliding velocity and
according to material
take the value of 
where   frictional
coefficient
But   tan 
Step 13:
Calculate the Basic Dimension of Worm & Worm

Wheel
2a
1. Axial module m x 
q  Z2  2x
(Assume x  0
2. Number of starts Z 1
3. Number of teeth on the worm wheel Z 2  i  Z 1
4. Face width (b) [From table 38, from PSG Data

book pg. 8.48]
5. Length of worm L  [Choose L formula from Data
book pg.8.48; Table: 39; Assume n  0]
6. Centre Distance a  0.5 m xq  Z 2  2x
7. Height factor fo  1
8. Bottom clearance c  0.2 m x  0.3 m x
9. Pitch diameter d

d1  m x q  2x  d2  Z 2 m x

Assume x  0

10. Tip diameter d a
da1  d 1  2fom x  d a2  Z2  2fo  2x mx


 Assum e x  0
11. Root diameter d f
df1  d 1  2fom x  2C  d f2  Z 2  2fo mx  2C



Problem 3.16 Design a worm gear drive a transmit 22.5 kW
at a worm speed of 1440 rpm. Velocity ratio is 24:1. An
efficiency of atleast 85% is desired. The temperature rise should
be restricted to 40C. Determine the required cooling area.
Given data
P  22.5 kW ; N  1440 rpm ; i  24 ; T o  T a   T  40C ;
  85%
Solution
Assuming worm material as steel and wheel material
as Bronze (sand cast)
u  39 kg f/mm 2  390 N /mm2
[b]  50 N/mm2 (Assume rotation in one direction

only)
Step 2: Calculation of centre distance

From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.46, Table 37
corresponding to efficiency   85%
number of starts Z 1  3
Z2
since i
Z1
 Z2  i Z 1  24  3  72
d1
Assume q  diameter factor   11 (initially)
mx
Assume sliding velocity vs  3 m/s (initially)
From PSG Data book Pg. 8.45, Table 32,

corresponding to sliding velocity
[c]  1590 kg f/cm 2  159 N/mm 2
Assume intially k  k d  1
hp
M t  71620 i
n
since the power is in kW
2 N
P Mt
60
P  60 22.5  103  60
 Mt    3581 N m
2 N2  1440 
2   
 24 
[M t]  M t  kd  k  3581  10 3  1  3581  10 3 Nmm
Substitute  c is N/mm 2; M t in N-mm.



2
 Z2  3  540  [M t]
a 1 Z   10
 q   2 
  q  [ c ] 
  


2
 72  3  540  3581  10 3
 1     345.9
 11    72   10
  11   159 
  
a~
 346 mm
Step 3: Calculation of axial module

Refer PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.43
2a
Axial module m x 
q  Z 2  2x
Assume x  0
2a 2  346
 mx  
q  Z 2 11  72
m x  8.4 mm
From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 8.2, select standard

module
 axial module m x  10 mm
Step 4: Recalculate a and determine d 1

m x q  Z 2 10 72  11
a   415 mm
2 2
Pitch circle diameter of worm d 1  q m x

 d 1  11  10  110 mm
Step 5:
V1
Sliding velocity vs 
cos 
 Z1  1 3 
But   tan  1    tan  11 
 q   
  15.25 
and
 d 1 N1   110  1440
v1  
60  1000 60  1000
v1  8.3 m/s
8.3
 vs 
cos 15.25
vs  8.6 m/s
Step 6: Modification of [c]

Since vs  3 m/s (initially assumed), the [c] value has
to be modified.
 [ c] is reduced by 20% to account for the increased

speed.
 [ c]  0.8  159
 127 N/mm 2
Step 7: Determination of Induced stresses

3
  Z2 



 1 [M t]
540  q  
c   
 Z2   a  10
 
 q 
3

  72 


  1 3

540   11    3581  10
72 /11  415  10
 
 121 N/mm 2  [c]
 The design is satisfactory based on surface stresses.
1.9 [M t]
b 
m 3x qZ 2 yv
Z2 72
Zv  3
 3
 80
cos  cos 15.25 
From PSG data book Pg.No. 8.18 corresponding to
Z v  80
y v  0.499
1.9  3581  10 3
 b  3
 17.22 N/mm2  [b]
10  11  72  0.499
 The design is satisfactory based on bending

stresses.
Step 8: Efficiency
tan 

tan   
From PSG Data book Pg.No. 8.49, from graph at

vs  3.5 m/s
  0.03
   tan 
   tan  1   tan  1 0.03
   1.718 
tan 15.25 

tan 15.25   1.718 
  0.8935  89.35%
Step 10: Heat removal analysis

1    Input power  kt To  Ta  A
1  0.8935   22500  10 40  A
[Assume kt  10 w /m 2  C ]
A  5.99 m 2
 Cooling Area  5.99 m 2
Problem 3.17 A 2 kW power is applied to a worm shaft at

720 rpm. The worm is of quadruple start type with 50 mm as
pitch circle diameter. The worm gear has 40 teeth with 5 mm
module. The pressure angle in the diametral plane is 20.
Determine (i) the lead angle of the worm, (ii) velocity ratio
and (iii) centre distance. Also calculate efficiency of the worm
gear drive and power lost in friction.
Solution
P  2 kW
N 1  720 rpm
Z 1  4 since quadruple start
d 1  50 mm
Z 2  40 teeth
m  5 mm
Z2 40
i  V.R    10
Z1 4
Step 1
Worm – steel
Wheel – Bronze, sand, chill
[b]  50 N/mm2
[c]  159 N/mm 2 at Vs  3 m/s
Step 2
Calculation of centre distance


2
  Z2  3  540  [M t]
a 1  Z  10
 q   2 
 q [ ]
c 
 
q  10 (diameter factor) From PSG Data book

Pg.No. 8.46; Table 36.
Initially assume k  kd  1
Po wer  60 2  10 3  60
Mt  
2  rpm of wh eel 720
2 
10
 265.25 Nm
 265.25  10 3 Nmm
 [M t]  M t  k  k d
 265.25  10 3  1
 265.25  10 3 Nmm


2
 40  3  540  265.25  10 3
a 1   
 10   40  10
 10  159 
 
 133.7 mm
Step 3
Lead angle 
Z1
tan  
q
4
  0.4
10
tan   0.4
  tan 1 0.4
 21.8 
Step 4
Efficiency of worm gearing
tan 

tan   
v1
We know sliding velocity vs 
cos 
 d1 N 1
But v1 
60  1000
  50  720
v1   1.884 m/s
60  1000
1.884
 vs   2.03 m/s
cos 21.8
from the graph, corresponding to sliding velocity and

plot of bronze worm wheel
  0.045
But   tan 
 tan   0.045
   tan 1 0.045
 2.576 
tan 21.8

tan 21.8  2.576 
 0.8827
 88.27%
Step 5
Power lost in friction Q
Q  P 1  
 2  103 1  0.8827 
 234.6 watts
 0.234 kW
Problem 3.18 A worm drive transmits 15 kW at 2000 rpm

to a machine carriage at 75 rpm. The worm is triple threaded
and has 65 mm Pitch diameter. The worm gear has 90 teeth
of 6 mm module. The tooth form is to be 20 full depth involute
coefficient of friction is 0.1;
Calculate (i) Tangential force acting on the worm (ii) axial
thrust and separating force on worm. and (iii) efficiency of
worm drive.
Solution
Given Data:
P  15 kW ; N 1  2000 rpm; N 2  75 rpm; Z 1  3;

d 2  65 mm; Z 2  90 ; m x  6 mm   20;   0.1
1. Tangential force acting on the worm (refer PSG

Data book P.No. 8.57)
2M t kW
Ft  M t  97420
d2 N1
2  730.65 15
  97420 
6.5 2000
 224.81 kg  730.65 kg f  cm
2. Axial thrust on Worm: (refer PSG Data book Page

No. 8.57)
F a  F t tan    Z1
tan  
q
 224.81 tan 15.47  5.71 d2 65
q   10.83
mx 6
 87.10 kg 3
  tan  1
10.83
Lead angle    15.47
3. Separating force
(or) Radial force   Frictiona l coefficient

 F t  tan   tan   0.1
 224.81 tan 20    tan 1 0.1
 81.824 kg friction angle    5.71
tan 
4. Efficiency    (refer PSG Data book Pg.
tan   
No. 8.49)
tan 15.47
  0.7142
tan 15.47  5.71
  71.42%
Problem 3.19 Determine the efficiency of worm gear drive to

transmit 20 hp from a worm at 1440 rpm to the worm wheel
the speed of the worm wheel should 40  2% rpm.
(May /June 2008)
Solution
Given Data:
Power  P  20 hp ; Speed of worm  N  1440 rpm
Speed of Worm wheel  40  2%
 Gear
speed of worm 1440
ratio  i    36  2%
speed of worm wheel 40
i.e , % deviation of i  2%
 Selection of material and design stresses refer
Databook, Refer PSG Data book Page No. 8.45
Worm - steel;
Worm wheel  Bronze (sand chill cast) -

2
u  39 kgf  mm
(assume rotation in one direction only)
Take [b]  Design bending stress  500 kgf  mm 2
and [c]  Design surface stress  1590 kgf  cm 2
(assume initially, the sliding velocity
vs  3 m  sec
 Since the efficiency is not given, assume efficiency

as 80%
For efficiency   0.70 to 0.82 ,
The value of Z 1  no. of starts  2
Z2
But, i  gear ratio  ; where Z 2  no. of teeth on
Z1
worm wheel
 Z 2  iZ 1  36  2  72 teeth
d
 Assume q  diameter factor   11 (initially)
mx
where d  pitch diameter of worm  mm
 m x  axial module  mm
 Design twisting moment [M t]
Design
torque  [M t]  M t kd  k
 25464.88  1  1 hp
M t  71620 i
[M t]  25464.88 kgfcm n
20
 71620   32  0.8
1440
 25464.88 kg f  c m
Assume k  kd  1 initially
 Centre distance, a refer PSD Databook, Page

No. 8.44
Centre distance (a)


2
 Z2  3  540 
a 1  Z  q [ ]  [M t]
 q   2 C 


2
 72  3  540 
a 1   25464.88
 11    72  1590 
  11  
  
a  30.88 cm  388.8 mm
Take centre distance  a  309 mm
Calculation of axial module, mx Refer PSG Data

book Page No. 8.43
2a
axial module  m x 
q  Z 2  2x assume x  0
2  309
  7.53 mm
11  72  0
From PSD data book, refer page No. 8.2, select

standard module
 axial module  m x  10 mm
Recalculate, centre distance (a)
m x q  Z 2 10 11  72 
a   415 mm
2 2
Reference diameter of worm  d 1  q  m x  11  10
 110 mm
Refer PSG Data book Z1 2

tan   
P.No. 8.44 q 11
Sliding velocity  lea d angle    10.3 
V2
 vs 
cos 
8.293 d 1 N   0.11  1440

 v1  
cos 10.3  60 60
 8.429 m /sec  8.293 m  sec
Since vs  3m  sec (initially assumed)
Therefore, reduce [c] by 30%
Now, The design surface stress
 [ c]  0.7  1590  1113 kg f  cm2
Checking of surface stress, c
Refer PSG Data book Page No.8.44


3
540  Z 2  q  1 
C    [Mt]  [ c]
Z 2  q  a 


  72  
540
  11   1 
     25464.88
72  11   415 
 
 32.276 kg f  cm 2  [ c] 1113 kg f  cm 2
 The design is satisfactory based on surface stress.
 Checking of bending stress, b
Refer PSG Data book Page Z2 72

Zv  
No.8.44 3
cos  3
c os 10.3
1.9 [Mt]  73.59

b   [b]
m3x  q Z2  yv Take approximately
Zv  80 teeth
1.9  25464.88

13  11  72  0.499 Refer PSG Data book
P.No. 8.18
 122.42 kgf  cm2  500 kgf  cm2
take yv  0.499
(at Zv  80 teeth)
mx  10 mm  1 c m
 The design is satisfactory based on bending stress
 To find efficiency of drive

Refer PSG Data book
Page No. 8.49
tan    friction angle

tan    from graph (P.No. 8.49)
tan 10.3  at vs  3.5 m  sec,   0.03

tan 10.3  1.718 
  0.85  85%    tan   0.03
   tan  1 0.03
 1.718 
CROSSED HELICAL GEARS

3.24 Screw or Skew gears (crossed helical gears)
These helical gears are also known as spiral gears.
They are true helical gears and only differ in their
application for interconnecting skew shafts shown in
Fig. 3.9. Screw gears can be designed to connect shafts at
any angle, but in most applications the shafts are at right
angles.
1. Helical gears of the same hand operate at right

angles.
2. Helical gears of opposite hand operate on parallel
shafts.
D rive r D rive r
D rive r D rive r
L eft-H an d
D rive r D rive r
Fig.3.9.Types o f H elical Gear M eshes.
Helical angles 1 and 2 need not be the same.

However, their sum must be equal to shaft angle.
1  2  
Where 1 and 2 are the respective helix angles of the

two gears and  is the shaft angle.
Module: Because of the possibility of different helix

angles for the gear pair, the radial modulus may not be
the same. However, the normal modulus must always be
identical.
Let a pair of screw gears have the shaft angle  and

helix angles 1 and 2, fig 3.10. If they have the same
hands, then
  1  2
If they have the opposite hands, then
  1  2 or   2  1
Crossed helical gears are noiseless in operation due

to smooth engagement and disengagement. These gears are
not suitable for high transmission of power, because of
point contact between teeth. The efficiency of the drive is
less due to relative sliding of teeth along the common
tangent.
G ea r 1
(R igh t-H a nd (L eft-H a nd )
 2
1 2
1

G ea r 2
(R igh t-H a nd )
Fig. 3.10. Screw Gea rs o f N o nparallel and

N on inters ecting A xes.
Fig. 3.10 Screw Gears of Non parallel and Non-intersecting Axes

3.24.1 Design procedure (Refer PSG data book Page

No. 8.55)
Let P n  Circular pitch,
P d  Diameteral pitch
suffix n refers to normal plane
suffixes 1, 2 refer to driving and driven wheels

respectively
P dn  P cn  
P cn  P c cos 1  P c cos 2
1 2
P d1 Pd 2
P dn  
cos 1 c o s 2
D  pitch diameter of the gear
Z 1 P cn
D 1  pitch diameter of driving wheel 
 c o s 1
Similarly,
Z 2 P cn
D 2  pitch diameter of driven wheel 
 c o s 2
Z2 D 2 cos 2
i  velocity ratio  
Z1 D 1 cos 1
  1  2 ;  when both helicals are of the same hand
 when both helicals are of the opposite

hand
Z v  virtual number of te eth

Z1 Z2
 
cos 3 1 cos3 2
1. To calculate strength of the gear tooth
Let F s  strength of the gear tooth kgf
[b]  design bending stress kgf/cm 2
b  face width – cm
Y  form factor   y
C  wear and lubrication factor
(Refer table 44, PSG design data book P.No. 8.55)
[b]  b  Y
FS  kgf
P dn  C w
Modified as,
[b]  b   y [b]  b  P cn  y

FS   kgf
   Cw
 P  C w
 cm 
2. Calculation of Dynamic load F d
Let F d  Dynamic load kgf
Fd  Ft  Cv
where hp  75
F t  Transmitted load 
Vm
hp is the given power
V m is the mean velocity in m/sec
4.5  V m
Velocity factor C v 
4.5
Equate (1) and (2) to calculate P cn and then find the

value of module.
3. Calculation of wear load
Let F w  wear load
F w  kQ  D 21
Where k  Load stress factor
[refer Table 45, PSG Design book P.No. 8.55]

2
 2D 2 
Q  Ratio factor   
D  D2
 1 
4. Calculation of lead l
l1  lead of the driving wheel   D 1 tan 2

l2  lead of the driven wheel   D 2 tan 1
5. Calculation of center distance

Z1 Z2
a  centre distance  
2P dn f c o s 1 2Pdn cos 2
3.26 The Equations for a Screw Gear Pair on

Nonparallel and Non-interacting Axes in the Normal
System
Example
No. Item Symbol Formula
Pinion Gear
1 Normal module ma 3
2 Normal Pressure n 20
Angle
3 Helix Angle  20 30
4 Number of Teeth Z1, Z2 15 R 24 L
& Helical Hand
5 Number of Teeth zv Z 18.0773 36.9504
3
of an Equivalent cos 
Spur Gear
6 Radial Pressure 1  tan n  21.1728 22.7959
tan 1  
Angle  cos  
7 Normal xn 0.4 0.2

Coefficient of
Profile Shift
8 Involute inv  n 2 tan n 0.0228415
Function  n  Xn1  Xn2 
 
 Zy1  Zy2 
 inv n
9 Normal Working  n Find from 22.9338

Pressure Angle Involute
Function
Table
10 Radial Working xt tan 1 24.2404 26.0386
Pressure Angle  tan  n 
 
 c o s 
No. Item Symbol Formula Example

11 Center Distance Y 1 0.55977
Z  Zv2
Increment Factor 2 v1
 cos n 
 1
 cos wn 
12 Center Distance x  z1 67.1925

 
2 cos 1

z2 
y
2 cos 2 
mn
13 Pitch Diameter d Zmn 47.8880 83.1384

c os 
14 Base Diameter db d cos t 44.6553 76.6445
15 Working Pitch dx1 d1 49.1155 85.2695

2ax
Diameter d1  d2
dx2 d2
2ax
d1  d2
16 Working Helix n  dx  20.4706 30.6319
tan 1  tan  
Angle  d 
17 Shaft Angle  w1  w2 51.1025

or w1  w2
18 Addendum ha1 1  y 
xn2 mn
ha2 1  y  xn1 4.0793 3.4793
mn
19 Whole Depth h [2.25  y  xn1  6.6293

xn2] mn
20 Outside Diameter da d  2ha 56.0466 90.0970
21 Root Diameter dt da  2h 42.7880 76.8384

Chapter 4
DESIGN OF SPEED REDUCERS

(Gear Boxes)
Geometric progression - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram,

kinematics layout -Design of sliding mesh gear box - Design of
multi speed gear box for machine tool applications - Constant
mesh gear box - Speed reducer unit. – Variable speed gear box,
Fluid Couplings, Torque Converters for automotive applications.
4.1 GEAR BOX

A gearbox is a mechanical method of transferring
energy from one device to another and is used to increase
torque while reducing speed. A group of gears put together
in a manner to increase the torque of an engine and reduce
the speed is known as gear box. Generally gear boxes are
also known as speed reducers, or gear reducers.
4.2 TYPES OF GEAR BOXES

 According to the type of drive used: Spur, helical,
bevel and worm gears.
 According to the No. of stages:
(i) Single stage Gear box:
It means one pair of gear wheels, such as one pinion

and one wheel can be operated to reduce the speed.
(ii) Multi-stage Gear box:
It means two or more pairs of gears can be operated

to reduce the speed.
In case of machine tools, the gear box is used to

reduce the cutting speed. The cutting speed depends on
material of the job, cutting tool used and nature of
operation.
The same machine tool may be used for different
working conditions. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a
gear box between motor and spindle for changing the
spindle speeds.
There are variety of gear boxes used in industries
such as aerospace, paper, mining, agriculture, etc...
The toothed gears are used as independent units to
reduce or increase the speed and they are enclosed in rigid
closed housings.
The housings provide
1. Support for the shafts
2. Hold lubricant inside
3. Protect the gear from dust and moisture
4. Give necessary cooling surface to dissipate the
heat generated.
When the unit is used as a speed reducing device, it
is called as “speed reducer.”
4.2.1 Applications
Speed reducers are widely used for reduction of speed
in turbine generator set; from motor to machine tool
spindles; in rolling mills; from engine to road wheels in
automobiles, etc.
in conveyors, crushers, cranes, elevators, feeders, small
and large ball mills, mixers, towers and coal pulverising
units.
Design of Speed Reducers (Gear Boxes) 4.3
 Major Manufacturing Industries – Sugar, cement,

elevator, paper, plastic and leather, rubber, steel
industry, power plant, mines and minerals, waste
water treatment and extraction.
In speed reducers, gears are arranged in different
forms:
1. Single reduction with spur gear, bevel gear and

worm and worm wheel
2. Double reduction with spur gear, bevel gear and
worm and worm wheel
4.2.2 Requirements of Speed Gear Boxes
 It should provide silent operation of the power
transmission.
 To reduce / increase the rpm.
 Change the direction of rotation (Clockwise /
Anticlockwise)
 Shift the axis of rotation (linear or angular)
 To transmit the required power to the spindle.
4.2.3 Method of changing speed in gear boxes

Mainly two important methods are used,
(i) Sliding mesh gear box
(ii) Constant mesh gear box.
4.2.4 Requirements to obtain optimum design

To reduce large diameter of the gear wheels and also
to limit the pitch line velocity of gear drive, the following
principles are to be followed.
1. Number of gears on the last stage should be
minimum.
2. Number of gears on shafts should not be more

than three. (But in some cases it may be four)
3. It is necessary to have,
N maximum  N input  N minimum in all stages, except
in the first stage.
4. The transmission ratio between driver and driven
shaft should be the maximum.
N maximum N minimum 1
 2 and  (For all stages,
N minimum Ninput 4
except for first stage)
4.2.5 Main components of gear box

 Shafts for mounting gears.
 Oil seals for lubrication.
 Bearings to support shafts.
 Gears for getting different speeds.
 Gear box housing used for covering all inner
components.
4.2.6 Speed Changing

 In the conventional gear box, speed changing is
obtained by using sliding gears.
Compound gears are mounted on splined shaft and
are moved by means of forced lever pivoted at the casing.
4.3 SPEED DIAGRAM (OR) RAY DIAGRAM

 The speeds of the spindle should be in the
geometric series, in order that the number of
gears employed to be minimum and also to reduce
speed loss. Preferred Nos. are in Geometrical
progression.
The speed of driving shaft, driven shaft and

intermediate shafts can be represented easily in one
diagram. That particular diagram is called ‘Speed diagram’
(or) Ray diagram.
( D rive r)
H ig h
H ig h Sp eed
Sp eed
(D rive r)
L ow
L ow S peed
Sp eed
( D rive n)
( D rive n)
(b) Bevel G ear
(a) Sp ur Gear
L ow speed
D riven
L
L ow
Sp eed
D riven
H ig h
Sp eed
D river
H ig h S peed D river (c) Worm & Worm Wh eel
Fig. 4.1 Single Red uction Sp eed R edu cers
H S pur G ears
W orm
W he el
I I
I I
L I
L
L H
W orm
(a) Spur Gears (b) Spu r An d (c) W orm & Wo rm Wh eel
H - H igh Spe ed Bevel G ears and Spu r G ear
I - In term ed iate S pe ed
L - L ow S pe e d Fig. 4.2 Do uble R eduction Speed Reducers
4.3.1 Geometric progression and standard step ratio
Step 1
Calculate step ratio 
Let N max  Maximum speed required.
N min  Minimum speed required
Z  No. of speeds required.
N max
 Z  1
N min
Calculate step ratio ‘ ’
There are three methods to find the required speeds.

1st Method
The standard step ratio values are available in
(Refer PSG databook, Page No. 7.20) R5 – 1.6; R10 – 1.25;
R20 – 1.12; R40 – 1.06. The standard step ratio values are
given in Geometric progression in the above series.
If the calculated value of  is coinciding with the

standard step ratio, then select that series and write the
speeds from N min , N 2, N 3  N max , continuously.
For example
N max  335 rpm ; N min  100 rpm; Z  12 speeds
N max
 Z  1
Nmin
355
 12  1 ;   1.12
100
which is standard step ratio of R20 series.
The value of  obtained is exactly coinciding with R20

series. Therefore take R20 series and write 12 speeds
continuously.
N 1  100; N 2  112; N 3  125; N 4  140 ; N 5  160;

N6  180; N 7  200; N 8  224; N 9  250; N 10  280 ;
N 11  315; N 12  355
2nd Method
If the calculated value of  is non-standard step ratio,

then try the multiples of standard step ratios and try the
series.
For example
N max  1600 rpm; N min  500 rpm; Z  6 speeds
N max
 Z  1
N min
1600
  6  1;   1.26
500
which is a non-standard step ratio.
Trail 1
Take R40 series step ratio 1.06 and try multiples.
 1.06  
1.06  1.06  1.06  1.26
Skip 3 speeds.
By multiplying R40 series step ratio by 4 times, the
value obtained is similar to the required step ratio.
Therefore take R40 series by skipping three speeds
ie., N 1  500; N 2  630; N 3  800; N 4  1000 ; N 5  1250 ;
N 6  1600
Since the value of N 6  1600 is coinciding with the

required value of N max , therefore the selection of this trail
is satisfactory.
Note:
Try any standard step ratio multiples (i.e., R5 or R10
or R20 or R40)
If the multiples are four means, skip three speeds
(i.e., multiples minus one)
If the multiples are three - skip two speeds.
3rd Method
If the  value is not coinciding with standard step
ratio. (or) If the multiples of standard step ratio are also
not coinciding, then find the speeds by using this method.
Note
Before using this method, first try method (1) and
method (2).
For example:
N max  600 rp m; N min  23 rpm; Z  12 speeds
N max
 Z  1
N min
600
 12  1    1.345
23
(which is a non-standard step ratio)
Trail 1
Take R20 series multiples   1.12 
 1.12  1.12  1.12  1.404
which is greater than required;  not satisfactory.
Trail 2
Take   1.06 (R40 series) multiples
1.06  1.06  1.06  1.06  1.338

 1.06  
Skip 4 speeds.
which is approximately equal to the required  value.
Therefore, try R40 series by skipping 4 speeds.

N 1  23.6; N 2  31.5; N 3  42.5 N 4  56; N 5  75; N 6  100;
N 7  132; N 8  180; N 9  236 N 10  315; N 11  425; N 12  560;
The maximum speed obtained is 560 rpm. But the

required maximum speed is 600 rpm.
Therefore the above trail is not satisfactory.
To obtain speeds (Approximate Method)

N 1  23 rp m
N 2  N 1    23  1.345  30.935  31 rpm
N 3  31  1.345  41.495  42 rpm
Similarly N 4  56 rpm; N 5  75 rpm; N6  101 rpm;

N 7  136 rp m; N 8  183 rpm; N 9  246 rpm; N 10  331 rp m
N 11  445 rpm; N 12  599 rpm
The maximum speed obtained is almost equal to the

required maximum speed.
4.4 STRUCTURAL FORMULA
Preferred Structural formula

Write the No. of speeds requried in multiples of 2
and 3 as given table 4.1
Table 4.1
6 speeds 3  2 or 2  3
P1 P 2 P1 P2
9 speeds 3  3
P1 P 2
12 speeds 3  2  2 or  2  3  2 or 2  2  3
P1 P 2 P 3 P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3
18 speeds 3  3  2 or 2  3  3 or 3  2  3
P1 P 2 P 3 P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3
16 speeds 2  2  2  2
P1 P 2 P 3 P 4
Structural formula
Z  P 1 X 1 , P 2 X 2 , P 3 X 3
1 st stage 2 nd stage 3rd stage
For example: 12 speed gear box
Speed Space
3  2  2 P1  3 X 1  1 always
P1 P2 P3
P2  2 X2  P1  3
P3  2 X3  P1  P2  3  2  6
12  3 1 , 2 3 , 2 6

st nd rd
1 stage 2 stage 3 stage
In the ray diagram,
1st stage: 3 speeds required with one space interval

between each speed
2nd stage: 2 speeds required with three space interval
between each speed
3rd stage: 2 speeds required with six space interval
between each speed.
4.5 CONSTRUCTION OF RAY DIAGRAM

Let u  No. of stages.
Draw u  1 vertical lines (with some distance)
The 1st vertical line from left represents the driver

shaft in the 1st stage and 2nd line represents the driven
shaft for the 1st stage and driver shaft for the 2nd stage
and so on.
That means, in each stage consists of one driver shaft

and one driven shaft.
Draw a series of parallel horizontal lines with equal

space according to number of speeds required.
Selection of N input in each stage
To obtain optimum design of gear box,
Check, for each stage, except for the 1st stage
N max Nmin 1
 2 and  (or)
N input N input 4
N max  N input  N min
If this is not possible to satisfy, then try

N max N input

N input N min
 Always start the ray diagram from the

minimum speed.
 At the end, all speeds should be completely
filled.
4.6 KINEMATIC LAYOUT

To draw the kinematic arrangement, find the total
number of gears required.
Approximate method to find No. of gears required.
Table 4.2
No. of Approximate
Factors
speeds No. of gears
2 2  1 2 2  4
3 3  1 2 3  6
do not consider 1
4 22 2 2  2  8
6 23 2 2  3  10
8 222 2 2  2  2  12
9 33 2 3  3  12
12 232 2 2  3  2  14
16 2222 2 2  2  2  2  16
18 332 2 3  3  2  16
Draw the approximate kinematic diagram according

to the required input and output speeds according to the
stages.
 In case of 2 speeds, there are two pairs of gears.
One pair gives the maximum speed and the other
pair gives the minimum speed.
 In case of 3 speeds, there are three pairs of gears.
One pair gives the maximum speed. One pair
gives the minimum speed and the other pair gives
the intermediate speed.
 In each stage, the minimum No. of teeth on one
gear can be assumed between 17 to 20; Maximum
No. of teeth should not exceed to 120 teeth.
 In case of 3 pairs of gears, to avoid interference,
check the difference between adjacent gear No. of
teeth. The value should be greater than or equal to
4.
 To find the No. of teeth on each gear, use velocity
ratio,
Speed of driven No. of teeth on driver
V.R  
Speed of driver No. of teeth on driven ... (1)
In case of 2 speeds, let Z 1 and Z 3 are driver gears
and Z 2 and Z 4 are driven gears.
Assume centre distance is constant, then
Z 1  Z 2  Z3  Z4 ... (2)
By using relations (1) and (2), calculate No. of teeth
on each gear.
By solving numerical problem, we can easily
understand the concepts.
Basic Series of Preferred Numbers (From PSG D.B7.20)

R 5 R 10 R 20 R 40
  1.6   1.25   1.12   1.06
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
1.06
1.12 1.12
1.18
1.25 1.25 1.25
1.32
1.40 1.40
1.50
1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60
1.70
1.80 1.80
1.90
2.00 2.00 2.00
2.12
2.24 2.24
2.36
2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
2.65
2.80 2.80
3.00
3.15 3.15 3.15
3.35
3.55 3.55
3.75
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
4.25
4.50 4.50
4.75
5.00 5.00 5.00
5.30
5.60 5.60
6.00
6.30 6.30 6.30 6.30
6.70
7.10 7.10
7.50
8.00 8.00 8.00
8.50
9.00 9.00
9.50
10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
Problem 4.1: Design a 12 Speed Gear Box

The speed range required is 100 to 355 rpm
(a) Draw the Ray diagram,
(b) Draw the Kinematic arrangement,
(c) Calculate the No. of teeth on each gear. (Oct. 2007)
Solution:
N max N max  355 rpm

 Z  1
N min
355 N min  100 rpm

  12  1
100
 11  3.55 Z  No. of speeds  12
  1.122

The progression ratio   1.122
Coincides with R20 series standard Geometric

progression ratio.
Therefore select R20 series speeds
N 1  100 rpm; N 4  140 rpm; N 7  200 rpm; N 10  280 rpm

Structural Formula
Stage Speed Space

Z322 I P1  3 X1  1
12  P 1, P 2, P 3 II P2  2 X 2  P1  3
 P 1X 1, P 2X 2, P3X3 P3  2 X 3  P 1  P2
III
326
12  3 1, 2 3, 2 6
st nd rd
1 stage 2 stage 3 stage
u  No. of stages  3
 D raw u  1  3  1  4 vertical
lines.
Since 12 speeds, draw 12 horizontal
lines.
Procedure for the construction of Ray diagram

3rd Stage: 2 speeds, 6 spaces.
At 100 rpm (min), Locate Point (A)
Leave six intervals. At 200 rpm - mark point (B).
i.e., Point (B) represents N max  200 rpm , Point (A)
represents N min  100 rpm
Locate input speed at Point (C) and check:
N max Select N input  160 rpm and
2
N input mark it as (C)
or 200
 1.25 which is less than 2
160
N min 1  Selection of N input  160 rpm
  0.25
N input 4 is satisfactory.
Join CA and CB
3 (1) 2 (3) 2 (6)

RAY DIA GR AM
2nd Stage: 2 speeds, 3 spaces.

Locate Point (D) above Point (C) after 3 spaces.
Join DA 3 and DB 3
To find N input for 2nd stage.
N max  224 rpm
N min  160 rpm

Select N input  200 rpm
N max 224
2  1.12 which is less
N input 200
than 2
N min 1 160  Selection of N input  200
 ;  0.8
N input 4 200 is satisfactory.
Locate Point (E) at
200 rpm.
(Note: Selection of N input  180 rpm is also correct.)
1st Stage: There are 3 speeds with 1 space interval.
 Mark (F) and (G) with 1 space interval from E .
Locate (H) as Input of Motor
For first stage, it is not necessary to satisfy the

condition.
 N max 
 2
 Ninput 
Join H and F
From (F), draw (2) speeds

FC 1 and FD 1
180 rpm 250 rpm
(Maintain again 3 space intervals in II stage)
From C1 draw 2 speeds. (112 rpm, and 224 rpm)
C1A 1 and C 1B 1
112 rpm 224 rpm (Maintain again 6 space
intervals in III stage)
Join H and G
From (G) draw 2 speeds (200 rpm and 280 rpm)
GC 2 and GD 2
intervals in II stage)
From C2 draw 2 speeds (125 rpm and 250 rpm)
C2A 2 and C 2B 2
From D:
Draw (2) speeds (140 rpm and 280 rpm)
DA3 and DB 3
From D1:
D1A4 and D 1B 4
160 rpm 315 rpm (6 space intervals)
From D2:

D2A5 and D 2B 5
180 rpm 355 rpm (6 space intervals)
Kinematic Diagram
No. of Gears required are
 23  2  2  27
 14 Gears For details, refer
page 4.13. Table 4.2
Calculation of Number of Teeth: Refer kinematic
arrangement
III Stage
1st Pair (Reducing speed)
Speed of driven N 1 Z 2
 
Speed of driver N2 Z1 Speed of driver  N  160 rpm
2
Speed of driven  N1  100 rpm
Let Z 2  20 teeth
(Assume above 17 teeth.)
100 20 1st Pair:  Z1  32 teeth

160 Z 1
Z2  20 teeth
20  160
Z1   32 teeth
100
2nd Pair: Increasing speed N 3  driven speed  200 rpm
N 4  driver speed  160 rpm
 
Speed of driver N 4 Z 3 ... (1)
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z 4 because centre distance is same.
32  20  Z 3  Z 4
Z3  Z4  52 ... (2)
3 (1) 2 (3) 2 (6)

RAY DIA GR AM
200 Z 4
  Z 4  1.25 Z 3
160 Z 3
Z 3  1.25 Z3  52
52
Z3   23
2.25
Take Z3  23 teeth
2nd Pair Z3  23 teeth
Z 4  52  23  29 teeth Z4  29 teeth
II Stage
1st Pair: Reducing speed
Speed of driven N 7 Z8
 
Speed of driver N 8 Z 7
N8  driver speed  200 rpm
160 20
 N7  driven speed  160 rpm
200 Z 7 Assume Z 8  20 teeth
20  200
Z7  ; Z 7  25 teeth
160
1st Pair: Z7  25 teeth; Z8  20 teeth
2nd Pair: Increasing speed. N 6  driver speed  200 rpm

N 5  driven speed  224 rpm
 
Z 7  Z 8  Z 5  Z 6, b ecau se centre dis tance is same
25  20  Z 5  Z 6
Z5  Z6  45 ... (1)
224 Z 6

200 Z 5
Z 6  Z 5  1.12
Z 5  1.12Z 5  45
45
Z5   21.22
2.12
2nd Pair: Z5  21 teeth
Z 6  45  21 Z6  24 teeth
 24 teeth
I Stage
In this stage, there are 3 speeds; and 3 pairs of gears
are required.
 To avoid interference of gear of one shaft with the
gear of the other shaft while shifting,
Z 1  Z 3  9  4 also Z7  Z5  4
Z 4  Z 2  9  4; Z 6  Z8  4; condition satisfied
1st Pair: Reducing speed N 10  driver speed  355 rpm
Speed of driven N9 Z 10
 
Speed of driver N 10 Z9 Assume Z 10  20 teeth
200 20
 
355 Z 9
355  20
Z9   35.5
200
1st Pair: Z9  36 teeth
Z10  20 teeth
2nd Pair: Intermediate speed
Spee d of driven N 13 Z 14
 
224 Z 14

355 Z13
Since centre distance is same,
Z 9  Z 10  Z 13  Z 14  36  20  56
Z14  Z13  0.63
 Z 13  0.63Z 13  56
56
Z 13   34 teeth
1.63
Z 13  34 teeth
Z 14  56  34
 22 teeth
3rd Pair: Increasing speed N 11  driven speed  250 rpm

 
250 Z 12

355 Z 11
Z12  Z11  0.704

Since centre sitance is same, Z 11  Z12  Z 13  Z 14  56
Z 11  Z12  56
Z 11  0.704 Z 11  56
Z 11  32.85
 T ake Z 11  33 teeth
3rd Pair: Z11  33 teeth
Z12  23 teeth
Z 12  56  33  23 teeth
 No. of teeth on all the gears are given here:
1st stage
Z 9  36 teeth  Z 12  23 teeth 
Z 10  20 teeth  Z 13  34 teeth 
Z 11  33 teeth  Z 14  22 teeth 
2nd Stage 3rd Stage
Z 5  21 teeth Z 1  32 teeth
Problem 4.2: The maximum and minimum speeds of a 6

speed gear box are to be 1600 rpm and 500 rpm respectively.
Construct the speed diagram and the kinematic arrangement
of the gear box. (Apr. 2008)
Given Data:
No. of speeds  Z  6
Max. speed  N max  1600 rpm
Min. speed  N min  500 rpm
N max
 Z  1
N min
1600
 6  1
500
1
5
 1600 
   1.2619
 500 
  1.2619 is not a standard step ratio.
Therefore, Trail (1): for R40 series,
  1.06
1.06  1.06  1.06  1.2624

  1.06  
Skip 3  speeds
Skip (3) speeds and try R40 series.
N 1  500 rpm; N 4  1000 rpm
N 2  630 rpm; N 5  1250 rpm
N 3  800 rpm; N 6  1600 rpm
Since N 6  1600 rpm is the max. required speed,
 Select the above speeds. (i.e., R 40 series by

skipping 3 speeds).
Structural Formula
Z32 P1  3 X1  1
P1 P2
P2  2 X 2  P1  3
st
Z  P 1X 1, P 2X2 In 1 stage
3 represents - No. of speeds
1 represents - space between speeds
 3 1, 2 3 In the 2nd stage,
st nd
1 Stage 2 Stage 2 represents - No. of speeds
3 represents space between speeds
Ray Diagram:
No. of stages 2; so 3 vertical lines
No. of speeds 6; so 6 horizontal lines
Mark N 1  500 to N 6  1000 rpm in Ray diagram.
Take N max  1000 rpm and mark it as (B)
N min  500 rpm and mark it as (A)
Here space between A and B is 3 and no. of speeds

is 2 ie A and B.
Nmax Nmin 1
Either  2 or 
Nip Nip 4
For 1st stage, the above condition need not be

checked. Select N input as N max for 1st stage.
For 2nd Stage

N max  1000 rpm

1000
 1.25  2
800
 satisfies condition of mark N input  800 rpm
as C. Mark D and E so that CD and DE has 1 space

each.
Join DA 1 parallel to CA and
Join DB 1 parallel to CB
Similarly, join EA 2 parallel to CA
and join EB 2 parallel to CB
Similarly A1, A 2, B 1, B 2 are also marked.
Approximate No. of Gears Required

6 speeds - (3  2 ) = 23  2  10 gears
For 1st stage

No. of speeds required are ‘3’ Refer
 No. of gears required are ‘6’. Pg.No.4.13 for
finding no. of
For 2nd stage gear
No. of speeds required are ‘2’
 No. of gears required are ‘4’.
Calculation of No. of Teeth on Gear

Refer Kinematic Diagram
2nd Stage
1st pair Z 1 and Z 2 - Reducing speed
4
*
3
*
1
2
10
*
9
*
7
8
*
5
6
2nd pair Z 3 and Z 4 - Increasing speed
Assume Z 1  20 teeth driver 
1st Pair: (Reducing speed)
Z 1  No. of teeth on driver  20 teeth
N 1  Speed of driver  800 rpm
Z 2  No. of teeth on driven
N 2  Speed of driven  500 rpm
Z2 N1

Z1 N2
No. of teeth on driven Sp eed o f driver


No. of teeth o n driver Speed of driven
Z2 800

20 500
Z 2  32 teeth
Z1  20 teeth
Z2  32 teeth
2nd Pair: (Increasing speed)
Z 3  No. of teeth on driver

Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z 4  20  32  52
 Z 3  Z 4  52 ... (1)
No. of teeth on driven Speed of driver

No. of teeth on driver Speed of driven
Z4 800
  0.8
Z3 1000
Z 4  0.8Z 3 ... (2)

Substitute the value of Z 4 in eq. (1)
Z 3  0.8Z 3  52
52
Z3   28.88
1.8
Z 3  29 teeth
But Z 3  Z 4  52
N14  driver speed  355 rpm
 Z 4  52  29 N13  driven speed  224 rpm
 23 teeth
Z3  29 teeth
Z4  23 teeth
1st Stage
1st Pair: Z 5 and Z 6 - Reducing speed
2nd Pair: Z 7 and Z 8 - Increasing speed
3rd Pair: Z 9 and Z 10  - Intermediate speed.

1st Pair: Reducing speed.
Z 5  No. of teeth on driver  20 (Assume)
Z6 N5

Z5 N6
1600
Z 6  20   40
800
Z5  20 teeth
Z6  40 teeth
2nd Pair: Increasing speed.
Z 5  Z 6  Z 7  Z 8  60
 Z 7  Z 8  60
... (3)
Z8 N7

Z7 N8
1600
 Z8  Z
1250 7
 1.28Z 7 ... (4)

Z 7  1.28 Z7  60
60
Z7   26.31
2.28
But Z 7  Z 8  60
 Z 8  60  27  33 teeth
Z7  27 teeth
Z8  33 teeth
3rd Pair: Intermediate speed
Z 5  Z 6  Z7  Z8  Z 9  Z 10  60
 Z 9  Z 10  60 ... (5)
Z 10 N9 1600
But,   Z 10  Z
Z9 N 10 1000 9
 1.6 Z 9
... (6)
Z 9  1.6 Z 9  60
60
Z9   23.07
2.6
 Z 10  60  23  37 teeth
Z9  23 teeth
Z10  37 teeth
No. of teeth on each gear
II Stage I Stage
Z 1  20 Z 5  20
Z 2  32 Z 6  40
Z 3  29 Z 7  27
Z 4  23 Z 8  33
Z 9  23
Z 10  37
Check
To avoid interference
Z 7  Z 5 and Z 7  Z9  4
27  20  7 and 27  23  4
The condition is satisfied. Therefore, the calculation

of No. of teeth on each gear is satisfactory.
Problem 4.3: Design a 9 speed gear box for a milling

machine with speeds ranging from 56 - 900 rpm. The input
speed is 720 rpm; Make a neat sketch of the gear box. Indicate
the No. of teeth on all the gears and their speeds. (Apr. 2008)
Given Data:
Input speed  720 rpm
N max
 Z  1
N min
900
 9  1
56
1
 900 8
 
 56 
 1.415
  1.415 is not a standard step ratio.
Trail 1
Consider R20 series, which is having   Step ratio

 1.12.
1.12  1.12  1.40

 1.12  
Skip 2 speeds
Try R20 series by skipping (2) speeds.

C2
N 9 = 9 00 rp m
In pu t (N ) =7 20 rp m
C1
N 8 = 6 30 rp m
N 7 = 4 50 rp m
F C
N 6 = 3 15 rp m
E B2
N 5 = 2 24 rp m
D B1
N 4 = 1 60 rp m
B
N 3 = 112 rpm
A2
N 2 = 8 0 rpm
A1
N 1 = 5 6 rpm
3 (3) A
3 (1)
Ray D iagram fo r Nine S peed Gear Box
2
1
3
4
5
6
8
7
10
9
11
12
N 1  56 rpm; N 4  160 rpm; N 7  450 rpm
N 2  80 rpm; N 5  224 rpm; N 8  630 rpm
N 3  112 rpm; N 6  315 rpm; N 9  900 rpm
Since N 9  900 rpm is the maximum required speed,

therefore select the above speeds from N 1 to N9, according
to R20 series by skipping 2 speeds.
Structural Formula
Z33 P1  3 X1  1
P1 P2
P2  3 X2  P1  3
st
Z  P 1X 1, P 2X2 In 1 stage,
3 represents No. of speeds
 31, 33 In 2nd stage,
st nd
1 Stage 2 Stage 3 represents no of speeds
Ray Diagram
Mark N 1 to N 9 in Ray diagram.
No. of stages is 2, so draw 3 vertical lines.
No. of speeds is 9, so draw 9 horizontal lines.
For 2nd stage,
Mark A in N 1  56 rpm. Mark B in N 4  160 rpm after

leaving 3 spaces.
Similarly mark C in N 7  450 rpm after leaving 3

spaces.
N max N min 1
Select input speed 2 and 
N i p N ip 4
450 56
Select N ip  224 rpm  2  0.25
224 224
Since condition is satisfying,
Select N ip  224 rpm. So mark D accordingly.
Join AD, BD and CD
For 1st stage, no need to check the condition.
Then mark E and F after leaving 1 space in between

D, E and F.
Join D, E and F with input speed 720 rpm.
Joint EA 1 (Parallel to DA ) EC 1 (Parallel to DC ) - Join

FA 2 (Parallel to DA ) and FC 2 (parallel to DC )
Approximate No. of Gears Required
Refer Page 4.13 for details
9 speed  3  3  23  3  12 gears
For 1st stage,
No. of speeds required are 3.
 No. of gears required are 6.
For 2nd stage,
No. of speeds required are 3.
 No. of gears required are 6.

Calculation of No. of Teeth on Gear

Refer kinematic diagram.. (Here after words, to
calculate no. of teeth on all gears, the kinematic diagram
should be referred.
II Stage
1st Pair - Z 1 and Z 2 - Reducing speed
2nd Pair - Z 3 and Z 4 - Increasing speed
3rd Pair - Z 5 and Z 6 - Intermediate speed.
1st Pair: Reducing speed Z 1 and Z 2
Z 1  No. of teeth on driver  20 teeth (Assume)
N 1  Speed of the driver  224 rpm
No. of teeth on driven Speed of the driver


No. of teeth on driver Speed of the driven
Z2 N1

Z1 N2
224
Z 2  20   80
56
 Z1  20 teeth
Z2  80 teeth
2nd Pair: Increasing speed Z 3 and Z 4

Z4 N3

Z3 N4
224
  0.4977
450
Z 4  0.4977Z 3 ... (1)

Z 1  Z 2  Z3  Z 4  20  80  100
Z 3  Z 4  100
Z 3  0.4977 Z 3  100
100
Z3 
1.4977
 66.76
Take Z 3  67 teeth
 Z 4  100  67  33 teeth
Z3  67 teeth
Z4  33 teeth
3rd Pair: Intermediate speed. Z 5 and Z 6

Z6 N5 224
 
Z5 N6 160
Z6
 1.4 Z 6  1.4Z 5  3
Z5
 Z 5  Z 6  100  4
Since the centre distance is same,
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z 4  Z 5  Z 6  20  80  100
From eq. (3) and (4)
Z 5  1.4Z 5  100
100
Z5   41.66
2.4
 Z 6  100  42  58 teeth
Z5  42 teeth
Z6  58 teeth
2nd Stage To check interference
Z 1  20 teeth Z 1, Z 3, Z5 are driver.
Z 2  80 teeth Z 3  Z1 

and 4
Z 3  67 teeth
Z 3  Z5 

Z 4  33 teeth
Z 5  42 teeth 67  20  47 
4
67  42  25 
Z 6  58 teeth
 There is no interference.
1st Stage
2nd Pair - Z 9 and Z 10  - Increasing speed
3rd Pair - Z 11 and Z 12  - Intermediate speed.
1st Pair: Z 7 and Z 8 - Reducing speed.
No. of te eth on driven Speed of driver


No . of teeth on driver Speed of driven
Z8 N7

Z7 N8
720
Z 8  20   64.28
224
Z 8  65 teeth
Z7  20 teeth
Z8  65 teeth
2nd Pair: Z 9 and Z 10  - increasing speed.

Z 7  Z 8  Z 9  Z 10  20  65  85
 Z 9  Z 10  85 ... (5)
Z 10 N9 720
But,    1.6
Z9 N 10 450
 Z 10  1.6 Z 9 ... (6)

Z 9  1.6Z 9  85
85
Z9   32.69
2.6
 Z 10  85  33  52 teeth
Z9  33 teeth
Z10  52 teeth
3rd Pair: Z 11 and Z 12  - intermediate speed.


Z 7  Z 8  Z 9  Z 10  Z 11  Z 12  85
 Z 11  Z 12  85 ... (7)
Z 12 N 11 720
But,    2.285
Z 11 N 12 315
Z 12  2.285 Z 11 ... (8)

Z 11  2.285 Z 11  85
85
Z 11   25.87
3.285
 Z 12  85  26  59 teeth
Z11  26 teeth
Z12  59 teeth
1st Stage
Z 7  20 teeth Similarly,
Z 8  65 teeth Z 7, Z 9, Z11 are driver gears.
Z 9  32 teeth
Z 10  52 teeth Check for interferen ce,
Z 11  26 teeth Z9  Z7 
4
Z 9  Z 11
Z 12  59 teeth 
32  20  12 
 4 Since both
32  26  6 
are greater than four.
 There is no interference.
Problem 4.4: A gear box is to give 18 speeds for a spindle

of a milling machine. The drive is from an electric motor of
3.75 kW at 1440 rpm. Maximum and minimum speeds of the
spindle are to be around 650 rpm and 35 rpm respectively.
Find the speed ratios which will give the desired speeds and
draw the structural diagram and kinematic arrangement of the
drive. (Apr. 2007)
Solution:
N max
 Z  1
N min
N max  650 rpm
650
 18  1
35 N min  35 rp m
1
17
 650  Z  18
Step ratio    
 35 
 1.1875
Trail 1
R40 series
  1.06
 1.06  
1.06  1.06 skip 2 speeds
 1.191
which is approximately equal to the required step ratio.
 Skip two speeds

N 1  35.5 rpm N 9  140 rpm N 17  560 rpm

N 2  42.5 rpm N 10  170 rpm N 18  670 rpm
N 3  50 rpm N 11  200 rpm Since N 18 is closer to the
N 4  60 rpm N 12  236 rpm required N max ,
N 5  71 rpm N 13  280 rpm
N 6  85 rpm N 14  335 rpm
N 7  100 rpm N 15  400 rpm
N 8  118 rpm N 16  475 rpm
Structural formula,
No. of speeds required  Z  18
332
P1 P2 P3
Speeds Space intervals

P1  3 X1  1
P2  3 X 2  P1  3
P3  2 X 3  P1  P 2  3  3  9
 Structural formula  P 1X 1, P 2X 2, P 3X3
 31 , 33, 2 9

st nd rd
1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage
Construction of Ray Diagram

N min 1
and 
For Third Stage N i/p 4
To find N input , 35.5

 0.355  0.25
100
Let N ip  100 rpm
I In pu t
N 1 8 = 67 0
N 1 7 = 56 0
N 1 6 = 47 5
N 1 5 = 40 0
N 1 4 = 33 5
E
N 1 3 = 28 0
H
N 1 2 = 23 6
G
N 11 = 200
F
B
D N 1 0 = 17 0
N 9 = 1 40
N 8 = 118
N 7 = 1 00
C
N6 = 85
N5 = 71
N4 = 60
N3 = 50
N 2 = 4 2.5
N 1 = 3 5.5
1 st Sta ge . 3 (1) 2 nd S tage . 3 (3) 3 rd Sta ge . 2 (9) A
Ray D iagram fo r 18 Speed Gear Box.

Z 13 =44
Z 15 =40
D rive r Z 11 =3 4
(67 0 rpm )
*
*
*
13
15 11
I Stage 16 12
14
II S tage
Z 7 =35 III Stag e

Z 9 =28 Z 5 =2 0 D river
(200 rpm )
*
*
*
Z 3 =4 9
D riven 5
9 7
6 Z1 = 20 D river
10 (100 rpm )
8
*
*
D riven
Z 8 = 25
Z 10 = 32
Z 1 4 =10 4 (280 rpm ) Z 6 = 40
Z 16 =1 08 (170 rpm )
(2 80 rpm )
Z 1 2 = 114 (100 rp m)
(236 rpm ) (236 rpm )
D rive n
Z 4 = 28
Z 2 = 57
Kinem atic Arrangement of 18 Speed Gear Bo x. (170 rpm )
(35.5 rpm )
Nmax From 100 rpm, leave 9

2
Nip spaces and mark
N max  170 rpm
N max 170
  1.7  2
Nip 100
 Select N ip as 100 rpm; and mark it as (C)
Take 9th speed as
N max  170 rpm and mark as (B)
Take the 1st speed
N min  35.5 rpm and mark as (A)
For Second Stage

To find N input , N min
and
Let N ip  200 rpm N i/p
N max 100
280  0.5  0.25
  1.4  2 200
Ni  p 200
Mark N max as (E)
 Select N ip as 200 rpm; and mark it as (F).

Similarly mark (D) at the midpoint of (E) and (C). (or)
Mark D after leaving 3 spaces from C and mark E after
leaving 3 spaces from D .
Approximate No. of Gears required

18 speeds 3  3  2  23  3  2  16 gears
For 1st Stage

No. of speeds required are 3,
 No. of gears required  6; [i.e. 2  3  6]
For details, refer page 4.13 table 4.2
For 2nd Stage

For 3rd Stage

Calculation of No. of Teeth on Each Gear

Refer Kinematic Arrangement
For III Stage

1st Pair Z 1 and Z 2 - Reducing speed.
2nd Pair Z 3 and Z 4 - Increasing speed.
1st Pair: Reducing speed. Z 1 and Z 2
N 1  speed of driver  100 rpm
N 2  speed of driven  35.5 rpm
Z2 N1
Speed ratio  
Z1 N2
100
Z 2  20   56.3
35.5 Z1  20 teeth
 Take Z 2  57 tee th. Z2  57 teeth
2nd Pair: Increasing speed Z3 and Z4
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z4  57  20
Z 3  Z 4  77 ... (1)
Z4 N3
But, speed ratio  
Z3 N4
Z4 100
  0.5882
Z3 170
Z 4  0.5882 Z 3 ... (2)

Z 3  0.5882 Z 3  77
77
Z3   48.48
1.5882
 Z 4  77  49 28
Z3  49 teeth
Z4  28 teeth
For II Stage
3 speeds - 3 pairs of gears.
2nd Pair - Z 7 and Z 8 - Increasing speed
3rd Pair - Z 9 and Z 10 - Intermediate speed.
1st Pair Z5 and Z6: Reducing speed.
N 6  Speed on driven  100 rpm.
Z6 N5 200
Speed ratio    2
Z5 N6 100
Z 6  20  2  40 teeth
Z5  20 teeth
 Z6  40 teeth
2nd Pair Z7 and Z8: Increasing speed.
Since the centre distance is same.

Z 5  Z 6  Z 7  Z8  20  40  60
Z 7  Z 8  60 ... (3)
Z8 N7 200
But, speed ratio     0.7142
Z7 N8 280
Z 8  0.7142 Z 7 ... (4)

Z 7  0.7142 Z 7  60
60
Z7   35.001
1.7142
Z 8  60  35  25
Z7  35 teeth
Z8  25 teeth
3rd Pair Z9 and Z10: Intermediate speed.

Z 9  Z 10  Z 5  Z 6  Z 7  Z 8  20  40  60
Z 9  Z 10  60 ... (5)
Z 10 N9 200
Speed ratio,    1.176
Z9 N 10 170
Z 10  1.176 Z9 ... (6)

Z 9  1.176 Z9  60
60
Z9   27.57
2.176
Take, Z 9  28 teeth
Z 10  60  28  32 teeth
Z9  28 teeth
Z10  32 teeth
To avoid interference,
Z 5, Z 7 and Z 9 are driver gears with Z 5  20 teeth
Z 7  35 teeth and
Z 9  28 teeth
Condition
Z7  Z5  4 35  20  15
and Z 7  Z 9  4 35  28  7 Both are greater than 4.

 There is no interference between gears.
Z5  20 teeth; Z7  35 teeth; Z9  28 teeth
Z6  40 teeth; Z8  25 teeth; Z10  32 teeth
I Stage
In first stage, the No. of speeds required are 3.
Therefore, six gears are required.
i.e., 3 pairs of gears.
1st Pair: Z 11 and Z 12 - Reducing speed
2nd Pair: Z 13 and Z 14 - Increasing speed

3rd Pair: Z 15 and Z 16 - Intermediate speed
1st Pair: Z 11 and Z 12 - Reducing speed.
N 12  speed of driven  200 rpm
Z 12 N 11 670
Speed ratio   
Z 11 N 12 200
670
Z 12  17   56.95  57 teeth
200
and Z11  17 teeth
2nd Pair: Z 13 and Z 14 - Increasing speed.

Z 13  Z 14  Z 11  Z 12  17  57  74
Z 13  Z 14  74 ... (7)
Z 14 N13 670
But, speed ratio   
Z 13 N 14 280
Z 14  2.3928Z 13 ... (8)

Z 13  2.3928Z 13  74
74
Z 13   21.81
3.3928
and Z 14  74  22  52 teeth
Z13  22 teeth
Z14  52 teeth
3rd Pair: Z 15 and Z 16 - Intermediate speed.
Z 15  Z 16  Z 11  Z 12  Z 13  Z 14  74
Z 15  Z 16  74 ... (9)
Z 16 N15 670
But, speed ratio   
Z 15 N 16 236
Z 16  2.8389Z 15 ... (10)

Z 15  2.8389Z 15  74
74
Z 15   19.27
3.8389
From equation (1)
Z 16  74  20  54 teeth
Z15  20 teeth
Z16  54 teeth
To Avoid Interference
Z 13  Z 11  4; i.e., 22  17  5
and Z 13  Z 15  4; i.e.,22  20  2
Since the difference between No. of teeth on Gear 13

and Gear 15 are less than 4, then multiply all the gears
in the 1st stage by 2.
Modify the No. of teeth on each gear (from

Z 11 to Z16), multiplying by 2
Z 11  17  2  34 teeth
Z 12  57  2  114 teeth
Z 13  22  2  44 teeth
Z 14  52  2  104 teeth
Z 15  20  2  40 teeth
Z 16  54  2  108 teeth
Check again,
Z 13  Z 11  44  34  10
Z 13  Z 15  44  40  4
Since the difference between Z 13 and Z 11 ,

Z 13 and Z 15 is greater than 4, our calculation is correct.
Therefore, the No. of teeth on each gear are given

here.
3rd Stage
Z 1  20 teeth
Z 2  57 teeth
Z 3  49 teeth
Z 4  28 teeth
2nd Stage
1st Stage
Z 5  20 teeth
Z 11  34 teeth
Z 6  40 teeth
Z 12  104 teeth
Z 7  35 teeth
Z 13  44 teeth
Z 8  25 teeth Z 14  104 teeth
Z 10  32 teeth Z 16  108 teeth
Problem 4.5: Design a 9 speed gear box to give output speeds

between 280 and 1800 rpm. The input power is 5.5 kW at
1400 rpm. Draw the kinematic layout diagram and the speed
diagram. Determine the number of teeth on all gears.
Given Data
N min  280 rpm ; N max  1800 rpm ;
P ower  5.5 kW; Z  9 speed
Solution
We know that
N max
 Z  1
N min
1800
  9  1
280
   1.26
Since the obtained  is not a standard speed ratio

take   1.06 R40 series  1.06  1.06  1.06  1.06  1.26
Skip 3 speeds, which is approximately equal to the
required  value.
 Try R40 series by skipping 3 speeds; From Pg.No. 7.20
N 1  280 rpm; N 2  355 rpm, N 3  450 rpm;
N 4  560 rpm; N 5  710 rpm, N 6  900 rpm;
N 7  1120 rpm; N 8  1400 rpm; N 9  1800 rpm
Structural formula
Z33 ; P1  3 ; X1  1
9  P 1, P 2 ; P2  3 ; X2  P1  3
 P1 X 1, P 2 X 2
9  3 1, 3 3
Since number of stages u  2 ,
 Draw u  1  2  1  3 vertic al lines
Sinc e 9 speeds, draw 9 ho rizo ntal lines
Procedure for constructing speed diagram

At 280 rpm (min), Locate A.
Leave 3 intervals at 560 rpm mark B, again
Leave 3 intervals at 1120 rpm, mark C
Locate input speed at point D
N max
2
N input
Selecting N input  710 rpm
N max 1120
  1.57  2
N input 710
N m ax 280 1
   0.39 
N input 710 4
After locating point ‘D’, at 900 mark E and again interval

at 1120, mark F.
Select Input speed as 1400 rpm.
Calculation of number of Teeth

II stage I pair
 
Speed of driver N12 Z 11
Assume Z11  20 teeth
Z 12 710
   Z12  50.71 ~
 52 teeth
20 280
II stage II pair
Z7 N8 560
Since    0.788
Z8 N7 710
Speed D iag ram or Ray D iagram of 9 speed gear bo x

also Z 7  0.788 Z8
Since
Z 7  Z 8  Z 11  Z12
0.788 Z 8  Z 8  20  52  Z8  40 teeth
 Z7  32 teeth
II stage, III pair

Z9 N 10 1120 Z9
Since     1.57 Z 9  1.57 Z 10
Z 10 N9 710 Z 10
Also Z 9  Z 10  Z11  Z12
1.57 Z 10  Z 10  20  52 Z10  28 teeth
and Z9  44 teeth
I stage, I pair
Z5 N6 710
Since    0.507  Z6  40 teeth
Z6 N5 1400
I stage II pair
Z1 N1 900
Since    0.64  Z1  0.64 Z 2
Z2 N2 1400
also Z 1  Z 2  Z 5  Z6
0.64 Z 2  Z 2  20  40 ; Z2  37 teeth
and Z1  24 teeth
I stage III pair

Z3 N4 1120
Since    Z3  0.8 Z 4
Z4 N3 1400
But Z 3  Z 4  Z 5  Z6
0.8 Z 4  Z 4  20  40
Z4  34 teeth
a nd Z3  28 teeth
Problem 4.6: The maximum and minimum speeds of nine

speed gear box are to be 600 rpm and 100 rpm respectively.
The drive is from an electric motor giving 3 kW at 1440 rpm.
Design the gear box. Construct the speed diagram and sketch
the arrangement of gear box.
Solution
N max  600 rpm, Nmin  100 rpm; P  3 kW ; Z  9,
N input  1440 rpm
We know that
N max
 Z  1
N min
600
 9  1
100
8  6    6 1/8
  1.25
The progression ratio   1.25 , coincides with the R10

series standard progression ratio
Therefore select R10 series speeds
N 1  100 rpm; N 2  125 rpm; N 3  160 rpm;
N 4  200 rpm; N 5  250 rpm; N 6  315 rpm;
N 7  400 rpm; N 8  500 rpm; N 9  600 rpm;
Structural formula
Z33
9  P 1, P 2
 P 1 X 1, P 2 X2
P 1  3, X 1  1
P 2  3, X 2  3
 9  3 1, 3 3
u  no . o f stages  2
 draw u  1  2  1  3 vertical lines
since 9 speeds, draw 9 horizontal lines
Procedure for the construction of ray diagram
2nd Stage: 3 speeds, 3 spaces
At 100 rpm (min), locate point A
Leave 3 intervals, at 200 rpm, mark point B
Again leave 3 intervals, at 400 rpm, mark point C
Point “C” represents N max  400 rpm , Point “A”

represents N min  100 rpm
Let N input  250 rpm.
N max
2
N input
Select N input  250
400
  1.6  2
250
N min 1
and   0.25
N input 4
100
  0.4  0.25
250
 Selection of N input  250 is satisfactory and mark

it as D , similarly mark E and F above
Kinematic diagram:
No. of gears required  2 3  3  12
Calculation of No. of Teeth on gear

II stage
1st pair - (Z 1 and Z 2) - Reducing speed
2nd pair - (Z 3 and Z 4) - Increasing speed
3nd pair - (Z 5 and Z 6) - Intermediate speed
II stage
1st pair reducing speed (Z 1 and Z 2)
Let
Z 1  No of teeth on driver  20 teeth Assume

Driver 600rpm
D riven D river 250rpm
Driven
F ig. Kin em atic A rrang em ent

Z 2  No of teeth on driven
N 1  Speed of the driver  250 rpm
N 2  Speed of the driven  100 rpm
No. of teeth on driven Speed of the driver


No. of teeth on driver Speed of the driven
Z2 N1

Z1 N2
N1
 Z2   Z1
N2
250
  20
100
Z 2  50
 Z1  20 teeth, Z 2  50 teeth
2nd pair Increasing speed (Z 3 and Z 4)
Z 3  no. of teeth on driver
Z 4  no. of teeth on driven
N 3  speed of driver  250
N 4  speed of driven  400
Z4 N3

Z3 N4
N3
Z4   Z3
N4
250
Z4   Z  0.625 Z 3
400 3
Z 4  0.625 Z3
Since centre distance is same
Z1  Z2  Z3  Z4
 Z 3  Z 4  20  50  70
Z 3  Z 4  70
 Z 3  0.625 Z 3  70
 Z3  43.07  44 teeth
and Z4  26 teeth
3rd pair: Intermediate speed (Z 5 and Z 6)
Z6 N5 250
  
Z5 N6 200
 Z 6  1.25 Z 5
Z 1  Z 2  Z3  Z 4  Z 5  Z 6  20  50  70
 Z 5  Z 6  70
 Z 5  1.25 Z 5  70
Z5  31.11  32 teeth
Z 6  70  32
 Z 6  38 teeth
II stage
Z 1  20 teeth; Z 4  26 teeth
To check interference:
Z 1, Z 3, Z 5 are driver
 Z3  Z1 
 
 a nd 4
Z Z 
 3 5
 44  20 
 
 and   4
 
 44  32 
 There is no interference
I stage
1st pair - (Z7 and Z8) - Reducing speed
2nd pair - (Z9 and Z10 ) - Increasing speed
3rd pair - (Z11 and {Z 12 ) -Intermediate speed
1st pair
Z7  No . of teeth on driver  20 teeth Assume
Z8  No. of teeth on driven
N7  Speed of driver  600 rpm
N8  Speed of driven  250 rpm

Z8 N7

Z7 N8
600
 Z8  20   48 teeth
250
 Z7  20 teeth
Z8  48 teeth
2nd pair
Z9  No. of teeth on driver

Since the centre distance is same
Z7  Z 8  Z 9  Z 10  20  48  68 teeth
 Z 9  Z 10  68 teeth
But
Z10 N9

Z9 N 10
600
 Z 10   Z 9  1.5 Z 9
400
Z10  1.5 Z 9
 Z 9  1.5 Z9  68
 Z9  27.2  28 teeth

3rd pair
N11  Speed of driver  600
N12  Speed of driven  315
Z7  Z 8  Z 9  Z 10  Z 11  Z 12  68
 Z 11  Z 12  68
But
Z12 N 11 600
 
Z 11 N 12 315
 Z 12  1.9 Z 11
 Z 11  1.9 Z 11  68
 Z11  23.44  24 teeth
Checking of interference
 Z9  Z7 
 
 and 4
Z Z 
 9 11 
 28  20 
 28  24   4
 
Problem 4.7: A machine tool gear box is to have 9 speeds. The

gear box is driven by an electric motor whose shaft rotational
speed is 1400 rpm. The gear box is connected to the motor by a
belt drive. The maximum and minimum speeds required at the
gear box output are 1000 rpm and 200 rpm respectively. Suitable
speed reduction can also be provided in the belt drive. What is
the step ratio and what are the values of 9 speeds? Sketch the
arrangement., Obtain the number of teeth on each gear and also
the actual output speeds. (Nov/Dec 2007)
Given Data
Maximum speed  N max  1000 rpm
Minimum speed  N min  200 rpm
Solution
We know
N max
 Z  1
N min
1000
 8     1.22
200
which is not a standard step ratio
Trail 1
Take R40 series multiples   1.06
 1.06  1.06  1.06  1.06
 1.26
which is greater than required
 not satisfactory
 To obtain speeds (approximate method)
N 1  200 rpm
N 2  N 1    200  1.22  244 rpm
N 3  N 2    244  1.22  297.68 ~

 298 rp m
N 4  N 3    298  1.22  363.56 ~

 364 rp m
N 5  N 4    364  1.22  444.08 ~

 444 rp m
N 6  N 5    444  1.22  541.68 ~

 542 rp m
N 7  N 6    542  1.22  661.24 ~

 662 rp m
N 8  N 7  662  1.22  807.64 ~

 808 rpm
N 9  N 8    808  1.22  985.76 ~

 986 rp m
Structural formula
Z33
 P1  3 ; P2  3
and X1  1 ; X 2  P 1  3
Z  P 1 X 1, P 2 X 2
 3 1, 3 3
Ray diagram
N max N min
Select input speed;  2 and 4
N input Ninput
Select N input  444 rp m

Nmax 662 N min 200 1

   2 and  
N inp ut 444 N input 444 4
since condition is satisfying
Mark N input  444 rpm as D, and similarly mark E

and F .
Approximate number of gears required
9 speed  3  3  2 3  3  12 gears
Calculation of No. of teeth on gear
Let Z1  No. of teeth on driver  20 teeth Assume
N 1  Speed of the drive r  444 rpm
We know that
Z2 N1

Z1 N2
N1 444
 Z2  Z 1   20   45 teeth
N2 200
 Z1  20 teeth, Z2  45 teeth
Z4 N3
Similarly, 
Z3 N4
 444 
 Z4  Z 3  
 662 
 Z4  0.671 Z 3

G 1400 rpm
986 rpm
C2
808 rpm
C1
662 rpm
F C
B2
542 rpm
E
B1
D
444 rpm
364 rpm
B
A2
298 rpm
A1
244 rpm
200 rpm
3(1) 3(3) A
Ray D iag ram
D riven
D riven
Z 1  Z 2  Z3  Z 4
 Z 3  Z 4  20  45
 Z 3  Z 4  65
 Z 3  0.671 Z 3  65
 Z3  39 teeth
and Z4  26 teeth
Similarly,
Z6 N5 444
 
Z5 N6 364
 Z6  Z 5 1.2197 
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z4  Z 5  Z6  20  45  65
 Z 5  Z 6  65
 Z 5  1.2197 Z 5  65
 Z5  30 teeth
and
Z 6  65  30  35
Z6  35 teeth
To check for interference
Z 1, Z 3, Z 5 are driver
Z3  Z1 

and 4
Z3  Z5 

 39  20 
 39  30   4
 
Similarly,
Z7  N o . of teeth on driver  20 teeth Assume
Z8 N7
 
Z7 N8
N7 1400
 Z8   Z7  20 
N8 444
 64 teeth
Z 7  Z 8  Z9  Z 10  20  64  84
 Z 9  Z 10  84 ... (1)
But
Z 10 N9 1400
   2.11
Z9 N 10 662
 Z 10  2.11 Z 9 ... (2)

 Z 9  2.11 Z 9  84
 Z9  27 teeth
Z 7  Z 8  Z 9  Z10  Z 11  Z 12  85
 Z 11  Z 12  85
Z 12 N 11 1400
But,    2.583
Z 11 N 12 542
 Z 12  2.583 Z 11
 Z 11  2.583 Z 11  84
 Z11  23 teeth
Check of interference
 Z9  Z7 
 4
 Z9
 Z 11

 27  20 
 27  23   4
 
 Satisfactory, there is no interference
Problem 4.8: Design a nine-speed gear box for a machine to

provide speeds ranging from 100 to 1500 rpm. The input is
from a motor of 5 kW at 1440 rpm. Assume any alloy steel
for the gear. (May/June 2007)
Given Data
N max  1500 rpm
N min  100 rpm
P  5 kW
Solution
N max
 Z  1
N min
1500
 Z  1     1.40
100
  1.40 is not a standa rd s tep ratio
Trial 1:
Consider R20 series, which is having   step ratio  1.12
 1.12  1.12  1.12  1.40 skip 2 speeds
Try R20 series by skipping (2) speeds
N 1  100 rpm; N 4  280 rpm; N 7  800
N 2  140 rpm; N 5  400 rpm; N 8  1000
N 3  200 rpm; N 6  560 rpm; N 9  1250
The obtained N 9  1250  N max hence the above trail

is not satisfactory.
 To obtain speeds (Approximate method)

N 1  100 rpm
N 2  N 1   140 rpm
N 3  N 2   196 rpm
N 4  N 3   274 rpm
N 5  N 4   384 rpm
N 6  N 5   538 rpm
N 7  N 6   753.2 rpm
N 8  N 7   1054 rpm
N 9  N 8   1476 ~
 1500 rpm
Approximate method is satisfactory
Structural formula
Z  3  3 ; P1  3 ; X1  1
P2  3 ; X2  P1  3
Z  P 1 X 1, P 2 X 2
 3 1, 3 3
For second stage

N max N min 1
Check for condition  2 and 
N input N input 4
Select Input  384 rpm
where,
N min  100 rpm
N max  753 rpm

753
 1.96  2
384
N min 100
  0.26  0.25
N i/p 384
Satisfies the c o nditio n and mark it as D.
 N inp ut  384
Approximate Number of Gears
9 speed  3  3 and 2 3  3  12 gears
For I stage
No. of speeds required are 3
 No. of gears required are 6
For II stage
Calculation of Number of Teeth on gear
II stage
N1 Z2

N2 Z1
N 1  Speed of driver shaft  384
N 2  Speed of driven shaft  100
384
 Z2   20  78 teeth
100
 Z1  20, Z2  78 teeth
1 44 0 rpm
1 50 0 rpm
1 0 5 4 rpm
7 53 rp m
F C
5 38 rp m
E
3 84 rp m
D
2 74 rp m
B
1 96 rp m
1 40 rp m
1 00 rp m
3 (1) 3 (3) A
Ray D iag ram
2
1
3
4
5
6
Kinem atic Diagram

8
7
10
9
11
12
Z3  Z4  Z1  Z2
 Z 3  Z 4  98
N3 Z4 384
 
N4 Z3 753
N3
 0.509
N4
 Z4  0.509 Z 3
 Z3  0.509 Z 3  98
 Z3  65 teeth
Z4  33 teeths
Z5 N6

Z6 N5
274 Z 5
   Z 5  0.7135 Z6
384 Z 6
Also
Z 5  Z 6  Z3  Z4
Z 5  Z 6  98
 0.7135 Z 6  Z 6  98  Z6  58 teeth
and Z5  40 teeth
To check interference
Z 1, Z3, Z 5 are driver
 Z3  Z1 
 
 and 4
Z Z 
 3 5
there is no interferenc e
I stage
N8  Speed of driver shaft  1440 rpm
N7  Speed of driven shaft  384 rpm
Z7 N8

Z8 N7
Assume Z7  20 teeths
N7 1440
 Z 8  20   20   75 teeth
N8 384
and
Z7  20, Z8  75 teeth
Z9  Z 10  Z 7  Z 8   Z 9  Z 10  95 teeth
and
Z9 N 10 N 10
  Z 9  Z10 
Z 10 N9 N9
753
 Z 10   0.5229 Z 10
1440
 0.5229 Z 10  Z10  95
 Z10  63 teeth
and
Z9  32 teeth
Z 11 N12 Z 11 538
    Z 11  0.3736 Z 12
Z 12 N 11 Z12 1440
and
Z 11  Z 12  Z 9  Z 10
Z 11  Z 12  95
95
 Z12   70 teeth
1.3736
Z11  95  70  25
Check for interference
Z 7, Z 9, Z11 are driver gears
 Z9  Z7 
 4
 Z 9  Z 11 
Problem 4.9: Design the layout of a 12 speed gear box for a

lathe. The minimum and maximum speeds are 100 and 1200
rpm. Power is 5 kW from 1440 rpm. Draw the speed and
kinematic diagram. Also calculate the number of teeth on all
gears. (May/June 2013)
Given data
Z  12 ; Nmin  100 rpm ; Nmax  1200 rpm ; P  5 kW
Solution
Nmax
Since  Z  1
N min
1
 1200  11
 
 100 
   1.25
The progression ratio   1.25 , coincides R10 series.
N1  100 rpm ; N2  125 rpm; N 3  160 rpm ;
N4  200 rpm; N 5  250 rpm; N 6  315 rpm;
N7  400 rpm; N 8  500 rpm; N 9  630 rpm
N10  800 rpm; N 11  1000 rpm; N 12  1250 rpm
Structural formula
Z322 P1  3 X1  1
12  P 1, P 2, P 3 P2  2 X2  P 1  3
 P1 X 1, P 2 X 2, P 3 X 3 P3  2 X3  P1  P2  3  2  6
 3 1, 2 3, 2 6
Since Number of stages = 3
Since 12 speeds, draw 12 horizontal lines three spaces
III stage, I pair

Z 13 N 14
Since 
Z 14 N 13
Procedure for constructing speed diagram

At 100 rpm (min) Locate A, at sixth intervals at
400 rpm and mark as B.
STAGE 3
STAG E 2
STAG E 1
Let N input  250
N min 100 1
Sinc e   0.4 
N input 250 4
N max 400
and   1.6  2
N input 250
Select input 250 rpm and mark C.
III stage, I pair

Assume  Z13  20 teeth
N 13 250
 Z 14  Z 13   20   Z14  50 teeth
N 14 100
III stage, II pair

Z 11 N 12 Z 11 400
    Z 11  1.6 Z 12
Z 12 N 11 Z 12 250
Also Z 11  Z 12  70
 1.6 Z 12  Z 12  70
 Z12  27 teeth
Mark N max  500 in II stage as (D)

Input speed in II stage (E) 400 rpm
N min  C
II stage, I pair
Z7 N8 500
Since    Z7  1.25 Z 8
Z8 N7 400
also Z 7  Z 8  Z9  Z10  52
1.25 Z 8  Z 8  52
 Z8  24 teeth and Z7  28 teeth
III stage, II pair

Z9 N 10
Since 
Z 10 N9
N9 400
 Z 10  Z 9   20   Z10  32 teeth
N 10 250
I stage, III pair

Z5 N6
Since 
Z6 N5 Assume Z5  20 teeth
N5 1000
 Z6  Z5   20 
N6 400
 Z6  50 teeth
I stage, II pair
Z3 N4 500
Since    0.5
Z4 N3 1000
 Z3  0.5 Z 4
Also Z 3  Z 4  Z 5  Z6  70
0.5 Z 4  Z 4  70  Z4  47 teeth and Z3  23 teeth
Mark in 1st stage
Max speed as (G)
Min speed as (E)
Input at 1000 rpm as H

Z 1  Z 2  70
Z1 N2 630
   0.63
Z2 N1 1000
Z 1  0.63 Z2
0.63 Z 2  Z2  70
Z 2  43
Z 1  70.43  27
Z1  27 teeth
Z2  43 teeth
Problem 4.10: Design a 12 speed gear for a headstock of a

lathe. The maximum and minimum speeds are 600 rpm and
25 rpm respectively. The drive is from a electric motor giving
2.25 kW at 1440 rpm. Construct the speed diagram and sketch
the arrangement of the gear box. (Nov/Dec 2009)
Solution
Z  12, N max  600 rpm, N min  25 rpm , P  2.25 kW ,
We know that
N max
 Z  1
N min
600
 12  1
25
  1.334
First check for the step ratio whether it coincides with

series value.
Since the obtained step ratio does not coincide with

the standard step ratio and also the multiples of obtained
step ratio does not coincide with the standard step ratio,
therefore to obtain speeds, by Approximate method
N 1  25 rpm
N 2  N 1    25  1.334  33.35 rpm  34 rp m
N 3  N 2    34  1.334  45.356 rpm  46 rpm
N 4  N 3    46  1.334  61.364 rpm  62 rpm
N 5  N 4    62  1.334  82.7 rpm  83 rpm
N 6  N 5    83  1.334  110.72 rpm  111 rpm
N 7  N 6    111  1.334  148 rpm
N 8  N 7    148  1.334  197.432 rpm  198 rpm
N 9  N 8    198  1.334  264.132  265 rp m
N 10  N 9    265  1.334  353.5  354 rpm
N 11  N 10    354  1.334  472.23  473 rpm
N 12  N 11    473  1.334  630 rpm
Structural formula
Z322
12  P 1, P 2, P 3
 P 1 X1, P 2 X 2, P 3 X 3
P 1  3; X 1  1
P 2  2; X 2  3  P 1
P 3  2; X 3  P 1  P 2  6
 12  3 1, 2 3, 2 6
Let u  no. of stages  3
 Draw u  1  4 vertical lines
Since, 12 speeds draw 12 horizontal lines
Procedure for construction of ray diagram:

3rd stage: 2 speed, 6 spaces
At 25 rpm (min), locate point “A ”
Leave six intervals at 148 rpm, mark point “B ”
Point “B ” represents N max  148 rpm
Point “A ” represents N min  25 rpm
Locate input speed, point “C ”
N max N min 1
 2 or  or 0.25
N input N input 4
148 25
  1.78  2 and  0.30  0.25
83 83
 Selection of N input  83 is satisfactory
2nd stage, 2 speeds, 3 space
Locate point “D ” above point “C ” after 3 spaces

 N max  198, N min  83
Select N input  148

198 83
  1.3  2 and  0.56  0.25
148 148
 Selection of N input  148 is satisfactory

Locate point “E ” at 148 rpm
1st stage 3 speeds, 1 space
 Mark “F ” and “G ”
Locate “H ” as input of motor
For first stage, it is not necessay to satisfy the
condition
 N max 
 2
 N input 
Kinematic diagram
No. of gears required  2 3  2  2  2 7 
 14 gears
Calculation of Number of Teeth
III stage
1st pair (Reducing speed)
Speed of driver  N 2  83 rpm

Speed of driven  N 1  25 rpm
But
N1 Z2

N2 Z1
25 20
  Z 1  66.4  67 teeth
83 Z 1
K inem atic Layou t

 Z1  67 teeth; Z2  20 teeth
2nd pair, Increasing speed
But
N3 Z4

N4 Z3
and
Z1  Z2  Z3  Z4
 Z 3  Z 4  67  20
Z 3  Z 4  87
and
148
Z4   Z3
83
Z 4  1.78 Z3
 Z 3  1.78 Z 3  87
 Z3  31.29  32 teeth
and Z4  55 teeth
II stage
1st pair: Reducing speed
But
N7 Z8

N8 Z7
Z 8  N8 148
 Z7    Z8
N7 83
Z 7  1.783 Z 8
 Z7  35.66  36 teeth
2nd pair: Increasing speed

But
N5 Z6

N6 Z5
and
Z7  Z8  Z5  Z6
36  20  Z 5  Z 6
 Z 5  Z 6  56 teeth
and
198
Z6   Z5
148
Z 6  1.33 Z5
 Z 5  1.33 Z 5  56
 Z5  24 teeth
Z6  31.92  32 teeth
I stage
In this stage, there are 3 speeds, and 3 pairs of gears
are required.
To avoid interference of gear of one shaft with the

gear of the other shaft while shifting:
Condition to avoid interference;
Z 12  Z 10   4 and Z 12  Z 14   4
Assume: Z10  20 teeth
N9 Z 10
But 
N 10 Z9
148 20

600 Z 9
 Z9  81.08  82 teeth
2nd pair: Intermediate speed
Let
But
N 13 Z 14

N 14 Z 13
198 Z 14

600 Z 13
 Z 14  0.33 Z 13
and
Z 9  Z 10  Z13  Z 14
 Z 13  Z 14  82  20
Z 13  Z 14  102
 Z 13  0.33 Z 13  102
 Z13  76.69  77 teeth
and
Z14  25 teeth
3rd pair: Increasing speed
N 11  speed of driven  265 rpm
But
N 11 Z 12

N 12 N 11
265 Z 12
 
600 Z 11
 Z 12  0.44 Z 11
But
Z 11  Z12  Z 13  Z14
 Z 11  Z 12  77  25
 Z 11  Z 12  102
Hence
Z 11  0.44 Z 11  102
 Z11  71 teeth
and
Z12  31 teeth
Check for Interference
Z 12  Z 10  31  20  4
Z 12  Z 14  31  25  4
Hence, there is no interference and the design is safe.

Problem 4.11: The spindle of a pillar drill is to run at 12
different speeds in the range of 100 rpm to 355 rpm. Design
a three stage gear box with a standard step ratio. Sketch the
layout of the gear box, indicating the number of teeth on each
gear. The gear box receives 5 kW from an electric motor
running at 360 rpm. Sketch also the speed diagram.
(April/May 2008)
Solution
Given
P  5 kW, N max  355 rpm, Nmin  100 rpm
Z  12
N max
 Z  1
N m in
355
  12  1
100
   1.122
The progression ratio   1.122 , coincides with R20

series standard progression ratio.
Therefore select R20 series speeds. (From P.S.G. Data book,

Pg.No. 7.20)
N 1  100 rpm , N2  112 rpm, N 3  125 rpm, N 4  140 rpm
N 5  160 rpm, N 6  180 rpm, N 7  200 rpm, N 8  224 rpm
N 9  250 rpm, N 10  280 rpm, N 11  315 rpm, N 12  355 rpm
Structural formula
Z322
12  P 1, P 2, P 3
 P 1 X1, P2 X2, P 3 X 3
 3 1, 2 3, 2 6
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage
P 1  3; P 2  2; P3  2
X1  1  1
X 2  P1  3
X 3  P1  P2
326
H 360
335
315
280
250
G
D
224
F
200
E B
180
160
C
140
125
112
100
I Stage II Stage III Stage A
3(1) 2(3) 2(6)
Ray D iag ram

14 12 10
13 9
11
D riven Driver 200 rp m
8
6
7
5
Driven
To a void interfere nce, a ll ge ars in this stage

are m o dife d to: Z 9 = 14 4; Z 1 0 = 80 ; Z 11 = 1 32 ; 4
2
Z 1 2 = 92; Z 1 3 =1 36 ; Z 1 4 = 88 3 1
Driven
Kinematic D iagram 10 0 rpm

u  No. of stages  3
 Draw u  1  3  1  4 vertical lines
Since 12 speeds, draw 12 horizontal lines
3rd stage : 2 speeds, 6 spaces
At 100 rpm (min) locate point A
Leave six intervals at 200 rpm mark point B
i.e., Point B represents N max  200 rpm, Point A

represents
N min  100 rpm
Locate input speed, Point C
N max
 2 select N input  160
N input
200
or  1.25 which is less than 2
160
N min 1
 or 0.25
N input 4
Locate Point C at 160 rpm.
2nd stage: 2 speeds, 3 spaces.
Locate point D above point C after 3 spaces.
To find N input for 2nd stage
N max  224 rpm
N min  160 rpm

select N input  200 rpm
N max
2
N inp ut
224
 1.12 w hich is less than 2
220
N min
 1/4;
N input
160
 0.8  Selection of N input  200 is satisfactory.
200
Locate point E at 200 rpm. (Note: selection of 180

rpm is also correct)
1st stage: There are 3 speeds with 1 space interval.
 Mark F and G

Locate H as input of motor.
For first stage it is not necessary to satisfy the condition.
 N max 
N 2
 input 
Join H, F
From F draw (2) speeds
F C 1 and F D 1
180 rpm, 250 rpm (maintain again 3 space intervals)

From C 1, draw 2 speeds. (112 rpm and 224 rpm)
C 1 A 1 and C 1 B 1
112 rpm, 224 rpm

Join H, G
From G draw 2 speeds (200 rpm and 280 rpm)
G C 2 and C D 2
200 rpm, 280 rpm

From C 2 draw 2 speeds (125 rpm and 250 rpm)
C 2 A 2 and C 2 B 2
140 rpm, 315 rpm

From D 2
draw (2) speeds (180 rpm and 355 rpm)

D 2 A 5 and D 2B 5
180 rpm 355 rpm
Kinematic Diagram
No. of Gears required are  2 3  2  2   2 7
 14 Gears
Calculation of Number of Teeth
III stage
1st pair (Reducing speed)
speed of driven N 1 Z2
 
spe ed of driver N 2 Z1
let Z 2  20 teeth
100 20

160 21
20  160
Z1   32 teeth
100
speed of driver  N 2  160 rpm
speed of driven  N 1  100 rpm
Assume above 17 teeth
1st pair  Z1  20 teeth
Z2  32 teeth
N 3  drive n s peed  200 rpm
 
speed of driver N 4 Z3 ... (1)
Z1  Z2  Z3  Z4
20  32  Z 3  Z 4
Z 3  Z 4  52 ... (2)
200 Z 4

160 Z 3
Z 4  1.25 Z3
Z 3  1.25 Z 3  52
52
Z3   23
2.25
Z4  52  23  29 teeth
2nd pair Z3  23 teeth
Z4  29 teeth
II stage
 
speed of driver N 8 Z7
160 20

200 Z7
20  200
Z7 
160
Z7  25 teeth
1st pair: Z7  25 teeth
Z8  20 teeth
 
speed of driver N 6 Z5
Z7  Z8  Z5  Z6
25  20  Z 5  Z 6
Z 5  Z 6  45 ... (1)
224 Z 6

200 Z 5
Z 6  Z 5  1.12
Z 5  1.127 5  45
45
Z5   21.22
2.12
Z 6  45  21
 24 teeth
2nd pair Z5  21 teeth
Z6  24 teeth
I stage
In this stage there are 3 speeds; and 3 pairs of gears
are required. To avoid interference of gear of one shaft
with the gear of the other shaft while shifting:
Condition to avoid interference
Z 12  Z 10   4
Z 12  Z 14   4
N9 Z 10
 ; Assume Z 10  20
N 10 Z9
 Z 9  35.5  36 teeth
N 13 Z14 224
  Z14  Z 13   0.63 Z13
N 14 Z 13 355
But Z 9  Z 10  Z 13  Z 14
56
 Z 13  Z 14  36  20  56  Z 13   34 teeth
1.63
Z13  34 teeth
Z14  22 teeth
N 11 Z 12 250 Z 12
  
N 12 Z 11 355 Z 11
 Z 12  Z 11  0.704
Z 11  Z 12  Z 13  Z 14  56
Z 11  0.704 Z 11  56  Z11  33 teeth
Z12  23 teeth
Check the No. of teeth on Z 9, Z 10 , Z 11 , Z 12 , Z13 and

Z 14
Z 12  Z 10  23  20  3 which is less than 4
Z 12  Z 14  23  22  1 which is less than 4
 Interference will occur between the gears. To avoid

Interference, proportionately increase the No. of teeth on
all the gears.
 Multiply by 4
Z 12  4  23  92, Z10  80, Z 12  Z 10  92  80  12  4

 Satisfactory
Similarly
Z 9  144 teeth, Z 10  80 teeth, Z 11  132 teeth,
Z 12  92 teeth, Z 13  136 teeth, Z 14  88 teeth,
Problem 4.12: Design a layout of a 12 speed gear box for a

milling machine having an output of speeds ranging from 180
to 2000 rpm. Power is applied to gear box from a 6 kW
induction motor at 1440 rpm. Choose standard step ratio and
construct the speed diagram. Decide upon the various reduction
ratios and number of teeth on each gear wheel. Sketch the
arrangement of the gear box. (April/May 2008)
Solution
N max
 Z  1
Nmin
N max  2000 rpm, N m in  180 rpm
2000
   12  1
180
   1.244
It is not a standard step ratio
 Try second method
(i.e.) Try the multiples of standard ratio and try the

series
Take R20 series and try multiples
 1.12  1.12  1.256 which is greater than required.
 To obtain speeds (Approximately) by Approximate

method
N 1  180 rpm
N 2  N 1    224 rpm
N 3  N 2    278.65  279 rpm
N 4  N 3    347 rpm
N 5  N 4    431.66  432 rpm
N 6  N 5    536 rpm
N 7  N 6    667 rpm
N 8  N 7    830 rpm
N 9  N 8    1033 rpm
N 10  N 9    1285 rpm
N 11  N 10    1599 rpm
N 12  N 11    1990 rpm is almost equal to N max
Z322
12  P 1, P 2, P 3
P 1  3; X 1  1
P 2  2; X 2  P 2  3
P 3  2; X 3  P 1  P 2  3  2  6
3rd stage
Locate N input
Mark N min  180 rpm as (A)
N max  667 rpm as (B)
N max
2
Ninput
Let us select N input  432 rp m
667
2
432
N min 1

N input 4
180 1

432 4
 Selection of Input is satisfactory and mark it as (C)
2nd stage
Mark N max  830 rpm as (B)
N max 836
  1.25  2
N input 667
Let N input  667
N min 432 1
  0.647 
N input 667 4
Selection of Input 667 is satisfactory and mark it as (E)
I stage
1st pair
Let Z2  20 teeth
N 12 = 1 9 9 0 rp m
N 11 = 1 5 9 9 rp m
H
1440
rp m
N 10 = 1 2 8 5 rp m
N 9 = 1 0 3 3 rp m
N 8 = 8 3 0 rp m
D
N 7 = 6 6 7 rp m
E
B
N 6 = 5 3 6 rp m
N 5 = 4 3 2 rp m
C
N 4 = 3 4 7 rp m
N 3 = 2 7 9 rp m
N 2 = 2 2 4 rp m
N 1 = 1 8 0 rp m
I S ta g e 3 (1 ) II S ta g e 2 (3 ) III S ta g e 2 (6 ) A
Fig. Ray Diag ram

Z 1 2 = 27
Z 1 4 =23
Driver 1440 rp m
Z 6 = 28
Z 8 = 20
Driven Driver 667 rpm
Z 4 =41
Z 2 =2 0
Z 11 = 36 Driven Driver 432 rp m

Z 1 3 =40 (10 33 Z 9 =4 3
(83 0 rpm ) rpm ) (66 7rp m )
Z 5 = 23
(830 rpm ) Z 7 =3 1
(432 rpm )
Driven
Z 3 =27 Z 1 =48
Kinem atic D iagram (6 67rpm ) (18 0 rpm )
N1 Z2
Since 
N2 Z1
N2 432
 Z1  Z 2   Z 1  20   48 teeth
N1 180
N3 Z4
Similarly 
N4 Z3
and
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z4
 Z 3  Z 4  68 teeth
N3
 Z4  Z3   Z 4  1.54 Z3
N4
 Z 3  1.54  Z 3  68
 Z 3  27 teeth
and
Z 4  68  27  41
 Z 4  41 teeth
II stage
N7 Z8

N8 Z7
N8
 Z7  Z8   Z7  31 teeth
N7
and
Z6 N5

Z5 N6
Z7  Z8  Z5  Z6
 Z 5  Z 6  51 teeth
and
N5
Z6  Z5   Z 6  1.24 Z 5
N6
 1.24 Z 5  Z 5  51
 Z 5  23 teeth
and
Z 6  28 teeth
I stage
N9 Z 10

N 10 Z9
N10
 Z 9  Z 10   Z 9  43 teeth
N9
N 13 Z 14

N 14 Z 13
N13
 Z 14  Z 13   Z 14  0.576 Z 13
N 14
But
Z 9  Z 10  Z 13  Z14
 Z 13  Z 14  63 teeth
 Z 13  0.576 Z 13  63
 Z13  40 teeth
and
Z14  23 teeth
Similarly
N 11 Z 12

N 12 Z 11
 N 11 1033 
Z 12  Z 11  0.717    0.717 
 N 12 1440 
But
Z11  Z 12  Z 13  Z14  63  Z 11  Z 12  63
 Z 11  0.717 Z 11  63  Z11  36 teeth
and
Z12  63  36  27
Z12  27 teeth
Check for Interference

Z 12  Z10  4; Z 12  Z 14  4
27  20  4; 27  23  4
 satisfactory
Design of Gear Box

1. Selection of spindle speed
Progression ratio 
N max
n  1 
N min
2. Construct the Ray diagram.

3. Construct the kinematic arrangement.
4. Calculate the No. of teeth of all the gears.
5. Choose the suitable material
(i) C45 – 30
(ii) 15 Ni2 Crl M015 – 80
(iii) 40 Ni2 Crl M028 – 100
and for permissible shear stress N/mm 2
(i) C45  30
(ii) C14  25
(iii) 40 Ni2 Crl M0 28 – 55
(iv) Low carbon alloy steel – 40
6. Calculation of module:
(i) Find the torque for the gear
P  60
T
2 N
(ii) Calculate the tangential force,
T 2T
Ft  
r Zm
(iii) Find the value of module,


Ft
m
m  
b
where, m   10
m
(M value take from point 4)
7. Find the value of centre distance by using formula,

 Zx  Zy 
a m
 2 
8. Calculate the face width: b  10  m

9. Calculate the distance between the bearing using
formula,
L  25  10  4b  20  7b  10  25
 Assume, width of the bearing  25 mm
 Clearance between gear and bearing  10 mm

 Distance between the adjacent groups of gears
 20 mm
 4b is two pairs gear group and 7b is three pairs

gear group from the total length.
10. Design of shafts
Fn  L
(i) Maximum bending moment M  
4
F n  Normal load
Ft
Fn 
cos 
(ii) Torque eq T eq   

M 2  T2
P  60
T
2 N low
T  Torque on the spindle in system.
(iii) Find the diameter of the spindle
1/3
 16  Teq 
ds   
    
16T eq
where, 
 d3s
(From point 4)
11. Design the diameter of the input and intermediate

shaft.
T  0.2d3s []
Problem 4.13: Design a 12 speed gear box for an all geared

head stock of the lathe. Maximum and Minimum speeds are
600 rpm and 25 rpm respectively. The drive is from an electric
motor giving 3.25 kW at 1500 rpm. (Assume length of shaft
 860 mm).
Given Data: n  12 ; N max  600 rpm, N min  25 rpm ;
P  3.25 kW ; N input  1500 rpm

To Design a gear box.

Solution
1. Selection of spindle speeds.
N max
n  1 
N min
1/11
 600 
   1.338
 25 
From PSG data book Page No. 7.20
1.06  1.06  1.06  1.06  1.06   1.334
Since 1.334 is very close to 1.338, we can take R 40

series.
N 1  25, N 2  33.5 , N 3  45, N 4  60, N 5  80 ,
N 6  106, N 7  140, N 8  190, N 9  250, N 10  335
N 11  450, N 12  600
2. Draw the Ray diagram:

Formula: 3(1), 2(3) 2(6)
Stage 1
N max 140
  1.75  2
Ninput 80
N min 25
  0.31  0.25
Ninput 80
Stage 2
N max 190
  1.36  2
Ninput 40
N min 80
  0.57  0.25
Ninput 40
Stage 1
N min 140
  0.311  0.25
Ninput 150
N max 250
  0.56  2
Ninput 450
3. Kinematic Arrangement
4. Calculate the No. of teeth of all the gears
Stage 3
1st pair: Maximum reduction from 80 rpm
corresponding gears are 13 and 14 on shaft 25 rpm.
Assume Z13  20 (driver)
Z 13 N14

Z 14 N13
20 25
 ; Z14  64
Z 14 80
2nd pair: Speed Increases from 80 to 140 rpm.

(Corresponding gears are 11 and 12).
Z 11 N 12 140
 
12 N 11 80
Z 11  1.75 Z 12
where, Z 11  Z 12  Z 13  Z14
1.75 Z 12  Z 12  20  64
3 (1) 2 (3) 2 (6)

6 00
H 4 50
3 35
2 50
G
D
1 90
F
1 40
E
1 06
80
C
60
45
Sh a ft-1
S haft-3
S haft-2
Sh aft-4
3 3.5
Stag e 1 Stag e 2 Stag e 3

25
Fig. Ray Diagram for 12 Speed G ear B ox A

I S tag e II S tage III Stag e
Fig. Kinem atic Arrang em en t fo r 12 Speed G ear B ox.

Z12  31
Z11  1.75 31  54
Stage 2
1st pair: Maximum speed reduction from 140 to 80
rpm (corresponding gears are 9 and 10)
Z9 N 10

Z 10 N9
20 80

Z 10 140
 Z10  35
2nd pair: Speed Increase from 140 to 190 rpm.

Z7 N8 190
 
Z8 N7 140
Z 7  1.357 Z 8
where, Z 7  Z 8  Z 9  Z10
1.357 Z8  Z 8  20  35
Z8  24
Z7  1.357 24  32
Stage 1
1st pair: Maximum reduction from 450 to 140 rpm
(corresponding gears are 5 and 10)
Z5 N6

Z6 N5
20 140

Z 6 450
Z 6  65
2nd pair: Speed Reduction from 450 to 190 rpm.

(Corresponding gears are 3 & 4).
Z3 N4 190
 
Z4 N5 450
Z 3  0.422 Z 4
where, Z 3  Z 4  Z 5  Z6
0.422 Z4  Z 4  20  65
Z4  60
Z3  0.422 60  25
3rd pair: Speed Reduction from 450 to 250 rpm.

Z1 N2 250
 
Z2 N1 450
Z 1  0.555 Z 2
where, Z 1  Z 2  60  25  85
 Z2  55
 Z1  0.555 55  30
5. Material Selection: C 45
6. Calculation of module:
Torque at lowest speed 25 rpm by meshing gears 13
and 14.
60  3.25  10 3
T 14 
2  25
 1241.40 N  m
To Calculate tangential force on gear 14,
T 2  T 14
Ft  
r Z 14  m
. . Zm 
 . r 2 
 
2  1241.40  10 3

64  m
38793.75

m


F t
module m 
m  
b
m   10 ,   30 [for C 45 ]
m
m

  38793.75 /m 

 10  30 

129.31
m
m

129.31
m2 
m
m 3  129.31
m  5.056 mm
Nearest value is  5 mm
(From PSG Data book Pg No. 8.2)
7. Calculate the centre distance

(i) Centre distance for
 Z1  Z2 
Stage 1,  a1   m
 2 
 30  55 
a1   5
 2 
a1  212.5 mm
(ii) Centre distance for stage 2,
 Z7  Z8 
a2   m
 2 
 32  24 
 5
 2 
 140 mm
(iii) Centre distance for stage 3,
 Z11  Z 12 
a3   m
 2 
 54  31 
 5
 2 
 212.5 mm
8. Find the face width

bm
b  10  5  50 mm
9. Length of shaft
L  860 mm (given)
(i) Maximum bending moment M
Fn  L
M
4
Ft 38793.75 /m
Fn  
cos  cos
Assume,   20
38793.75 /5 7758.75

 
cos 20 0.939
Fn  8256.6 N
Maximum Bending moment,
8256.6  860
M  1.77  10 6 N  mm
4
(ii) EquivalentTo rqueTeq
T eq  
 M 2  T214  

1.77  10 62  1241.4 2
 1.77  10 6 N  mm
(iii) Find the diameter of the spindle,

1/3
 16  T eq 
ds   
   
where,   30 N/mm 2 from the part 4

1/3
 16  1.7  10 6 
 
   30 
 66.08 mm
Using R 40 series, Rounded value of the diameter is

67 mm.
11. Design of the other shaft

(i) Diameter of shaft:
P  60 3.25  10 3  60
Torque  
2 N 2  450
T  69 N  m
T  0.2 d 3s 
1
69  10 3  0.2d3s 30
1
ds  22.57 mm or 23 mm
1
(ii) Diameter of shaft 2
Minimum speed  140 rpm

P  60 3.35  10 3  60
Torque  
2N 2  140
T  228.5 N  m
wkt, T  0.2d3s 

2
22.5  10 3  0.2d3s 30

2
ds2  33.64 mm
(iii) Diameter of shaft 3:

P  60 3.35  103  60
Torque  
2 N 2  80
 399.87 N  m
399.87  10 3  0.2 d 3s 30 

3
ds  40.5 mm
3
Problem 4.14: Design a gear drive, to give 18 speeds for a

spindle of a milling machine. The drive is from an electric
motor of 6.75 kW at 1500 rpm. Maximum and minimum
speeds of the spindle are to be around 35 and 650 rpm
respectively.
Given Data: Z  18 ; P  6.75 kW; N motor  150 rpm;
N max  650 rpm; N min  35 rpm.

To: Design a Gear box
Solution
1. Selection of spindle speed
N max
n  1 
N min
1/17
17 650  650 
    
35  35 
  1.1875
The step ratio is not standard, so multiply the

standard ratio to the calculated step ratio.
where, 1.06  1.06  1.06  1.191
The value is very close to the calculated step ratio

1.18 of R40 series.
(skip 2 speeds from the R40 series)
It’s given by,
N 1  35.5, N 2  42.5 , N 3  50, N 4  60, N 5  71 ,
N 6  85, N 7  100, N 8  118, N 9  140, N 10  170 ,
N 11  200, N 12  236, N13  280, N14  335, N 15  400,
N 16  475, N 17  560, N18  670
N max is very close to the N 18 , therefore speed

selection is satisfactory.
2. Ray diagram
Formula: 2(1) 3(2) 3(6)
Stage 3
N max 280
 2
Ninput 140
N min 35.5
  0.253  0.25
Ninput 140
Stage 2
N max 280
  1.186  2
Ninput 236
2(1) 3(2) 3(6)

670
560
, 475
400
335
C
280
H F
236
G
200
E
170
140
D
118
B
100
85
71
60
50
42.5
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3
35.5
A
RAY DIAG RAM for 18 Speed G ear Box
4.145
Z 1 =2 3 Z = 20
3
Driver 475 rpm 20 m m 20 mm 7b
1 3
4 Z 7 = 30
2 Z 5 = 25
a 1=
Z 9 =20
91 .5m m
Z 13 =6 6
Driven Driver 236 rp m
Z 11 =4 1
9
5
7 10 Z 1 5 =20
a 2=
6
8 1m m
Z 2 =38 236 rpm 8

280 rpm Z 4 =4 0 Driven Driver 140 rpm
15
10 m m 4b
Z 8 =25 16
Z 6 =29 11
Z 1 0 =34
Design of Transmission Systems
280 rpm 10m m

a 3=
200 rp m 140 rpm 12

13
148.5m m
7b 14
D riven
Z 1 4 = 33
280 rpm
Stage 1 Stage 2 Z 1 2 =5 8
Stage 3
35.5 rpm
100 rpm
Kinematic Arrangem ent for 18 Speed G ear B ox Z 1 6 = 79
N min 140
  0.59  0.25
Ninput 236
Stage 1
N max 280
  0.59  2
Ninput 475
N min 236
  0.49  0.25
Ninput 475
 All conditions are satisfied.

3. Kinematic Arragement
4. Calculate the No. of teeth of all the gears.
State 3
1st pair: Maximum reduction from 140 to 35.5 rpm
(Corresponding gears are 15 and 16)
Assume, Z15  20 driver
Z 15 N 16
 
Z 16 N 15
20 35.5

Z 16 140
Z16  79
Z 11 N 12

Z12 N11
Z 11 100

Z12 140
Z 11  0.714 Z 12 
Z 11  Z 12  Z 15  Z 16
0.714 Z 12   Z 12  20  79
 Z12  58
 Z11  0.714 58  41
rd
3 pair: Speed Increases from 140 to 280 rpm.
Z 13 N 14

Z 14 N 13
Z 13 280

Z 14 140
 280 
Z 13    Z14  Z 13  2Z 14
 140 
where, Z 13  Z14  Z 15  Z 16
2Z 14  Z 14  20  79
Z14  33
Z 13  2 33
Z13  66
Stage 2
I pair: Maximum reduction from 236 to 140 rpm
Assume, Z9  20 (driver)
Z9 N 10

Z 10 N9
20 140

Z 10 236
 Z10  34
Z5 N6

Z6 N5
 200 
Z5    Z6
 236 
Z 5  0.847 Z 6
where, Z 5  Z 6  Z 9  Z 10
0.847 Z 6  Z 6  20  34
 Z6  29
 Z5  0.847 29  25
3rd pair: Speed Increases from 236 to 280 rpm.

Z7 N8

Z8 N7
 280 
Z7    Z 8  Z 7  1.186 Z 8
 236 
Z 7  Z 8  Z 9  Z10
1.186 Z 8  Z 8  20  34
Z8  25
Z7  1.186 25  30
Stage 1
1st pair: Maximum Speed Reduction from 475 to 236
rpm (Corresponding gears are 3 and 4)
Assume, Z3  20 (driver)
Z3 N4

Z4 N3
20 236

Z 4 475
Z4  40

Z1 N2

Z2 N1
 280 
Z1    Z 2  Z1  0.59 Z2
 475 
where,
Z 1  Z2  Z 2  Z4
0.59Z 2  Z 2  20  41
Z2  38
Z 1  0.59 38
Z1  23
5. Material Selection
Select 40 Ni2 Cr1 M0 28
6. Find the value of module:

Torque: gear 16 has the lowest speed of 35.5 rpm.
P  60 6.75  10 3  60
(i) T 16  
2 N 2  35.5
T 16  1815.71 N  m
(ii) Tangential Force,
T 2  T16
Ft  
16 r Z 16  m
2  1815.71  10 3 45967.34
 
79  m m


Ft
wkt, m
m  
b
m   10 ;   100
m
Material constant  100
45967.34 /m
 
 
45.96
m 
10  100 m
45.96
m2 
m
m 3  45.96
m  3.58 mm
(or) m  4 mm (Standard module)
From PSG Data book Pg No 8.2
 Centre distance for Stage 1,

 Z1  Z2 
a1   m
 2 
 23  38 
  4  122 mm
 2 
For stage 2
 Z5  Z 6 
a2   
 2 
 25  29 
  4  108 mm
 2 
For stage 3
 Z11  Z 12 
a3   m
 2 
 42  58 
  4  200 mm
 2 
8. Calculation of face width

b    m  10  4  40 mm
9. Calculation of length of shaft

L  25  10  46  20  7b  20  7b  10  25
 110  18b
 110  18 40  830 mm


(i) Maximum bending moment,
Fn  L
M
4
Ft 45967.34 /m
Fn  
cos  cos 20
Assume   20
45967.34 /4
  12.22  10 3 N
cos 20
12.22  10 3  830
M
4
M  2.53  10 6 N  mm
(ii) To find the equivalent Torque,
Teq  
 M 2  T216
 
2.53  10 62  1815.71  10 32
 
 6.40  10 12  3.29  10 12
Teq  3.11  10 6 N  mm
(iii) Find the diameter of spindle
1/ 3
 16  T eq 
ds   
   
where,   55 N/mm 2 from point 4

1/3
 16  3.11  10 6 
 
  55  
 66.03  66 mm R 40 series 
11. (i) Diameter of shaft 1

P  60 6.75  10 3  60
Torque  
2 N 2  475
T  135.70 N  m
T  0.2  d 3s  
1
1/3
 135.70  10 3 
ds   
1
 0.2  55 
ds  23.10 mm
1
 25 mm R 40 series
(ii) Diameter of shaft 2
P  60 6.75  10 3  60
Torque  
2 N 2  236
 273.12 N  m
273.12  10 3  0.2  d3s  55

2
d s  29.17  30 mm R 40 series
2
(iii) Diameter of shaft 3
P  60 6.75  10 3  60
Torque  
2 N 2  140
 460.41 N  m
460.41  10 3  0.2  d3s  55

3
ds  34.72 mm  35 mm R40 series 

3
Problem 4.15: A six speed gear box is required to provide

output speeds in the range of 125 to 400 rpm, with a step ratio
of 1.25 and transmit a power of 5 kW at 710 rpm. Draw the
speed diagram and kinematic diagram. Determine the number
of teeth module and face width of all gears, assuming suitable
materials for gears. Determine the length of the gear box along
the axis of the gear shaft. (Nov/Dec 2007)
Solution
N max
 Z  1
N min
400
 6  1
125
   1.262
The  is not an standard progression ratio. Therefore,

for R40 series from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 7.20
  1.06
  1.06  1.06  1.06  1.06  1.262 skip 3  speeds
Skip (3) speeds and try R40 series
N 1  125 rpm
N 2  160 rpm
N 3  200 rpm
N 4  250 rpm
N 5  315 rpm
N 6  400 rpm
Since N 6  400 rpm is the maximum required speed
 Select the above speeds
Structural formula
Z32 P1  3 X1  1
P1  P2 P2  2 X2  P2  3
 Z  P 1 X 1, P 2 X 2
 3 1, 2 3 
N max N min 1
Check Either  2 or 
N input N input 4
Fo r 1st stage, the abo ve c o nditio n need no t be

c hec ked.Selec t N input as 710 rpm. Mark
N max  250 a s B
N min  125 as A
3 (1) 2 (3 )
D =710 rpm
710 rpm
400 rpm
315 rpm
B
250 rpm
200 rpm
C
160 rpm
125 rpm
3(1) Ray D iag ram 2(3) A
Z 7 = 28
STAG E I Z 9 = 24 S TAG E II
4.157
Z 5 =20
Driver 710 rpm
5
7 9
6
10
8
Z 3 =29
Z 1 =2 0
Driven Driver 200 rp m

1
3 2
4
Driven
Z 8 = 63
Z 1 0 =6 7 Z 4 =23
Z 6 = 71 (3 15 rpm ) Z 2 = 32
(2 50 rp m ) (250 rpm ) (125 rpm )
(200 rp m )
For 2nd stage
N max N min 1
Check  2 and 
N input N input 4
Select N input  200 rp m
250 125 1
  2 and 
200 200 4
 Selection of N input 200 rpm is satisfactory and

mark it as (C)
Approximate No. of gears required
6 speeds  3  2  2 3  2  10 gears
Calculation of No. of teeth on gear
Assume Z 1  20 teeth driver
N 1  200 rpm  Speed of driver
N 2  125 rpm  Speed of driven
Z 2  N o . of teeth on driven
Z2 N1
 
Z1 N2
N1
 Z2  Z1 
N2
200
 20   32 teeth
125
Z 1  Z 2  Z3  Z 4  20  32  52
Z4 N3
and 
Z3 N4
Z4 200
   0.8
Z3 250
Z 4  0.8 Z3
 Z 3  0.8 Z3  52
 Z3  29 teeth
But Z 3  Z 4  52
 Z4  23 teeth
Z6 N5
Similarly, 
Z5 N6
N5
 Z6  Z5 
N6
710
 20 
200
 71 teeth
Z 5  Z 6  Z7  Z 8  91
 Z 7  Z 8  91
Z8 N7
and 
Z7 N8
Z8 710
 
Z7 315
 Z8  2.253  Z 7
 Z7  2.253 Z 7  91
 Z7  28 teeth
and Z8  63 teeth
Z 5  Z 6  Z 7  Z 8  Z 9  Z10  91
 Z 9  Z 10  91
Z 10 N9
But 
Z9 N 10
710
 Z 10  Z
250 9
 Z 10  2.84 Z9
 Z 9  2.84 Z 9  91
 Z9  24 teeth
and Z 10  91  24  67
Z10  67 teeth
To avoid interference
Z 7  Z 5 and Z 7  Z 9  4
28  20 and 28  24  4
The condition satisfies, therefore the calculation of

number of teeth on each gear is satisfactory.
Module calculation
The lowest speed is 125 rpm
 Calculate the torque at 125 rpm
5  10 3  60 P  60
T125 rpm  
2  125 2 N
 381.97 Nm
But
Torque  F t  r2
2
where r2 is the pitch circle radius of gear 2
Z2  m 32  m
But r2    16 m
2 2
where m refers to module
F t  tangential force on gear 2

2
 381.97  10 3  F t  16 m
2
381.97  10 3 23,873.12
 Ft   N
2 16 m m


Ft
But m
 Mm
b
where m   10 (assume) from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No.
m
8.14
a1  Material constant
 100, for 40 Ni2 Cr1 Mo 28
 80, for 15 Ni2 Cr2 Mo15
 30, for C 45


 23873  12 
m  /10  100
 m 
23873.12
m2 
m  1000
 m 3  23.873
m  2.9 mm
~
 3 mm (standard) from P.S.G. Data book, Pg.No. 8.2
we know b  10  3 m
 b  10  3  30 mm

a1  centre distance in stage 1
Z 1  Z2 m 20  32 3

 
2 2
 78 mm
Z 5  Z 6 m 20  71 3
a2    136.5 mm
2 2
Length of shafts
Assume Distance between the gear and gear box wall
is to be about 10 mm. Distance between the adjacent
groups of gears is to be about 20 mm. Total length
requirement for 2 pairs group and 3 pairs group are to be
4b and 7b respectively.
Thus the length of the shaft is obtained as
L  30  10  4b  20  7b  10  30
(First 30 and last 30 mm are for bearings)
Put b  30 mm
we get L  430 mm
 Length of shafts is L  430 mm
Problem 4.16: Sketch the arrangement of a six speed gear
box. The minimum and maximum speeds required are around
450 and 1400 rpm. Drive speed is 1440 rpm. Construct speed
diagram of the gear box and obtain various reduction ratios.
Use standard output speeds and standard step ratio. Calculate
number of teeth in each gear.
Solution
Maximum speed  N max  1400 rp m
N max
 Z  1
N min
1400
  6  1    1.254
450
It is not a standard ratio

Therefore, Trail (1) for R20 series (from P.S.G Data

book, Pg.No. 7.20)
  1.12
  1.12  1.12  1.254
 Skipping one speed, we get
N 1  450 rpm
N 2  560 rpm
N 3  710 rpm
N 4  900 rpm
N 5  1120 rpm
N 6  1400 rpm
Structural Formula
Z3  2
P1 P2
P 1  3; X1  1
P 2  2; X2  P1  3
Z  P 1 X 1, P 2 X 2
 3 1, 2 3
For second stage

Mark N min as A
N max as B
N max
Check 2
N input
Let N input  710 rpm
900
 2
710
N min 1

N input 4
450
  0.25
710
 N input selection is satisfactory, mark it as C
Approximate No. of gears required
6 speeds  3  2  2 3  2  10 gears
For 1st stage

 No of gears required are 6
For 2nd stage

Kinematic diagram
Let Z1  No . of Teeth of Driver  20 teeth
N 1  710 rpm
N 2  540 rpm
Z2 N1 N1 710
But   Z2   Z1   20
Z1 N2 N2 450
Input
D 1440 rpm
,,
1400 rpm
B2
E 1120 rp m
B1
900 rpm
D
B
710 rpm
C A2
560 rpm
A1
450 rpm
1 s t Stage 3(1) 2 nd S tage 2(3 ) A
Ray D iag ram
4.167
Z 7 =27
Z 9 =2 3
Z 5 = 20
Driver 1440 rpm
5
7 9
6
10 Z 3 =2 9
8
Z 1 = 20
D riven Driver 710 rpm

1
3 2
4
Z 8 = 33
Z 6 = 40 1120 rpm Z 10 =37 Driven
7 10 rp m 900 rp m
900 rp m Z 2 = 32
(450 rp m )
 32 teeth
 Z 1  20 tee th, Z2  32 teeth
N3  710 rpm
N4  900 rpm
Z 1  Z 2  Z3  Z 4  20  32  52
 Z 3  Z 4  52
Z4 N3 710
But  Z 4  Z  Z 4  0.788 Z 3
Z3 N4 900 3
 0.8 Z 3
 Z 3  0.8 Z 3  52  1.8 Z3  52
 Z3  29 teeth
But Z 3  Z 4  52
 Z 4  52  29  23 teeth
Z3  29 teeth, Z4  23 teeth
Similarly,
Z6 N5

Z5 N6
N5
 Z6   Z5
N6
1440
 Z6   20  40 teeth
710
and hence
Z5  20 teeth, Z6  40 teeth
Similarly
Z 5  Z 6  Z 7  Z 8  60
 Z 7  Z 8  60
Z8 N7

Z7 N8
1440
 Z8   Z7
1120
 Z8  1.28 Z7
 Z7  1.28 Z7  60
 Z7  27 teeth
But Z 7  Z 8  60  Z 8  33 teeth
Z 5  Z 6  Z7  Z8  Z9  Z10  60
 Z 9  Z 10  60
Z 10 N9
But 
Z9 N 10
1440
 Z 10  Z  Z 10  1.6 Z9
900 9
 Z 9  1.6 Z9  60
 Z9  23 teeth

Check to avoid interference
Z 7  Z 5 and Z 7  Z 9  4
27  20  7 and 27  23  4
The condition is satisfied. Therefore, the calculation
of No. of teeth on each gear is satisfactory.
Problem 4.17: The following data refers to an overlapping

Speed Gear Box:
No. of speeds required  14
Maximum speed  400 rpm
Motor power  11 kW at 970 rpm
Draw speed diagram, and kinematic arrangement. Find the
actual output speeds.
Solution
N max  400 rpm
N min  20 rpm
Z  No . o f speeds  14
N max
 Z  1
N min
1 1
14
 400 
   1.259
 20 
Motor speed I  970 rpm.
Trail 1
The above step ratio is nearly equal to R10 series.

Therefore, Try R10 series;
N 1  20 rp m N 8  100 rpm
N 2  25 rpm N 9  125 rpm
N 3  31.5 rpm N 10  160 rpm
N 4  40 rpm N 11  200 rpm
N 5  50 rpm N 12  250 rpm
N 6  63 rpm N 13  315 rpm
N 7  80 rpm N 14  400 rpm
The last speed is coinciding with the N max .
 Selection of speeds is satisfactory.
The kinematic arrangement will be similar to that of

18 speed gear box with 4 overlapping speeds.
For 18 speeds structural formula,
18  3  3  2 P1  3 X1  1
P1 P2 P 3
Z  P 1X 1, P 2X 2, P 3X 3 P2  3 X 2  P1  3
 31, 33, 29 P3  2 X 3  P 1P 2  9
For 14 speed gear box, subtract 4 from the last stage

character.
Now the structural formula is modified as,

Z  3 1, 3 3, 2 9  4
 3 1, 3 3, 2 5
I Stage - 3 speeds with one space interval.
II Stage - 3 speeds with three space intervals.
III Stage - 2 speeds with 5 space intervals.
Draw the speed diagram similar to previous method

in which four speeds are overlapping i.e., repeating
Selection of Ninput in each stage
3rd Stage
N max  63 rpm
N min  20 rpm
Let N input  40 rpm
N max
2
N input
N max 63
Check   1.575
N input 40 which is less than 2
 satisfactory,
Take N input  40 rpm
2nd Stage
N max  160 rp m
N min  40 rpm
Try, N input  100 rpm

N max 160
  1.6
N input 100 which is less than two
Take Ninput  100 rpm
Ist Stage
For 1st stage, there is no need to check the condition
 N max 
  2 . Therefore select Ninput as 400 rpm.
N input
 
Kinematic Arrangement
Draw the Kinematic arrangement for 18 speed gear
box.
In 3rd stage, 2 speeds are required – Two pairs of
gears required.
In 2nd stage, 3 speeds are required – Three pairs of
gears are required.
In 1st stage, 3 speeds are required – Three pairs of
gears are required.
To Find number of teeth on each gear.
III Stage
I Pair: Reducing speed
N2  speed of the driver  40 rpm ;
Z2  No. of teeth on driver;
N1  speed of the driven  20 rpm ;
Z1  No. of teeth on driven;

(O u tp ut)
1
2
4
3
5
6
* **
8
7
10
9
11
16 14 12
*
13
15
Speed of the driven N 1 Z 2

V.R   
Speed of the driver N2 Z 1
20 20

40 Z 1
40  20
Z1   40
20
Z1  40 teeth
Z2  20 teeth
II Pair: Increasing speed
N 4  Speed of the driver  40 rpm ; Z 4  driver teeth;
N 3  Speed of the driven  63 rpm ; Z 3  driven teeth;

V.R   
Speed of the driver N4 Z 3
Z 1  Z 2  40  20  60
63 Z 4 Z 3  Z4  60

40 Z 3 Z 3  1.575 Z 3  60
Z 4  1.575 Z 3 60
Z3   23.30 teeth
2.575
take Z 3  24 teeth
Z 4  60  24  36
Z3  24 teeth
Z4  36 teeth
II Stage
1st Pair: Reducing speed.
N 5  speed of the driven  40 rpm ;
Z 5  No. of teeth on driven;
N 6  speed of the driver  100 rpm ;
Z 6  No. of teeth on driver;
Speed o f the d riven N 5 Z 6

V.R   
Speed o f the driver N6 Z 5
40 Z6

100 Z5
100  20
Z5   50 teeth
40
1st Pair Z5  50 teeth
Z6  20 teeth
II Pair: Increasing speed.
N 8  speed of the driver  100 rpm ;
N 7  speed of the driven  100 rpm ;

V.R   
Speed of the driver N 8 Z 7
Z 5  Z 6  Z 7  Z 8  50  20  70
Z7  Z8  70 ... (1)
160 Z 8

100 Z 7
Z 8  1.6 Z 7 ... (2)

Z 7  1.6 Z 7  70
70
Z7   26.92
2.6
Z 8  70  27  43
Z7  27 teeth
Z8  43 teeth
III Pair: Intermediate speed
N 9  Speed of the driven  80 rpm ;
N 10  Speed of the driver  100 rpm ;
N9 Z 10
N 10 Z9
Z 9  Z 10  Z 5  Z 6  50  20
80 Z 10
 Z 9  Z 10  70 2
100 Z9
Z 10  0.8 Z 9 1
From equation (1) and (2)
Z 9  0.8 Z 9  70
70
Z9 
1.8
Z 9  38.88 ; Z 10  70  39  31
Z9  39 teeth
Z10  31 teeth
To avoid interference, check
Z 8  Z 6  43  20  23
Z 8  Z 10  43  31  12
Since (1) Z 8  Z 6  4
and (2) Z 8  Z 10  4
 Calculation of number of teeth on each gear is

satisfactory.
Z5  50 teeth Z8  43 teeth
I Stage
I Pair: Reducing speed.
Speed of the d river N 11 Z12

V.R   
Speed of the driver N 12 Z11
100 Z 12
Assume Z 12  20 teeth ; 
400 Z 11
20  400
Z 11   80 Teeth
100
Z11  80 Teeth
Z12  20 Teeth
II Pair: Increasing Speed
N 13 Z 14
V.R   Z 11  Z 12  80  20  100
N 14 Z 13
Z 13  Z 14  100
160 Z 14

400 Z 13
Z 14  0.4 Z 13 2
Z 13  0.4Z 13  100
Z 13  Z 14  100
100
Z 13   71.42  72
1.4
Z 13  72 teeth
Z 14  100  72  28 teeth
II Pair
Z13  72 teeth
Z14  28 teeth
III Pair: Intermediate speed
N 15  speed of the driven  125 rpm Z 15  driven teeth;
N 16  speed of the driver  400 rpm Z 16  driver teeth;
driven speed N15 Z 16

V.R   
driver speed N 16 Z15
125 Z16 Z 15  Z 16  Z 13  Z 14  Z 11  Z 12

400 Z 15
 77  23  100
Z 16  0.3125  Z 15,
Z 15  0.3125 Z 15  100
Z 15  76.19  77
Z15  77 teeth
Z16  23 teeth
To avoid interference,
Check 1 Z 14  Z12  4
2 Z 14  Z16  4
1. 28  20  8 which is greater than (4)

2. 28  23  5 which is greater than (4)
Selection of Gears is satisfactory. Therefore,
calculation of No. of teeth on each gear is satisfactory.
To find actual output speeds
No. of teeth on driver

Output speed (1)  input speed 
No. of teeth on driven
Z 14 Z8 Z4
Output speed (1)  400   
Z 13 Z7 Z3
28 43 36
 400   
72 27 24
 371.60 rpm ... (1)

Z 14 Z8 Z2
Output speed (2)  400   
Z 13 Z7 Z1
28 43 20
 400   
72 27 40
 123.86 rpm ... (2)

Z 14 Z6 Z4
Output speed (3)  400   
Z 13 Z5 Z3
28 20 36
 400   
72 50 24
 93.33 rpm ... (3)

Z 14 Z6 Z2
Output speed (4)  400   
Z 13 Z5 Z1
28 20 20
 400   
72 50 40
 31.11 rpm ... (4)

Z 14 Z10 Z4
Output speed (5)  400   
Z 13 Z9 Z3
28 31 36
 400   
72 39 24
 185.47 rpm ... (5)

Z 14 Z10 Z2
Output speed (6)  400   
Z 13 Z9 Z1
28 31 20
 400   
72 39 40
 61.82 rpm ... (6)

Z 16 Z8 Z4
Output speed (7)  400   
Z 15 Z7 Z3
23 43 36
 400   
77 27 24
 285.42 rpm ... (7)

Z 16 Z8 Z2
Output speed (8)  400   
Z 15 Z7 Z1
23 43 20
 400   
77 27 40
 95.14 rpm ... (8)

Z 16 Z10 Z4
Output speed (9)  400   
Z 15 Z9 Z3
23 31 36
 400   
77 39 24
 142.45 rpm ... (9)

Z 16 Z10 Z2
Output speed (10) 400   
Z 15 Z9 Z1
23 31 20
 400   
77 39 40
 47.48 rpm ... (10)

Z 16 Z6 Z4
Output speed (11) 400   
Z 15 Z5 Z3
23 20 36
 400   
77 50 24
 71.688 rpm ... (11)

Z 16 Z6 Z2
Output speed (12) 400   
Z 15 Z5 Z1
23 20 20
 400     23.89 rpm
77 50 40 ... (12)
Z 12 Z8 Z4
Output speed (13)  400   
Z 11 Z7 Z3
20 43 36
 400   
80 27 24
 238.88 rpm ... (13)

Z 12 Z8 Z2
Output speed (14)  400   
Z 11 Z7 Z1
20 43 20
 400   
80 27 40
 79.62 rpm ... (14)

Z 12 Z10 Z4
Output speed (15)  400   
Z 11 Z9 Z3
20 31 36
 400   
80 39 24
 119.23 rpm ... (15)

Z 12 Z10 Z2
Output speed (16)  400   
Z 11 Z9 Z1
20 31 20
 400   
80 39 40
 39.74 rpm ... (16)

Z 12 Z6 Z4
Output speed (17)  400   
Z 11 Z5 Z3
20 20 36
 400   
80 50 24
 60 rpm ... (17)

Z 12 Z6 Z2
Output speed (18)  400   
Z 11 Z5 Z1
20 20 20
 400   
80 50 40
 20 rpm ... (18)
Problem 4.18: Design a Gear box, for the following data:

No. of speeds required  16; Min. speed  100 rpm; Max. speed
 560 rpm; Draw neat diagram and Kinematic arrangement.
(May/June 2013)
Given: N max
  Z  1
N max  560 rpm; N input
560
N min  100 rpm;   16  1
100
  1.12
which is standard ratio for R20 series.
N 1  100 rpm; N 9  250 rpm;

N 2  112 rpm; N 10  280 rpm;
N 3  125 rpm; N 11  315 rpm;
N 4  140 rpm; N 12  355 rpm;
N 5  160 rpm; N 13  400 rpm;
N 6  180 rpm; N 14  450 rpm;
N 7  200 rpm; N 15  500 rpm;
N 8  224 rpm; N 16  560 rpm;
Structural formula
Z  16  4  2  2 P1  4 X1  1
P1 P2 P3
3 stages required. P2  4 X2  P1  4
Z  P 1X 1 , P 2X 2 , P 3X 3 P3  2 X3  P1 P2

st nd rd
1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 428
16  41  , 24 , 28

st nd rd
3rd Stage
To select N input,
N max 250
  1.25
N input 200
which is  2  Satisfactory.
N min 100
  0.5
N input 200
which is  0.25  Satisfactory.
Select Ninput  200 rpm - 3rd Stage Locate (C)
2nd Stage
N max 315
  1.125
N input 280
which is less than (2)  Satisfactory

N min 200
  0.7142
N input 280
which is greater than (0.25)  Satisfactory
Select Ninput  280 rpm - 2nd Stage. Locate (E)
1st Stage
In this stage, N input  560 rpm
(No need to check condition)

Input
I B7 560
B6 500
D3
B5 450
D2
B4 400
H
D1
B3 355
G
B2 315
F D
B1 280
E C3
B 250
C
2
A7 224
C1
A6 200
C
A 5 180
A4 160
A3 140
A2 125
A1 112
A 100
st nd rd
1 Stage 4 (1) 2 S tag e 2(4 ) 3 Stag e 2 (8 )
2
1
4
3
(1 00)
6
5
8
7
12 10
11 9
13
16 1 4
15
Locate I:
 In the 3rd stage, above point (C); mark (D) after
four space intervals. i.e. at 315 rpm.
 In the 2nd stage, above point (E); mark (F), (G),
(H) with one space interval.
 Join CA; CB
100 rpm 250 rpm
From C 1
Join IF, FC 1 C 1A 1;  C 1B 1
224 112 rpm 280 rpm
Join IG
From G
GC 2  250 GD 2  400
From C 2
C 2A 2  125 C 2B 2  315
Join I H
From H
HC 3  280 HD 3  450
From C 3
C 3A 3  140 C 3B 3  355
Repeat the same process; And complete the speed

diagram.
Kinematic Arrangement
The no. of stages are (3): 4  2  2
 The no. of gears required  24  2  2
 28  16
Z  P 1X 1, P 2X2, P 3X 3
16  41, 24, 28

st nd rd
Calculation of No. of Teeth on each gear
III Stage
I Pair: Increasing Speed

N1 Z2
VR  N2  Speed of driver  200 rpm
N2 Z1
Z1  no. of teeth on driven  25 assume
250 Z2 Z2  No . of teeth on driver
 ; Z 2  31.25
200 25
Z 2  32 teeth
Z1  25 teeth
Z2  32 teeth
II Pair : Decreasing Speed N3  Speed of driven  100 rpm
N3 N4  Speed of driver  200 rpm

Z4 100 Z4
VR   ;  Z3  No . of teeth on driven
N4 Z3 200 Z3
Z4  No . of teeth on driver
Since centre distance is constant,
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z4  25  32  57
57
Z 3  Z 4  57; Z 3  0.5 Z 3  57; Z3   3.8 teeth
1.5
Z 4  19 teeth
Z3  38 teeth
and Z4  57  38  19 teeth
II Stage
I Pair : Increasing speed:

N5 Z6 N8  Speed of driver  280 rpm
VR 
N4 Z5 Z7  No . of teeth on driven
Z8  No . of teeth on driver
315 Z 6
 ; Z 6  28.1  28 teeth
280 25
Z5  25 teeth
Z6  28 teeth
II Pair: Decreasing Speed

N7 Z8 N5  Speed of driven  315 rpm
VR  N6  Speed of driver  280 rpm
N8 Z7
Z5  No . of teeth on driven  25 assume
200 Z 8 Z6  No . of teeth on driver
 ; Z 8  0.714 Z7
280 Z 7
But Z 7  Z 8  Z5  Z 6  25  28  53
Z 7  0.714 Z 7  53
Z 7  30.9  31 teeth and Z 8  53  31  22
Z7  31 teeth
Z8  22 teeth

I Stage
I Pair: Increasing Speed Z9  No. of teeth on driven  40 assume
N9 Z 10 Z10  No. of teeth on driver
VR 
N 10 Z9
Note: In any calculation of
315 Z 10 number of teeth on the gear
 ; Z 10  22.5
wheel, the value must be
560 40
greater than 17; Because of
Z9  40 teeth and
this reason, Z 9 is assumed
Z10  23 teeth as 40 teeth.
II Pair : Decreasing Speed

N 11 Z 12
VR   ; N12  Speed of driver  560 rpm
N 12 Z 11
280 Z 12 Z12  No. of teeth on driver
 ; Z 12  0.5 Z 11
560 Z 11
63
Z 11  0.5 Z 11  63; Z 11   42 teeth
1.5
and Z 12  6  42  21 teeth
Z11  42 teeth
Z12  21 teeth
III Pair: Increasing speed:

N 13 Z 14
VR 
N 14 Z 13
Z 14  Z 13  63
0.71428 Z 13  Z 13  63
63
Z 13  ~ 37
1.71428
Z 14  63  37  26
Z13  37 teeth
Z14  26 teeth
N 13  S pe ed of driven  400 rpm
N 14  S pe ed of driver  560 rpm
Z 13  N o. of teeth on driven  37 teeth assume
Z 14  N o. of teeth on driver
IV Pair: Decreasing Speed N15  Speed of driven  355 rpm

N 15 Z 16 N16  Speed of driver  280 rpm
VR  
N 16 Z 15 Z15  No. of teeth on driven
355 Z 16
 ; Z 16  0.633 Z 15
560 Z 15
But Z 15  Z16  Z13  Z 14  26  19  63
Z 15  0.633 Z 15  63 ;
Z 15  39
Z 15  39 teeth and Z 16  63 39  24
 Z15  39 teeth
Z16  24 teeth
Problem 4.19: Design the layout of a gear box for a milling

machine having an output of speeds ranging from 180 to 2000
rpm. Power is supplied to the gear box from a 6 kW induction
motor at 1440 rpm. Choose standard step ratio and construct
the speed diagram. Decide upon the various reduction ratios
and the number of teeth at each gear wheel. Sketch the
arrangement of gear box. (April/May 2008)
Solution
Given
N max  2000 rpm
N min  180 rpm
P  6 kW
Z  8 assum ed since not given
N max
 Z  1
N min
2000
 8  1
180
   1.41
Consider R20 series, which is   step ratio  1.12
1.12  1.12  1.40

 1.12   skip 2 speeds
Try R20 series by skipping (2) speeds

N 1  180 rpm, N 2  250 , N 3  400, N 4  560
N 5  800 rpm, N 6  1000 , N 7  1400 , N 8  2000
Structural formula
Z222
8  P 1, P 2, P 3
 P 1 X 1, P 2 X 2, P 3 X 3
 2 1, 2 2, 2 4
P1  2 ; P2  2 ; P3  2
X1  1  1
X2  P1  2
X3  P1  P2  2  2  4
U  N o. of stages  3
Since 8 speeds, draw 8 horizontal lines

3rd stage: 2 speeds, 4 spaces
Locate input speed (i.e.) point C
Point A is minimum speed and B is the maximum

speed in stage 3
N max
2
N input
800
2
560
N min 1
  0.25
N input 4
180 1
  0.25
560 4
 Selection of N input  560 is satisfactory.
 Locate point ‘C’.
Similarly mark all the points and complete the ray

diagram.
Kinematic diagram
No. of gears required are
 2 2  2  2  2 6  12 Gears
Calculation of number of teeth
III stage
Speed of driven N 1 Z2
 
Speed of driver N 2 Z1
(i.e.) N 1  180, N 2  560
Assume above 17 teeth
Let Z2  20 teeth
H
2 00 0
1 40 0
1 00 0
F D
8 00
E B
5 60
C
4 00
2 50
1 80
I S tag e II S tag e III S tag e A
2 (1) 2 (2) 2 (4)
R ay D iag ram
Z 1 2 = 20 Z 1 0 =1 8
4.199
D river 1440 rpm
12 10
Z 6 =2 7
11 9 Z 8 =2 0
Driven D river 800 rpm Z 4 = 48
8
6 Z 2 = 20
7
Z 11 = 29 Z 9 = 31 5
10 00 rpm D riven D river 560 rp m
80 0 rpm
2
I STA G E
1
Z 5 = 22
10 00 rpm Z 7 =2 9
5 60 rpm 4
3
I I S TA G E
Driven
Z 3 = 34
800 rp m
Kinem atic Diagram 1 80 rpm

III STA G E Z 1 = 62
180 20
 
560 Z 1
 Z1  62 teeth
N3 Z4
Similarly 
N4 Z3
Z1  Z2  Z3  Z4
20  62  Z 3  Z 4  Z 3  Z 4  82
800 Z 4
  Z 4  1.42 Z 3
560 Z 3
 Z 3  1.42 Z 3  82
 Z3  34 teeth
and Z4  48 teeth
II stage
N7 Z8

N8 Z7
Assume Z8  20
560 20

800 Z 7
 Z7  29 teeth
Similarly
N5 Z6

N6 Z5
Z 7  Z 8  Z5  Z6
29  20  Z 5  Z 6
 Z 5  Z 6  49
also
1000 Z 6
  Z 6  1.25 Z 5
800 Z5
Hence
Z5  22 teeth
Z6  27 teeth
I stage
Z11 N 12

Z12 N 11
Assume Z12  20
1440 Z 11
 
1000 20
Z11  29 teeth
Similarly
Z 9  Z 10  Z11  Z 12
(i.e.) Z 9  Z 10  49
and
Z9 N 10 Z9 1440
  
Z 10 N9 Z 10 800
 Z 9  1.8 Z 10
1.8Z 10  Z 10  49
 Z10  18 teeth
Z 9  49  18
Z9  31 teeth
Problem 4.20: A three speed reduction gear box is to have

the following speed ratios as nearly as possible. Bottom gear
5:1, second gear 3:1 and top gear 1.5:1. Output shaft and input
shafts are to be in line and the centre distance which is
horizontal between them and the lay shaft is 144 mm. All the
gears are to be 4 mm module and none should have less than
20 teeth of 20 pressure angle. Determine the suitable No. of
teeth and pitch circle diameter of all the gear wheels. Find the
actual speeds obtained. (Oct. 2007)
 Gears (1) and (2) Z 1 and Z 2 are the constant

mesh gears.
 Gears (4), (6), (8) Z 4, Z 6 and Z 8 are sliding gears
on lay shaft.
 Gears (3), (5), (7) Z 3, Z 5 and Z 7 are fixed gears
on output shaft.
 Gears (3) and (4) Z 3 and Z 4 - Form Top gear
 Gears (5) and (6) Z 5 and Z 6 - Form Second gear
 Gears (7) and (8) Z 7 and Z 8 - Form Bottom gear
Given
I. Bottom Gear
Speed of driver No. of teeth on driven

Speed ratio  
Spee d of driven No. of teeth on driver
N1 N8 Z2 Z7
    5
N2 N7 Z1 Z8
Z2 Z7
  5
Z1 Z8 ... (1)
* * * *
II. Second Gear

N1 N6 Z2 Z5
Speed ratio     3
N2 N5 Z1 Z6
Z2 Z5
  3
Z1 Z6
... (2)
III. Top Gear

N1 N4 Z2 Z3
Speed ratio      1.5
N2 N3 Z1 Z4
Z2 Z3
   1.5
Z1 Z4
... (3)
Since the centre distance is same for all the gears,
Z 1  Z 2  Z 3  Z 4  Z5  Z6  Z7  Z 8
But, distance between output shaft and lay shaft

 144 mm given
i.e., PCRGear 1  PCRGear 2  144
 PCD   PC D 
 2    144
 Gear 2 
1  Gear 2
But, Module  m
PCD

Z
D

Z where Z  No. of teeth.
D or PCD  pitch circle diameter.
DmZ
 mo dule  Z 1   module  Z2 
     144
 2 Gear 2
1  Gear 2
module  m  4 mm given 
4 Z1 4 Z2
   144
2 2
 Z 1  Z 2  72 teeth
 Z3  Z4
 Z5  Z6
 Z7  Z8
Z 7  Z 8  72
 Z 7  72  20
 52 teeth
Z7  52 teeth
Z8  20 teeth
Bottom Gear
From eq. (1),
Z2 Z7
 5
Z1 Z8
Z2 Z8 20
5 5  1.923
Z1 Z7 52
 Z2  1.923 Z 1 ... (4)

But Z 1  Z 2  72 ... (5)
Z 1  1.923 Z 1  72
72
 Z1   24.63
2.923
Take Z 1  25 teeth ; Z 2  72  25
 47 teeth
Z1  25 teeth
Z2  47 teeth
Second Gear
From eq. (2)
Z2 Z5
 3
Z1 Z6
47 Z5
 3
25 Z 6
Z 5  1.596 Z 6 ... (6)

Z 5  Z 6  72 ... (7)
1.596 Z 6  Z 6  72
72
Z6   27.73
2.596
and Z5  72  28  44
Z5  44 teeth
Z6  28 teeth
Top Gear
From eq. (3)
Z2 Z3
  1.5
Z1 Z4
47 Z3
  1.5
25 Z 4
Z 3  0.7978 Z 4 ... (8)
Z 3  Z 4  72 ... (9)
0.7978 Z 4  Z 4  72
72
Z4   40.04
1.7978
Z 3  72  40  32
Z3  32 teeth
Z4  40 teeth
Actual Speeds
Speed of driven N o. of teeth on driver

Spe ed of driver No. of teeth on driven
Top Gear
Speed of driven (output speed)
Z1 Z4
 Speed of driver  
Z2 Z3
(Assume speed of driver  2000 rpm )
25 40
Output speed for Top gear  2000  
47 32
 1329.78 rpm
Second Gear
Z1 Z6
Output speed for 2nd gear  2000  
Z2 Z5
25 28
 2000  
47 44
 676.98 rpm
Bottom Gear
Z1 Z8
Output speed for bottom gear  2000  
Z2 Z7
25 20
 2000  
47 52
 408.16 rpm
Pitch circle diameter of gears

D 1  mZ 1  4  25  100 mm
D 2  mZ 2  4  47  188 mm
D 3  mZ 3  4  32  128 mm
D 4  mZ 4  4  40  160 mm
D 5  mZ 5  4  44  176 mm
driven  N1  100 rpm
D 6  mZ 6  4  28  112 mm
driver  N2  160 rpm (input)
D 7  mZ 7  4  52  208 mm
D 8  mZ 8  4  20  80 mm
4.7 CONSTANT MESH GEAR BOX

It is a type of transmission used in motor vehicle
application and also known as manual gear box. It uses a
driver-operated clutch which is engaged and disengaged by
a foot pedal or hand lever for regulating torque transfer
from the engine to the transmission system.
All transmissions donot have 4 speeds forward and

all donot have the same gear reductions at the various
speeds. For example: Passenger cars usually have only
three forward speeds and one reverse speed. We must
remember that, the gear reduction in the transmission is
only between the engine and the propeller shaft. In this
type of transmission, certain countershaft gears are
constantly in mesh with the main shaft gears.
Constant mesh gear box is an example for the

application of ordinary gear train in automobiles. In this
type, the main shaft gear wheels and the lay shaft gear
wheels, giving different ratios on engaging with each other,
Sh iftin g leve r
En gagem en t G ear
d og s Se lector Fo rk
1 2 3 4 5 R
Dog D2
Dog D1
D og D 3
Fro m To
En gine D iffere ntial
M ain shaft
A P
Prim ary D1 F D2 J L D3 Idle r
D H N G ear
sha ft
C E M
G
B I
L aysh aft K
Fig.4.3 Con stant Mesh Gear B ox
are always in mesh (i.e), all the gear wheels are always
being meshed with their pair.
The general layout of constant mesh type is similar
to that of the sliding mesh, however it differs in the terms
of gear wheel type and wheel teeth design.
Constant mesh gear box uses double helical gears for
its transmission, the main benefit of double helical (or)
stronger helical gear is that it helps in “quieter (less noisy)
operation”
The helix arrangement on the teeth (or) the gear
tooth is always in contact with its pair which reduces the
chattering effect which is quiet common in case of straight
cut teeth (or) spur gear type.
In constant mesh gear box set up, the main shaft

revolves at different speed and the connection between any
one of the wheel and main shaft is obtained by “Dog clutch
members”.
The forward speed of the gear box works on constant

mesh principle and reverse speed on sliding mesh principle.
4.7.1 Constant Mesh Gear Box Gear Shifting

1. First Gear: Drive is through ABCD gear pairs and D1
engages with D.
The engagement dog D 1 is shifted to the first pair

that is towards the primary shaft, the first gear gets locked
to the main shaft thus the main shaft starts rotating in
the first gear. (i.e. low speed but high torque).
2. Second Gear: Speed Gear Drive is through ABEF and

D1 engages with F.
The clutch pedal is pressed thus disconnecting the

transmission, now the dog D 1 is shifted from first pair to
the second pair that is away from the primary shaft. Now
the clutch is released and the main shaft is at gear 2.
3. Third Gear: Drive is through ABGH and D2 engages

with H
The transmission is disconnected by pressing the

clutch. The engagement dog D 2 is shifted towards the
primary shaft to the Gear pair (3), thus the main shaft is
locked to gear (3) and the clutch is brought to engaged
position.
4. Fourth Gear: Drive is through ABIJ and D2 engages

with J
The engagement dog D2 is shifted away from the

primary shaft to gear pair (4).
5. Fifth Gear or Top Gear: Drive is through ABKL and

D3 engages with L
The engagement dog D 3 is brought towards the

primary shaft to the gear pair (5) with the highest gear
ratio.
6. Reverse Gear: Drive is through ABMNP and D3 engages

with P
The dog D3 is shifted to the idler gear which is in

constant mesh. This changes the direction of drive and the
reverse gear is obtained.
4.8 SPEED REDUCER UNIT

 Worm Reducer
 Helical Reducer
 Miler Bevel gear reducer
4.8.1 Worm Reducer

There are two types of worm gear reducers.
Cylindrical type (worm power drive) and drum shaped type
(Troi drive). A worm gear reducer is a reduction gear box
which consists of a helical output gear and a worm input
gear where a worm (which is a gear in the form of a screw)
meshed with a worm gear (which is similar in appearance
to a spur gear).
4.8.2 Helical Reducer

It has high power and is a compact with standard
right angle and parallel shaft types, including motor types.
The helical power drive uses a modular housing to
accomodate any mounting position.
4.8.3 Bevel Reducer

Bevel gears are gears where the axis of the two shafts
intersect and the tooth bearing faces of the gears
themselves are conically shaped. There are four types of
bevel gears.
 Straight bevel gears

 Spiral bevel gears
 Zerol bevel gears
 Hypoid bevel gears
4.9 VARIABLE SPEED GEAR BOX

Fluid couplings and torque convertes are used as
variable speed gear box to suit the varying engine speed.
4.9.1 Fluid coupling (or) Fluid fly wheel

It is a hydro dynamic device which is used to
transmit rotating mechanical power. It has been used in
automobile transmission system as an alternative to a
mechanical cluth. It also has widespread applications in
marine and industrial machine drives, where variable speed
operations and controlled start-up without shock loading of
the power transmission system are essential. It is also
called as fluid flywheel.
A fluid flywheel is a hydraulic device. In 1905 Dr.

Hermann Fottinger, a chief engineer of the Vulcan Werke
Sh ell Vanes
C o re
C o re
R u nn er
H o using
,m peller
,nput Sh aft O utput S haft or R u nn er
O il C ircula tio n
,m peller Fig.4.4 Fluid Flywheel.
AG in Germany invented the fluid flywheel. The fluid

flywheel is now a fundamental part of modern car design
and is used in other applications including diesel
locomotives.
Fluid flywheel is a kind of fluid coupling in which
the flywheel is the driving rotor. Fluid flywheel is a fluid
device utilizing recirculated fluid within a sealed housing
to maintain speed or torque applied to a mechanical
apparatus without relying on inertia of weight.
A fluid-flywheel consists of two concentric housings -

a main circulation chamber and an angular recirculation
chamber surrounding the main circulation chamber. A shaft
is mounted on the bearing of the outer housing and the
extension of the shaft has a series of blades mounted
thereon.
Upon rotation of the shaft, fluid is drawn by the

blades into the inlet end of the main circulation chamber.
The fluid is propelled from one series of blades to the next

until it is discharged from the outlet end. The fluid is then
redirected around the inner housing and re-circulated
through the recirculation chamber. The fluid, being
constantly re-circulated within the device will increase in
speed or maintain the existing speed with relatively
minimum force being applied to rotate the extending shaft.
Toroidal shaped flow deflectors at opposing ends are useful
for smooth transition of fluid from the main circulation
chamber to the recirculation chamber and vice versa.
Van es
E n gine
C ra nk
S h aft
H u bs C lutch
S ha ft
,m pe ller S h ell R o tor
Fig.4.5. Tw o H alve s of F luid F lywh eel.
The driving unit is called impeller and the driven

limit is called as runner. When the efficiency of the liquid
coupling is highest, the impeller and the runner almost
runs at same speed. But usually the runner speed is less
than the impeller. This speed lag of runner is called slip.
The slip is greatest when the vehicle is at rest that is when
the runner is stationary.
Fluid coupling is used with conventional clutch and
transmission to enable the driver to use clutch and gear
with less skill and fatigue as compared to the mechanical

linkage.
Applications
 Fluid couplings are used in many industrial
applications involving rotational power in machine
drives.
 Rail transportation and Hydraulic braking systems.
 Automobile and Aviation systems.
4.9.2 Torque Convertor

A torque converter is a hydraulic fluid coupling that
is used to transmit power from one or more engines or
motors to a driveshaft or other output shaft. It takes the
place of a mechanical clutch, and within certain operating
speed ranges, multiplies input torque, providing the output
equivalent of a reduction gears. Torque converters are
commonly found in automotive transmission system and
also used in marine systems and other various machine
tools.
We have read about manual transmission, system in

which an engine is connected to a transmission by way of
a clutch. Without this connection, a car would not be able
to come to a complete stop without stopping the engine.
But cars with an automatic transmission have no clutch
that disconnects the transmission from the engine. Instead,
they use an amazing device called torque convertor.
4.9.2.1 Torque Converter Gear Box

A torque convertor is a fluid coupling or clutch that
disengages when the vehicle is stopped and transfers power
as engine rpm increases. When the vehicle is in motion
and not under acceleration, the torque converter slips and

transfers power as vehicle speed decreases.
A torque converter, by its very nature as a fluid
coupling also dampens engine combustion pulses to achieve
smoother operation. “Torque converters have never been
considered efficient” because they tend to lose more power
than they transfer by their nature as “fluid coupling”.
4.9.2.2 Torque converter principles

A fluid coupling is an assembly of two element drive
i.e. the impeller and the turbine which is incapable of
multiplying torque, while a torque converter has one extra
element (the stator) in addition to impeller and turbine
which alters the drive’s characteristics during periods of
high slippage, producing an increase in output torque.
The purpose of Torque converter is to transmit

engine torque to the driving wheels. It also increases or
decreases torque to suit varying road and operating
conditions.
In a manual transmission system, the driver

manually selects the appropriate gear ratio to suit.
In an automatic transmission, it is done by both the

transmission control system, automatically selecting the
gearing according to load and speed, and by the torque
converter.
The torque converter is fitted on the engine in the

same place as a clutch, and does the same job as that of
clutch-transmitting engine torque to the input shaft of the
transmission. It also multiplies torque according to
operating conditions.
It is also called as a fluid coupling, since the fluid is

acting as the driving medium and none of the converter
components are physically connected to the others. It acts
as an automatic clutch. At engine idling speeds, the vehicle
is kept stationary by allowing the engine to operate without
transmitting power to wheels.
Tu rbine S tato r ,m pe ller
Fig.4.6. A Ty pical To rq ue C o nverte r.
Torque converter has basically three elements:

1. The Impeller,
2. Turbine, and
3. Stator.
All the components - impeller, turbine and stator have
curved vanes and are assembled in a single casing but are
separated from each other by thrust bearings. The casing
is filled up with full of fluid like oil.
The impeller is keyed and attached to the converter

casing and both the impeller and casing rotate as a single
member. In simple words, the impeller has a large number
of vanes rotating along with the casing as the engine
rotates. Each vane has a slight curvature and is set radially
outward to the casing. The impeller is acting as a

centrifugal pump. The fluid enters at center and leaves
radially outward and then it enters the turbine and rotates
the turbine.
The turbine has more vanes, with a greater curvature
and is set radially inward. The direction of curvature of
the turbine vanes is opposite to that of the impeller vanes.
The turbine has no direct mechanical link with casing. i.e.,
the turbine is free to rotate in the casing and a central
spline of the turbine mates with a spline on the input shaft.
When the fluid leaving the impeller rotates the turbine,
the input shaft splined with turbine also rotates.
There is a chance of fluid coming out of the turbine
flows in the opposite direction to the impeller and hence
slows down the impeller. Fig 4.7 (a). To avoid this, a stator
is placed in between the turbine and impeller and this
stator changes the direction of flow from turbine and
provides the positive flow to the impeller. Fig 4.7 (b). The
P um p S tator Va nes
Turbine Turbine P um p
P um p
Turb in e H elping to R ota te Pum p
Turbin e S to pp ing P um p
Pu m p
Fig.4.7(a). Torque Con verter- Fig.4.7. (b ). Torque Con verter-

Oil is Throw n A gainst Oil Path is Changed
Pump Van es. by Stator to Aid R otation of Pum p.
Torque C onve rte r H ousin g

(C o nn ects to F lyw hee l
a nd im pello r)
Flyw heel Turbine O u tpu t S ha ft

(C o nn ects to (C o nn ects to Transm issio n)
En gine)
Stator O utp ut Shaft

(C o nn ects to F ixed
in Tra nsm issio n)
Turbine
Pu m p(im pe llo r)
( Fixe d to H ou sing )
Stator
Fig.4.8 Torque Con verter Cut Away(Assemb ly)
stator is free to rotate and no mechanical link with turbine,

impeller and casing. The stator has a small set of curved
blades attached to a central hub. The central hub is
mounted on a one-way clutch to allow the stator to rotate
only in the same direction as the impeller.
4.9.2.3 Advantages.
1. Provides noise free operation.
2. Fuel consumption is reduced.
3. Provides simplified driving control.
4. Wear and tear is greatly reduced.
5. Shocks and vibrations are greatly reduced.
6. Despite the efficiency loss, moderate slippage the
torque converter provides a smoother, more even
flow of power by absorbing engine and power

train’s vibrations rather than transmitting to the
output shaft or surrounding equipment.
4.9.2.4 Applications
 Automatic transmissions on automobiles such as
cars, buses and trucks.
 Forwarders and other heavy duty vehicles.
 Marine propulsion systems.
 Industrial power transmissions such as conveyor
drives, drilling rigs, construction equipments and
railway locomotives.
Chapter 5
CAMS, CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Cam Design: Types-pressure angle and under cutting base

circle determination-forces and surface stresses. Design of plate
clutches – axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim
clutches- Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes -
external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe brake.
5.1 CAMS: (CAM AND FOLLOWER)
5.1.1 Introduction
In a cam drive, there are two main components, cam
and follower. The cam acts as a driving member and is
made to have miscellaneous boundary (usually curved
shape) surface in order to transmit desired motion to the
corresponding follower (the driven member) by a direct
contact. The cam shape is like a disc with some projection
on its face. The cam transmits the desired motion (linear
or oscillatory) to the follower.
Cams are widely employed in most machineries like

I.C engines, printing machines and other instruments
because of its accurate and efficient transmission of motion,
velocity and acceleration.
To an d fro mo tion
R o ller To an d fro mo tion
 
(b)
(a) plate cam (b) w edge cam
(or)
Radial cam w ith Translating follower.
(a) Fig.5.1
5.1.2 Classification of Cam Mechanisms

Cam Mechanisms can be classified into various types.
(a) Based on input of cam and output of follower

they are of four types.
1. Rotating cam-translating follower mechanisms.

2. Rotating cam-oscillating follower mechanism.
3. Translating cam-translating follower mechanism.
4. Stationary cam-rotating follower mechanism.
(b) Based on the motion of follower it is of three

types.
1. R-R-R (Rise-Return-Rise) Mechanism.

2. D-R-R-D (Dwell-Rise-Return-Dwell) Mechanism.
3. D-R-D (Dwell-Rise-Dwell) Mechanism.
Cams, Clutches and Brakes 5.3
5.1.3 Types of Cam
1. According to the shape

(a) Wedge or flat cam.
(b) Radial or disc cam.
(c) Cylindrical or drum cam.
(d) Spherical
(e) Conical
2. According to the method of provision of

constraint
(a) Spring loaded
(b) Positive drive.
3. According the motion of follower

(a) Uniform velocity.
(b) Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM).
(c) Cycloidal Motion.
(d) Uniform acceleration and retardation.
5.1.4 Type of Cam followers
1. According to the construction of contact surface

(a) Knife edge
(b) Flat faced follower
(c) Roller follower
2. According to the type of moment

(a) Translating
(b) Oscillating
3. According to location of follower

(a) Radial
(b) Off-set
 Radial: When the motion of the follower is along
the axis passing through the centre of the cam.
 Off-set: When the motion of the follower is along
the axis away from the axis of cam.
5.1.5 Nomenclature of a Cam-Drive
1. Base Circle
The smallest circle drawn to the cam profile from the
centre of rotation of cam. The base circle decides the size
of the cam drive.
2. Cam Profile
This is the boundary curve of the contact surface of
the cam with the follower.
3. Trace Point
It is the point on the follower for the purpose of
tracing the cam profile.
4. Prime Circle
It is the smallest circle drawn to the pitch curve from
the centre of rotation of the cam.
5. Pitch Curve
The imaginary curve obtained when the follower is
assumed to rotate the cam, keeping the cam fixed. It is the
path of the trace point.
m axim um D irection of m otion

p ressure a ng le N o rm al
Follow er
Pitch po int
D irection
o f m otion Tra ce point
Pitch circle
nt
Ta n g e
Cam
profile
Prim e Ra
circle
Rb
rp
Pitch Ba se
curve circle
Fig. 5.2. C am Nom enclatu re.
6. Cam Angle 

The angle of rotation of the cam for a definite
displacement of the follower.
7. Pitch Point
It is the point on the cam pitch curve having
maximum pressure angle.
8. Pressure Angle ()

The angle at any point on the pitch curve included
between the normal to the pitch curve and line of motion
of the follower at that instant.
9. Stroke
The maximum displacement of the follower from the
base circle of the cam.
10. Pitch Circle

It is the circle obtained when the centre of cam axis
is taken as its centre and its radius such that it passes
through the pitch point.
11. Transition Point

The point on the cam at which the follower has its
maximum velocity.
12. Pulse or Jerk

It is used to define the instantaneous time rate of
change of acceleration in order to minimise vibration.
5.1.6 Basic Curves

Refer PSG Data book P.No. 7.110 for characteristic
equations of basis curves.
1. Simple polynomial: y  c  n
When n  1; straight line y  c 
When n  2; parabolic (or) constant acceleration.

2
y  c
When n  3; cubic (or) constant pulse y  c 3

2. Trigonometric curves
1. Simple harmonic
2. Double harmonic
3. Cycloidal.
Advantages of Trigonometric curves, over simple

polynomial
1. Smaller cam size;
2. Easier layout;
3. Lower follower side thrust;
4. Low manufacturing cost;
5. Easier duplication.
Problem 5.1: A polynomial cam having n  2.4 rotating at
60 rpm has positive acceleration (i.e., its direction is that of
the positive displacement), part of its rise of 10 mm in 40 of
cam rotation. Find the velocity and acceleration value at the
end of 30 of cam rotation. (April/May 2008)
Solution
Given Data:
n  2.4
When   40 ; the rise  10 mm y  N  60 rpm
2N

60
 2  60
  40   0.6981 rad .   6.283 rad/sec
180 60
Basic equation, y  c n ... (1)

10  c  0.6981 2.4
10
c   23.69
0.6981 2.4
differentiate the eq. (1) w.r.t. t
dy d
Velocity   c n
dt d t [Where    t]
v  c    n  n  1  2
Velocity at the end of 30 of Cam rotation
2.4  1
  
v  23.69  6.283  2.4   30  
 180 
v  144.39 mm/sec
Differentiate the eq. (2) w.r.t. t
d 2y
Acceleration   c   2  n n  1 n  2
dt 2
2.4  2
2   
 23.69  6.283  2.42.4  1   30  
 180 
 Acceleration at the end of 30 of Cam rotation

 2420 mm/sec 2
Cam Curvature
 If radius of roller  radius of curvature of pitch

surface, then the profile is satisfactory. (i.e. No
under cutting).
Rr  Pk
No und er cutting 
 If radius of roller  radius of curvature of pitch

surface, then the cam profile results under
cutting.
Rr  Pk
U nder cutting results
 If roller radius  radius of curvature of pitch

surface, a pointed cam profile results.
 A pointed cam will not give desired motion. (Refer
PSG Databook Page No. 7.114)
To Avoid Under cutting
 1 d 2y 
Flat follower  P c  Rb   y  2  2 
min
  dt 
0 to avoid under cutting
Roller follower
2 32
 
 1 dy 
 R p  y2     
   dt  
 Pk  2
min
2  1 dy   1 d 2y 
R p  y  2     R b  y  2  

dt
  dt 2 
 Rr to avoid under cutting
 For y, at point of maximum negative acceleration.

where P c  radius of curvature of the cam profile
P k  radius of curvature of the pitch curve
R b  base circle radius; R p  prime circle radius

y  follower displacement; R r  radius of the roller
2N dy d 2y
 ;  Velocity;  A cceleration
60 dt dt 2
[For velocity and acceleration equations, refer PSG

databook (Page No. 7.110) according to the type of curve]
Under cutting in Cams
When a cam has a sharp point (corner) the follower

does not undergo an abrupt change of motion, but gradually
assumes a different velocity. If the roller radius is greater
than the theoretical pitch curve at the convex portion of
the cam, the roller undercuts, i.e. moves itself over the
same path twice. This phenomenon is called undercutting.
Problem 5.2: A radial cam rotating at 150 rpm is driving 15

mm diameter translating roller follower to produce the
following motion, rise of 25 mm with SHM in 150 degrees of
cam rotation, dwell for 60, fall 25 mm with SHM in 120 of
cam rotation and dwell for remaining 30. Construct the cam
contour.
(a) with pressure angle limited to approximately 20.
(b) with the pressure angle limited to exactly 20
(April 2007)
Solution: (a) Approximate pressure angle:

 150
For SHM, the position of transition point is at i.e.
2 2
 At 75, locate transition point and pitch point

6’ f f’
5’ e e’
4’ d d’
25 3’ c c’
mm
b b’
2’
a a’
P
1’
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6’ 5’ 4’ 3’ 2’ 1’ 0’
o
o =15 0 d 1 R d 2
Displacem en t Diagram
fh
Pitch circle radius  R p 

4.315  25
 Rp   41.2 mm.
5

6
Take pitch circle radius as 42 mm ;

 5
h  rise  25 mm ;   150    rad
180 6
CAM PROFILE (Procedure):
1. Draw pitch circle with a radius of 42 mm with Q

as centre
2. Locate Transition Point and Pitch point (P)
3. Divide cam angle of rise 150 into equal number
of parts (say 6) on either side of the point P. (3
equal parts on each side of P.
4. Draw the radial lines
Q0, Q 1, Q 2, Q 3, Q4, Q 5 and Q6.
5. With P as centre and 25 mm (rise of follower) as
radius, draw a semi-circle.
6. Divide the semi circle into same number of equal

parts (i.e., six). Mark the point as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
and 6.
7. Take Q 0 as radius and Q as centre, draw arc on
the radial line Q 0 and get 0. Similarly Q1 radius,
Q as centre draw an arc on the radial line Q1
and get a similarly.
8. Similarly, draw arcs, with radius
Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Q 6, interest the respective
radial lines, Q 2, Q3, Q4, Q5, and Q 6, to get
b, c, d, e and f respectively.
3’
R o ller 4’ 6 Tra nsitio n a nd
5’ Follow er 5 Pitch P oint (P)
4 2’
c
d 3
P
2
M otio n o f 1 b
e 0 1’
Follow er
6’ 1 50
o a
f o 0’
o 75
75 o
o
30 Pitch
Q
o  o’ C ircle
60
Cam 0”
Pro file
o a’
1 20
Pitch
C u rve b’ 1”
2”
c’
f’
6” d’
e’ 3”
5”
4” o
(a) Pressure An gle Limited to Appro ximately 20
9. Draw a smooth pitch curve passing through 0, a,

b, c, d, e and f to get pitch curve.
10. With centers 0, a, b, c, d, e and f, draw circles
with radius equal to roller radius.
11. Draw the cam profile (Tangential curve to the
roller circles).
12. Repeat the same procedure during fall and dwell
periods.
(b) Exact pressure angle method:

For SHM, R p  Pitch circle radius
2
 P  m  20
h  sin  
     150
Rp 
p 
2  cos  150  ra d
 180
 p 
and  m  tan 1   cot 
  
   p 
20  tan  1  cot  
   
 150  180 150 
180 
 
tan 20  1.2 cot 1.2  p
0.36397
cot 1.2  p   0.3033
1.2
1
 0.3033
tan 1.2 p
tan 1.2 p  3.29697
1.2 p  tan 1 3.29697

1.2 p  73.12
  p  60.03  61
2
   60.93 
25  sin 
  
 150  
 180 
 Rp   39.149 mm
   60.93 
2cos  
  
 150  180  h  25 mm
 
Take R p  40 mm
h   
y  1  cos 
2   
25    61 
  1  cos   8.88 mm
2   
 150  
 180 
Take y  9 mm
CAM PROFILE
Procedure
1. With Q as centre draw a pitch circle with a radius

of 40 mm R p
2. Locate pitch point P.
3. Draw a radial line Q 0 at an angle of 61   p
^
i.e. P Q 0  61.
4. Mark 150 cam angle with Q 0 as reference and
divide into 6 equal number of parts and draw
radial lines. Name the points as
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
5. Locate y  9 mm below the pitch point at M. i.e.

(PM  9 mm ).
6. With Q as centre Q M as radius, draw an arc on
line Q3, which intersects at 0.
7. From 0 mark the rise  25 mm . Draw a semicircle
with radius 25 mm, divide the semicircle into
same number of equal parts (six), name the points
as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 and project on the Q3
line.
m =2 0
o
3’ Tra nsitio n P oint
6 2’ Pitch P oint (P)

4’ 5
Follow er 4
1’
M otio n 3 P
c
5’ P 2 9 mm
d b
1
0 M a
0’
R o ller
Follow er e o
61
o
0 Pitch
0
15
C ircle
o
R P = 40 m m
6’ 30
f
 O”
o Pitch
60 a’ C u rve
o
Cam 120 1”
Pro file
b’
2”
c’
f’
d’ 3”
e’
6”
4”
5”
o
(b) Pressure Angle Lim ited to E xactly 20
8. With Q as centre and radius as Q0, draw an arc

on the radial line Q 0. Name this point as 0.
9. Similarly locate a , b , c , d, e and f
10. With 0, a, b, c , d, e and f, as centers, draw circles
with radius equal to roller radius.
11. Draw a smooth pitch curve passing through
0, a , b, c , d, e and f .
12. Draw the cam profile, i.e. tangential curve to
the roller circles
13. Repeat the same procedure during fall and dwell
periods.
5.14 Simple Harmonic Motion SHM

2
h   
a  cos
2    
when   0; Acceleration is maximum positive
when     Acceleration is minimum negative

when    Acceleration is zero.
2

Cycloidal: When   Acceleration is maximum.
4

Parabolic: When   Acceleration is maximum.
2
Cams of Specified Contours

For accuracy of profile, and cheapness of manufacture,
profiles should be formed of circular arcs and straight lines,
then the motion of the follower can be calculated. This type
of cams are known as “cams of specified contours”.
I. Circular Cam with Flat Follower

When the flank of the cam are connecting the base
circle and nose arc of convex circular arc, then the cam is
known as Circular Arc Cam.
II. Tangent Cam with Roller Follower

When the flank of the cam are straight and tangential
to the base circle and nose circle, then the cam is known
as a Tangent Cam. (These cams are used for operating
the inlet and exhaust valves of internal combustion
engines).
Circular Arc Cam with Flat Follower

r 1  Base circle radius;
r 3  Flank radius;
r 4  Nose radius;
  Cam angle for displacement ‘y’
1  Cam angle for acceleration
2  Cam angle for lift.
Distance OD  radius r 5:
0    1 A to B Displacement
Flank y  r 3  r 1 1  cos 
Acceleration
y  a   2r 3  r 1 c o s 
when   0; a is max.
a max   2r3  r1
Flank B N ose
r4 D
C2
r3
r5
A

2
r1
Base circle
1
Fig. 5.3 Circular Cam w ith Flat Follow er.

C1
1    2 B to D  y  r 4  r 1  r 5  r 4 cos  2  
Nose
a   2r 5  r 4 c o s 2  
Put   2
a min   2r5  r4
Line diagram
A B
r4
D
r3
C2
r
r5
3
O O D =r 5
1
Fig. 5.4 C1
a
y
Flank N o se
 = cam a ng le for position  Fig. 5.5

B
r4 D
y c2
y r4
A c2 D
r1  r3 2 r 3 =C B
 L r5 CA
r1 (=O D )
r3
o o
1
1
B
A D
 C2
c1
(b)
(a) o
c1
C 1 (c)
Fig. 5.6 Circular A rc Cam with Flat F aced Fo llo wer.
r2
D1
r2 B1 B1 s
D1
A1 S D
B D B
A1 r4
y
r4 c2
y
 c2
A 
 A 
r1 
L rs r1 r 5 =O D
(=O D )
o o
(a)
(b)
Fig. 5.7 Tangent Cam with Ro ller F ollower
F
B1 r4
r2 s
 D1
A1
B D
y
 c2
A

r1 r3
o r5
Fig. 5.8 C1
C ircular A rc C am w ith R o lle r Fo llo w er
Problem 5.3: The following data refers to a circular cam

which operates flat faced follower; Least radius  50 mm. Total
lift  25 mm. Flank radius  150 mm. Angle of lift  70 degrees;
Calculate the principal dimensions of the cam and draw the
cam profile.
r 1  Least radius  50 mm
r 3  Flank radius  150 mm
Lift  25 mm
2  Angle of lift  70
From the diagram,
C 1C 2  r 3  r 4
 150  r 4 ... (1)
O C1  r 3  r 1
 150  50  100 ... (2)
O C 2  r 1  lift  r 4
 50  25  r 4
 75  r 4
AOC 2  70, Therefore, C 2O C 1  110 ... (3)
Using Cosine Rule
C 1C 22  OC 21  O C 22  2O C 1  O C 2cos 110
150  r 42  100 2  75  r 42  2100 75  r 4 c o s 110
150  r 42  75  r 42  100 2  68.4 75  r 4
150 2  300r 4  r 24  75 2  r 24  150r 4  100 2  68.475  r 4
16875  150r 4  100 2  5130  68.4r 4
16875  15130  150 r 4  68.4r 4
1745  81.6 r 4
1745
r4   21.38 mm
81.6
 Nose radius  r 4  21.38 mm
 r 5  O C2  r 4 From eq. (3)

 53.615  21.38  74.99 mm OC2  75  21.38  53.615 mm
r5  75 mm O D  54 mm
To find 1,
Apply sine rule,
OC 2 C 1C 2 C 1C 2  r 3  r 4

sin  1 sin 110 
= 150 - 21.38
53.615 128.62
 = 128.62 mm
sin 1 sin 110
B
D
25
r4
=
ft
Li
0 C2
15
=
r3
- 
70
r5
E
o
A 0
=7
2
50
o
11O
=
r1
O

C1
53.615
sin  1   sin 110   0.3917
128.62
 1  sin 10.3917  23 
1  23
The principal dimensions are,
r 4  21.38 mm; r 5  75 mm
1  23 
Cam Profile: (With Dimensions)
r1 = 5 0

=
O 70 o
11 0 o
r4 =
21 B
r3 = 47
15 o
0 C
2

=
23 o
C
1
Problem 5.4: The following data refers to a cam operating

the suction valve of a 4-stroke petrol engine, least radius
 18 mm; Lift  10 mm; Nose radius  3 mm; Crank angle when
the suction valve opens before TDC  4; Crank angle when the
suction valve closes after BDC  50; Cam shaft speed  80 rpm.
The cam is a circular type with circular nose and flanks.
Calculate: 1. Maximum acceleration and retardation of the
valve.
2. Minimum force to be exerted by the spring to overcome
inertia of the valve parts whose mass is 250 grams. (Nov 2013)
Given Data:
4-stroke petrol engine;
r 1  L east radius  18 mm ; Lift  10 mm ;
r 4  Nose radius  3 mm
Crank angle when suction valve opens before TDC  4
Crank angle, when suction valve closes after BD C  50
Cam shaft speed  80 rpm
Circular arc cam - with flat speed follower
A to B - Acceleration  a   2r 3  r 1 cos 
when   0 ; acceleration is maximum.
 a max   2r 3  r 1 [Refer Fig.]
But r 3  r 1  OC 1 Calculate OC 1
A
r1
=5 8 .5
O o
(18 0-5 8.5 )
r3
r5
B
r4
C2
1
D
C1
B to D - Retardation    2r 5  r 4 cos 2  
put   2 But r 5  r 4  O C 2
a    2r 5  r 4 Calculate OC 2
Step 1.
Find OC 1 and OC 2
OC 2  r 1  lift  r 4
 18  10  3  25 mm
C 1C 2  r 3  r 4
 OC 1  r 1  r 4
 O C 1  18  3  O C 1  15
Su ctio n Valve TD C
O pen s
o
4
1 80 +5 0+ 4= 23 4 o
o
50
Su ctio n
Valve C loses
BD C
Angle of crank rotation during suction  4  180  50
 234
For 4-stroke cycle engine,
1
Speed of cam shaft  speed of crank shaft.
2
1
(Therefore cam angle is also angle of crankshaft)
2
234
22   117
2
117
Cam angle for lift   2   58.5 
2
Consider triangle O C 1C 2, apply cosine law
C 1C 22  OC 21  OC 22  2O C 1  O C 2  cos 180  58.5
15  O C 12  O C 21  25 2  2  O C 1  25  cos 121.5
225  30O C 1  O C 21  O C 21  625  2OC 1  25  cos 121.5 
Simplify,
r 1  18 mm
O C 1  103.36 mm
r 4  3 mm
 C 1C 2  O C 1  15  103.36  15
lift  10 mm
 118.36 mm
Step 2.
To Find 1
Apply sine rule,

OC 2 C 1C 2

sin  1 sin 121.5 
25 118.36

sin  1 sin 121.5 
1  10.4 
Step 3.
r 3  O C 1  18
Acceleration is maximum
 103.36  18
a max   2r 3  r 1
 121.36 mm
2
 2  80   121.36  18  N  80 rpm
   
 60   1000 
2N
2 
 7.254 m/sec 60
Step 4.
Retardation
2
2  2  80  25
a min    O C2     
 60  1000
  1.754 m /sec 2
Step 5.
Minimum value of force  F min  m  accelerationmin
m  250 gram
 0.25  1.754  0.44 N
5.1.7 Designing CAM

 Consideration
The following points should be considered.
1. The rise should be kept as small as possible and

achieved in the lowest possible time.
2. Backlash should be kept to a minimum.
3. The moving parts should be as rigid and light as
possible.
4. The pressure angle should be kept as low as
possible (upto 30). In order to reduce the
pressure angle, off-set may be provided between
the cam and follower.
5. The accuracy of the cam is important to avoid the
vibration effects and therefore care should be
taken to produce cam profile.
Procedure
Step 1.
From the given data, note down all the given
information like the load to be lifted, torque supplied, etc,
and then find the type of cam, follower and its motion
based on the lift, velocity and acceleration required. Also
select proper material to be used for cam and follower.
Step 2.
By assuming proper pressure angle, calculate the
prime circle radius of the cam.
Step 3.
Calculate the minimum radius of curvature of the
pitch curve by using formula (or) design chart and finalise
the radius of follower and base circle of cam.
Step 4.
Using lift and cam angles draw the displacement -
angle diagram and then draw the cam profile.
Step 5
Find the width of the face of cam based on the contact
strength of cam material.
Step 6.
Find the dimensions of the follower with respect to
their withstanding strengths, space limitation, etc.
Step 7.
Evaluate the spring parameter such as stiffness,
spring index and length by using suitable formulae.
5.1.8 Cam Profile Layout

The cam profile can be drawn by graphical method if
the displacements for different cam angles are clearly
specified.
To draw a cam profile, the following points are to be

considered.
1. The displacement time diagram is always given

for a point on the follower which is utilized to
draw the follower in its correct position at any
instant.
2. The cam profile will always be tangent to the
follower and will thus be determined by the
envelope of the follower profiles drawn in
successive position.
3. Cam profile has to be drawn on the basis of
principle of inversion i.e, cam should be kept fixed
and the frame carrying the follower is to be
rotated in the opposite direction to that of cam.
5.1.9 Pressure angle : (Refer Fig. 5.9)

Pressure angle is the angle between the follower
motion and a normal to the pitch curve. This is very
important angle for cam design, as its maximum value
establishes the cam size, torque loads, side thrust wear and
acceleration of follower, etc.
Due to the angle between the follower motion and a

normal to the pitch curve, the normal force F n may be
resolved into two components F n cos  and F n sin  .
F n cos  is used to lift the follower and F n sin  to produce
a side thrust on the guide of the follower.
Ca m Fo rce
N o rm al N 2
 Pre ssure A ngle
Su rfa ce/Pitch
C u rve
A Rr y Ca m Fo rce F n
F orce requ ire d to

Rp lift th e follo w er
c le
h 
Fn Cos 
C ir
 R
ch


P it
Rb Rp

In itital Cam
Ba se Fo rce on th e guide,
Po int p rofile
C ircle F n Sin 
Fig.5.9 (a) Fig.5.9 (b)
The allowable value of  is influenced by the speed

of operation and weight of connected part. The pressure
angle can be determined by using the formula.
1 dy
tan  
R d
Where, R Distance of trace point from the centre of

cam.
The trace point displacement R is given by

R  Rp  y  Rb  Rr  y
Where, Rp  Prime circle radius

Rb  Base circle radius
Rr  Radius of the roller of follower
y Follower option.
For parabolid,
harmonic and cycloidal
cams, the prime circle
radius can be evaluated Pitch
C u rve
using the formula assuming
maximum pressure angle as y’
 dy 
 dt 
 max 
tan max  Rp
R p  y  
Suppose if offset is o ffset

e
provided for the follower
(Fig. 5.10) then pressure
angle is given by Fig. 5.10
y  e
tan  

R 2p  e 2  y
dy
Where y 
d
and e  offset distance
5.1.10 Under Cutting

When a cam has a sharp point, the follower does not
undergo an abrupt change of motion, but gradually
assumes a different velocity. If the roller radius is greater
than the theoretical pitch curve at the convex portion of
the cam, the roller undercuts, i.e., move itself over the same
path twice, this phenomenon is called under cutting.
Therefore, as long as the minimum radius of the
curvature of the pitch curve P k is greater than the radius
of the roller R r the profile will be satisfactory and the

desired displacement may be obtained.
P k  R r (No under cutting)
If P k min  R r, then the profile will be a pointed one.
If P k min  R r, then the cam will have an undercut

which should be avoided.
To avoid under cut
For Flat Follower
 1 d 2y 
P C min  R b   y  2  
  dt 2 
 0 (to avoid under cutting)
Where P C min  radius of curvature of cam profile
For Roller Follower

2 3/2
 
 1 dy 
 R p  y2     
P k min     dt  
2
2  1 dy   1 d 2y 
R p  y  2    R b  y  2  
dt  dt 2 
  
 R r to avoid under cutting
 For y at point of maximum negative acceleration.

where
2  N dy d 2y
 ,  velocity and  Acceleration.
60 dt dt 2
[For velocity and displacement equation refer PSG

data book Pg No. (7.110)
5.1.11 Contact Stress
A compressive stress is induced in the contact line
during the force transmission between cam and follower
and this stress is called contact stress.
Hence the materials selected for the manufacturing
of cam and follower should have sufficient endurance limit
and hardness.
The induced contact stress ‘c’ between cam and
follower (roller) is given by the equation.


F n E 1 E2  1 1 
c  0.591 
b [E 1  E 2] R r P Cmin 

 
Note: Minus sign is used when the follower is in
contact with concave portion of the cam profile.
where,
Fn  Normal force at the point of contact.
E 1, E 2  Moduli of elasticity of cam and

follower
b Face width of cam
P C min  Minimum radius of curvature of cam
profile
P C min  P Kmin  R r
5.1.12 Force Determination
R ising
N 1 W
al
N1
rm
No
B F n cos 
Fn
 Fn
A N2
N 2
F n sin 
 L ifting F orce =F n cos 
Side Thrust =F n sin 
Fig:5.11
In the Fig. 5.11, W is the external force, which is the

sum of inertia force and spring force that acts against the
direction of motion of the follower. Therefore the power
supplied should be in such a manner that the torque
produced should develop the lifting force F , which should
be greater than the external force.
The torque required to drive the cam is given by
Fv F n  cos   v
T 
  (here F   
and the normal force F n is obtained by
W
Fn 
 2A  B 
cos    h   sin 
 B 
Where
 Co-efficient of friction.
A Overhang length.
B Follower bearing length.
Note: Parameters like spring dimensions are

determined based on the given condition.
Problem 5.5: A cycloidal cam with a central roller follower

has a rise of 25 mm in angle of 70. Base circle radius is 80
mm and the follower roller radius is 20 mm. Speed of rotation
of the cam is 5000 rpm. Mass of the follower is 0.5 kg. Find
the maximum value of acceleration of the follower,
corresponding pressure angle, stiffness of the spring used with
the follower and maximum cam force. The function between
the follower guide may be ignored. (Nov/Dec 2007 - AU)
Given data
h  25 mm

  70  70  rad
180
Base circle radius r b  80 mm
Follower radius r r  20 mm
Speed N   5000 rpm
m  0.5 kg
Solution
From P.S.G. Data book Pg. No.7.110 for cycloidal
cam, the rise ‘y ’ of the cam is given by.
h    1 sin 2   
y 
   2 


Differentiating we get the velocity (From P.S.G data
book Pg.No.7.110)
dy h  2 
v  1  cos 
d    
w.k.t for cycloidal cam, acceleration is maximum
(Refer PSG Data book P.G.No. 7.110)
when

 0.25

25   1 
y    2 sin 2  
   
 1 
 y  25  0.25  sin 2  0.25  
 2  
y  25 0.25  0.00435 
y  25 0.2456 
y  6.14 mm
and
dy h 
v   1  cos 2  
d   
we know that angular velocity is given by
2N

60
2   5000

60
 523.59 ra d/sec
dy 25  523.59
  [1  cos 2  0.25
d   
 70  180 
 
13089.75
 [1  0.2484]
1.221
 10720.91  0.7516
 8057.53 mm/sec
From P.S.G Data book Pg. No.7.113
 dy 
d
Pressure angle tan    
Rp  y
But Rp  y  r
1 dy
 tan   
r d
or
 1 dy 
  tan  1   
r d
W.k.t
R p  R b  Rr
 80  20
 100 mm
 r  100  6.14 mm
r  106.14 mm
 1 
   tan  1   8057.53 
 106.14 
 89.2
Now maximum value of follower acceleration by the

equation (Refer P.S.G Data book Pg.No.7.110)
 d 2y  2  h 2 2
A fmax   2 
 2
sin

 d  m ax 
2   25  10  3  523.3 2
 A f max   sin 2  0.25
1.22172
 28819.88  sin 2  0.25 
 28819.88  0.0273
 788.53 m/s2
But inertia force
F 1  m f A f max
 0.5  788.53
 394.265 N
The inertia force is maximum 394.265 N but acts

upward. If the spring does not exert a force greater than
394.265 N, then contact between roller and cam will be

lost, therefore spring force has to be set atleast 394.265 N.
w.k.t the compression of spring for the follower rise

from lower most portion to the present level at  0.75

1
 y  25 [0.75  sin 2   0.75]
2
 25 [0.75  0.1591 sin 4.712 ]
 25 0.7369
 18.42 mm
 Required minimum stiffness of the spring
F1
k 
y
394.265

18.42
 21.40 N/mm
Cam forces
At any instant, both inertia force and spring force are

acting on the cam. During the phase cam rotation when

varies from 0.5 to 1, the total force on the follower, F is

the difference between the inertia force (upward) and the
spring force (downward). Hence the maximum force during
this phase is due to spring force and this occurs, when the

follower reaches the highest portion i.e  1

F n max  F s  h  k
 25  21.40
 535 N

When from downward these two forces donot reach

their maximum at the same time. Therefore it is necessary
to calculate both the forces and obtain their sum for

different values of


1.  0 ; y  0 ; Fs  F1  0 ;   0


2.  0.25 ; y  6.14 mm

F s  6.14  21.40
 131.39 N
and
F 1  394.265 N and
  89.2
 F  394.265  131.39
 525.661 N

3.  0.375 ,   18.15 

 1 
y  25  0.375  sin 2   0.375  
 2  
 6.56 m
F s  21.40  6.56 m
 140.384 N
d 2y 2 
F1  m f  2
 m f  2  h 2
 sin 2 
d  
0.5  2   25  10  3  523.3 2  sin 2   0.375 


1.22172
 592.4 N
F  592.41  140.384
 732.794 N
 d 2y
4.  0.5, y  12.5 mm , 0
 d
F s  12.5  21.46
 267.5 N
F1  0
F  F s  F 1  0  267.5 N
F  267.5 N
dy 25
 [1  c o s 2   0.5]
d 1.2217
 20.46 [0.5030]
 10.29 mm/ra d
r  100  12.5
 112.5
 1 
  tan 1   10.29 
 112.5 
 5.22 
The normal force acting between follower and guide

1. F n  9 for 0

525.661 N 
2. F n   37648.9 N for  0.75
cos 89.2  
732.794 N
3. F n 
cos 18.15 

 15128 for  0.375

267.5 N
4. F n 
cos 5.22

 268.61 N for  0.5

Thus we find
F n max  37648.9 N
Problem 5.6: A radial cam rotates at 1200 rpm with the

follower rising 20 mm with SHM is 150 of cam rotation. The
roller is 32 mm in diameter and the prime circle is 80 mm in
diameter. Check whether under cutting will occur.
Solution
W.k.t
To avoid under cutting

2 3/2
 
 1 dy 
 R p  y2     
P K min     dt  
2
2  1 dy   1 d 2y 
R p  y  2     R p  y  2  
  dt   dt 2 
2
1  d 2y  h 
Also     
 2  dt 2 max
2 
at   
150  

180
 2.62 radian
1 dy
At   , y  20 mm, a nd 0
 dt
3/2
 40  202  02 
 
 P K min 
40  202  2 02  40  20  14.38
Assume
R p  40 mm
R r  16 m
 P K min  48.4 mm
We find P K min  R r
Hence there is no under cutting.

Problem 5.7: A cycloidal motion cam has the following data
h  25 mm,   60, max  38. Calculate the minimum radius
of the base circle if the radius of the roller is 6 mm. Also
calculate the amount of offset that is necessary to reduce the

maximum pressure angle to 25
Solution
Calculate the minimum base circle radius R b
Rb  Rp  Rr
Given data
Radius of roller R r  6 mm
w.k.t
 dy 
 dt 
 max 2h
tan  max  
R p  y   h 
 Rp  2  
 
2  25
tan  max 
 25 
 R p  2  60
 
  180  
  60   3  60 
3  
2  25
 tan 38 
 25  
 Rp  2  3
 
150
tan 30 
R p  12.5 
 R p  48.6 mm
 R b  R p  R r  48.6 mm  6 mm
 R b  42.6 mm
Now find the offset (e) required to reduce the pressure

angle.
dy
e
d
tan  

 R 2p  e 2 y
2h
e
 h
tan 25  
2

 e
R 2p 2
2  25
e

tan 25 
25

 48.62  e 2 
2
47.75  e
0.4663 

 2361.9  e 2  12.5
solving by trail and error, we get

e  22 mm, and
  24.75 
5.2 CLUTCHES
5.2.1 Definition
A clutch is a device used to engage and disengage
the driving shaft to the driver shaft according to the
requirement. In case of automobiles, the clutch is required
during changing of gears. By operating a lever, the clutch
engages and disengages the driver and driven shafts. While
changing gears, the driven shaft should be disengaged from
the driving shaft.
5.2.2 Classification of Clutch

Clutches are classified in two ways, based on
1. Method of energy transfer (actuation).
2. Method of engagement.
According to the method of energy transfer, the
clutches are categorised into
1. Mechanically actuated clutches.
2. Hydraulically actuated clutches.
3. Pneumatically actuated clutches.
4. Electrically actuated clutches.
According to the method of engagement, clutches are
categorised into
1. Friction clutches.
2. Positive contact clutches.
3. Over running clutches.
4. Magnetic clutches.
In this book, mechanically operated clutches,
especially friction clutches are discussed.
The actuating force or the force required to engage
the clutches is supplied mainly by springs.
5.2.3 Working principle of friction clutch

The principle of transmission of power is by
contacting friction surfaces, to develop frictional force and
this frictional force is used to start the driven shaft from
rest and gradually increases the speed without slipping. In
case of automobiles, the friction clutch is used to engage
the engine shaft to the driven shaft.
5.2.4 Material for friction surface

The materials used for lining of friction surfaces
should have the following properties.
1. The material should have high coefficient of

friction.
2. The material should withstand high temperatures
caused during operation.
3. The material should have high heat conductivity,
high resistance to wear and should not be effected
by moisture or oil.
5.2.5 Types of friction clutches
1. Disc or plate clutches.
(a) Single disc clutch
(b) Multiple disc clutch
2. Cone clutches.
3. Centrifugal clutches.
5.2.6 Advantages and Disadvantages of friction
clutch.
Advantages of friction clutches.

1. They have a very little shock during engagement
as they can slip relative to each other.
2. It can be used for high speed engagement
applications.
Disadvantages of friction clutches

1. They are not suitable for application that require
positive transmission because they do slip.
2. Replacement of friction material is often required
as they wear out.
3. External cooling is required as they generate heat

during engagement.
5.27 Design considerations for friction clutches

1. Sufficient torque transmitting capacity.
2. Light weight.
3. Smooth engagement without shock and fast
disengagement with drag.
4. Proper friction material (high co-efficient of
friction) that should not be affected by moisture
and oil, etc.
5. Provision for taking up wear of the contact
surfaces.
6. Provision for transmission of heat which is
generated during operation.
5.28 Design of a Disc (or) plate clutch
Consider two friction surfaces
Single d isc
o r plate
dx
p
r1
r2 r2 x
W
r1
Frictio n surfaces Fig.5.12(b)
Fig.5.12(a) Forces on a D isc Clutch.

Let,
W Axial thrust,,
p Intensity of axial pressure,
r1  External radius of friction disc
r2  Internal radius of friction disc.
r Mean radius of friction disc
 Coefficient of friction
Ft  Frictional torque transmitted by the clutch
For more details, refer Dynamics of machines by Dr.

S. Ramachandran
Consider the following two conditions
1. Uniform pressure distributed over the entire area

of the friction surface.
2. Uniform axial wear due to the sliding friction.
1. By considering uniform pressure
W
Intensity of pressure  p 
 r21  r22
2  r3  r3 
Total frictional torque  Ft   W  2
1 2 
3 2 
 r1  r2 
 
Ft   W r
... (1)
where r = mean radius of the friction surface
2  r31  r32 
r  
 
3  r21  r22 
 
2. By considering uniform wear
Let p  Intensity of pressure
x  radial distance from axis of the clutch
Intensity of pressure varies inversely with the radial

distance x ;
1
p or p. x  constant
x
(a) The intensity of pressure is maximum at inner radius

r2
 pmax r2  C
C
 or pmax 
r2
(b) The intensity of pressure is minimum at outer radius

r1
pmin r1  C
or
C
pmin 
r1
(c) The average pressure is given by,
W
paverage 
 r21  r22 
 
1
Total frictional torque  Ft   W r1  r2
2
Wr
where r  mean radius of the friction surface
 r1  r2 
 
 2 
(d) Axial thrust  W  2 C r1  r2
In general
The total frictional torque acting on the clutch F t

Ft  n  W r
w here n  no. of pairs of contact surfaces
  coefficient of friction r1  outer radius
W  axial load r2  inner radius
2  r31  r32 
r  mean radius    for uniform pressure
 
3  r21  r22 
 
1
  r  r2  ... for uniform wear
2 1 
Note:
1. For a single plate or disc clutch, n  2 (both sides

of the plate are effective)
2. For a multiple disc clutch
n  n1  n2  1
where n 1  no. of discs on driving shaft
n2  no. of discs on driven shaft.
Problem 5.8 A single dry plate clutch is to be designed to

transmit 10 HP. at 900 rpm. Find (a) diameter of the shaft,
(b) mean radius and face width of the friction lining assuming
the ratio of the mean radius to the face width as 4, (c) outer
and inner radii of the clutch plate. Take y for the shaft
material as 38 kg/mm2 (Nov/Dec - 2009)
Power  10 HP  7.36 kW
Speed  N  900 rpm
Refer P.S.G Data book, page No. 7.89


3 495000  kW  kw
(a) Diameter of shaft  d 
N []
where kW  rated power  7.36 kW

N rpm of the drive N  900 rpm
kw  factor based on working conditions
 k1  k 2  k 3  k 4
[]  Allowed shear stress
Since working conditions are not given,
Assume k 1, k2, k 3, and k4 values
From P.S.G Data book, Page No. 7.90 take
k1  0.5 ; k2  1.25 ; k 3  0.32 and k4  0.75
kw  k1  k2  k3  k4
kw  0.5  1.25  0.32  0.75  2.82
Assume, material of shaft as C50;
y  38 kgf/mm 2 ; FOS  2
[]  Allowable shear stress

y 1
 
2 FOS
38 1
   9.5 kg f/mm 2
2 2
[]  950 kgf/cm2
Diameter of clutch shaft
d

3 495000  7.36  2.82
900  950
 2.29 cm o r 2.3 c m
d  23 mm
(b) Let b  face width
rm  mean radius
rm
b (given)
4
Refer PSG data book Page No 7.89
[M t]
im 
2 P b b  r2m
W.k.t For single plate clutch im  2
where, im  Number of friction surfaces
From PSG data book, Page No. 7.89, allowable

pressure  Pa  k. P b
where k  speed fac to r  1 (assume)
and P b  basic pressure  2.5 to 3 kg f/cm 2 ( for dry

running)
Take P b  3 kg f/cm 2
  coefficien t of friction  0.25 Assume
From PSG Databook, Page No. 7.8
71620 HP 71620  10
Mt    795.77 kg f  c m
N 900
Design torque  [M t]  M t  k
w 795.77  2.82  2244.07
 2244 kg f  cm
 Mt 
im   
2 Pb b  r2m
2244
2
rm
23  0.25  r2m
4
2244  4
r3m 
2   3  0.25  2
 rm  

3

952.38117
rm  9.8 c m or 98 mm
Mean radius  rm  98 mm
(c) To find ri  inner radius and ro  outer radius
b  face width of the plate
rm
 ro  r i 
4
98
ro  ri   24.5
4
b  24.5 mm ... (1)

ro  ri
But rm   98
2
 ro  ri  98  2  196 ... (2)
By solving eq. 1 and eq. 2 we get ro  110.25 mm and
ri  85.75 mm
Inner radius of the clutch plate ri  85.75 mm
Outer radius of the clutch plate  ro  110.25 mm
Problem 5.9: Design a suitable clutch for scooter of 150 C.C.
Axial thrust is to be provided by suitable helical springs. At
maximum torque, the power developed is 4 kW at 3200 rpm.
Space restricts the outer diameter of the clutch to be 150 mm
[May/June - 2008]
At maximum torque developed,
Power  P  4kW and
Speed  N  3200 rpm
The outer diameter  do  150 mm
d0
The outer radius  r0   75 mm
2
From PSG databook, Page No. 7.94 according to the

maximum torque, the ratio of inside diameter is varying
from 0.72 to 0.84.
Assume inner radius  0.8  outside radius
ri  0.8 r0
Refer PSG data book, Page No 7.89
97400 kW
Transmitted torque  M t 
N
97400  4

3200
 121.75 kg f c m
Number of friction surfaces
i  m1  m 2  1
where, m 1  no. of driving plates.
m 2  no. of driven plates
[M t]
imin 
2 P b b  r2m
where [M t]  Design torque  kw M t
kw  Factor based on working conditions
kw  k1  k2  k3  k4
Since, working conditions are not given, assume

k 1, k2, k 3, and k4 from data book
Refer PSG databook, Page No 7.90 and 7.91
k1  0.5 ; k2  1.25 ; k3  k 4  0.9
kw  0.5  1.25  0.43  0.9  3.08
[M t]  3.08  121.75  374.99 kgf cm
[M t]  Design tw isting moment  375 kgf cm
P b  3 kg f/cm 2
and k  1 spee d factor

P a  k P b  3  1  3 kgf/cm 2
Face width of plate b  r0  ri
 75  60  15 mm  1.5 cm
Assume   0.3 ri  0.8 r0
[M t ] ro  75 mm (Given)
imin 
2  Pb b  r2m
and ri  60 mm
375 r1  r0

2   3  1.5   0.3  6.75 2 rm  2
 0.97 75  60
  67.5 mm
2
 6.75 c m
 Take imin  1
 No. of plates  m 1  m 2  i  1  1  1  2
Axial thrust  W  2  C r0  ri

(Maximum pressure occurs at inner radius)
 C  pmax  ri  3  6
 18 kg/cm
 W  2   18 7.5  6.0  169.64 kg
Axial thrust  169.64 kg
Problem 5.10: A single plate clutch, effective on both sides,

is required to transmit 30 kW at 1400 rpm. Determine the
inner and outer diameter of friction surface if the co-efficient
of friction is 0.25, ratio of diameter is 1.5 and the maximum
pressure is not to exceed 0.2 N/mm2. Also determine the axial
thrust to be provided by springs. Assume the theory of uniform

wear.
Given data
Power 30 kW
P  30 kW  30  10 3 W
Speed N  1400 rpm
  0.25
pmax  0.2 N/mm2
Do
 1.5
Di
Solution
Let ro & ri be the outer and inner radii respectively.
 ro  1.5 ri
Now find
Torque to be transmitted (T)
60 P 60  30000
T 
2  N 2   1400
 204.62 N  m
 204.62  10 3 N  mm
w.k.t
T  n  W rm
Here,
n Number of sides of friction surface.

n2 (both sides of the plate being effective)
  0.25 (given)
W Axial thrust applied by the spring.
W  2  pmax ri ro  ri
 2   0.2  ri 1.5 ri  ri
W  0.63 r2i N
rm  Mean radius
 ri  r o 
rm   
 2 
 ri  1.5 ri 
 
 2 
rm  1.25 ri
 T  n  W rm
We have
204.62  10 3  2  0.25  0.63 r2i  1.25 ri
204.62  10 3  0.3937 r3i
1/3
 204.62  10 3 
 ri   
 0.3937 
ri  [519735.839 ]1/3  80.400 mm
ri ~
 80 mm   Di  160 mm
And
ro  1.5  ri  1.5  80
ro  120 mm  D o  240 mm
 The axial thrust applied by the spring W
W  0.63 r2i
 0.63  802
W  4032 N
Problem 5.11 A multiplate clutch is to be designed to

transmit a power of 50 kW at 500 rpm. Assuming suitable
materials and data, determine the main dimensions of friction
lining used in that clutch.
Solution
Given data
Power P  50 kW ; Speed N  500 rpm
Assume service factor  1.25
Let P d  Design Power
Design power  Rated power  service factor

i.e., P d  P  Service factor
 50  10 3  1.25
 62500 W
Now calculate design torque that is to be transmitted.
60  P d 60  62500
T 
2N 2  500
 1193.66 N  m
 1193.66  10 3 N  mm
Let,
 Permissible shear stress for shaft material.
  60 N/mm2 (Assume)
and d diameter of clutch shaft.
Then
1/3
 16T 
d 
  
1/3
 16  1933660 
d 
   60 
1/3
 30938560 
d 
 188.49 
d  [164134.15 ]1/3
d  54.75
 d  55 mm
Let
ri  Inner radius ; ro  Outer radius
ri  2d  2  55
 110 mm
ro  1.5 ri  1.5  110
 165 mm
n1  Number of driving plates  5 (Assume)
n2  Number of driven plates  6 (Assume)
W.k.t.
 n  n 1  n 2  1  5  6  1  10
Let the friction material be asbestos based material.
Assume,   0.35
Allowable pressure  0.21 to 0.56 N/mm 2
Now
T  n Wrm
ri  ro 110  165
 rm    137.5 mm
2 2
T 1193660
W 
n  rm 10  0.35  137.5
W  2480.33 N
Now
W
pmax 
2  r i r o  r i 
2480.33

2    110 165  110
 0.06 N/mm 2  allowable pr. 0.21 N/mm 2
Since the pressure is less than allowable pressure,

our design is safe.
Now find face width
b  ro  ri  165  110
b  55 mm
Thickness
t  5 mm (Assumed)
Hence, the main dimensions of friction lining are
1. Inner radius  110 mm
2. Outer radius  165 mm
3. Face width  55 mm
4. Thickness  5 mm
Problem 5.12: A mult-disc clutch is to transmit 30 kW at

1200 rpm and consists of 4 discs on driving shaft and three
discs on the driven shaft. The inside diameter of the contact
surface is 150 mm. The maximum pressure between the friction
surfaces is limited to 0.2 N/mm2. The coefficient of friction is
0.25; Consider the uniform wear condition and find the outside
diameter of the contact surface.
P  30 kW ; N  1200 rpm
m 1  no. of discs on driving shaft  4
m 2  no. of discs on driven shaft  3
150
pmax  0.2 N/mm 2 ;   0.25 ; rmin   75 mm
2
Let rmax  outside diameter

97400 kW 97400  30
Mt  
N 1200
 2435 kg f  cm
Tran smitted 
 M t  2435 kgfc m (or) M t  243500 N  mm
torque 
For uniform wear condition,
P max  rmin  C
 C  0.2  75  15 N /mm
Axial force on each friction surface (W)
W  2C  rmax  rmin 

 
W  2  15  rmax  75   94.24  rmax  75  (1)
   
But,
rmax  rmin rmax  75
rm  mean radius    0.5 rmax  37.5 
2 2
Number of friction surfaces  i  m 1  m2  1
i4316
Torque transmitted  [M t]  i    W  rm
243500  6  0.25  94.24  rmax  75   0.5 rmax  37.5 

  
243500  6  0.25  94.24  0.5 r2max  2812.5 
 
0.5 r2max  2812.5  1722.55
r2max  9070
 Outside radius of disc  rmax  95.23 mm

Problem 5.13: A multi disk clutch consists of five steel plates

and four bronze plates. The inner and outer diameters of
friction disks are 75 mm and 150 mm respectively. The
coefficient of friction is 0.1 and the intensity of pressure is
limited to 0.3 N/mm2. Assuming the uniform wear theory,
calculate (i) the required operating force, (ii) power
transmitting capacity at 750 rpm. (May/June 2007)
Solution
Given data
D o  150 mm, ro  75 mm, D i  75 mm, ri  37.5 mm ,   0.1
pmax  0.3 N /mm2, N  750 rpm, m 1  5, m 2  4
Required operating force for uniform wear condition
pmax  ri  C
 C  0.3  37.5  11.25 N/mm
Hence required operating force
W  2  C [ro  ri]
 2   11.25 75  37.5 
 2650.7 N
Power Transmitting Capacity at 750 rpm

For uniform wear condition
Normal Torque  T  i  W rm
[i  no. of frictional surfaces]
We know that
ro  ri 75  37.5
rm  
2 2
and
No. of friction surfaces  i  m 1  m 2  1  5  4  1  8
 75  37.5 
 T  0.1  2650.7   8
 2 
 119.281  10 3 N  mm
 119.2 N  m
2  NT
Power 
60
2    750  119.2

60
 9361.94 W
Power  9.36 kW
Problem 5.14: Find the torque that two surface of dry disc
clutch can transmit if the outside and inside lining diameter
are 120 mm and 70 mm respectively and the applied axial
force is 10 kN. Assume uniform wear and   0.4
(Apr/May - 2008 AU)
Solution
For uniform wear, [P max ri  C ]
W  2  Pmax ri ro  ri
Given that
W  10 kN, ri  35 mm ; ro  60 mm
W
 pmax 
2  ri ro  ri
10

2   35 60  35
 1.8189  10  3 kN/mm2
 pmax  1.8189 N/mm 2
For uniform wear condition
p  ri  C (constant)
Since the intensity of pressure is maximum at the

inner radius ri
and mean radius
ro  ri 60  35
rm    47.5 mm
2 2
and Torque Transmitted
T  n p  W rm
[np  i  no.of frictional surfaces]
np  2 (since both sides of plate effective)
 T  2  0.4  10,000  0.0475
 380 Nm
5.2.9 CONE CLUTCH

Cone clutch is used in automobiles. It consists of
driver which is keyed to the driving shaft and has an inside
conical surface which fits exactly into the outside conical
surface which is keyed to the driven shaft. Hence it consists
of one pair of friction surface. The cone angle , the radii
of friction surface and the face width are the important
design parameters.
b C o nical F riction
Su rfa ce
Sp rin g
r1
B
r2

Wa
D riving
sha ft
D rive n
D rive n sha ft
D rive n
sha ft
Fig.5.13 C one Clutch.
5.2.9.1 Design of cone clutch:

Consider a pair of friction surfaces of cone clutch.
Let
pn  Normal pressure between the contact surfaces
r1  Outer radius of friction surface
r2  Inner radidus of friction surface
r1  r 2
rm  Mean radius of friction surface 
2
  S em i cone angle
  coefficient of friction between the

contact surfaces
Consider the following two conditions
1. Uniform pressure
2. Uniform wear
1. Uniform pressure
2  pn  r31  r32 
Frictional torque  F t   
sin   3  (1)
Frictio n
b surfac e
F= W n
 r1
r r2
Wn

Wa
Fig. 5.1 4 Forces o n a F riction S urface
Let W a  axial force; b  face width; r  mean radius
Normal face W n
W n  Normal pressure  Area of contact surface
 pn  2r  b
Axial force  W a  Wn  sin 
 pn  2  rb sin  (2)
r1  r2
But, sin  
b
 r1  r2  r1  r2
(or) b    and r 
 sin   2
Substitute the values of b and r in equation (2)
 r1  r2  r1  r2
W a  pn  2    sin 
 2  sin 
W a pn    r21  r22 
 
Wa
pn 
  r21  r22  (3)
 
Now, substitute the value of pn in eq (1)
2  Wa  r3  r3 
1 2
 Ft   
sin    r2  r2   3 
 1 2 
2 Wa  r3  r3 
   1 2 
3 sin   2 2  Wa
 r1  r2  But  Wn
  sin 
2  r3  r3 
1 2 
 Ft   W n   2 2 
3  r1  r2 
 
2. Uniform wear
Incase of uniform wear, the intensity of pressure
varies inversely with the distance (similar to the axial
clutch)
1
Px 
x
C
Px 
x (C  a constant)
2   C  r1  r2 
2 2
Total frictional torque  F t   
sin   2  (4)
Normal force on the  2C

 r1  r2
contact surface  sin 
Axial force  W a  W n  sin 
 2 C  r1  r2
Wa
C
2 r1  r2
Substitute the value of C in eq. (4)
2  Wa  r2  r 2 
1 2
Frictional torque  F t   
sin  2 r1  r2  2 
 W a  r1  r2 
  
sin   2 
Wa
but W n 
sin 
 r1  r2 
 Ft   W n   
 2 
r  r2
Since, W n  pn  2r  b and r
2
Therefore the above equation can be written as
Friction torque  F t    pn  2r  b  r
F t    pn  2r2  b
Axial force required to engage the clutch
 W a engage  W n  sin    W n cos 
Problem 5.15: An engine is developing 50 kW at 1200 rpm

by using a cone clutch. The cone angle is 30. The mean radius
is 300 mm; The coefficient of friction is 0.25; The normal
pressure should not exceed 0.2 N/mm2; Determine (1) face width
of the cone (2) axial force required to engage the clutch.
P  50 kW ; N  1200 rpm ; 2  30;   15
pn  0.2 N/mm 2 ;   0.25 ; r  300 mm Let; b  face width
Assume uniform wear, Refer PSG data book Page.No. 7.89
9400 kW
M t  T ran smitted torque 
N
97400  50
  4058.33 kg f  c m
1200
(o r) M t  405833 N  mm
Frictional torque  F t  2  pn  b  r2
405833  2  0.25  0.2  b  300 2
F ace width  b  14.35 mm
Let Waengage  Axial force required to engage the

clutch
W n  Normal force on the contact surface
 pn  2r  b
 0.2  2    300  14.35

 5409.82 N
 Axial force required 
  Waengage  W n sin    cos 
to engage the clutch 
 5409.82  sin 15   0.25 cos 15] 
F aengage  2707.17 N
Problem 5.16: A power of 20 kW, is to be transmitted through

a cone clutch at 500 rpm. For uniform wear condition find the
main dimensions of clutch and shaft. Also determine the axial
force required to engage the clutch. Assume co-efficient of

friction as 0.25 and the maximum normal pressure on the
friction surface is not to exceed 0.08 MPa and design stress
for the shaft material as 40 MPa.
Solution
Given data
P  20000 Watts ; N  500 rp m ;   0.25
[pmax]  0.08 MPa  0.08 MN /m 2
 0.08 N/mm 2
s  40 MPa  40 MN/m 2
 40 N/mm 2
Torque to be transmitted
60 P 60  20000
T 
2  N 2    500
 382 N  m
 382  10 3 N  mm
Diameter of clutch shaft

1/3
 16T 
d
 s 
 
1/3
 16  382  10 3 
d 
   40 
d  36.5 mm
Take d  40 mm
Let
rm  Mean radius
rm  4d assumed
 rm  4  40  160 mm
Now
b  face width of friction lining
160
b  80 mm
2
Assume   (angle of friction surface with axis clutch)
  20
ro  Outer radius of friction lining
b
ro  rm  sin 
2
 160  40 sin 20
 174 mm
ri  Inner radius of friction lining.
b
ri  r m  sin 
2
 160  40 sin 20
 146 mm
  pmax ri r2o  r2i 

T
sin 
T sin 
 pmax 
  ri r2o  r2i 
382  10 3  sin 20


  0.25  146 174 2  1462
 0.1271 N/mm 2  allow able 0.08 N/mm 2 pr
Since the pressure developed is more than the

allowable pressure, therefore the design is not safe with
this dimension. So let us change the dimension.
rm  5d  200 mm
b  100 mm
  25
then
ro  200  50 sin 25
 221 mm
ri  200  50 sin 25
 179 mm
382  10 3  sin 25

 pmax 
  0.25  179 221 2  179 2
 0.068 N/mm 2  [pmax] 0.08 N/mm 2
Now the pressure developed is less than the allowable

pressure i.e. (0.08 N/mm 2)
 Axial force required to engage the clutch W a
 W a rm
T   W n rm 
sin 
T  sin 
Wa 
 rm
382  10 3  sin 25


0.25  200
 3229 N
5.2.10 CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCHES

The disc clutches and cone clutches are manually
operated mechanical clutches whereas the centrifugal
clutches are operated by an electric motor (or) I.C engine.
These clutches are employed to engage the driven shaft
automatically after the driving member attains a particular
Fig.5.15
speed. The centrifugal clutch permits the driver motor or

engine to start, warm up and accelerate the operating speed
without load. The clutch then automatically engages and
the driven shaft is smoothly brought up to operating speed.
This type of clutches are generally used in Motor
cycles, Go-cart, Mopeds, Scooty, etc.
5.2.10.1 Designing of centrifugal clutch

Torque transmitted
T  Ff  R  n
where
Ff  Frictional force
R Inside radius of drum

n No of shoes
F f    Fa  Coefficient of friction
Now Fa  Actuating force (outward

force)
Fa  Fc  Fs Fc  Centrifugal force on each
shoe
Fs  Inward force (Spring force)
F c  2 r Distance of centre of gravity
F c  m  2r  Angular speed of drum at

running speed.
F s  m  21 r 1  Angular speed of drum at the

time of engagement
 T  Ff  R  n    Fa  R  n
Also the force acting on each shoe  Net outward

force F a
Here, the intensity pressure exerted on each shoe due

to this force.
Net outward force Fa

p 
Area of conta ct of shoe lb
Fa

Rb
. .
. lR
5.2.10.2 Internal expanding rim clutches

The internal expanding rim clutch is often used in
textile machinery, machine tools where the clutch may be
located within the driving pully. It benefits from centrifugal
effects and transmits high torque even at low speeds and
requires both positive engagement and high release force.
It is a type of centrifugal clutch.
5.2.11 Electromagnetic clutch

Electromagnetic clutches are operated electrically but
transmission of torque is done mechanically. This is why
it is also called as electro-mechanical clutches.
Electromagnetic clutch is best suited for remote

operations, because it doesnot require linkages to control
its engagement. It has fast and smooth operation. However
there is a risk of overheating, because energy dissipates as
heat in the electromagnetic actuator each time when the
clutch is engaged. Therefore the maximum operating

temperature of the clutch is limited by the temperature
rating of the insulation of the electromagnet, Another
drawback is its high initial cost.
Arm ature
Field C oil
H ub
Fig. 5.16 Electro M agnetic Clutch .
Working:
Engagement: When the clutch is required to actuate,
current flows through the electromagnet, which produces a
magnetic field. The monitor portion of the clutch becomes
magnetized and set up a magnetic loop that attracts the
armature. The armature is pulled against the rotor and a
frictional force is generated at contact within a relatively
short time, the load is accelerated to match the speed of
the motor, there by engaging the armature and output hub
of the clutch. In the meanwhile the motor is constantly

rotating with the input all the time.
Disengagement: When current is removed from the shaft,
the armature is free to turn with the shaft. In most
designs, spring holds the armature away from the motor
surface when power is released creating a small air gap.
Cycling: It is achieved by interrupting the current
through the electromagnet. Slippage normally occurs only
during acceleration. When the clutch is fully engaged, there
is no relative slip.
Applications
Electromagnetic clutches are widely used because of
its compact nature; Some of the areas of applications are.
1. Machinery like lawnmover, copy machines,
conveyor drive etc.
2. Automobile: Helps the driver to shift gear, while
the vechile is in motion or running engine.
3. Locomotives: It is used in diesel locomotives.
5.3 BRAKES
5.3.1 Introduction:
Brake is a device which is used to stop the motion
of a machine or retard its motion. It is due to the friction
between contact surfaces.
The factors required in the design are:
1. Coefficient of friction between the braking

surfaces.
2. Unit pressure between braking surfaces.
3. The projected area of the braking surfaces.
4. Heat dissipating capacity.
5.3.2 Difference between clutch and brake

Clutch is used to rotate the driven member along with
driving member. Where as, brake is used to control or stop
the moving member. In otherwords, clutch is used to
connect two moving members of the machine, i.e driven
member along with driving members. Whereas brake
connects a moving member to a stationary member.
Therefore we can say that, if one member of the clutch is
kept fixed (stationary), then the clutch becomes a brake.
5.3.3 Brake friction materials

The brake lining material should have the following
properties.
1. It should have high coefficient of friction.
2. It should have high wear and heat resistance.
3. It should have high heat dissipation.
4. It should not react with moisture and oil.

5.3.4 Types of Brakes

1. Simple block shoe brake
2. Pivoted block shoe brake
3. Double block shoe brake
4. Simple band brake
5. Differential band brake
6. Band and block brake
7. Internal expanding brake
5.3.5 Single Block Shoe Brake

It consists of a block which is pressed against the
rotating wheel. The friction between the block and wheel,
it causes a tangential braking force on the wheel. This
tangential braking force retards or stops the rotation of the
wheel. The block is attached to a lever, which is pivoted
at one end and the force is applied on the other end.
Let , P  Applied force

RN  Normal Reaction force
r Wheel radius
2 Angle of contact between block and wheel
Ft  Tangential braking force (or) frictional force
l Length of the lever;
x  distance between centre of wheel to the
fulcrum.
It is assumed that, the normal pressure is uniform

between the block and the wheel when the angle of contact
2  60 
Then, frictional braking force F t  R N

. .
 Braking torque = T B  F tr  R Nr [ . F t   R N]
There are three conditions in the arrangement of

contact surface and position of pivot.
Note: Direction of rotation is equal to direction of F t break.
Case I
When the tangential braking force F t passes through
the fulcrum of the lever
N N
x x
Ft P
O O Ft P
Fulcru m RN r Fulcru m RN
r
2 2
(a) Clock - wise Ro tation (b) Anti Clo ck - wise Rotation

Fig.5.17
(a) Clockwise rotation of (b) Anticlockwise rotation

wheel. Taking moments of wheel. Taking moments
about ‘O’ about ‘O’
RN  x  P  l RN  x  P  l
Pl Pl
RN  RN 
x x
Note:
In clockwise rotation of wheel, F t is acting right side.
Because, we design the brake shoe, not rotating wheel.
Hence, with respect to brake shoe, F t should be right side.
Similarly, in case of anticlockwise rotation of wheel, F t
should be left side.
But, braking torque Braking torque

T B  RN  r TB   RN r
Pl Pl
  r  r
x x
Plr Plr
TB TB 
x x
Case II
When the tangential force F t passes through a
distance ‘a’ below the fulcrum.

x x
a O P a O P
Ft Ft
RN RN
r r
2 2
(a) Clock - w ise Ro tation (b) Anti Clock - wise Rotatio n

Fig.5.18
(a) When wheel rotates (b) When wheel rotates in

in clockwise direction. anti-clockwise direction
Taking moment about ‘O’ Taking moment about ‘O’
F t  a  R N x  Pl Ft  a  P  l  R N  x
But F t  RN But F t  RN
RN a  R Nx  Pl RN a  Pl  RN x
Pl R N x   RN a  Pl
RN 
a  x
Braking torque R N x  a  Pl
TB  R N r Pl
RN 
x  a
Plr Plr
TB  TB 
a  x x  a
Case III
When the tangential force F t passes through a
distance ‘a’ above the fulcrum.

x x
Ft Ft
a a
P P
O 2 R N r O 2 R N r
(a) Clock - w ise Ro tation (b) Anti Clock - wise Rotatio n

Fig.5.19
(a) When wheel rotates in (b) When wheel rotates in

clockwise direction anti-clockwise direction.
Taking moment about ‘O’ Taking moment about ‘O’
F t  a  P  l  RN  x F t  a  R N x  Pl
But F t  RN But F t  RN
RN a  Pl  RN x RN a  R Nx  Pl
R N x   R N a  Pl Pl
RN 
a  x
R N x  a  Pl Braking torque
Pl TB  R N r
RN 
x  a
Plr Plr
TB  TB 
x  a a  x
Case II (b) and Case III (a) are same
i.e., RN x  R N a  Pl
moment of frictional force
In this type of brakes, frictional force adds to the

moment of force (Pl) i.e. friction helps to apply the force.
These brakes are self-energizing brakes.
Case II (a), and case III (b) are same
When the frictional force is greater enough to apply

the brake without any external force, then the brake is
called self-locking brake.
From the above equations, condition for self locking
if x  a ; the P will be –ve or equal to zero.
No external force is required to apply the brake.
The self locking brake is used only in back - stop

applications.
In order to avoid self locking,
x  a
 The brake should be self energizing but not self

locking
 P b  bearing pressure on the block or shoe
RN

Ab
A b  width of shoe  projecting length of shoe
 w 2rsin 
Angle of contact
It is assumed that the normal reaction and frictional
force act at the mid point of the block; Usually the angle
of contact 2  is small i.e less than 60. When the value
of 2 is more than 60  2  60, then equivalent
co-efficient of friction w is used in torque equation.
 Equivalent co-efficient of friction
4  sin 
  eq 
2   sin 2 
where   actual coefficient of friction
2   Angle of conta ct
Problem 5.17: A single block brake shown in the diagram

has the diameter 300 mm. The angle of contact is 120. The
coefficient of friction is 0.3; If the torque transmitted by the
brake is 80 N – m, find the force P required. Assume length
of the lever l  300 mm and distance between centre of wheel
to fulcrum x  150 mm
Given:
2  120;
x  150 mm
T B  80 N m
x
 80  10 3 N mm
Diameter of drum O Ft P
Fu lcru m
d  300 mm (or) radius of RN
2
drum  150mm
Let P Force
required to operate the
(a ) Clo ck - W ise R otatio n
brake
Taking moments about O
RN x  P  l
Pl P  300
RN    2P
x 150
RN  2 P
Since angle of contact is greater than (or) equal to

60
4  sin 
  
2   sin 2 
4  0.3  sin 60


120   sin 120
4  0.3  sin 60



 sin 120 
1.5
1.03923

2.96042
  0.351
Braking torque TB  R Nr
80  10 3  0.351  [2 P]  150
80  103
P   759.7 N
105.3
Problem 5.18: The block brake is shown in the diagram;
Brake drum diameter provides a braking torque of 360 Nm,
and coefficient of friction is 0.3
Find (1) the force P to be applied at the end of the lever for
the clockwise and counter clockwise rotation of the brake drum.
2. The location of the pivot or fulcrum to make the self locking
for the clockwise direction.
2 00 6 00
50
O 1 00
Solution
1. (a) Consider clockwise direction
TB  360 N m
 360  10 3 Nmm
300
r  150 mm
2
Let P is the force applied at the end of the lever

2 00 6 00
P
Ft
50
RN
O 1 00
Fig.5.3.4.
Braking torque TB  Ft  r
 360  10 3  F t  150
F t  2400 N.
But F t  R N
 2400  0.3  R N
R N  8000 N
Taking moments about ‘O’
P  800  R N  200  Ft  50
8000  200  2400  50

P
800
P  1850 N
(b) Consider counter clockwise direction
P  800  F t  50  RN  200
P  2150 N
200 600
P
Ft
50
100 O RN
2. Location of pivot or fulcrum to make self-locking

(when anti clockwise rotation). Let x be the distance of the
pivot from the line of action.
P  600  200  F t x  R N  200
In order to make the brake self-locking F t x must be

equal to RN  200 (i.e. P must be zero)
P
Ft
x
O RN
100
 F t x  RN  200
8000  200 F t  2400 N

x
2400
R N  8000 N
 667 mm
Problem 5.19: In a single block brake, the diameter of the

drum is 250 mm and the angle of contact is 90. The operating
force of 700 N is applied at the end of lever which is at 250
mm from the centre of the brake block. The coefficient of
friction between the drum and the lining is 0.35. Determine
the torque that may be transmitted. Fulcrum is at 200 mm
from the centre of brake block with an offset of 50 mm from
the surface of contact.
(a) Consider clockwise direction
Taking moments at ‘O’
P  450  F t  50  RN  200
But P  700 N
 700  450  F t  50  R N  200
3,15,000  50 F t  R N  200
2 00 m m 2 50 m m
P
50 mm 7 00 N
O
Fig.5.3.13.
200 m m 250 m m
P
Ft
50 700 m m
RN
But F t   RN
we know   0.35
 F t  0.35 R N
Substituting in above equation
3,15,000  50  0.35 R N  200 R N
 R N  1726 N
 F t  604.109 N
But Braking Torque T B  F t  r
250
 604.109   75513 Nmm
2
 75.513 Nm
(b) Anticlockwise direction

P  450  F t  50  RN  200
3,15,000  0.35 R N  50  RN  200

200 m m 250 m m
Ft
50 P= 70 0N
RN
R N  1448.27 N
 F t  506.89 N
250
But Braking Torque TB  F t  r  506.89   63.36 Nm
2
5.3.6 Simple band brake

a F a F
O
O
T2 A B T1 A B
L L
T1 T2
 
B ra ke d ru m B ra ke d ru m
S h aft S h aft
B a nd B a nd
Fig.5.2 0(a) C lockw is e D irectio n
In a simple band brake, one end of the band is

attached to the fixed pin or fulcrum O of the lever and the
other end is attached to the lever at a distance ‘a’ from

the fulcrum.
Let
F Force applied at the end of the lever
T1  Tension on tight side of the band
T2  Tension on the slack side of the band
 Angle of lap
r Brake drum radius
T1 
Ratio of tensions  e
T2
Braking force on the drum  T 1  T 2
 Braking torque on the drum  TB   T 1  T 2  r

 
(Neglecting thickness of band)
Let t thickness of the band

then re  effective radius of the drum
 t 
r 
2
Braking torque on the drum  TB   T1  T2  re
 
(Considering thickness of band)
Consider clockwise rotation, taking moments about
fulcrum ‘O’
Then, F  l  T1 a
T1 a
F
l
Consider anti-clockwise rotation, taking moments
about fulcrum ‘O’
Then,
F  l  T2 a
 T2 a 
F 
 l 
where a  perpendicular distance from O to the line of
action
l  length of the lever
Note 1
Let P Power absorbed in watts.

N Speed of the drum in rpm
TB  Braking torque in N  m
2 NT B
P
60
P  60
 T B  Braking torque 
2 N
Note 2
To find width of steel band
Let b width of the band – mm

t thickness of band – mm
t  tensile stress in the band material in

2
N/mm
T1  maximum tension in Newtons
Then, T 1   t b t Newtons
(a) If stress and thickness are given, find b

(b) If cross-section of band t are given, find  stress.
5.3.7 Differential Band brake
A
F A
F
b b
T2 a a
O B C T1 O
B C
L T1 L T2
M M
 Ba nd  Ba nd
Bra ke drum Bra ke drum
Sh aft Sh aft
(a) Clockwise R otation (b) Anti Clo ckwise Ro tation

of the Drum of the Drum
Fig.5.21 Differential Ban d Brake
In case of differential band brake, the ends of the

band are attached at A and B to a lever AOC as shown
in the diagram. The lever is pivoted on a fixed pin or
fulcrum at ‘O’.
Let
T1  Tension on tight side
T2  Tension on slackside
F  Applied force
l  length of lever (from O to C)
a  distance from fulcrum to other end (O to A)
b  distance from O to B (from O to B)
Consider clockwise rotation, taking moments about ‘O’
F  l  T1 b  T 2  a
Fl  T 2a  T 1b
... (1)
For anti-clockwise rotation,
F  l  T2 b  T 1a
F  l  T1a  T2b
... (2)
When the frictional force helps to apply the brake it
is called self energizing brake.
In the above two equations the moment

T 1b and T2 b helps in applying brake.
Note 1
When the force F is negative or zero, then the

brake is self locking
Therefore, for clockwise rotation of the drum, the
condition for self-locking is,
T 2 a  T 1 b or T 1 b  T2 a
(or)
T2 b

T1 a
For anticlockwise rotation of the drum, the condition

for self locking is,
T1 a  T2 b or T2 b  T 1 a
T1 b
(or) 
T2 a
Note 2
If length of OB is greater than OA, then the force
F must act in the upward direction to apply brake.
Note 3
If the length OB is less than OA, then force F
must act in the downward direction in order to
apply brake. T 1 and T2 remain same.
Problem 5.20: A differential band brake shown in the
diagram has a width of 80 mm and thickness of 2 mm. The
permissible tensile stress in the band material is limited to 60
N/mm2. The Coefficient of
friction is 0.25 between drum
a F
and the friction lining. The 50 b
A 2 00
brake drum diameter is O
T2 B C
500 mm.
T1
Calculate for clockwise
direction
(a) Tension in the band
o
2 20
B ra ke d rum
(b) Actuating force
(c) Braking torque B and
(d) Whether the brake is Fig.
self-locking or not.
Given data:
b  80 mm ; t  2 mm ; t  60 N/mm 2
d  500 mm (or) r  250 mm
T2
A F
a
50 b
T2 O C
2 00 B
8 00
T1
Since b  a therefore F will act upwards

Max tension  T 1   b t  60  80  2  9600 N
T1
 e
T2

  220 
9600 180
 e0.25  3.839
T2
 3.839 radian
T2  3676 N
F  800  T 1  200  T 2  50
9600  200  3676  50

F
800
 2629.75 N
Braking torque  T B  T 1  T 2 r
 9600  3676  250

 1481000 N m m
 1481 N m
Checking for self locking
Clockwise rotation
Since, b  a, the c o nditio n fo r self lo c king
T2 b

T1 a
T2 3676
  0.3829
T1 9600
b 200
 4
a 50
T2 b
Since 
T1 a
0.3829  4
The brake is self-locking
Problem 5.21: Design a differential band brake for a crane

lifting a load of 50 kN through a rope wound round a barrel
of 550 mm diameter, as shown in Fig. The brake drum keyed
to the same shaft be 650 mm in diameter and the angle of lap
of the brake band over the drum is 240. Operating arms of
the brake are 45 mm and 210 mm. Operating lever is 1.5 m
long. Take   0.25.
Solution:
Given data
Load  50 kN  50  10 3 N
Barrel Diameter  550 mm

o
2 40
6 50
5 50 m m
mm
T2
F
2 10
L oa d T1 O
45
Fig.
1 50 0
Barrel radius  225 mm

Brake drum diameter  650 mm
Brake drum radius  325 mm
Angle of lap   240

 240  rad
180
 4.188 rad
Length of lever  1.5 m
  0.25
Designing differential band brake by following steps.
Step 1
Find braking torque
T B  Load  Barrel radius
T B  50  10 3 N  225 mm
T B  11250  10 3 Nmm
T B  11250 N.m
Step 2
Find Tension T1 & T 2
T1  T 1  Tight side tension

Tension ratio  e   T  Slack side tension
T2
 2
T1
  e0.25  4.188  2.849
T2
o r T1  2.849 T2 ...(1)
Now,
TB  T1  T2  r
11250 N m  T1  T2  0.325 m
T 1  T 2  34,615.4 N ...(2)
Comparing and solving both equation 1 and 2, we get
T 1  53336.5 N and
T 2  18721.14 N
Step 3
Thickness of band brake
t  0.005  D
 0.005  650
t  3.25 mm
Now find band width w
Assume Induced tensile stress  t  60 N/mm2

T1
t 
wt
53,336.5
  60 N/mm 2
w  3.25
Band Width w  273.5 mm
w  273.5 mm
Step 4
Calculate the bearing pressure
T1
P max 
w .r
53,336.5

273.5  325
P m ax  0.599 N/mm 2
[P ] for Metal drum  1.5 N/mm 2
Since P max  [P],
Step 5
Force applied at the end of lever.
From the figure.
Taking moments about O, we get
F  1500  T1  45  T2  210
F  1500  53336.5  45  18721.14  210
F  1020.85 N
Problem 5.22: A differential band brake is operated by lever

as shown in fig. The brake drum has a diameter of 600 mm
and the maximum torque on the drum is 900 N-m. If the
co-efficient of friction between the brake lining and drum is
0.3, find the operating force.
Solution:
Given data
Diameter  600 mm or 
Radius  300 mm  0.3 m
T B  900 N  m
  0.3
10 a
0
m
m
D F
5 00 m m
T1 O b C
8 0m m
T2
o
2 40
Fig.
OB  l  500 mm  0.5 m
OC  b  80 mm  80  10  3m
OD  a   100 mm  0.1 m

  240  240 
180
 4.188 rad
Step 1
Braking torque is given  900 N  m
Step 2
Tension of tight and slack side.
Tension ratio is given by

T1
 e 
T2
T1
 e0.3  4.188  3.5136
T2
T1  3.5136 T2 ...(1)
Also
TB  T1  T2 r
900 N  m  T1  T2  0.3 m
T1  T2  3000 ...(2)
Comparing and solving equation (1) and (2) we get
T 1  4193.48 N
T 2  1193.50 N
Step 3
Taking moments about the fulcrum O, we get
F  0.500  T1  0.100  T 2  80  10  3
 F  0.5  4193.48  0.1  1193.50  80  10  3
 F  0.5  323.868
 Operating force F  647.736 N
Problem 5.23: A band and block brake having 12 blocks, each

of which subtends at an angle of 16 at the centre, is applied to
a rotating drum of diameter 600 mm. The blocks are 75 mm
thick. The drum and the flywheel. mounted on the same shaft
have a mass of 1800 kg and have a combined radius of gyration
of 600 mm. The two ends of the band are attached to pins on
the opposite sides of the brake fulcrum at distances of 40 mm
and 150 mm from the fulcrum. If a force of 250 N is applied at
a distance of 900 mm from the fulcrum, find:
(i) The maximum braking torque,
(ii) The angular retardation of the drum, and
(iii) The time taken by the system to be stationary from the
rated speed of 300 r.p.m. Take coefficient of friction between
the blocks and the drum as 0.3.
Solution
Given data
Angle of contact  2  16
  8
d  600 mm  0.6 m
or r  300 mm  0.3 m
D N
900 m m
O A
a B
40
T1 mm b
150 m m
T2
F = 2 50 N
r
D rum
Fig.
t  75 mm  0.075 m
Mass m  1800 kg
Radius of gyration k  600 mm  0.6 m
Force F  250 N
(a) Number of blocks n  12
From the figure
OD  a  40 mm  0.04 m
OA  b  150 mm  0.15 m
OB  l  900 mm  0.9 m
Step 1 Calculate Maximum braking torque T B 
The braking torque will be maximum when all the

following conditions are satisfied.
1. b > a.
2. The applied force acts upwards.
3. Anticlockwise rotation of brake drum.
From the fig we know that band attached to A is

tighter T 1 and end of band attached to B is slack side
tension T2.
 Tension ratio is given by
n
T1  1   tan  

T2  1   tan  
12
T1  1  0.3 tan 8 

T2  1  03 tan 8 
T1
 2.7524
T2
T1  2.752 T2
...(1)
Now taking moments about O.
F  l  T 1  a  T2  b
250  0.9  T1  0.04  T2  0.15
225  0.04 T1  0.15 T 2

...(2)
Comparing and solving equation (1) and (2) we get
T1  5636 N and
T2  2048 N
Now
Maximum braking torque TB 
 d  2t 
T B  T 1  T 2  
 2 
 0.6  2  0.075 
 5636  2048  
 2 
 1345.5 N  m
II. Find Angular retardation of drum 
T B  I   mk 2 
1345.5  1800  0.62  
  2.07 rad/s2
III. Time taken by the system to come to rest from the
speed of 300 rpm.
Initial angular speed
2N
i 
60
2   300
  31.4 rad/s
60
Final angular speed  f  0 rad/s
Now
w.k.t
f  i    t
0  31.4  2.07 t
31.4
t
2.07
t  15.2 sec
5.3.8 Double shoe brake

In case of single block shoe brake, an additional load
is acting on the shaft and its bearings. In order to overcome
this additional load, double block shoe brake is used.
Note
When angle of contact is more than 60, then the

equivalent coefficient of friction
4 sin 
 
2  sin 2 
TB   Ft  Ft  r
 1 t 
2
 
where F t and F t are braking forces on two blocks and
1 2
r  radius of the wheel
Problem 5.24: A double shoe brake shown in the diagram,

is capable of absorbing a torque of 1500 N-m. Brake drum dia
= 400 mm; Angle of contact for each shoe 110;   0.4
Find:
(a) Spring force necessary to set the brake
(b) Width of the shoe brake, if the bearing pressure on the
lining material is not to exceed 0.5 N/mm2
Solution
Given data
TB  1500  10 3 N mm
d  400 mm; r  200 mm;

2  110  110   1.919 rad
180
S S
3 00
Ft
2
o o
110 110
RN R N1
2
Ft 2 50
O2 O1
40 40 Fig.
  0.4 ; P b  0.5 N/mm 2
Let S  Spring force necessary to set the brake.
Since 2  60 ;
equivalent coefficient  4 sin 

Therefore   
of friction  2  sin 2
4  0.4  sin 55


1.919  sin 110 
 0.4584
Taking moments about O 1
S  550  R N  250  F t 200  40

1 1
Ft
1
But RN 
1 
S  550  545.37 F t 160

1
 705.37 F t
1
 F t  0.78  S Newtons
1
Similarly, S  550  F t  200  40  RN  250

2 2
Ft
2
S  550  160 F t   250  545.37 F t
2 0.4584 2
550 S  385.37 F t

2
F t  1.4272  S Newtons
2
Braking torque  T B  F t  F t  r
1 2
1500  10 3  [0.78 S  1.4272  S]  200
S  3398 Newtons
 F t  0.78  S  0.78  3398  2650.4 N

1
and F t  1.4272 S  1.4272 3398  4849.6 N

2
To find width of shoe brake:

Let b  width of the brake shoe.
Ft
1 2650.4
RN    5782 N
1  0.4584
Ft
2
RN   10579.4 N
2 
Projected bearing area of one shoe
 Ab  b  2rsin  
RN
Pressure 
Ab
10579.4
 0.5  R N  RN
b 2r sin  2 1
11515
b
0.5 2  200  sin 55
b  64.6 mm
Max. normal force is on the left hand side of the shoe
Problem 5.25: The layout of double block brake is shown in

Fig. The brake is rated at 250 N-m at 650 rpm. The drum
diameter is 250 mm. Assuming coefficient of friction to be 0.3
and for conditions of service. A pressure value of 1000 kPa
may be assumed.
Determine
(i) Spring force ‘S’ required to set the brake
(ii) Width of shoes
Which shoe will have greater wear and what will be the ratio
of rates of wear of the two shoes.
Solution
1. Relation between friction and Normal forces
S S
FL2 1 60 m m
o
110 RN
1
o
RN 110
2
F L1
1 60 m m
O1 O2
60 60
Fig.
Ft
RN 
e
4  sin 
But e 
2  sin 2

since   0.3, 2  110   1.919
180
 110 
4  0.3 sin  
 e   2   0.3437
1.919  sin 110 
Ft
1
 RN 
1 0.3437
R N  2.91 F t
1 1
Similarly RN  2.91 F t
2 2
2. Calculation of spring force

Considering LH yoke, take moment about O 1,
S  320  F t  125  60   R N  160  2.91 Ft  160

2 2 2
(ie)
320S  65 F t  465.5 F t
2 2
320S  400.5 F t
2
 Ft  0.799 S
2
Considering RH yoke, take moment O2
S  320  F t  125  60  RN  160

1 2
320 S  65 F t  2.91 F t  160

1 1
320 S  473 F r
 F t  0.6 S
1
Now Braking Torque  F t  F t  r  250  10 3 Nmm (given)

1 2
 0.6 S  0.799 S  125  250  10 3
 S  1426.4 N
3. Wear depends upon the friction force
Ft Fl
2
 Wear ratio is 
Ft Fr
1
Ft Fl
2 0.799 S
  1.33 
Ft 0.6 S Fr
1
As F l  F r, LH side shoe will have greater wear
Determination of width of shoe

Determine the greater normal force and obtain
bearing pressure in terms of the unknown width of the
shoes; by knowing pressure value, b can be found out
R N  R nl  2.91 F l  2.91  0.799 S  2.91  0.799  1426.4

2
 3316.5 N
R N  R nr  2.91 F r
1
 2.91  0.6 S
 2.91  0.6  1426.4  2490.5 N
We find Rnl  R nr , and hence R nl will be used in

calculating the maximum bearing pressure.
Projected area of shoe
A  2r sin   b
 2  125  sin 55  b
 204.78 b mm 2
R nl 3316.5
P  Unit bearing pressure  
A 204.78 b
16.19
 N /mm 2
b
16.19
  10 6 N/m2
b
V  rubbing velocity
 Dn   250  10  3  650
 
60 60
 8.508 m/s
Pressure  1000 kPa given
16.19
 10 6  8.508  1000000
b
 b  137.74 mm
5.3.8 Internal Expanding Brake

Internal expanding brake is commonly used in
automobiles. It consists of two brake shoes S 1 and S2 and
outer surfaces are lined with friction material. These shoes
are pivoted at one end about O 1 and O2. The other end of
the shoes are made to contact a cam. When the cam
rotates, the brake shoes are pushed outwards. The friction
between the brake shoes and drum produces the braking
torque, which reduces the speed of the drum. The brake
shoes are held in their original position by means of a
spring.
When the drum rotates in the anti-clockwise

direction, lefthand shoe is known as leading or primary
shoe and the right hand shoe is known as trailing or
secondary shoe.
Refer PSG data book page No 7.99
Let
r  Internal radius of the brake drum
b  Face width of the shoe

R o tation
F F
r
D ru m

L in ing

a
c

O1 O2
Fig. 5.22
a  Distance from the centre of the drum to the shoe pivot

F  Actuating force
p  pressure at angle ‘’
 1  centre angle of heel from pivot
 2  centre angle of toe from pivot
 m  centre angle of point of maximum pressure from pivot.
M n  moment of normal force on the right shoe.

M n  moment of normal force on the left shoe.
M f  moment of the frictional force on the left shoe
pm  maximum pressure on the right shoe

pm   maximum pressure on the left shoe
  coefficient of friction
J  polar moment of inertia of the brake drum  Kg  m.sec 2
t
tr  temperature rise of the brake drum
C p  sp. heat of drum material
 0.13 for cast iro n
 0.116 fo r steel
Total moment of frictional force

2
 pm  b  r
 Mf 
sin  m
 sin  r  a cos  d
1
 pm  b  r a 

sin m  r cos 1  cos  2  4 cos 22  cos 21 
 
Total moment of normal force

2
pm b r
Mn 
sin m
 sin 2 d
1
1 pm b r a  1 
    1  sin 2   sin 22 
2 sin m  2 2 
For right shoe,
Mn  Mf
F
C
For left shoe
M n  M f
F
C
M npm M f pm
M n  and Mf 
pm pm
Braking torque
 cos 1  cos 2 
 M t   b r2    pm  pm 
 sin m  
Note 1
max  90 when 2  90
max  2 when  2  90
Note 2
If M f  M n, then the brake becomes self locking.

Problem 5.26: An automotive type internal – expanding shoe
is shown in the diagram. The face width of the friction lining
is 60 mm and the coefficient of friction is 0.35. The maximum
intensity of pressure is limited to 1.2 N/mm2. Assume angle
1 can be zero. Calculate (1) the actuating force ‘F’ and (2)
The torque capacity of the brake.
o
o 30
30
F F
R
1 50 o
1 20
o 1 20
1 77
1 25 R
o
30
o 30
Fig.
Solution
Assume that the maximum normal pressure will occur
between the lining on right hand shoe and the brake drum.
Therefore, for right hand shoe
1  0; max  90  when   90
2  120 max   2É when 2  90
Since, 2 is greater than 90
m  max  90
From the given diagram
a  125 mm
C  177 mm
r  150 mm
Given data
b  60 mm
  0.35
p  1.2 N/mm 2
 pm b r  a 
Mf   r  cos 1  c o s 2   4  cos 22  cos 21  
sin m     
0.35  1.2  60  150

  150  cos 0  cos 120 
sin 90
125
  cos 2120  cos 20 
4
 3780  150  1  0.5   31.25   0.5  1 
 3780  225  46.875   673312.5 N mm
Total moment of normal force
pm b  r 1 
Mn     2   1    sin 21  sin 22  
2 sin  m    2 
1.2  60  150  125


2  sin 90 
  1 
 120  180  2  sin 20  sin 2 120  
 
1
 675000 2.09  [0    0.866 ]
2
 1706000 N mm
Mn  Mf 1706000  673312.5
F 
C 177
 5834.39 N
Torque on the right hand shoe
 r2 pmax b  cos 1  c o s  2 
 M t    
 R sin m
0.35  150 2  1.2  60 c o s 0  c o s 120 


sin 90
M tR  283500 Nmm or 283.5 N m
For identical shoes, the expressions for M n and M f are

proportional to pmax .
For Left shoe, let pm is maximum pressure on the

left shoe.
M f  pm 673312.5  pm
Mf  
pmax 1.2 
 561093.75 pm
M n pm 1706000  pm

Similarly, MN  
pmax 1.2
 1421666.66 pm
M n  M f
For left shoe, F
C
1421666.66 pm  561093.75 pm

9037.78 
177
pm  1.858 N/mm 2
Since, shoes are identical
Torq ue on th e  p m
  M tL  MtR 
le ft hand shoe  pmax
283500  1.858

1.2
 438952.5 N mm
 438.9525 N mm
Therefore,
The to taltorque 
 283500  438952.5
capacity of the brace 
M t  722452.5 N mm
 722.4525 Nm
Alternately
Refer PSG data book, page No 7.99
 c o s 1  cos  2 
Braking torque   b r2    p m  p m 
 sin m  
 c o s 0  c o s 120  
 0.35  60  150 2    1.2  1.858  
 sin 90 
 472500 0.5 3.058
 722452.5 N mm
M t  722.452 Nm
Problem 5.27: An automotive type internal expanding double

shoe shown in fig. is 300 mm in diameter and is actuated by
a mechanism that exerts the same force (F) on each shoe. The
shoes are identical and have a face width of 32 mm. The lining
is a moulded asbestos having a coefficient of friction of 0.32
and a pressure limitation of 1000 k.Pa.
1. Determine the actuating force P, and
2. Find the braking capacity (i.e torque absorbing capacity of
the brake).
Solution
Given data
Diameter  300 mm  0.3 m
b  32 mm  0.032 m
  0.32
pmax  1000 kPa
 1000  10 3 N /m 2
o
27
F A F
1 00
0
15
O o
1 26
112
O1
O2
B
50 50
27
o Fig.
(i) Actuating force (F)

The force F is found on the basics that the maximum
pressure occured on shoe, as it is a right hand shoe (self
energizing)
From the fig:
 1  0
 2  126

 126 
180
 2.199 rad
  90
and sin   sin 90  1
From the fig, by using phythagorous theorem, we get
OO 1  
OB 2  BO 21
 112 2  50
 2
 122.65 mm
Now, the total moment of the normal forces about the

fulcrum O, equal to
1 pmax b  r  OO1  1 
Mn   2  1  sin 2  1  sin 2 2 
2 sin   2 
1  0.3 
  1000  10 3  32  10  3     0.12265
2  2 
1
[2.199  0  sin 0  sin 2  126]
2
 787.27 N  m
Again find moment of friction force m f about O 1
  pmax  b  r  OO1 
Mf   r cos 1  cos 2  c os 2 2  cos 2 1 
sin   4 
 0.3 
0.32  1000  10 3  32  10  3   
  2 
1
  0.3   0.12265

2  [cos 0  c o s 126    4
[cos 2  126  c o s 0]
  
 304.174 N  m
 The actuating force F
M n  Mf
F
l
787.27  304.174

0.112  0.100 
 2278.75 N
(ii) Braking capacity T B
The braking torque T B  for right hand shoe is given

by
T B   pmax  b  r2 cos  1  cos 2
2
 0.3 
 0.32  1000  10 3  32  10  3    cos 0  cos 126
 2 
 365.83 N  m
Now find T B for left hand shoe.
For identical shoes, the expressions of M n and M f are

both proportional to pmax.
 The maximum intensity of pressure for left hand

shoe  pmax
787.27 p max 787.27 p max

 M 1N  
pmax 1000  10 3
 7.813  10  3 pmax
and
304.174 pmax 304.174  pmax

Mf  
pmax 1000  10 3
 3.042  10  4 pmax
 F for left hand shoe equal to
M N   M f
F
l
8.813  10  4 pmax  3.042  10  4 pm ax

2278.75 
0.112  0.100
or pmax  445.04  10 3 N/m2
Torque required by left hand shoe
TB   pmax  b  r2 c o s 1  cos 2
2
3 3  0.3 
 0.32  445.04  10  32  10   c o s 0  cos 126
 2 
 162.8 N  m
 The braking torque T is the total torque produced

by both right and left hand shoes.
 T  T B  TB
 365.83  162.8
 528.64 N  m
Problem 5.28: An automotive type internal-expanding

double-shoe brake is shown in figure. The face width of friction
lining is 40 mm and the intensity of normal pressure is limited
to 1 N/mm2. The coefficient of friction is 0.32. The angle 1
can be assumed to be zero. Calculate (i) the actuating force P,

(ii) the torque-absorbing capacity of the brake.
(Apr/May 2008)
o
30
F F
1 00 .9 1 25 R
o
1 20
8 6.6
50 50
o
Fig. 30
Solution
Assume that the maximum normal pressure will occur
between the lining on right hand shoe and the brake drum.
 For right hand shoe
1  0;  max  90, when   90
2  120;  max  2 when 2  90 

Since 2 is greater than 90
m   max  90
From given diagram
a  100 mm ; c  187.5 mm ; r  125 mm
Also given
b  40 mm ;   0.32
pmax  1 N/mm 2

 pm br  a 
Mf   r c o s 1  c o s 2  cos 2  2  cos 2 1 
sin m  4 
0.32  1  40  125
 Mf   125 cos 0  c o s 120 
sin 90
100
 cos 2 120  c o s 2 0  ]
4
 1600 [125 1  0.5  25  0.5  1]
 240000 Nmm
Total moment of Normal force

pm b r a  1 
Mn   2  1  sin 2  1  sin 2 2 
2 sin  m  2 
1  40  125  100   1 
  120  180  2 sin 2 0  sin 2 120 
2 sin 90  
 1 
 250000  2.09 0    0.866 
 2 
 630750 Nmm
Mn  Mf
F
C
630750  240000
F
187.5
 2084 N
Torque absorbing capacity of brake from P.S.G Data

book, Pg.No. 7.99
Braking Torque
 cos 1  cos  2 
  br 2   pm  pm
 sin m 
 cos 0  cos 120 
 0.32  40  1252   1  pm
 sin 90 
pm is unknown (i.e.) Max. pressure on left shoe
Hence
M f  pm 240000 pm

Mf    240000 pm
pmax 1
Similarly
M n pm
Mn   630750 pm
P max
for left shoe
Mn  Mf
F
C
630750 pm  240000 pm
2084 
187.5
 pm  1
 Braking Torque
 cos 0  cos 120 
 0.32  40  1252   i  1
 sin 90 
 600000 Nmm  600 Nm
5.3.10 Energy considerations
When the rotating members of a machine are allowed

to stop by using a brake, the kinetic energy of rotation
must be absorbed by the brake.
When the members of a machine which are initially
at rest and it is required to rotate upto a speed, slipping
occurs between driver and driven until the driven member
rotates with the same speed of driver.
In case of clutch or brake the kinetic energy is
absorbed during slippage.
In the design of mechanical brake, the braking torque
depends on the amount of energy absorbed by the brake.
Let m  mass of the mechan ic al system
V 1  Initial velocity
V 2  final velocity
The kinetic energy absorbed by the brake
1
 KE  m  V 21  V 22 
2  
Similarly, in case of rotating body,
1  2
The Kinetic energy absorbed  KE  I    22 
2  1 
where I  mass moment of inertia of rotating body
 m .k2
k  radius of gyration
 1  Initial angular velocity

 2  final angular velocity
The energy absorbed by the brake
 E  M t   Jo ules
where M t  Braking torque N m
  angle through which the brake drum rotates

during the braking period in radian
 1  2 
Q t
 2 
t  time in seconds
5.3.11 Temperature Rise

The energy absorbed by the brake is converted into
heat. The heat produced between rubbing surfaces
increases the temperature of friction materials. When the
temperature rises the coefficient of friction reduces, which
in turn reduces the braking torque. At higher temperature
the wear of friction lining is high, which reduces the life
of lining material. In order to increase the life of tech lining
materials, the temperature should be kept within the
permissible value.
In general, it is very difficult to find the temperature
rise. But according to practical considerations, the given
equation is used for preliminary design.
Refer PSG databook, page No. 7.99
Hg
Temperature rise of brake tr 
W Cp
2 n 2 J
where Hg  heat generated per operation k.cal
1800  427
J polar moment of inertia of the brake drum

assembly. kg f m. sec 2
W  w eight o f the brake drum, kg f
C p  Specific heat of drum material
 0.13 for cast iron
 0.116 for steel
n  speed of the drum, rpm
In SI units:
E
Temperature rise  t 
mC
where E  Total energy absorbed by the brake (J)
m  Mass of the drum assembly (kg)

C  Specific heat of the brake drum material
 460 J/kg C for cast iron
5.3.12 Friction Materials
A brake or clutch friction material should have the
following characteristics.
1. A high and uniform coefficient of friction
2. High resistance to wear
3. It should withstand high temperatures
4. It should have high heat conductivity
For the characteristics of friction materials,
Refer PSG databook, page No. 7.97
5.4 GENEVA MECHANISM

Refer P.S.G Data book
(Page No. 7.81, 7.82, 7.83, 7.84)
Geneva mechanism consists of a Geneva wheel with

a number of slots and a driving disc (Crank) whose
projected pin enters the slot and causes the intermittent
rotation of the “Geneva wheel.”
This mechanism is used in rotary tables and indexing

turrets in machine tools and in automatic machines. The
number of slots in the mechanism ranges from three to
eight depending on the applications.
Z  No. of slots on the driven disc.
OP  e  Centre distance
OB  r  Radius of the driving crank
R  Radius of Geneva wheel
  Semi-indexing angle (driven)
  Semi-indexing angle (driver)
  Angular velocity of driving crank (Assumed to be

constant)
d  Angular velocity of driven disc.
 OBP  90 (P. No. 7.81 of PSG Data book)

    90 
2
 Z  2
 
2 2Z
s c l)
D i ee
e n Wh
iv a
Dr nev
e
(G
R
wd
e B

o
90
3
O
D riving D isc
(or) C rank r
Fig.5.23 External Gen eva Mechanisam
R  
1   sin   cos   cos    

1  2
e Z
 
where R  Radius of Geneva wheel.
 Length of the slot h r


hrRe e
re
 
 e sin  e cos  e
2 Z r  e sin 
    
h  e  sin  c o s  1   e  sin 1
Z Z Z
 

R  e  cos 2
Z
h    
(or)   sin  cos  1 
e  Z Z 
The pin enters the Geneva wheel tangentially with
no shock. i.e., The centre lines of the slot and crank must
be mutually perpendicular at engagement and at
disengagement.
The circular segment attached to the crank effectively

locks the wheel against rotation when the roller is not in
engagement, and also positions the wheel for correct
engagement of the roller with the next slot.
 For entry without shock,

r 
  sin   sin
e Z
  Z  2
 
2  2Z
 t  time taken for one complete rotation of driving

crank, in seconds.
60

n
where n  speed of rotation of crank in rpm;
tr Z2
 
t 2Z
w here tr  resting time, seconds.
 Angular acceleration of driven disc, at the start

and finish of indexing.

 do   2tan
Z
2N
where,   rad /sec
60
Z  No. of slots
P
P
d R



e A
A
90 o
B
r

e

r
 
Fig.5.24
 sin 
tan  
1   cos
 d  Angular velocity of driven disc.
cos   
 
1  2 cos   2
 d  Angular acceleration of driven disc.

1  2 sin 

 2 2
2
1  2 cos    
  
 dmax   
1
 To avoid the wheel overhanging the bearing,
dW   
 2  1  sin 
e  Z 
Non-interference of Geneva wheel shaft-with driving
disc (or) The shaft of the driving disc does not interfere
with the geneva disc, the following condition has to be
satisfied.
d   
 2 1  cos 
e  Z
where dW  diameter of wheel shaft.
Problem 5.29: The fig. shows a Geneva mechanism used to

obtain intermittent rotary motion from continuous rotation. The
pin A is carried in a constant speed shaft which is rotating
at 100 rpm, and it engages with a slotted member.
OP  125 mm; OA  88 mm; POA  20; Find the
instantaneous angular velocity and angular acceleration of the
slotted member. (May/June 2010)
Crank angle    20

N  100 rpm
2N 2  100
   10.47 rad/sec
60 60
r 88
 
e 125
  0.704
o
20

88
1 25
A

Fig.5.25
OA  r  Radius of the driving crank  88 mm
OP  e  Centre distance  125 mm
Angular velocity of driven disc (or) slotted member
c o s   
 d  
1  2 cos   2
0.704 cos 20   0.704

d   10.47
1  2  0.704  cos 20  0.7042
1.7372
  10.06 rad/sec
0.1725
Angular acceleration of driven disc
1  2 sin 

 d   2
1  2 c o s   2
0.704 1  0.704 2 sin 20

d   2 2
 10.47 2
[ 1  20.704 cos 20  0.704 ]
13.313
  448.25 rad/sec 2
0.0297
Problem 5.30: A Geneva wheel is to have six slots. Driving

crank radius is 50 mm. Determine various dimensions of
geneva wheel. (October 2000)
Solution:
Given data:
Z = number of slots on the driven disc  6
r  Driving crank radius  50 mm
For entry without shock,
r 
  sin   sin
e Z
where e  Centre distance.
r 
  sin
e Z
r
e

sin
Z
50
e  centre distance   100 mm
180
sin
6
e  100 mm
r 50
But, sin     0.5
e 100
where,   semi – indexing angle (driven)
  sin  1 0.5
  30
R
  radius ra tio   cot
r
1 50
 R  r c o t   50    86.6025 mm
tan tan 30
Radius of Geneva wheel  R  86.6025 mm
h  Slot length  r  R  e
 50  86.6025  100
h  36.6025 mm
To avoid the wheel overhanging the bearing
dw   
 2  1  sin 
e  Z 
 180 
dw  2  100  1  sin
 6 
dw  100 mm
Angle of locking action
 180
 Z  2  6  2  240
Z 6

Indexing time ratio   

where   Semi – indexing angle driver
 
     30  60 
2 2
60
  0.333
180
Note: If n  100 rpm, (speed of rotation of crank is given)

then,
t  time taken for one complete rotation of the driving

crank in seconds
60 60
   0.6
n 100
Time for indexing  ti   t  0.333  0.6  0.199 sec
Z2 62
Resting time  tn  t  0.6  0.4 sec
Z2 62
5.5 RATCHET AND PAWL MECHANISM

Ratchet and Pawl mechanism is mainly used in
hoisting machines. It allows rotation in one direction and
prevents rotation in other direction. In hoisting machines,
this mechanism allows to raise the load, but prevents the
load falling down due to gravity. The mechanism is shown
in Fig. 5.5.1.
This mechanism consists of (1) Ratchet (2) Pawl.

Ratchet is fitted to the driver shaft and the Pawl is fixed
to the machine frame. The pawl engaging the ratchet locks
the clockwise rotation of the driver shaft. When the rotation
is reversed, the pawl gets disengaged and allows the
ratchet to rotate in counter clockwise direction.
Ratchet and Pawl Mechanism (7.85 and 7.86) Refer

PSG Data book.
1. Material:
Ratchet - Grey cast iron Grade 15 - 30, Cast steel,

C30 and C45.
Pawl - C45, 40 Cr 1
Ratchet and pawl are surface hardened to 50 HRC.
2. No. of teeth on ratchet wheel
Z  6 to 8
 12 to 20
 16 to 25
3. Values of p - linear unit pressure - P/b kgf/cm
P
p where P  Peripheral force (or)
b
G
P

o
90
D
t
b
a1
(a) (b)
b
P e1
h
a P
x
(c) (d)
Fig.5.26
P 2M t
b 
p Zm
Steel pawl and C.I. ratchet Z  no. of teeth on ratchet

- 50  100 kgf/cm
Steel pawl and steel m  D/Z (module)
ratchet - 150  300 kgf/cm
  b/m  1.5 to 3.0 D tip circle dia. of
ratchet.  m Z
M t  torque transmitted


3 Mt
4. Module: m  2
Z  [ b ]
where [ b ]  300 to 500 kg f/cm 2 (for C45 steel)
Other Dimensions
a  m; h  0.75m ; bm
5. Bending moment M b  P  h
Design of Pawl
M b  P  e1
1
 6M b
1 P 
Total stress    
2 xb

bx 


3 P b 
Dia. of the pawl pin  d  2.71 a 
2 [  ]  2
b
1

where a1  thickness of collar on pawl pin (from table 7.86)
[ b ] for C 45 steel 30 to 50 N/mm2
Problem 5.31: Design a ratchet and pawl mechanism for the

following data:
Braking torque = 180 N-m
Brake drum diameter = 400 mm
Solution:
Given data:
M t  180 N  m (Convert in to kg f  cm
 1800 kg f  cm
Let Z  No. of teeth on ratchet  18 assume
Step 1:
Calculate module (m)

assume   2.5


Mt
2
3
and [b]  450 kgf/c m2
Z  [b]
for ratchet


3 1800
2  0.8925 c m
18  2.5  450
Take m  1 cm or 10 mm
From data book,
a  m  1 cm;
h  0.75 m  0.75 c m
b  m  2.5  1  2.5 cm
Step 2:
2M t
Peripheral force  P  But D  Zm
D
2  1800
  200 kg f
18  1
Step 3:
P 200
Linear unit pressure    80 kg f/cm 2
b 2.5
Step 4:
Refer PSG databook Page No. 7.85 Calculation of
diameter of pawl pin
y


P b  [b] 
d  2.71   a1  FOS
2[b]  2  for C45 steel (Pawl)
y  36 kgf/mm 2


3 200  25 
d  2.71   6 Take FOS  5
2  7.2  2 
36
 17.228 mm  [ b] 
5
Take d  18 mm  7.2 kgf/ mm 2
Refer table (P.No. 7.86)
of PSG Data book
a1  6 mm
b  2.5 cm = 25 mm
Step 5:
Checking stress for pawl
Refer PSG databook page No. 7.85
6M b1 P M 1  Pe1
   [b]
bx 2 x.b e1  a  1 cm  10 mm (assume)
6  2000 200 M b  20010
 2
 1
25  10 10  25
 2000 kg f  mm
 4.8  0.8
x  a  1 cm  10 mmassume 
 5.6 kgf/ mm 2
b  2.5 c m  25 mm
2
 7.2 kgf/ mm
 Design is safe
Two Marks Question and Answers TM.1
Two Marks Question and Answers
Chapter - I
1.1 Name the types of transmission belts.

Based on the belt cross-section, the types of
transmission belts are:
1. Flat belt
2. V-belt
3. Round belt.
1.2 What are the commonly used belt materials?
1. Leather
2. Cotton or Canvas
3. Rubber
4. Nylon core
5. Balata
6. Fabric.
1.3 State Law of Belting
The law of belting states that the center line of the
belt as it approaches the pulley must lie on a plane
perpendicular to the axis of that pulley, or must lie in the
plane of the pulley, otherwise the belt will run off from the
pulley.
1.4 Explain the term Crowning of Pulleys

Pulleys are provided with a slight dwell to prevent
the belt from running off the pulley. This is known as
crowning of pulleys. The crowning maybe tapered (or)
rounded. The height of the crown depends upon the width,
speed and length of belt.
TM.2 Design of Transmission Systems
1.5 What are the different types of flat belt drives?

The different types of flat belt drives are:
1. Open belt drive
2. Crossed belt drive
3. Quarter-turn belt drive
4. Compound belt drive
5. Belt drive with idler pulley
6. Stepped or cone pulley
7. Fast and loose pulley drive.
1.6 What are the advantages of flat belt drive?

The advantages of flat belt drive are:
1. They are more flexible and absorb shock loads and

vibration.
2. They are relatively cheap and easy to maintain.
3. They can be used in dusty or abrasive
atmosphere.
4. The design of flat belt drive is simple and
inexpensive.
5. They can be used for long distance, even upto 15
m.
6. They are quiet and efficient.
1.7 Why is the face of a pulley crowned?
(Nov/Dec 2009)
To keep the belt running on the pulley face, it is

necessary that the face has to be crowned.
1.8 Define maximum tension in a belt?

(Arp/May 2008)
Maximum Tension in a belt T    b  t
where
  m amimum safe stre ss
b  width of the belt
t  th ickness of the belt
1.9 What is slip in a flat belt drive?

In a flat belt drive, when the frictional grip between
the pulley and belt is insufficient, the driver will have some
forward motion without belt, which is known as slip.
1.10 What is creep in a flat belt drive?

Due to the difference in tensions on tight side and
slack side, the belt undergoes a change in strain as it
passes around the pulley. To compensate for these different
strains the belt moves relative to the surface of the pulley.
This relative movement of the belt is called creep.
1.11 How does creep effect the belt design?

The creep in belt leads to slip, loss of power and
velocity ratio. So, elastic nature of the belt also taken into
account in the belt design.
1.12 What is centrifugal tension in a belt drive?

When the belt runs over the pulley, some centrifugal
force is created due to the belt velocity, which increases the
belt tension on both tight as well as the slack side. The
increase of tension due to centrifugal force is called
centrifugal tension.
1.13 What are the factors affecting the coefficient of

friction between a belt and pulley?
The coefficient of friction between the belt and the
pulley depends upon the factors like material of belt,
material of pulley, slip of belt, and speed of belt. The value
of coefficient of friction lies between 0.25 to 0.30.
1.14 What are the factors to be considered in design
of a belt drive?
The factors to be considered in design of a belt drive
are power to be transmitted, input and output speeds, the
centre distance, peak load, nature of load, effect of
centrifugal force, the ratio of tight side of slack side tension,
coefficient of friction, etc.
1.15 Sketch the cross section of a V-belt and label its
important parts. (Nov/Dec 2009)
2  = 40
o
Fa bric and
W ru bb er co ve r
x
Fa bric
T C o rds
R u bb er
b
2
Cross-section of a V-b elt

1.16 Give the relationship of ratio of tensions in a

V-belt drive. (Apr/May 2008)

T1 sin 
e
T2
where, T 1  Ten sions on tight side
T 2  Tensions on slack side
  A ngle of conta ct in radians

  S emi groove angle
1.17 State reasons why V-belt drive is preferred over
flat belt drive.
(a) Replacement of V-belt is easy, because V-belts are
available according to standards.
(b) Power transmitted by the V-belts is more.
(c) For smaller centre distances V-belts are more
suitable.
(d) Efficiency is high, when compared to flat belt.
1.18 How will you determine the no. of belts
required in the design of V-belt drives?
P  Fa
k W  Fc  F d
P  given power in kW
F a  service factor
k W  power transmitted per belt
F c  correction factor for length
F d  correction factor for arc of contact.

1.19 What are the factors affecting the belt life?

The belt life is very much affected by the following
factors. Decrease in pulley diameter, increase in belt
thickness, increase in tight side tension, too large centre
distance, service and environmental conditions, deflection
in load, etc.
1.20 Give few disadvantages of V belt drive over flat

belt drive.
The disadvantages of V belt drive over flat belt drive are:
1. V belts cannot be used for large centre distances.

2. Design of V belts are more complicated.
3. V belts are not so durable.
4. V belts are costly.
5. The centre distance should be exact for V belts.
1.21. What are the advantages of wire rope drives?
(a) High strength to weight ratio.
(b) Silent operation at high speeds.
(c) Greater reliability.
(d) High efficiency.
(e) Low cost.
(f) Ability to withstand shock loads.
1.22 Name some applications of wire rope drive.
Wire rope drive is best suited for the applications
where large amount of power is to be transmitted over a
long distance. Wire ropes are used in elevators, mine hoists,
cranes, conveyors, hauling devices, suspension bridges, etc.
1.23 Where are the stresses induced in a wire rope?

A wire rope is generally subjected to the following
stresses.
1. Direct stress due to axial loads.

2. Bending stresses due to bending of ropes over
sheaves.
3. Stresses due to acceleration or retardation of
moving masses.
4. Stresses during starting.
1.24 How are the wire ropes designated?
The wire ropes are designated by a number specifying
the number of strands and number of wires in each strand.
The wire diameter, type of construction and wire material
grade are also included in the designation.
1.25 What is the meaning of wire designation

6  12/6/1?
6 - refers to the number of strands
12/6/1 - refers number of wires in a strand are

12  6  1  19.
(i.e. 19 wires are formed by 12 wires over 6 wires

with 1 core wire)
1.26 What is a chain drive?

The chain drive consists of an endless chain running
over two or more sprockets to transmit power. The chain
consists of large number of links connected by pin joints
and the sprockets are toothed wheels with a special tooth
profile.
1.27 What are the advantages of chain drive?

The advantages of chain drive are:
1. Compact drive when compared to flat-belt drives.

2. No slip between chain and sprocket.
3. High efficiency of the drive.
4. Possibility of driving several sprockets by using a
single chain.
1.28 What is a silent chain?
Silent or inverted tooth chain consists of a series of
links formed form laminated plates. A special profile is
used to reduce noise level for chain links and sprocket. The
links themselves engage with the sprocket teeth directly to
reduce noise. They can be operated at high speeds and has
more reliability.
1.29 How are chains designated?

According to BIS (IS: 2403-1967) the roller chains are
designated as per roller diameter and number of stands in
the chains. For example,
5.0 S IS: 2403-1967 represents single strand chain with

roller diameter 5 mm.
10.0 D IS: 2403-1967 represents double strand chain

with roller diameter 12.17 mm.
24.0 T IS: 2403-1967 represents triple strand chain

with roller diameter 25.5 mm.
1.30 Why is odd number of teeth for sprocket

preferred?
In order to distribute wear evenly on all the chain
links, it is the usual practice to have odd numbers of teeth
on the smaller sprocket and an even number of pitches in

the chain.
1.31 What are the types of failure of chain drive?
The various failures in chain drives are:
1. Elongation: It is caused by increased pitch due to joint

wear under the action of tension and dynamic loads during
operation.
2. Failure of Joints and Plates

Improper erection causes misalignment of sprockets
and wear occurs on the plate of the chain, which causes
the failure of joints.
3. Wear of the sprocket teeth

Wear of sprocket occur due to the relative motion
between bush and the teeth.
1.32 What are the main classification of chains?

The main classification of chains are:
1. Roller Chains
2. Bushed Chains
3. Silent (inverted tooth) Chains.
Again the roller and bushed chains are of three types.
(a) Simpler
(b) duplex
(c) Triplex.
1.33 List the applications of the chain drives.

Chain drives are widely used in machine tools,
material handle equipments, automobiles, bicycles, wood
working machinery, construction machinery, agricultural
machinery, rolling mills, coal cutters, etc.
1.34 Explain the chordal action in chain drive.

When the chain passes over a sprocket, it moves as
a series of chords instead of a continuous arc as in case of
the belt drive. Thus the centre line of the chain does not
have uniform radius.
1.35 What are the limiting values on number of

teeth on sprockets?
The minimum number of teeth recommended for
small sprocket is 17 and the maximum number of teeth on
larger sprocket can be between 100 and 120.
Chapter - II
2.1 State the advantages of the gear drives over

other type of drives.
The advantages of the gear drives over other types of
drives are:
1. Gear drives are positive drives.

2. Suitable for shorter centre distance.
3. The gear drives are better than others in case of
amount of power transmission and efficiency.
4. Change of speed is very easy in gear drives.
2.2 State the fundamental law of gearing?

The fundamental law of gear drive states that the
common normal to the tooth profile at the point of contact
should always pass through a fixed point, called the pitch
point, in order to obtain a constant velocity ratio.
2.3 How is gear classified?

1. Based-on peripheral velocity
(i) Low velocity (0 to 3 m/s)
(ii) Medium velocity (3 to 15 m/s)
(iii) High velocity (15 m/s and above).
2. Based on mutual position of shafts
(i) Parallel shafts-spur, helical, herringbone gears.
(ii) Intersecting shafts-straight bevel, spiral bevel
gears.
(iii) Non-Parallel, non-intersecting shafts-crossed
helical, spiral, hypnoid gears.
3. Based on the relative motion of shafts
(i) Row gears-(relatively motion of shafts are fixed).
(ii) Planetary and differential gears.

4. Based on contact area
(i) External gears
(ii) Internal gears.
5. Based on teeth on wheel
(i) Straight teeth-spur gears
(ii) Helical teeth-helical, herringbone gears
(iii) Inclined teeth-bevel gears
(iv) Curved teeth-spiral gears.
2.4 Define the following terms of a gear. (a) pressure

angle ; (b) diameteral pitch D p
Pressure angle : It is the angle between the common

normal of two gear teeth profiles at the point of contact
and the common tangent at the pitch point.
Diametral pitch D p: It is the ratio of number of teeth
of the pitch circle diameter in inches.
2.5 Define ‘module’ of a gear.
The module is a basic parameter, by which a gear
tooth is specified and is equal to the ratio between pitch
circle diameter in millimeters and number of teeth.
2.6 What is a pitch point?
The intersecting point of the line of action and the
line joining the axes of two mating gears is called as pitch
point. The circle drawn through pitch point, from gear
centre is called pitch circle.
2.7 What is interference in gears?
In a pair of gears in mesh, the possibility of the tip
of one tooth digging into the portion of the flank of the
mating tooth gear can occur in certain conditions. This
phenomenon is termed as interference.
2.8 How can interference in gears be avoided?
The interference in gears can be avoided by ensuring
that the point of contact between the two teeth always
remains on the involute profiles of the both the teeth. This
also can be avoided by,
(1) reducing the tooth height,
(2) increasing the pressure angle, and
(3) the radial flank of pinion teeth be cut back.
2.9 What is the minimum number of teeth on pinion

to avoid interference?
The minimum number of teeth on the pinion in order
to avoid interference are given in the following table.
Pressure angle
14.5 20
Z min (Theoretical) 32 17
Z min (Practical) 27 14
2.10 Explain undercutting in gears.

While generating gear teeth, if there is interference
of the cutter with the rotating job, then a recess is cut at
the root of the gear tooth which is known as
undercutting. This happens when the cutter extends
beyond the base circle of the pinions having small number
of teeth.
2.11 What is backlash?

Backlash is defined as the play between a mating pair
of gear teeth in assembled condition. It is the amount by
which the width of the tooth space exceeds the thickness
of the meshing tooth measured on pitch circle.
2.12 What are skew gears and list its application?

When the helical gears are mounted on non-parallel,
non-intersecting shafts, and mesh with each other, they
form a skew gearing (or) crossed helical gearing.
Skew gears are used to drive the cam shafts and

auxiliaries on small internal combustion engines, feed
mechanisms on machine tools, distributor drive of

automobile engines, etc.
2.13 Give the requirements of a gear materials.
The main requirements for a gear materials are low
cost, easy to manufacture, high strength, high wear
resistance, low coefficient of friction and noiseless
operation.
2.14 What are the materials commonly used for

gears?
Cast iron, steel, brass, Al-Zinc alloy, phosphor bronze,
nonmetallic materials like wood, fibre reinforced plastics,
backlite, mica, vulcanized rubber, composites, lead/graphite,
pressed paper, etc. are commonly used as gear materials.
2.15 What are the main types of gear tooth failure?

(May/June 2013)
(i) Tooth breakage (due to static and dynamic loads)

(ii) Tooth wear
(a) Abrasion
(b) Pitting
(c) Scoring or seizure
2.16 What are the common profiles used for gear
tooth?
The common types of profiles used for gear tooth are:
1. Involute
2. Cycloidal
3. Combination of the above two (composite system)

2.17 Write any two properties of involute curve.

Involute curve has the following properties.
1. The shape of the involute is dependent only upon the

size of the base circle.
2. If one involute, rotating at a uniform rate of
motion, acts against another involute, it will
transmit a uniform angular motion to the second,
regardless of the distance between the centers of
the two base circles.
2.18 What are the characteristics of cycloidal gears?
Cycloidal gears do not have interference. A cycloidal
tooth is stronger than involute tooth because it has
spreading flanks in contrast to the radial flanks of an
involute tooth. Also cycloidal gear teeth have less sliding
and therefore less wear, better contact and lower contact
stress.
2.19 Compare involute and cycloid profiles.
Involute profile Cycloid profile

Pressure angle Constant Varies from zero
to maximum.
Running Smooth Less smooth
Manufacturing Easy Complicate
Velocity ratio Small variation This does not
in centre distance permit any
does not affect variation in
velocity ratio centre distance.
2.20 What are the disadvantages of using cycloidal

profile for a gear tooth?
The disadvantages of using cycloidal profile for a gear
tooth are:
1. The cycloidal profile cutters are formed with

greater difficulty and with less accuracy.
2. The cost of machining cycloidal profile is very
high.
3. Accurate centre distance setting of cutter is
required.
4. The cycloidal profile does not permits even a
small variation in centre distance of gears without
undercutting or variation in velocity ratio.
5. In the cycloidal profile system, the pressure angle
varies from zero at pitch line to maximum at the
tip of the teeth.
2.21 What are the general characteristics of spur
gearing?
The general characteristics of spur gearing are:
1. Transmit torque between parallel shafts.

2. Teeth are parallel to axis.
3. Line contact takes place during mating.
4. Can be used as sliding gears in gear boxes.
5. Easy to design and manufacture.
2.22 What are the applications of spur gears?
The spur gears are used in sliding gearboxes, machine
tools, automobiles, material handling equipments, rolling
mills, marine power plants, etc.
2.23 Why are spur gears preferred for certain

applications?
Spur gears are preferred for certain applications due
to following reasons.
1. Provision can be made for shifting of gears

2. Higher efficiency (99%)
3. The maintenance of drive is inexpensive and life
is long
4. Design and fabrication is easier and more
economical.
2.24 What is interchangeability of gears?
In a gear drive the ability of replacing a failed gear
by a similar gear (same tooth form) without affecting the
functionality of the drive is called interchangeability of
gears. This interchangeability is available in spur and
helical gears.
2.25 What is meant by cluster gears?
If two or more gears are cut on same blank with gap

between them and they are functioning as a single unit,
then they are called as cluster gears. The cluster gears
are widely used in speed gearboxes as sliding gears. They
are manufactured either by die forging, smith forging or by
turning form bar stock and the teeth are machined.
2.26 How teeth does contact occur in spur and in

helical gears?
In spur gears, the contact between meshing teeth
occurs along the entire face width of the tooth. In helical
gears, the contact between meshing teeth begins with a
point on the leading edge of the tooth and gradually
extends along the diagonal line across the tooth.
2.27 What are the advantages of helical gears over
straight spur gears?
The advantages of helical gears over straight spur
gears are:
1. High peripheral speed (20 to 35 m/sec).
2. Low noise.
3. High power transmission.
4. More smooth engagement, etc.
2.28 What are the demerits of a helical gear?
The demerits of a helical gear are:
1. The axial thrust is produced (thrust bearings are
required)
2. Complicated design (design is based on equivalent
number of teeth)
3. Machining of gear is difficult and costly
4. The transmission efficiency is slightly less
compared to the spur gear.
2.29 Differentiate between the normal pitch and
axial pitch in helical gears.
The axial pitch is the distance parallel to axis
between similar faces of adjacent teeth, whereas normal
pitch is the distance between similar faces of adjacent teeth
along a helix on the pitch cylinders normal to the teeth.
2.30 Show the circular pitch, normal pitch in a

helical gear using a sketch.
2.31 What is the virtual number of teeth in a helical

gear?
The virtual number of teeth or equivalent number of
teeth of a helical gear is the number of teeth on an
assumed equivalent spur gear whose pitch circle is in a
plane perpendicular to helical tooth. The virtual number of
teeth is given by,
Z
Zv  Where ; Z  number of teeth.
cos 
2.32 What are the ranges of helix angle used for

helical gears?
Helical gears have helix angle between 8 and 25.
Herringbone gears used in industrial gears have helix angle
between 20 and 30 and herringbone gears used in turbines
have helix angle upto 45.
2.33 What is a herringbone gear?

A gear fabricated such that half of its width is cut
with helix in one direction and other half of the teeth is
cut in opposite direction is called herringbone gear. The
herringbone gears are cut with help of gear shaping
machine. They do not induce any axial component of force
as in case of helical gears.
2.34 When do we prefer herringbone gears?
Herringbone gears are preferred to transmit large
power, without any noise and axial thrust. They are applied
in rolling mills, drive of reciprocating machineries, drive for
hoisting machineries, drive for machines tools, drives for
alternators from steam turbines, etc.
2.35 What are the merits and demerits of
herringbone gear?
The merits of a herringbone gears are silent
operation, absence of vibration and axial thrust, higher
efficiency, higher velocity ratio and high load carrying
capacity with high speeds and the demerits are high cost
and requirement of large space.
Chapter - III
3.1 State the use of bevel gears. (Apr/May 2008)
The bevel gears are used for transmitting power at a

constant velocity ratio between two shafts whose axes
intersect at a certain angle.
3.2 What are the various forces acting on bevel

gears?
The normal force F n acting (F r ) p
Pinion
on bevel gear tooth is
perpendicular to tooth profile and (F a ) p
making an angle  with pitch
circle. This normal force is (F r ) g (F a ) g
resolved into tangential
component F t radial component G ear
F r and axial component F a.
F r  Fttan  c o s 
F a  F ttan  sin 
where   pressure angle and   pitch angle.
 2M t 
Ft   ;
d
 av 
M t  torque on bevel gear
dav  pitch circle and of bend gear.
3.3 What are Mitre gears.

When the angle between two shafts is 90 and no. of
teeth on pinion is equal to no. of teeth on wheel (i.e.
Z 1  Z2 and i  1 ), then the arrangement of bevel gears are
called mitre gears.
3.4 What are the crown gears.

When the bevel gears connect two shafts whose axes
intersect at an angle greater than a right angle and one
of the bevel gear has a pitch angle of 90, then it is known
as a crown gear. The crown gear corresponds to a rack in

spur gearing.
3.5 Classify the bevel gears.
The bevel gears are classified as
1. Straight bevel gears 2. Spiral bevel gears

3. Zerol bevel gears 4. Hypnoid gears
5. Spiroid gears 6. Mitre gear.
3.6 What are the advantages of spiral bevel gears

over straight teeth bevel gears?
The advantages of the curved tooth spiral bevel gears
over the straight ones are in general the same as those of
helical gears over spur gears, namely lesser noise, greater
contact ratio, gradual engagement of the mating teeth,
greater load carrying capacity (15 to 25%), lesser vibrations,
etc.
3.7 Define the following gears. (a) Zerol bevel gear

(b) Hypnoid gear.
Zerol bevel gear is a patented bevel gear having curve
teeth but with a zerol spiral angle.
Hypnoid gear is similar to spiral bevel gear but with the

axis of the pinion is offset from the axis of the gear. In
hypnoid gears pitch surfaces are hyperboloids of revolution.
The tooth action between such gear is a combination of
rolling and sliding.
3.8 What are the advantages of hypnoid gears over

bevel gears?
The advantages of hypnoid gears are comparatively
smoother action and possibility of extending the shafts past
each other. So the bearings can be used on both sides of

the gear and the pinion. This makes the drive more rigid
and hence higher power can be transmitted than bevel
gears.
3.9 Why is hypnoid gear used in automobiles?
The hypnoid gear is used in automobile gear box
because the drive can be placed beneath the floor level.
3.10 Differentiate between the spiral bevel gears and

hypnoid gears.
The spiral and hypnoid gears are similar and the
most important difference being that the pinion axis of
hypnoid gear set is offset above or below the gear axis.
3.11 How are bevel gears classified based on pitch

angle?
Based on pitch angle the bevel gears are classified as
External gears 1  2  90
Internal gears 1  2  90
Crown gears 1 or 2  90
Miter gears 1  2  45
Where 1, 2 are pitch angles of pinion and gears

respectively.
3.12 When do you prefer worm and worm wheel

drive?
We prefer the worm and worm wheel drive in
following circumstances:
1. In large reduction in velocity ratio is required

2. Self locking specially is required

3. To connect non-intersecting perpendicular shafts.
3.13 List various application of worm gear drive.
The worm gear drives are used to connect
non-intersecting shafts whose axes are right angles to each
other. They are used in cranes, lifting machines, automobile
steering mechanism, indexing head, table drive for hobbling
machine, auto feed drive in lathe carriage, reduction gear
boxes, etc.
3.14 Give the advantages of worm gear drive.

The advantages of the worm gear drive are:
1. Transmission ratio upto 500:1 with comparatively

low weight.
2. Smaller overall dimensions and space
requirement.
3. Smooth and noiseless operation.
4. Irreversibility or self locking ability.
3.15 What are the disadvantages of worm gear
drive?
The disadvantages of worm gear drive are:
1. Wear is more due to sliding.

2. Transmission efficiency is less (only 65 to 70%).
3. Not suitable for high power applications.
4. Drive is costlier because use of materials like
phosphor bronze.
5. High amount heat to be dissipated using
lubricating oil.
3.16 What are the factors controlling the efficiency

of the worm drive?
The factors controlling the efficiency of the worm
drive are lead angle, number of starts in worm, surface
finish, type and amount of lubrication and type of design
of the system. The efficiency of the worm gearing also
depends on the material of the worm and worm wheel and
the rubbing velocity.
3.17 How efficiency of worm drive can be increased?

Worm drive efficiency can be increased by
1. Increasing the lead angle.

2. Using multistart worm with small diameter.
3. Improving finish, lubrication, etc.
4. Using rigid, non-yielding worms with smooth,
ground or polished flanks.
3.18 Define terms of worm gear drive. (a) helix
angle, and (b) lead angle.
Helix angle: It is the angle between the tangent to the
thread helix on the pitch cylinder and the axis of the worm.
Helix angle of worm wheel + lead angle of worm = 90
Lead angle: It is the angle between the tangent to the

pitch helix and the plane of rotation.
3.19 In which gear drive self-locking is available?

Self-locking is available in worm and worm wheel
drive. Condition for self-locking is the friction angle of the
surfaces in contact is greater than the lead angle of the
worm.
3.20 What is irreversibility in worm gears and how

is it obtained?
The worm drive is so designed that the gear can not
turn the worm although the worm can turn the gear. If
the worm wheel is unable to drive the worm, the
phenomenon is called irreversibility (ability to transmit
motion in one direction only). The irreversibility is obtained
by having the friction angle of worm greater then the lead
angle. It is also known as self locking ability of the gear.
3.21 Write short notes on worm and worm wheel?

The relative sliding of the profiles of the mating
members in a worm gear drive leads to seizure due to wear.
Therefore the allowable (or) designed contact stresses are
assigned depending on the combination of contacting
materials and the velocity of sliding.
3.22 Name the materials used for the manufacture of

worm and worm wheel?
Materials for Worm
Worms are made of steel.
Low carbon alloy steels case hardened to 55 to 63 RC
Medium carbon alloy steels surface hardened to 50 to

55 RC.
Materials for Worm Wheel
Cast iron used for low speed, light duty drives -

velocity upto 2 m/sec.
Tintless bronzes and brasses are used for velocities

upto 8 m/sec.
Cast tin, bronzes are used for velocities upto 25 m/sec.

3.23 Usually worm is made of hard material and

worm gear is made of softer material - Justify.
(Nov/Dec 2009)
Because of relatively high sliding velocities the worm

material is harder than the worm wheel material. The
worm goes through many more contact stress cycles than
the worm wheel, so it is advantageous to use harder, more
durable material for the worm.
3.24 Why is the crossed helical gear drive not used

for power transmission? (Nov/Dec 2007)
When helical gears are mounted on non-parallel
shafts (i.e.) crossed helical gears, the gears may be of same
or opposite hand. Crossed helical gears are essentially
non-enveloping worm gears. The teeth have point contact
with each other. For this reason they will carry only very
small loads and hence they are for instrumental
applications and not for transmission of power.
3.25 What is Lewis (tooth) form factor?

(Apr/May 2008)
F t  bm b Y
where the Y   y, is called the Lewis from factor;

whose value depends on the number of teeth and pressure
angle of the gear drive. The empirical relations for the
Lewis form factor are
for a 20 involute full-depth tooth

 0.912 
Y    0.154 
 Z 
for a 20 sub tooth

 0.95 
Y    0.175 
 Z 
for a 14.5  tooth

 0.684 
Y    0.124 
 Z 
3.26 What is the main disadvantage of a helical

gear drive? How is it eliminated?
The helical gears drive will produce axial thrusts. The
axial thrusts can be eliminated by the use of double helical
gears. Both hands produce axial thrusts which are equal
and opposite to each other, so they nullify each other.
3.27 What is helix angle?

A helix angle is the angle between any helix and an
axial line on its right.
3.28 What is the helix angle of a herringbone gears?

The helix angle of a herringbone gear ranges from
25 to 40.
3.29 What are the various materials used for the

production of gears?
The materials used for the production of gears are:
Metallic Materials
1. Plain carbon steels

2. Alloy Steels
3. Cast iron
4. Bronze (Worm wheel)
Non - Metallic Materials:

1. Wood
2. Synthetic resins
3. Compressed papers
3.30 What are the various losses in the worm gear?
Meshing occurs with sliding action, which is greater
than that of a toothed gears, because of this the friction
and intensive heating of the drive takes place. Therefore,
it results in power loss.
3.31 What is a power screw?
Power screw is power transmission device which is
used to convert rotary motion into reciprocating motion
with help of a screw and nut mechanism.
3.32 What are the main application of power
screws?
The power screws are used to
1. Raise the load.

2. Obtain an accurate motion in machine tools, e.g.
Leadscrew of lathe.
3. Clamp the workpieces, e.g. Vices.
4. Load the specimen, e.g. Universal testing machines.
3.33 What are advantages of power screws?
The main advantages of power screws are:
1. Large load carrying capacity with small overall
dimensions.
2. Simple design and easy to manufacture.
3. Provides large mechanical advantages.
4. Smooth and noiseless operation.
3.34 What are the various types of screw threads

used in power screws?
The various types of threads used in power screws are:
1. Square threads: high efficiency and difficult to

machine.
2. Acme threads: wear can be taken care of by use
of split nut.
3. Butters threads: unidirectional power
transmission, stronger than other types of
threads.
4. Ball round threads (ball screws): no backlash,
hither efficiency.
3.35 How is self locking obtained in power screws?
In order to make a screw as a self locking one, the
helix angle chosen should be low to introduce intentionally
a frictional force that is sufficient to prevent reverse
motion. In other words a screw will be self locking, if the
helix angle is less than friction angle.
Chapter - IV
4.1 Define the progression ratio  of a gear box.

If the speed steps in a gear box are arranged in a
manner to have the ratio adjacent speeds is constant, then
the progression ratio (step ratio) is called geometric
progression ratio .
N 1  first speed,
N2  N1  
N3  N2   
4.2 What are the various components of automation

speed reducers?
Casing shafts, lay shaft, spine shaft, bearings, gears,
keys, spacers. (To maintain space between gear and
bearings) etc...
4.3 Where do you use speed reducers.

A speed reducer is a gear mechanism, which is used
to reduce the angular speed of the output shaft as
compared with that of input shaft.
In a multi-speed gear box, the speed of the output

shaft is varied in discrete steps, these may be increased or
decreased speeds, from the input speed.
4.4 What type of gear will you recommend for silent

operation of gear boxes?
The gears recommend for silent operation of gear
boxes are helical gears.
4.5. Name the types of speed reducers?

1. According to the type of drive (Spur, helical, bevel
and Worm gears)
2. According to the no. of stages (single-stage,
double-stage)
3. According to the arrangement of shafts
(Horizontal, Parallel, Vertical, Co-axial,
Intersecting).
4.6 Why are spacers applied to gear box?
The spacers in the gear box are used to maintain
distance between the gears and the bearings.
4.7 What is the structural diagram of a gear box?

The structural diagram represents the arrangement
of shafts, and the arrangement of movable and fixed gears.
4.8 What does the ‘ray-diagram’ of gear box
indicate?
The ray diagram of a gear box, represents the no. of
output speeds, no. of stages required and also the no. of
shafts required.
4.9 What are the important components of a gear box?
1. Proper housing to support the bearings, to hold
lubricants and to protect the unit from dirt and
dust.
2. Shafts for mounting gears.
3. Suitable bearings to support the shafts.
4. Spacers to maintain distance between the gears
and the bearings.
4.10. Draw the structural diagram of a Gear box.
For A 6-speed gear box
Structural formula  Z  P1X1, P2X2, P3X3
P1, P2 X1  1, X2  P1  3, X3  P1 P2  3.2  6
Z  3 1, 2 3 x
1 60 0
1st 2nd E C
1 25 0
The No (3) indicates D
1 00 0
No. of speeds. The No.
B
inside the bracket indicates 8 00
No. of spaces in speed
6 30
diagram.
A
5 00
1 St S tag e Second Sta ge
4.11 What is a multi-speed gear box? Explain?

When the no. of output speeds are more than four,
then the gear box is known as multispeed gear box. The
multi speed gear box is used in machine tools to obtain
more output speeds such as 6,9,12 speeds.
4.12 What is a gear box?
A gear box is a device employed for stepped regulation
of the input speed and to give required output speed. It
consists of gears, shafts, levers, keys, bearings, etc.
assembled in a housing.
4.13. What is the use of gear box in a machine tool?
The gear box is used in a machine tool to get
1. Required torque and speed.
2. Multispeed in more number of steps.
3. Change in the direction of rotation.
4.14 Give the applications of the speed reducers.
The speed reducers are used in turbine generators,
between motor and machine tools, in rolling mills, between
engine and road wheels in automobiles and in many
industrial processing like cement factories, paper plants,
chemical industries, etc.
4.15 What is step ratio?
The ratio between the adjacent speeds in a
multispeed gearbox is called step ratio.
4.16 Why are the steps of speed arranged in

geometric progression in a machine tool gear
box?
The steps of speeds of a gear box of machine tools
are arranged in geometric progression because it provides,
1. Constant loss of economic cutting speed in whole

rpm range
2. Constant loss of productivity in the whole rpm
range
3. Better design feature
4. Compact design, etc.
4.17 What are the considerations to select a
particular transmission group in a gear box?
The transmission ratio must lie in the following
range.
1. The maximum reduction of speed is limited to four

times to keep the radial dimensions of gear box
 1
within the reasonable limits.  i.e. imin  
 4
2. Maximum increase of speed in a stage is
restricted to two times due to limitations of the
pitch line velocity.
In a transmission group.  i.e. imax  2 .
 
4.18 What are the informations given by a
structural diagram?
Structural diagram gives informations about
1. Number of shafts in a gear box.

2. Number of gears in shaft.
3. The order of changing transmission in individual

groups to get a desired speed.
4. Transmission range and characteristic of each
transmission group.
4.19 Distinguish between structural diagram and
ray (speed) diagram.
The structural diagram shows the general
arrangement of the gear transmission, where as the ray
diagram gives the gear arrangement for the required output
speed.
4.20 What are preferred numbers? (May/June 2013)

Preferred numbers are the conventionally rounded off
values derived from geometric series. There are five basic
series, denoted as R5, R10, R20, R40 and R80 series.
4.21 What are the possible arrangements to achieve

12 speeds from a gear box? (May/June 2013)
(i) 3  2  2 scheme (ii) 2  3  2 scheme
(iii) 2  2  3 scheme
4.22 Which type of gear is used in constant mesh gear

box? Justify. (Nov/Dec 2009)
Planetary reduction gears are remarkable for compact

layout and higher gear ratios. These reduction gears are
widely employed in aircraft, helicopters and winches and
other machines. The weight of planetary reduction gears
can be decreased two to three times as compared with
ordinary toothed gears of same power and gear ratios.
4.23 Compare sliding mesh and synchromesh gear

box. (Nov/Dec 2009)
Sliding mesh gear box is simplest type of gear box.

The clutch gear is rigidly fixed to clutch shaft. It remains
always connected to the drive gear of the lay shaft. The
required speed is obtained by shifting the gears in counter
shaft by selective mechanism.
Synchromesh gear box is used to synchronize the

rotation of gears that are about to be meshed. Due to
friction, the rotary pinion is made to rotate at the same
speed as the synchromesh unit.
4.24 List six standard speeds starting from 18 rpm

with a step ratio 1.4. (Apr/May 2008)
Consider R20 series, which is having

  step ratio  1.12
1.12  1.12
 1.12   1.4
skip 2 speeds
Take R20 series by skipping (2) speeds.
N 1  18 rpm
N 2  25 rpm
N 3  35.5 rpm
N 4  50 rpm
N 5  71 rpm
N 6  100 rpm
4.25 Sketch the kinematic layout of gears for 3

speeds between two shafts. (Apr/May 2008)
Z4
Z6 Z2
D rive r
D rive n
Z3
Z5 Z1
4.26 List out the Basic rules to be followed for

optimum gear box design.
To avoid excessively large diameter of the wheel and
also to limit the pitch line velocity of the gears.
1. Number of gears on the last (spindle) should be
minimum.
2. Number of gears on the shafts should not be more
than 3, though in exceptional cases it may be 4.
3. It is preferable to have N max  N input  N min in all
stages except in first stage.
4. The transmission ratio between the spindle and
the shaft preceding it should be the maximum
possible (i.e.) speed reduction should be maximum
possible.
Follow for all stages
N max N min 1
 2 and 
N input N input 4
If it is not possible
N max N input
keep 
N input N min
(Or)
N max N input
keep 
N input N min
4.27 Explain why the discrete speeds are specified

in geometric series for any machine tools?
(Apr/May 2008)
The speeds of the spindle should be in the geometric
series, in order that the number of gears employed is to
be minimum and also to reduce speed loss. Preferred No.
are in geometrical progression.
4.28 Why gear boxes are provided with housings?

Gear boxes are provided with housings because of the
following reasons.
1. Supports for the shafts.
2. Hold lubricant inside.
3. Protects the gears from dust and moisture.
4. Gives necessary cooling surface to dissipate the

heat generated.
4.29 What is preferred structural formulae?

The no. of speeds required when given in the
multiples of 2 and 3 is known as preferred structural
formulae.
4.30 Where are speed reducers applied?
is turbine generator set, from motor to machine tool
spindles, in rolling mills and in automobiles.
Chapter - V
5.1 What is a cam?
Cam is a mechanical member having miscellaneous
contour surface which transmits a desired motion to a
follower by direct contact. With help of cam, it is very easy,
accurate and efficient to produce a motion with required
velocity and acceleration.
5.2 Give the list of types of cams used in industries.
The common types of cams used in industries are :
(1) Wedge cam (2) Radial cam (3) Globoloidial cam
(4) Cylindrical cam (5) Spherical cam (6) 3-dimensional cam
(3D) and (7) Inverse cam.
5.3 Give some applications of cams.
Cams are used in wide variety of machines such as,
packaging machines, can making machines, wire forming
machines, IC engines, machine tools, computing
mechanisms, mechanical and electronic computers, etc.
5.4 Why are cam mechanisms preferred?

The cam mechanisms are preferred over other types
because the use of cams makes it possible to obtain an
unlimited variety of motions and the cams perform
satisfactorily year after year. The mechanical movements
from cams are not readily obtained by other types of
mechanisms.
5.5 Define following terms of a cam (a) trace point,
(b) stroke.
Trace Point: This is a reference point on the follower
which is used in laying out the theoretical curve or pitch
curve of the cam.
Stroke: This is the maximum movement of the follower
away from the cam shaft from its initial position. This also
known rise or life or throw of the cam.
5.6 Define the following (a) pitch point (b) jerk
Pitch point: It is the point on the cam pitch having the
highest pressure angle.
Jerk or pulse: The instantaneous time rate of change of
acceleration is called as jerk or pulse (i.e. sudden change
in follower acceleration).
5.7 What is the pressure angle?
It is the angle between normal to cam profile and
line of action of cam follower at the point of contact. The
pressure angle represents the steepness of cam profile. The
pressure angle is limited to 30 for smooth cam-follower
action.
5.8 What is the importance of pressure angle in cam

design?
The size of pressure angle is important because
1. Increasing pressure angle increases the side

thrust and this increase the forces exerted on cam
and follower.
2. If the pressure angle is too large, jamming of
follower takes place,
3. Reducing the pressure angle increase the cam
size.
5.9 Define the following (a) base circle (b) offset
Base circle: It is defined as the smallest circle which is
drawn tangent to the physical cam surface.
Offset: It is defined as the perpendicular distance between

the follower’s axis of motion and the centre of the cam.
5.10 What are the common types of cam followers?

The common types of cam followers are:
According to shape: Knife edge follower, flat faced

follower, spherical faced follower and roller follower.
According to motion: reciprocating follower and

oscillating follower.
5.11. Write short notes on side thrust on: Flat, Knife

edge and Roller follower.
Knife edge follower is subjected to excessive wear due
to sliding motion. If the load on the follower is small, this
follower can be used.
The roller follower has rolling contact, so wear is less.

The roller and knife-edge follower guides are

subjected to side thrust.
Incase of flat face follower, there is no side thrust.
5.12 What is undercutting in cams?

When a cam has a sharp point or corner, the follower
does not undergo an abrupt change of motion, but gradually
a different velocity. If the roller radius is greater than the
theoretical pitch curve at the convex portion of the cam,
the roller undercuts. i.e., moves itself over the same path
twice. This phenomenon is called under cutting.
5.13 Why a roller follower is preferred to that of an

knife-edge follower?
Knife edge follower is subjected to excessive wear due
to sliding motion. Roller follower has rolling contact, hence
the wear is less. If the load on the follower is small,
knife-edge follower can be used.
5.14 What is a clutch and why is it necessary?

A clutch is a machine member used to engage or
disengage a driving member with driven member. The
clutch is required for the following circumstances.
1. To engage and disengage driving and driven

member will without stopping the engine.
2. To avoid overloading of driving member.
5.15 What are the various types of friction clutches?
The friction clutches are classified according to:
1. Use: Connecting clutches, starting clutches and

directional clutches.
2. Construction: Shoe and cone clutches, disc clutches

and band clutches.
3. Friction pairing and lubrication: Dry and lubricated
clutches with or without special friction lining.
4. Operation: Mechanical clutches, magnetic clutches,

hydraulic or pneumatic operated clutches.
5.16 What are the characteristic of a positive

clutch?
The characteristics of a positive clutch are:
1. They do not slip; so no heat is generated.

2. They can not be engaged at high speeds.
3. Engagements at any speed accompanied by
shocks.
5.17 Why are the friction clutches preferred?
The friction clutches are preferred, because:
1. They transmit torque at the desired rate.

2. They permit smooth engagement at all speeds.
3. They permit variable output and regulation in
output.
4. They are simpler, smaller and invariably much
cheaper than fluid or electrodynamic clutches.
5.18 What are the required qualities for a friction
material used in clutches?
The required qualities for a friction material used in
clutches are:
1. High and uniform coefficient friction

2. Unaffected by environmental conditions
3. Ability to withstand high temperature together

with good heat conductivity
4. Good resilience, high wear resistance, scoring and
galling.
5.19. What is the axial force required at the
engagement and disengagement of cone clutch?
(May/June 2013)
W  W n 1   c o t 
5.20 Why is it necessary to dissipate the heat

generated during clutch operation?(Nov/Dec 2009)
In order to save the friction plates and lining

materials from melting by the heat produced during
operation, the generated heat should be dissipated.
5.21 Clutches are usually designed on the basis of

uniform of wear. Why? (Apr/May 2008)
In clutch design, generally two cases are considered.

In one case it is assumed that the intensity of the pressure
on friction surfaces is constant. This assumption is valid
only when the discs are relatively flexible. On the other
hand, if the discs are rigid, wearing of the friction surface
is approximately uniform after initial wearing - in has
taken place. In practical situations, neither of these
assumptions (uniform pressure or uniform wear) is correct.
So the designer has to choose a hypothesis which is more
close to the actual situation. Alternately, it is better to
assume a uniform wear rate because it is more conservative
than assuming uniform pressure but it results into lower
torque transmission capacity.
5.22 Sketch a cone clutch. (May/June 2007)
5.23 Define a brake?

Brake is a device which is used to stop the motion
of a moving body or retard its motion. It is due to the
friction between the contact surface.
5.24 What are the factors required to design a

brake?
The factors required to design a brake are:
1. Coefficient between the braking surfaces.
2. Unit pressure between braking surfaces.
3. The projected area of the breaking surface.
4. Heat dissipating capacity.
5.25 What are the different types of brakes?

The different types of brakes are:
1. Simple block (or shoe) brake
2. Pivoted block (or shoe) brake
3. Double block (or shoe) brake

4. Simple band brake
5. Differential band brake
6. Band and block brake
7. Internal expanding brake.
5.26 List few properties of a brake friction

materials?
The brake lining materials should have the following
properties.
1. It should have high coefficient of friction.
2. It should have high wear and heat resistance.
3. It should have high heat dissipation capacity.
4. It should not react with moisture.
5.27 What is the difference between clutch and brake?

Clutch is used to rotate the driven member along with
driving member where as brake is used to control or stop
the moving member.
5.28 How does Geneva mechanism function?

The Geneva mechanism consists a Geneva wheel
having radial slots and a crank. The crank has a pin which
enters into a radial slot and causes the Geneva wheel to
turn through a portion of revolution. When the pin leaves
the slot, the Geneva wheel remains stationary until the pin
enters the next slot. This way the continuous motion of the
crank is converted into intermittent motion of the Geneva
wheel.
5.29 List the applications of the Geneva mechanism.

The Geneva mechanism is used in rotary tables,
indexing mechanisms of turret and capstan lathes,
automatic machines, watches, motion-picture projectors, etc.
5.30 What is the requirement to obtain a smooth

motion from a Geneva wheel?
The slot in the Geneva wheel must be tangential to
the path of the pin upon engagement in order to reduce
shock during engagement. In other words, the centre lines
of slot and crank must mutually be perpendicular at the
engagement and at the disengagement.
5.31 State a few applications of ratchet and pawl

mechanism.
Shaping machine table movement
Planing machine
Hoisting machine
Bearing machine
Some types of screw jack.
5.32 What do you understand by ‘Geneva

Mechanism’
In machine tools, the mechanism used in rotary tables
and indexing turrets is known as Geneva mechanism.
Geneva mechanism consists of a Geneva Wheel with a no.
of slots and a driving disc (Crank) whose projected pin
enters the slot and causes the intermittent rotation of the
Geneva Wheel.
5.33 What is an intermittent mechanism?

It is a mechanism that consists a sequence of motions
and dwells. A dwell is a periods in which the output link
or links remains stationary while the input link continues
to move. The intermittent motions may be circular,
reciprocating or oscillating.
5.34 How ratchet and pawl mechanism works?
In a ratchet and pawl mechanism, the arm pivots
about the centre of the toothed ratchet wheel and is moved
back and forth to index the wheel. The driving pawl rotates
the ratchet wheel in one direction and does no work on the
return trip. The locking pawl prevents the ratchet from
reversing direction, while the driving pawl returns. Both
pawls are usually spring loaded.
5.35 What is the function of pawl in the ratchet and
pawl mechanism?
Pawl is the machine member used to interrupt the
further rotation of the driver (ratchet), by engaging in the
ratchet tooth. The pawl may be activated by its own weight
or by a spring. When the direction of rotation is reversed
the pawl gets disengaged and there is no interference of
driver motion. One or more pawls are used in a ratchet
mechanism.
1 Design of Transmission Systems
Index
B Differential Band brake, 5.99
Based on Hertz Method, 3.64, Double shoe brake, 5.113
3.192 Dynamic Effects (Dynamic
Basic Curves, 5.6 Tooth Load), 2.19
Bevel Reducer, 4.212
E
Bevel Gear Nomenclature, 3.4
Efficiency of Worm Gearing,
Brake friction materials, 5.83
3.157
Brakes, 5.83
Electromagnetic clutch, 5.80
Bush chain, 1.120
C F
Cam Profile Layout, 5.31 Factor of Safety, 2.25
Cam, 5.1 Failures of wire rope, 1.97
Centrifugal Clutches, 5.78 Fatigue Strength of Gear, 2.21
Chain, 1.120 Flat belts, 1.2

Chain Drives, 1.118 Flat Belt Drives, 1.3
Chain housing, 1.122 Fluid coupling, 4.212
Circular belts, 1.3 Fluid fly wheel, 4.212
Clutches, 5.47 Follower, 5.1
Cone Clutch, 5.69 Force Determination, 5.36
Constant Mesh Gear Box, 4.208 Friction Materials, 5.137
Contact Stress, 5.35
G
Crossed Helical Gears, 3.214
Gear Tooth Failures, 2.6
D Gear Box, 4.1
Design of chain drive, 1.118 Gear Materials, 2.26
Design of V-Belt Drive, 1.45
Geneva Mechanism , 5.138
Design of Wire Ropes, 1.91
Geometric progression, 4.6
Design of Gear Box, 4.129
Design of Spur Gear, 2.77 H
Design of V-Belts, 1.47 Helical Gears, 2.123
Design of Worm, 3.192, 3.153 Helical Reducer, 4.212
Designing CAM, 5.29 Hertz Method, 2.77
Index 2
I Single Block Shoe Brake, 5.84

Internal Expanding Brake, 5.120 Slack adjuster, 1.122
Inverted chains, 1.120 Speed Diagram, 4.4
Speed Reducer Unit, 4.211
K
Speed Ratio, 2.10
Kinematic Layout, 4.13
Sprockets, 1.121
L
Standard step ratio, 4.6
Law of Gearing, 2.7
Strength of Bevel Gears, 3.7
M Structural Formula, 4.11
Metallic materials, 2.26
T
N Tooth Stress, 3.7
Nomenclature of a Cam-Drive, Tooth Stresses (The Lewis
5.4 Bending Equation), 2.14
Non-metallic materials, 2.26
Toothed belt, 1.3
Normal Pressure Angle n,
Torque Convertor, 4.215
2.129
Torque Converter Gear Box,
Number of Teeth, 2.10
4.215
P Transverse Pressure Angle t,
Plate clutch, 5.50 2.129
Pressure angle , 2.129, 5.31
U
R Under Cutting, 5.33
Ratchet and Pawl Mechanism,
5.147
V
V - belts, 1.3
Ray Diagram, 4.4
Roller chain, 1.120 Variable Speed Gear Box, 4.212
S W
Screw or Skew gears, 3.214 Wear Tooth Load, 2.21, 2.127
Sheave materials, 1.114 Wear Strength of Helical Gears,
Silent chains, 1.120 2.127
Simple band brake, 5.96 Wire Ropes, 1.91
Simple Harmonic Motion SHM, Worm Reducer, 4.211
5.16 Worm Wheel, 3.153, 3.192

E. v. v. Ramanamurthy, S. Ramachandran-Design of Transmission Systems-Air Walk Publ. (2015)

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

E. v. v. Ramanamurthy, S. Ramachandran-Design of Transmission Systems-Air Walk Publ. (2015)

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

For UG

DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS

Design of Flat belts and pulleys - Selection of V belts and

1.1 BELT DRIVES

The selection of belt drive depends on some important

(c) Heavy duty belt drives

(a) Flat belt (b) V-b elt (c) Circular b elt

Fig. 1.1. Types of Belts.

(i) Flat belts

(iii) Circular belts

(iv) Toothed belt

Materials used for belts

1.1.5 Flat Belt Drives

1.1.6 Advantages of Flat-belt drive

2. A belt drive can be used as a clutch, by shifting

Fig.1.2. Open Belt Drive.

Fig.1.3 Crossed or Twist Belt Drive.

Fig.1.6 (a). Belt D rive with M any I dler Pu lleys.

D rive sha ft M ac hine

Fig.1 .7 Stepped o r Cone Fig.1 .8 Fa st and lo os e

1.1.9 Design Based on Basic Equations

The Fig. 1.9 represents the open flat belt drive.

Let, d  diameter of smaller pulley (Driver)

D  diameter of larger pulley (Driven)

C  center distance between two pulleys

where T 1  tension on tightside in Newtons

T 2  tension on slackside in Newtons

T c  centrifugal tension in Newtons

  ra dia ns r  smaller pulley radius

Always consider  for smaller pulley

Tc  Centrifugal tension  m  v2 in Newton.

where m  mass of the belt in kg f/meter length.

then, m    A  100 kg/m length

v  vel. of belt (or) belt speed

(d and D must be in meters)

Max. tension  T  S tress  Area    b  t Newton

where   stress in the belt N/m 2

b  w idth of belt in m eter

t  thickness of belt in meter

Note: For Max. Power Transmission

Initial tension T0

1.1.10 Design Based on Manufacturer’s Data

Step 1: Diameter of Driver (or) Driven pulley

Find the unknown parameters by using the given

From P.S.G Data book, Pg.No. 7.54, Take the

Step 2: Velocity of the belt v

Step 3: Load correction factor K s

Step 4: Arc of contact 

D  Diameter of larger pulley

d  Diameter of smaller pulley

Step 5: Correction factor for Arc of contact K 

Step 6: Corrected power

Step 7: Corrected belt rating

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.52, corresponding to

 Corrected belt rating of selected belt with

Step 8: Width of the belt

Millimeter plies of belt

corrected load or corrected power

From PSG Data book, Pg.No. 7.52, The standard belt

Step 9: Length of the belt

for open drive

for cross drive

for Quarter turn drive